NCR SelfServ23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual

NCR
SelfServ™ 23 and 27 ATMs
Service Manual
B006‐7265‐A000
February 2016
EMC COMPLIANCE COPYRIGHT AND TRADEMARKS
The product described in this book is a licensed product of NCR
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Corporation.
Radio Frequency Interference Statement
NCR Proprietary Information - not to be disclosed or reproduced
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the without written consent.
limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
NCR, NCR SelfServ and APTRA are trademarks of NCR
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
Corporation. Other product names mentioned in this publication
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies and are hereby acknowledged.
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, Where creation of derivative works, modifications or copies of
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. this NCR copyrighted documentation is permitted under the
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause terms and conditions of an agreement you have with NCR, NCR's
harmful interference in which case the user will be required to copyright notice must be included.
correct the interference at his own expense.
It is the policy of NCR Corporation (NCR) to improve products
as new technology, components, software, and firmware
Canadian Class A Device Declaration become available. NCR, therefore, reserves the right to change
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio specifications without prior notice.
noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio All features, functions, and operations described herein may not
Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of
be marketed by NCR in all parts of the world. In some instances,
Communications.
photographs are of equipment prototypes. Therefore, before
Le présent appareil numérique n’émet pas de bruits using this document, consult with your NCR representative or
radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils NCR office for information that is applicable and current.
numériques de la classe A prescrites dans le Réglement sur le
© 2016
brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le ministère des
Communications du Canada. By NCR Corporation, Duluth, Georgia, U.S.A.
http://www.ncr.com
EU EMC Directive 2004/108/EC All Rights Reserved
This equipment has been found to comply with the essential

requirements of EMC Directive 2004/108EC, by testing to
harmonized standard, EN55022 and EN55024. The equipment
complies with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to
EN55022.
This is a Class A product, in a domestic/residential environment

this product may cause radio interference in which case the user
may be required to take adequate measures.
Information to User
This equipment must be installed and used in strict accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions. However, there is no
guarantee that interference to radio communications will not
occur in a particular commercial installation. If this equipment
does cause interference, which can be determined by turning
the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to consult an
NCR service representative immediately.
CAUTION
NCR Corporation is not responsible for any radio or
television interference caused by unauthorized
modifications of this equipment or the substitution or
attachment of connecting cables and equipment
other than those specified by NCR. Such
unauthorized modifications, substitutions, or
attachments may void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. The correction of interference
caused by such unauthorized modifications,
substitutions, or attachments will be the
responsibility of the user.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company Instructions
NCR SelfServ 23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual
Revision Record i
Revision Record
Revision Date Chapter Reason for change

February 2014 All Initial release
March 2014 All New structure
Preventive Maintenance Currency Dispenser Updated
Preventive Maintenance Receipt Printer Updated
USB IMCRW Updated
Receipt Printer Updated
S1 Dispenser Updated
April 2014 N/A Corrected product ID from B006‐7625 to B006‐
7265.
May 2014 Miscellaneous Interface Removed Mini Misc I/F and replaced with Midi
Misc I/F.
January 2015 Introduction Updated: added 6627
Preventive Maintenance Schedule Updated: added S2 dispenser.
Preventive Maintenance S2 Currency Dispenser New
6623 Product Cabling Updated: added S2 dispenser
6627 Product Cabling New
Mini Core Updated: Lanier II
15 Inch Touchscreen New
15 Inch Display New
S2 Dispenser New
S2 Dispenser Cassette New
USB Barcode Reader New
SelfServ 27 Module Removal New
April 2015 Preventive Maintenance Security Enclosure Heaters New
Preventive Maintenance Barcode Reader New
Uninterruptible Power Supply New
USB Hub New
USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo) New
China EPP New
UEPP3 New
Backlight Displays New
Thermally Managed 15 Inch Display New
Alarms New
SATA DVD New
Product Environment Heaters New
SelfServ 23 Module Removal Updated: display and facia sections
SelfServ 27 Module Removal New
February 2016 USB IMCRW Update
Dynamo Display Update
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY February 2016

ii Revision Record
Revision Date Chapter Reason for change
February 2016 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Table of Contents iii
Table of Contents
Section 1 ‐ Introduction
Reference and Safety
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS.......................................................................................1
SAFETY INFORMATION...........................................................................................1
Electronics Boards ...........................................................................................1
ATM Cash Security ...........................................................................................1
Access ..............................................................................................................2
Barcode Reader ...............................................................................................2
Fluorescent Lamps...........................................................................................2
Section 2 ‐ Preventive Maintenance
Preventive Maintenance Overview
OVERALL SYSTEM CHECKS......................................................................................1
LUBRICATION .........................................................................................................1
Lubricants ........................................................................................................2
TEST TOOLS ............................................................................................................2
CLEANING MATERIALS ...........................................................................................3
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITY ..................................................................................3
Preventive Maintenance Schedule
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
POWER ON CHECKS ...............................................................................................2
POWER OFF CHECKS...............................................................................................3
FLUIDITI CHECKS.....................................................................................................6
POST PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS ...........................................................7
Card Readers
DIP CARD READERS ................................................................................................1
SWIPE CARD READERS............................................................................................1
USB IMCRW............................................................................................................2
Clean Read Heads and Smart Contacts............................................................2
Clean Rollers ....................................................................................................3
S1 Currency Dispenser
SUMMARY CHECKLIST ............................................................................................1
INSPECT THE PICK MODULE ...................................................................................2
PICK MODULE INTERNAL TIMING (D WHEEL TIMING) ...........................................6
PICK MODULE TO PICK MODULE TIMING ..............................................................8
INSPECT THE PRESENTER .......................................................................................9
INSPECT CASSETTES................................................................................................9
DIAGNOSTICS .......................................................................................................11
SUMMARY CHECKLIST ............................................................................................1
CLEANING MATERIALS ...........................................................................................1
INSPECT THE PICK MODULE ...................................................................................1

iv
Table of Contents
Pick Module to Pick Module Timing ................................................................3
INSPECT THE PRESENTER .......................................................................................4
INSPECT THE CASSETTES ........................................................................................5
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................5
Pick Valve.........................................................................................................5
Belt alignment .................................................................................................5
Note Skew........................................................................................................5
Bunch Splay .....................................................................................................5
Facia alignment................................................................................................6
Shutter .............................................................................................................6
Security Enclosure
GENERAL CHECKS ...................................................................................................1
DOOR HINGE LUBRICATION ...................................................................................1
USB Receipt Printer
Transport Sensors ............................................................................................1
Thermal Print Head..........................................................................................2
Security Enclosure Heaters
SECURITY ENCLOSURE HEATER TEST......................................................................1
Pre–requisite ...................................................................................................1
Test Frequency and Timing..............................................................................1
Security Enclosure Heater Test Procedure ......................................................1
ROOM HEATER TEST...............................................................................................2
Room Heat Low ...............................................................................................2
Room Heat Timed ............................................................................................2
Room Heat Faulty ............................................................................................2
Room Heat OK .................................................................................................2
USB 2D Bar Code Reader (UBAR)
CLEANING...............................................................................................................1
Section 3 ‐ Diagnostics Overview
Diagnostics Overview
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
SYSTEM APPLICATION ............................................................................................1
Entering System Application............................................................................1
Device Diagnostics ...........................................................................................4
Device Self Tests ..............................................................................................7
Event Logs........................................................................................................7
Service Tallies ..................................................................................................8
Device Status List .............................................................................................9
Device Servicing.............................................................................................10
Save Module Life Counts ...............................................................................10
Self Service Configuration..............................................................................11
Transaction Counters.....................................................................................13
LEVEL 0 DIAGNOSTICS ..........................................................................................13
Power‐up Diagnostics ....................................................................................13
Switch Selectable Diagnostics........................................................................14
Extended Diagnostics.....................................................................................14
TEST TOOLS ..........................................................................................................14

Table of Contents v
Bootable System Application.........................................................................15
KEY SYSTEM APPLICATION MENUS ......................................................................16
Section 4 ‐ Product Cabling
6623 Product Cabling
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAMS......................................................................................2
DC Distribution ................................................................................................2
AC Distribution.................................................................................................4
USB Distribution ..............................................................................................5
USB Distribution without HUB.........................................................................6
HARNESSES.............................................................................................................7
AC Harness Assy...............................................................................................7
Alarms Harness ................................................................................................8
Audio................................................................................................................9
Auto Supervisor Safe harness ........................................................................10
DC/USB Tray Harness (View 1 of 3) ...............................................................11
Facia Harness (View 1 of 2)............................................................................14
LVDS...............................................................................................................16
Mode Switch Harness ....................................................................................17
PSU Intel Harness...........................................................................................17
S1 Dispenser Harness (View 1 of 2) ...............................................................18
S1 Dispenser Harness (View 2 of 2) ...............................................................19
S2 Dispenser Harness ....................................................................................20
Speaker Harness ............................................................................................21
SPS Harnesses ................................................................................................22
USB Touch Screen Cable Assembly................................................................24
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAMS......................................................................................2
DC Distribution ................................................................................................2
AC Distribution.................................................................................................3
USB Distribution ..............................................................................................4
USB Distribution without HUB.........................................................................5
HARNESSES.............................................................................................................6
AC Harness Assy...............................................................................................6
Alarms..............................................................................................................7
Audio................................................................................................................9
Auto Supervisor Safe harness ........................................................................10
Heaters Harness.............................................................................................15
LVDS...............................................................................................................16

vi
Table of Contents
Mode Switch Harness ....................................................................................17
PSU Intel Harness...........................................................................................17
S2 Dispenser Harness ....................................................................................18
Speaker Harness ............................................................................................19
SPS Harnesses ................................................................................................20
Upper Advert Harness ...................................................................................23
USB Touch Screen Cable Assembly................................................................23
Section 5 ‐ Power Supplies
Standard Power Supply (300W)
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1
Power Requirements .......................................................................................2
TROUBLESHOOTING ...............................................................................................3
Restart after Shutdown ...................................................................................3
ERROR MESSAGES ..................................................................................................3
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................3
STRAPPING .............................................................................................................3
ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................4
FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.......................................................................4
CABLING .................................................................................................................4
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS ....................................................................4
Input/Output Pins............................................................................................4
TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS.....................................................................................4
Uninterruptible Power Supply
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1
Definitions .......................................................................................................1
Specification ....................................................................................................1
Indicators .........................................................................................................2
Indications During Operation ..........................................................................2
1150VA Module ...............................................................................................4
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................4
Level 0..............................................................................................................4
Level 1..............................................................................................................4
Level 3..............................................................................................................5
STRAPPING .............................................................................................................5
ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................5
Configuring The UPS ........................................................................................6
MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT...............................................................7
Battery Care And Replacement .......................................................................8
CABLING ...............................................................................................................11
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS ..................................................................11
TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS...................................................................................11
Section 6 ‐ Terminal Core and Communications
Mini PC Core

Table of Contents vii
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................2
Motherboards..................................................................................................2
PCI PCCM Board (Optional) .............................................................................3
PCI Riser Board (Optional) ...............................................................................3
Disk Drives .......................................................................................................3
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................6
Power on Self Test ...........................................................................................6
Beep Codes ......................................................................................................6
STRAPPING ............................................................................................................7
Motherboard Jumpers.....................................................................................8
FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.....................................................................10
Removing the PC Core Lid..............................................................................11
System Core Fan ............................................................................................11
PCCM Board (Optional Feature) ....................................................................12
PCCM Riser Card (Optional Feature) .............................................................13
External DVD..................................................................................................14
Audio Breakout Cable ....................................................................................14
USB Breakout Assembly.................................................................................15
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) ...................................................................................16
Motherboard .................................................................................................18
Memory Board (SODIMM).............................................................................20
CPU Cooler.....................................................................................................22
Processor .......................................................................................................23
I/O Shield .......................................................................................................25
CABLING ...............................................................................................................26
Interconnection Diagrams .............................................................................26
Cables ............................................................................................................30
Motherboard Connectors ..............................................................................33
HDDs and Optical Drive S–ATA Connector ....................................................37
USB 7 Port Hub
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1
Power Requirement.........................................................................................2
Maximum Cable Lengths .................................................................................2
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................4
Level 1 Diagnostics...........................................................................................4
STRAPPING .............................................................................................................4
ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................4
Top Box Mounted Hub.....................................................................................4
Safe Mounted Hub...........................................................................................4
CABLING .................................................................................................................5
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT ....................................................................................6
Hub Board........................................................................................................6

viii
Table of Contents
Section 7 ‐ Card Readers
USB IMCRW
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1
UIMCRW Firmware ..........................................................................................2
Card Detection and Pre‐head Detection..........................................................2
Card Transport.................................................................................................2
Security ‐ Long and Short Card Detection........................................................3
Reading and Writing To Magnetic Stripe Cards...............................................3
Reading and Writing to Smart Cards ...............................................................3
Sensor Locations..............................................................................................4
Optional Features ............................................................................................4
Removing Clamped Cards..............................................................................12
DIAGNOSTICS .......................................................................................................13
Level 0 Diagnostics.........................................................................................13
STRAPPING ...........................................................................................................27
ADJUSTMENTS......................................................................................................27
Pre‐head ........................................................................................................27
Heartbeat.......................................................................................................28
Card Detect Microswitch ...............................................................................28
FRU MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT .....................................................29
Anti‐Eavesdropping Kit ..................................................................................30
MEIs ...............................................................................................................32
IC Contact Block .............................................................................................33
Throat ............................................................................................................34
Battery ...........................................................................................................35
Base Transport...............................................................................................35
Card Clamping Module ..................................................................................35
CABLING ...............................................................................................................44
CIM Harness...................................................................................................44
MM HARNESS ................................................................................................45
CARD CAPTURE BIN HARNESS .......................................................................45
CONNECTORS .......................................................................................................46
Main Control Board .......................................................................................47
CIM/MM PCB .................................................................................................49
CIM/MM With Security PCB ..........................................................................50
IC Block PCB ...................................................................................................52
Card Clamping PCB ........................................................................................53
CIM/MM Turnaround Plug ............................................................................54
Cards ..............................................................................................................55
USB Smart Dip Card Reader
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1
Magnetic Stripe Reading..................................................................................2
Smart Card Reading .........................................................................................2

Table of Contents ix
Security Feature...............................................................................................2
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................3
STRAPPING .............................................................................................................5
ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................5
CABLING .................................................................................................................5
USB mini‐B connector......................................................................................6
Power connector .............................................................................................6
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ..................................................................................6
USB Contactless Card Reader
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1
Antenna Unit Connectors ................................................................................3
Control Unit Connectors ..................................................................................3
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................4
HW_DIAGNOSTICS Property............................................................................4
HW_SELF_TEST Property .................................................................................5
HW_MAINTENANCE PROPERTY .............................................................................6
HW_CONFIGURATION PROPERTY ..........................................................................6
STRAPPING .............................................................................................................7
LEDs and MEEIs................................................................................................7
Control Board ..................................................................................................7
ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................7
CABLING .................................................................................................................8
Harnesses.........................................................................................................8
+24V Power .....................................................................................................8
USB ..................................................................................................................8
AUX ..................................................................................................................9
R.F. Out ............................................................................................................9
LED/Buzzer.......................................................................................................9
USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo)
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................2
Operation.........................................................................................................2
Power...............................................................................................................2
Interface Connections......................................................................................2
LED ...................................................................................................................2
ERROR MESSAGES ..................................................................................................3
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................3
STRAPPING .............................................................................................................3

x
Table of Contents
ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................3
CABLING .................................................................................................................3
USB connector (J10).........................................................................................4
DC power supply connector (J6)......................................................................4
Card Recycler Module
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1
SPECIFICATIONS .....................................................................................................2
TROUBLESHOOTING AND DIAGNOSTICS................................................................2
MAINTENANCE AND CONFIGURATION ..................................................................2
STRAPPING AND ADJUSTMENTS ............................................................................3
CAPTURED CARD REMOVAL...................................................................................3
CABLING .................................................................................................................8
Section 8 ‐ Keyboards and Encryptors
Universal Encrypting PIN Pad (II)
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1
Keyboard..........................................................................................................2
USB Mainboard................................................................................................2
Removal Switches ............................................................................................2
USB Interface ...................................................................................................2
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................3
Self Tests..........................................................................................................5
CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................5
Configuration Options .....................................................................................5
STRAPPING .............................................................................................................6
ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................6
Assembly Replacement....................................................................................7
Defective Assembly Disposal ...........................................................................7
CABLING .................................................................................................................7
China Encrypting Pin Pad (USBCPIN)
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1
Keyboard..........................................................................................................2

Table of Contents xi
USB Mainboard................................................................................................2
USB Interface ...................................................................................................2
Mechanical Characteristics ..............................................................................3
ERROR MESSAGES ..................................................................................................3
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................4
Device Self Test................................................................................................7
Tallies ...............................................................................................................7
CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................8
STRAPPING .............................................................................................................8
ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................8
CABLING .................................................................................................................9
USB mini B .....................................................................................................10
Heater ............................................................................................................10
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ................................................................................10
Universal Encrypting Pin Pad (III)
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................2
Keyboard..........................................................................................................2
USB Mainboard................................................................................................2
USB Interface ...................................................................................................3
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................4
Level 0 diagnostics ...........................................................................................4
Device Self Test................................................................................................6
Tallies ...............................................................................................................7
STRAPPING .............................................................................................................7
ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................7
Damaged Assembly Disposal ...........................................................................8
Key Loading......................................................................................................9
CABLING .................................................................................................................9

xii
Table of Contents
Section 9 ‐ Display
15 inch USB Projected Capacitive Touch Screen
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1
Glass Sensor.....................................................................................................2
Two–Part Controller (Controller Board and A/D Board)..................................2
Projected Capacitive Technology.....................................................................3
USB PCAP Touch Screen Feature Driver ..........................................................4
ERROR MESSAGES ..................................................................................................4
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................4
Device Self Test................................................................................................6
STRAPPING .............................................................................................................6
ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................7
Touch Screen Configuration ............................................................................7
Touch Screen Glass ..........................................................................................8
Controllers .....................................................................................................13
CABLING ...............................................................................................................17
Flex Circuit ‐ 10 Circuit Cable .........................................................................17
Glass Sensor...................................................................................................18
Controllers .....................................................................................................20
Backlight Displays
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1
Interface Connections......................................................................................1
ERROR MESSAGES ..................................................................................................2
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................2
STRAPPING .............................................................................................................3
ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................3
CABLING .................................................................................................................3
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENTS/PINOUTS ..................................................................4
7.0 Inch Display................................................................................................4
10.4 Inch Display..............................................................................................4
15 Inch Dynamo Displays
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1
15 Inch Dynamo Displays.................................................................................1
Thermal Management Module (TMM)............................................................2
Warm‐up Time.................................................................................................3

Table of Contents xiii
Configuration ...................................................................................................3
ERROR MESSAGES ..................................................................................................3
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................3
STRAPPING .............................................................................................................3
ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................4
Dynamo Display ...............................................................................................4
Thermal Management Module (TMM)............................................................5
CABLING .................................................................................................................8
Dynamo Display ...............................................................................................8
Section 10 ‐ Printers
USB Receipt Printer
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................2
Paper Specification ..........................................................................................2
Printable area ..................................................................................................2
LEDs Location and Meanings ...........................................................................5
Module Error Messages...................................................................................7
General Checks ................................................................................................8
DIAGNOSTICS .......................................................................................................10
Device Diagnostics .........................................................................................10
Service Tallies ................................................................................................12
STRAPPING ...........................................................................................................13
Fuse................................................................................................................13
ADJUSTMENTS......................................................................................................13
Printer Sensor Re–calibration Procedure ......................................................14
Transport .......................................................................................................20
Dual Feed Mechanism (Standard) .................................................................21
Dual Feed Assembly (Stamp) .........................................................................23
Print Engine ...................................................................................................23
Fuse................................................................................................................26
Front Hopper .................................................................................................27
Rear Hopper...................................................................................................29
Hopper Low Sensor Harness..........................................................................30
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENTS/PINOUTS ................................................................31
Logic Board ....................................................................................................31
Single Roll Drive Board...................................................................................33
Dual Roll Control Board .................................................................................34
CABLING ...............................................................................................................34

xiv
Table of Contents
USB Journal Printer
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1
Environmental Requirements..........................................................................2
Paper Specification ..........................................................................................2
LEDs Location and Meaning.............................................................................3
Module Error Messages...................................................................................4
General Checks ................................................................................................4
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................5
LEVEL 3 DIAGNOSTICS....................................................................................10
STRAPPING ...........................................................................................................10
Switches.........................................................................................................10
ADJUSTMENTS......................................................................................................11
MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.............................................................11
Head Assembly ..............................................................................................11
CABLING ...............................................................................................................14
Section 11 ‐ Dispense
S1 Bill Alignment Dispenser
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
S1 Variants .......................................................................................................1
Pick Modules....................................................................................................1
Single and Dual Configuration .........................................................................2
Operational Environment ................................................................................2
Variants............................................................................................................2
Containers........................................................................................................3
Specifications...................................................................................................3
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................5
Path of Notes ...................................................................................................5
Pick Module .....................................................................................................9
Presenter Module............................................................................................9
Firmware Description ....................................................................................25
TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................................................27
Module State Table .......................................................................................27
Troubleshooting Procedures .........................................................................29
DIAGNOSTICS.................................................................................................32
STRAPPING ...........................................................................................................41

Table of Contents xv
Currency Dispenser Control Board ................................................................41
ADJUSTMENTS......................................................................................................43
Drive Belt Tension..........................................................................................43
Currency Evaluation Qualification Procedure................................................44
Calibrating the Dispenser ..............................................................................44
Establishing Singularity and Size....................................................................46
Calculation of Reject Rate..............................................................................49
Error Messages ..............................................................................................49
Cleaning Serial Number Read Transport Cameras.........................................52
Removing the Electronics Box (Rear Access) .................................................53
Replacing the Electronics Box........................................................................57
Removing the Control Board .........................................................................58
Removing the Main Motor ............................................................................61
Removing the LVDT .......................................................................................62
Replacing the LVDT ........................................................................................65
Pick Module Timing .......................................................................................65
CABLING ...............................................................................................................66
Internal Cables...............................................................................................66
Dispenser Main Motor...................................................................................66
Dispenser Interconnection Diagram..............................................................67
Front Access Presenters Cabling (Sheet 1 of 4) .............................................68
Front Access Presenter Cabling (Sheet 2 of 4)...............................................69
Rear Access Presenter Cabling (Sheet 1 of 4) ................................................72
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT ..................................................................................76
USB Connector...............................................................................................76
Transport LEDS and Sensors ..........................................................................76
Pick Modules..................................................................................................77
Note Thickness Sensor/ LVDT ........................................................................77
Stepper Motors..............................................................................................77
Intelligent Cassette Interface.........................................................................78
Clamp Middle Position Sensor.......................................................................78
Motor Sensors ...............................................................................................78
+24V Connector .............................................................................................79
+24V_Interlock Connector.............................................................................79
Fascia Shutter I2C Connector.........................................................................79
TTL Shutter Connector...................................................................................79
Aria Pick Module
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
Specifications...................................................................................................2
Functions of the Pick Module ..........................................................................2
ADJUSTMENTS......................................................................................................10

xvi
Table of Contents
Presenter Timing ...........................................................................................13
PIck Module to Presenter Timing ..................................................................13
TEST TOOLS ..........................................................................................................16
INTERNAL CABLES ................................................................................................16
Aria Single Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 1 of 2)...................................................17
Aria Single Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 2 of 2)...................................................18
Aria Double Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 1 of 2).................................................19
Aria Double Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 2 of 2).................................................20
STRAPPING ...........................................................................................................21
Fuse FS1 .........................................................................................................21
Connector J1 ..................................................................................................22
Currency Cassettes
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1
Cassette Variances...........................................................................................2
1000 Rupee Wide Cassettes Distinguishing Features......................................2
Standard Security Currency Cassettes .............................................................4
Tamper Indicating Currency Cassettes ............................................................4
Fluiditi Currency Cassettes ..............................................................................5
Cassette Components......................................................................................7
Cassette Operation ..........................................................................................9
Power Requirements .....................................................................................14
DIAGNOSTICS .......................................................................................................14
STRAPPING ...........................................................................................................14
ADJUSTMENTS......................................................................................................14
Currency Length Adjustment.........................................................................14
Currency Width Adjustment ..........................................................................16
Currency Length, Note Guide and “E” Spacer Codes.....................................18
Currency Loading ...........................................................................................22
Opening The Cassette....................................................................................22
Removing Unused Currency ..........................................................................25
Resetting The Tamper Indicating Cassette ....................................................28
Loading The Cassette.....................................................................................28
Closing The Cassette ......................................................................................31
Setting The Cassette Identification Code.......................................................32
Changing Cassette Identification Code..........................................................34
Mechanical ....................................................................................................36
Currency Length Adjustment.........................................................................37
Currency Width Adjustment ..........................................................................45
Note Low Sensing Adjustment.......................................................................52
CABLING ...............................................................................................................53
TOOLS...................................................................................................................53
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................2
Presenter Core.................................................................................................3

Table of Contents xvii
Nose.................................................................................................................3
Carriage............................................................................................................4
Bill Aligner Module (BAM) ...............................................................................5
Single Note Transport (SNT) ............................................................................5
Main Motor and Pump Assembly ....................................................................6
Double Pick Module.........................................................................................7
Single Pick Module...........................................................................................8
Currency Cassette............................................................................................8
Purge Bin..........................................................................................................9
Status Indicator Lights ...................................................................................10
Vacuum System .............................................................................................11
5/6 Hi Expansion Board .................................................................................13
Serial Number Read .......................................................................................14
Electrical System............................................................................................15
Sensors...........................................................................................................17
Error Messages ..............................................................................................18
Troubleshooting Procedures .........................................................................35
DIAGNOSTICS .......................................................................................................41
Action Requests .............................................................................................43
Diagnostics Tests ...........................................................................................47
Error Codes ....................................................................................................54
Tallies .............................................................................................................54
STRAPPING ...........................................................................................................55
ADJUSTMENTS......................................................................................................56
Pick Module Timing Procedure......................................................................56
Cleaning Serial Number Read Transport Cameras.........................................61
JAM CLEARANCE...................................................................................................62
How to move the Carriage to the Closed position.........................................62
HETS CALIBRATION...............................................................................................63
SETTING NOTE PARAMETERS ...............................................................................63
CURRENCY EVALUATION QUALIFICATION PROCEDURE.......................................66
Establishing Singularity and Width ................................................................66
Carriage Umbilical Harness............................................................................72
Carriage..........................................................................................................74
Nose...............................................................................................................77
Bill Aligner Module (BAM) .............................................................................79
Single Note Transport (SNT) ..........................................................................82
Main Motor and Pump Assembly ..................................................................86
Double Pick Module.......................................................................................88
Single Pick Module.........................................................................................92
5/6 Hi Expansion Board .................................................................................94
Pick Support Frame........................................................................................95
Presenter Core...............................................................................................96
Presenter Assembly .......................................................................................99

xviii
Table of Contents
CABLING .............................................................................................................100
Presenter Harness .......................................................................................100
Interface Harness.........................................................................................102
S2 Double Pick Module Harness ..................................................................103
Single Pick Module Harness.........................................................................105
Carriage Position Sensor Harness ................................................................107
Dual Cassette ID Harness.............................................................................107
Single Cassette ID Harness...........................................................................108
SNT Harness.................................................................................................109
BAM CIC Harness .........................................................................................111
Purge Bin LEDs Interface..............................................................................111
Purge Bin Interface Harness ........................................................................111
State of Health Harness ...............................................................................112
TEST AND ADJUSTMENT TOOLS .........................................................................112
GLOSSARY OF TERMS .........................................................................................112
S2 Dispenser Cassette
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
Tamper Indicator .............................................................................................2
Cassette Identification Code............................................................................2
Cassette Body and Lid Marking .......................................................................3
Cleaning ...........................................................................................................3
CASSETTE CONFIGURATION ...................................................................................4
Cassette Height................................................................................................4
Cassette Width ................................................................................................7
REPLENISHING CASSETTES ...................................................................................10
Preparing Currency ........................................................................................10
Loading the Cassette .....................................................................................11
Section 12 ‐ Shutters
Shutters
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1
Stepper Motor Driven Shutters .......................................................................1
Solenoid Driven Shutter...................................................................................3
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................4
STRAPPING .............................................................................................................5
ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................5
Stepper Motor Driven Shutters .......................................................................5
CABLING ...............................................................................................................11
Stepper Motor Driven Shutter ‐ Internal Cabling ..........................................11
Solenoid Driven Shutter ‐ Internal Cabling ....................................................11
Section 13 ‐ Security
Skimming Protection Solution (MCRW)

Table of Contents xix
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1
Capacitive Sensing ...........................................................................................2
Magnetic Field ‘Jammer’ .................................................................................2
Electrical ..........................................................................................................3
Module Error State Messages .........................................................................5
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................7
Diagnostic LEDs................................................................................................7
Post Repair Test: Run Sequence Test 1............................................................9
Service Tallies ................................................................................................12
Device Self Test..............................................................................................12
CONFIGURATION..................................................................................................12
STRAPPING ...........................................................................................................13
ADJUSTMENTS......................................................................................................13
SPS Bezel Moulding and Harness Assembly ..................................................14
Drill Mat .........................................................................................................14
SPS Control Box..............................................................................................15
Interconnecting Harnessing...........................................................................18
CONNECTORS ASSIGNMENTS ..............................................................................19
SPS Control PCB Connectors..........................................................................19
Daughter PCB Connectors .............................................................................19
CABLING ...............................................................................................................20
IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to IMCRW Linker Harness (J12 SPS Control PCB) .....20
IFD2 (SPS) Harness ‐ IMCRW Short Linker Harness (on IMCRW) ...................20
IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to Coil Linker Harness (J1 Daughter PCB) .................21
IFD2 (SPS) Ctl PCB to IMCRW Electrode Linker Harness (J9 SPS Ctl PCB) ......21
Penetration Mat Harness (J4 SPS Control PCB) .............................................21
SS ASM (SPS) Replenishment Harness (J6 SPS Control PCB)..........................22
ASM (SPS) Replenishment Harness (J6 SPS Control PCB) ..............................22
Skimming Protection Solution (Dip Card Reader)
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1
Functional Elements ........................................................................................2
SPS Control PCB ...............................................................................................3
ERROR MESSAGES ..................................................................................................4
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................6
Diagnostic LEDs................................................................................................6
Device Self Test................................................................................................8
Tallies ...............................................................................................................8
CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................9
Post Repair Test: Re‐Baseline Sensor/Run Sequence Test 1 .........................10
STRAPPING ...........................................................................................................12
ADJUSTMENTS......................................................................................................12

xx
Table of Contents
SPS Bezel and Driver Assembly......................................................................13
Interconnecting Harnessing...........................................................................13
Drill Mat .........................................................................................................14
SPS Control Box..............................................................................................15
CABLING ...............................................................................................................16
SPS DIP Driver PCB to Control PCB Linker Harness .......................................16
Low Power DC Distribution Harness .............................................................16
USB Type A to Type Mini B High Speed Cable Assembly ..............................16
Penetration Mat Harnesses ...........................................................................17
SS ASM (SPS) Replenishment Harness ...........................................................17
Bezel Assembly ..............................................................................................18
SPS Control PCB Connectors..........................................................................19
Alarms
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
Location ...........................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................3
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................4
Level 0..............................................................................................................4
Level 1..............................................................................................................4
Level 3..............................................................................................................4
STRAPPING .............................................................................................................4
ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................5
CABLING .................................................................................................................5
Alarm Termination Panels ...............................................................................6
Section 14 ‐ Miscellaneous Devices and Interfaces
Media Entry/Exit Indicators
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................1
STRAPPING .............................................................................................................2
ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................2
Standard MEEI .................................................................................................2
MEEI With Carrier Moulding............................................................................2
CABLING .................................................................................................................4
Midi Miscellaneous Interface
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1

Table of Contents xxi
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1
Board Layout....................................................................................................1
Power Requirement.........................................................................................2
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................2
Diagnostic LED .................................................................................................2
STRAPPING .............................................................................................................2
ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................3
CABLING .................................................................................................................3
Interconnect Diagram......................................................................................3
In‐Circuit Debug Cable .....................................................................................3
Midi‐Misc Board Connectors ...........................................................................4
USB DVD RW Slimline Drive
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................2
Dimensions ......................................................................................................2
Mounting Orientation......................................................................................2
Disk Clamp System...........................................................................................3
Tray Ejecting ....................................................................................................3
Supported Disk Types ......................................................................................3
Read and Write Speed .....................................................................................4
ERROR MESSAGES ..................................................................................................5
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................5
STRAPPING .............................................................................................................5
ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................5
CABLING .................................................................................................................5
USB Mini Interface...........................................................................................6
DC 5 V In Connector.........................................................................................6
Slim DVD SATA Super Multi Drive
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................2
Dimensions ......................................................................................................2
Tray Ejecting ....................................................................................................2
Supported Disk Types ......................................................................................3
Read and Write Speed .....................................................................................3
ERROR MESSAGES ..................................................................................................4
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................4
STRAPPING .............................................................................................................4
ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................4
CABLING .................................................................................................................5
Kiosk eSATA Core Breakout .............................................................................5

xxii
Table of Contents
Kiosk DVD eSATA + Power to Slimline SATA ....................................................6
DView Camera
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................2
Dimensions ......................................................................................................2
Camera Specifications .....................................................................................3
Lens Properties ................................................................................................3
Lens Focus........................................................................................................4
Temperature Requirements ............................................................................5
ERROR MESSAGES ..................................................................................................5
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................5
STRAPPING .............................................................................................................5
ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................5
CABLING .................................................................................................................6
Harness – CCTV Colour Camera – Safe ............................................................6
Harness Camera Power Top Box......................................................................6
Harness Camera PWR 12V Fascia ....................................................................6
Harness 24V EXT ..............................................................................................7
Camera.............................................................................................................8
Dual Power Board ............................................................................................8
USB 2D Bar Code Reader
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
Safety Compliance ...........................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1
Module States..................................................................................................3
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................3
Reporting .........................................................................................................3
Self Test ...........................................................................................................3
STRAPPING .............................................................................................................4
ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................4
CABLING .................................................................................................................4
UBAR Illumination IR LED Driver Board ...........................................................6
UBAR Interface PCB .........................................................................................7

Table of Contents xxiii
Section 15 ‐ Audio
Public/Private Audio with Volume Control
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1
STRAPPING .............................................................................................................1
ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................1
TEST TOOLS ............................................................................................................1
CABLE INFORMATION ............................................................................................2
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................2
S_DATA ............................................................................................................2
Section 16 ‐ Environmental Management
Product Environment Heaters
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1
Temperature Control.......................................................................................1
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................2
STRAPPING .............................................................................................................2
ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................2
CABLING .................................................................................................................2
Section 17 ‐ Special Procedures
SelfServ 23 Module Removal
ACCESS TO LOWER FACIA ITEMS............................................................................1
REMOVE KEYPAD....................................................................................................2
KEYPAD MEI............................................................................................................3
MCRW MEI/FACIA INSERT/DECAL INSERT .............................................................4
RECEIPT FACIA INSERT & MEI.................................................................................7
MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACE .................................................................................8
DISPLAY ..................................................................................................................9
TOUCHSCREEN .....................................................................................................11
FDKS AND SCREEN................................................................................................16
FACIA ....................................................................................................................18
FACIA SHELF .........................................................................................................19
PC CORE................................................................................................................20
DISPENSER............................................................................................................22
S1 Bill Alignment Dispenser Removal and Replacement
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1
Presenter Options............................................................................................1
Pick Modules....................................................................................................1
Removal of In Service Replenishment Covers .................................................2

xxiv
Table of Contents
Removal of Lower Pick Module .......................................................................2
Replacing the Lower Pick Module ...................................................................3
Removing the Electronics Box (Rear Access) ...................................................3
Replacing the Electronics Box..........................................................................8
Removing the Control Board ...........................................................................8
Removal of Fluiditi Security Module..............................................................10
Dispenser Control Board ‐ Front Access ........................................................10
Removal of Upper Pick Module .....................................................................12
Replacing the Upper Pick Module .................................................................15
Removing the Presenter Module...................................................................15
Replacing the Presenter Module ...................................................................15
Control Board Authorisation..........................................................................16
Control Board Authentication .......................................................................18
Dispense Protection Configuration................................................................21
Currency Evaluation Qualification Procedure................................................23
Calibrating the Dispenser ..............................................................................23
Establishing Singularity and Size....................................................................26
Calculation of Reject Rate..............................................................................29
Error Messages ..............................................................................................29
DIAGNOSTICS .......................................................................................................32
STRAPPING ...........................................................................................................32
ADJUSTMENTS......................................................................................................32
Drive Belt Tension..........................................................................................32
ACCESS TO FASCIA ITEMS.......................................................................................1
KEYPAD...................................................................................................................2
KEYPAD MEI............................................................................................................3
MCRW MEI/FASCIA INSERT/DECAL INSERT............................................................3
RECEIPT FASCIA INSERT & MEI ...............................................................................5
MIDI MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACE.........................................................................6
PC CORE..................................................................................................................6
PSU .........................................................................................................................9
SHUTTER.................................................................................................................9
CCTV CAMERA ......................................................................................................11
FASCIA ..................................................................................................................11
DISPLAY ................................................................................................................15
TOUCHSCREEN .....................................................................................................16
FDK BEZEL.............................................................................................................19
FASCIA SHELF........................................................................................................22
CASH DISPENSER ..................................................................................................23

SelfServ 23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual Section 1: Introduction
Section Divider
Section 1 - Introduction

Section Divider

Reference and Safety 1
Reference and Safety

Chapter Contents
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
This manual covers the devices used in the SelfServ 23 ATM (class number 6623) and
SelfServ 27 ATM (class number 6627) and should be read in conjunction with the
following documentation.
 B006‐7237‐x000 NCR SelfServ 23 ATM Parts Identification Manual
 B006‐7198‐x000 NCR SelfServ 23 ATM Operator Overview
 B006‐7244‐x000 NCR SelfServ 23 ATM Site Preparation
 B006‐7199‐x000 NCR SelfServ 23 ATM Installation Guide
 B006‐7373‐x000 NCR SelfServ 27 ATM Parts Identification Manual
 B006‐7196‐x000 NCR SelfServ 27 ATM Operator Overview
 B006‐7328‐x000 NCR SelfServ 27 ATM Site Preparation
 B006‐7197‐x000 NCR SelfServ 27 ATM Installation Guide
SAFETY INFORMATION
Electronics Boards
WARNING
This equipment uses Lithium Batteries. There is a danger of an
explosion if a battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to local environmental
guidelines.
ATM Cash Security
WARNING
This system uses mercury in the tilt switches located on the back of
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY January 2015

2 Reference and Safety
the currency dispenser module. Care should be taken when
handling the tilt switches to avoid a spillage.
Access
WARNING
To prevent strain or injury when carrying out tasks on the inner
facia area of rear access terminals adjust your position to ensure
that your waist is at the level of the top of the security enclosure,
allowing your chest and abdomen to lie flat on the top of the
security enclosure. Your feet should be supported on a firm base.
Barcode Reader
The Barcode Reader Module uses a class 2 laser emitter that may be uncovered if the
scanner engine is interfered with in any way.
WARNING
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
Fluorescent Lamps
WARNING
Fluorescent Lamps in display and fascia assemblies contain small
amounts of mercury. Dispose of according to applicable laws.
January 2015 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

SelfServ 23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual Section 2: Preventive Maintenance
Section Divider
Section 2 - Preventive Maintenance

Section Divider

Preventive Maintenance Overview 1
Preventive Maintenance Overview

Chapter Contents
OVERALL SYSTEM CHECKS
CAUTION
Make sure that ESD precautions are observed.
 Investigate any errors that may require immediate action
 Power off the terminal and vacuum the entire inside of the unit, paying special
attention to:
 Power supply unit
 Core
 Check all fans for correct operation and clean out any accumulations of dust,
especially the power supply and core
 If the face of the display, or vandal glass is dirty, drop the monitor back from the
vandal glass and clean the display face and the inside of the vandal glass. Ensure that
the dust seal is present and in good condition
 Using a vacuum cleaner, remove all accumulations of dust residue from the facia jack
socket
 Ensure that camera facia windows are clean. If, for any reason, the camera is
removed from the terminal, the opportunity should be taken to clean the inside of
the facia window and the camera lens
 Use the Customer Confidence Test or Level 2 diagnostics to make sure that all
modules are functioning correctly
 Clear all Device Status List messages
 Make sure your CSS Key Disk has been removed from the unit.
LUBRICATION
Satisfactory operation of mechanical components depends upon proper lubrication.
1. Use clean lubricants from properly labelled containers.
2. Avoid excessive lubrication. Apply only that amount which will provide a thin coating
on the entire bearing area or surface, unless otherwise specified.
3. All parts to be lubricated must be free from dust, corrosion and metal chips.
4. Lubricate bearing areas and surfaces during assembly, unless conditions caused by
subsequent handling are detrimental (for example, accumulation of chips, grit, and so

2 Preventive Maintenance Overview
on) to the proper operation of the part. In those cases lubrication should be applied
after assembly.
5. Apply lubricants using the most convenient method when none is specified, that is by
brushing, dipping, or oil can. Spraying is not recommended.
6. Lubricate all spring hooks and spring studs with lubricant B.
7. Working clipped or riveted assemblies should not be lubricated before riveting but
only after all processes, handling, or storage involving exposure to dirt or serious
atmospheric contamination are past.
8. On assemblies that have shafts on which one or more moving parts are assembled,
lubricate both the shaft and the hub areas on each part with the specified lubricant.
9. Lubricants can cause serious deterioration of rubber. Avoid contamination of drive
belts and drive rolls.
Lubricants
The lubricant ID letter in the table below is referred to in the appropriate device
preventive maintenance chapters in this section.
Lubricant NCR Reference No. * Recommended Alternative(s)

ID Type
A NCR No.2 General Purpose Oil see below Shell Oil Co. Donax T‐6
Mobil Oil Co. Mobile ATF 220
Exxon Oil Co. ATF or Esso ATF
B Synthetic Lubricating Grease 009‐0004618 (100gm None
containers)
C NCR No.3 Special Purpose Grease 603‐8000150 None
D Solid Lubricant Paste 009‐0009020 Molykote DXTM paste
E General Electric Silicone Fluid, SF‐96 (50) TM 603‐8000482 None
F Head Cleaning Fluid 603‐8000539 None
The NCR Reference Numbers in the above table are quoted from publication RM0300,
NCR Tool Catalogue.
TEST TOOLS
The following pin extraction tool is suitable for power connectors.
Manufacturer Type Manufacturer’s Part No.

Molex Mini‐Fit Jr. 11‐03‐0044 (HT 60630 B)

Preventive Maintenance Overview 3
CLEANING MATERIALS
The following table details the recommended cleaning materials:
Cleaning Materials NCR Reference No. *

Cleaning kit 009‐0004633
MCR/MCRW cleaning card 998‐0052929
Cheque Processing Module cleaning pack 009‐0018796
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the responsibility of the customer to clean the following modules (refer to the
relevant Operator Manual).
 Cash Deposit Module Sensors
 Keyboard surfaces
 Monitor surface
 MCRW/MCR
 Printers.

4 Preventive Maintenance Overview

Preventive Maintenance Schedule 1
Preventive Maintenance Schedule

Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the preventive maintenance schedule for the NCR SelfServ 23 and
SelfServ 27 ATMs.
Preventive maintenance should be carried out during repair calls.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY April 2016

2 Preventive Maintenance Schedule
POWER ON CHECKS
GENERAL CHECKS
Every Visit Discuss performance of the ATM with the custodian/operator/first line maintainer and
make notes of any entries in the logbook, which require resolution. Inspect for vandalism
and damage and advise the customer or customer representative of any findings
requiring repair.
Every Visit Visually check for FRAUD/TAMPERING around the Keyboard, Fascia and Card Reader.
Check for foreign devices and extra wires or harnessing. Report such activities to your
Territory or Service Account Manager. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE A DEVICE, THERE
MAY BE PERSONAL RISK ‐ PLACE THE ATM OUT OF SERVICE.
Every Visit For remote sites, check for lighting around the building area. NCR is not responsible for
building lighting but does need to inform the proper persons (help desk or branch
persons) of any safety infractions or issues.
Every Visit Report poor installation of Alarms/Comms cables to your territory manager. For example
excess cable loops lying in base of safe or cables interfering with moving parts etc. Where
possible tidy the installation to avoid ongoing interference with moving parts.
Every Visit Remove media stored within both top‐box and security enclosures (paper rolls,
envelopes, statement paper etc.) Remove currency storage bags and any rubbish lying
inside the ATM.
Every Visit Once the machine has been opened visually inspect the modules before you get started.
Check the cables and rails on all modules to ensure smooth operation.
Every Visit Review error and tally logs either on‐screen or printed and investigate any errors that
may require attention. Always print the tally logs and keep the last copy in the logbook.
There may be many Track 3 read errors on the MCRW and many communication errors;
these do not require any action.
Yearly If the ATM is replenished by branch staff, ask them to remove all currency containers and
the currency from the currency cassettes, and return cassettes for examination. Check
correct operation of the cassette doors, brushes, spring fingers, pusher plate, and pusher
plate pressure. Check cassette note height and width guide settings are correct, check for
high spots in the settings.
CABINETRY & FACIA
Every Visit Observe the general appearance of the ATM cabinet and clean as necessary
Every Visit Verify all fans are operating correctly and are not noisy, including the safe, LCD and power
supply fans.
Yearly Clean CD/DVD‐ROM drive with cleaning CD.
Yearly Verify correct operation of AC interlock switches; ensure there is not excessive float on
the door when in the closed position that would allow the switch to operate
intermittently.
Yearly If fitted verify correct operation of auto supervisor by opening/closing of fascia, security
enclosure or top‐box as appropriate. Listen for the click, verify that there is not excessive
float on the fascia or cabinetry when in the home position that would allow the switch to
operate intermittently.
April 2016 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

POWER OFF CHECKS
GENERAL CHECKS
Yearly Where it is safe (incoming power to the ATM from the building supply is switched off, and
there is no danger to yourself or others from the electrical power), carefully check the
tightness of the power ground connection at the ATM.
Yearly Check the power ground (and polarity) at the wall outlet using a Circuit Tester (if
available). The outlet cover should not be removed ‐ any issues should be escalated to
the customer for resolution. This is normally outside the scope of NCR Service Contracts,
but it is important for ATM performance.
CABINETRY & FACIA
Yearly Using a vacuum cleaner and (if necessary) air can, vacuum ALL internal surfaces of the
ATM including the PC core and fan, power supply, fans, and filters (where applicable).
Yearly Verify correct operation of the fascia and appearance door locks, verify locks are securely
fastened and locking nuts have not backed off. Ensure fascia is latching into position and
door latch plates are adjusted correctly.
Yearly Ensure all fascia mounted shutter doors are aligned and move freely, clean if necessary.
Be sure that the shutters have a covering over the circuit board portion of the shutter.
Ensure shutter assemblies are fully tightened onto the fascia.
Yearly Lubricate the safe door hinges with lubricant A (or similar low viscosity oil) as described in
the Preventive Maintenance Overview.
Yearly Verify harnessing is not being snagged/damaged during door opening/closing operations
and ensure harnessing has been tied back properly after part replacement. Make sure all
ground straps are fitted to shutter assemblies, facias and to keyboards. Check harnessing
is not being snagged/damaged during module racking.
Yearly Ensure retract and slide assemblies are securely bolted in place.
Yearly If applicable, check condition of rain management components, ensure Mylar guides
aren't torn.
S1 CURRENCY DISPENSER
Every Visit Use an air can and vacuum to remove dust from all areas of the dispenser.
Every Visit Replace all suction cups (277‐0009574). Check pick line for broken nozzles. Replace the
pick line if broken, cracked, or bent. Clean all sensor and LED board assemblies.
Every Visit Check for worn or broken gears or belts. If worn or broken belts are found, module
replacement should be scheduled and noted in the log book.
Every Visit Verify that the pick and presenter modules are correctly timed (D Wheel, Pick ‐ Pick). If
you do re‐time the dispenser, check timing several times to be sure no teeth are missing
on any gears and timing stays true. As each pick module "D" lines up with the sensor,
check that the half round wheel is ready to contact the full circular wheel inside the pick
module. Worn or broken gears may warrant pick module replacement.
Yearly Ensure that the note flicker at the purge bin is present, replace broken flickers or cable
ties with a new flicker.

Yearly Disconnect the vacuum tube from the bottom pick solenoid; replace the vacuum filter
(445‐0612449). When you disturb the air filter some dust will drop down the tubing be
sure to clean this out.
Yearly Clean the LVDT sensor wheels with cotton buds and alcohol.
Yearly Check the stacker wheels for damage and schedule module replacement if required.
Yearly Check purge bin micro switch for damage.
Yearly Ensure pick frame cassette latches operate correctly and lock cassette into position.
Yearly Check presenter to safe door cam ramp height setting.
N/A Lubrication ‐ Lubrication is only required on 66XX dispenser products when components
are being replaced.
Every Visit Remove any foreign objects, note fragments or paper clips.
Use an air can and vacuum to remove dust from all areas of the dispenser.
Remove note debris throughout the transport.
Every Visit Remove obvious dust build‐up on any optical sensors and prisms in the following areas:
 Pick Sensors
 Width Sensor
 Stack Entry Sensor
 Divert Entry Sensor
 Carriage Bunch, Pre‐Exit and Exit Sensors
 Carriage positions sensor and flags
 Purge Sensor (Reject Bin)
 Retract from Present (RFP) Entry Sensor
 Media deflector sensors
Every Visit Check pick line for broken nozzles.
Check pick line and replace if broken, cracked, or bent.
Every Visit Check belts are correctly seated.
Check belts for wear and damage. If worn or damaged belts are found, module
replacement should be scheduled and noted in the log book.
Every Visit Check gears for tooth damage.
Every Visit Clean HETS rollers and line 2 if required.
Every Visit Inspect, and if required, clean the cassettes.
Check the holes in the cassette pusher plate are clear of debris.
Yearly Check suction cups and replace if necessary.
Yearly Check that the pick modules are correctly timed.
If you need to re‐time the dispenser, check timing several times to be sure no teeth are
missing on any gears and timing stays true.
Worn or damaged gears may require a pick module replacement.
Yearly Check the SNT Flicker Pads and SNT Note Deflector for damage or wear.

Yearly Disconnect the vacuum tube from just below the air filter to prevent dust from dropping
down into the tubing and replace the filter.
If some dust does drop down into the tubing it must be cleaned out.
Yearly Check the HETS rollers for debris build‐up and clean if necessary.
Yearly Check purge bin micro switch for damage.
Yearly Check the smooth insertion of cassettes and purge bins and that latches engage easily.
Yearly Check the nose and carriage metalwork is not damaged or bent.
Yearly Check harnesses and parts that may contact the safe for damage.
Yearly Look at tallies, SOH and enhanced diagnostics telemetry to see if any FRUs are out of
spec.
Yearly Run appropriate diagnostics for actions performed.
Yearly Check BAM edge register slides freely and BAM rack slides without interference.
Yearly Check carriage umbilical for wear or damage.
Yearly Clean scanner in serial note read transport using compressed air or a soft thin brush or
cotton bud. A build‐up of dirt can be removed using a lint free cloth moistened with
soapy water or with an alcohol free wipe. Cleaning should be more frequent in units with
high note volume or which are installed in dusty locations.
MOTORIZED CARD READER/WRITERS
Every Visit The shutter and pre‐head are the most vulnerable parts of the card reader and subject to
the most dirt ingress and wear. These parts should be inspected and cleaned as required
on each service visit. Pre‐head wear will not be visible without removal of the pre‐head
from the card reader mouth. If Customer Failure reports that 'cards are not accepted,'
then replacement of the card reader would be appropriate.
Every Visit The shutter mechanism should be checked and adjusted for the shutter open and width
switch positions.
Every Visit Verify MCRW transport aligns correctly at fascia.
Every Visit Clean dip reader. Check that the dip debris access through the dip chassis is clear and can
allow the passage of dust and debris to clear the transport.
Yearly The MCRW is to be replaced after every 383K transactions to minimize downtime and
improve reliability. This value should be reduced if the MCRW is located in a "dirty
hostile environment." If the MCRW was not swapped on the previous PM (refer to log
book), swap it with one that has been thoroughly refurbished.
PRINTERS
Every Visit Ensure receipt/statement slots are free from obstruction, paint, moulding flash, burrs
etc.
Every Visit Ensure receipt/statement/passbook transports align correctly with fascia.
Every Visit Ensure printer PCB covers are fitted.
Yearly Clean receipt printer thermal print head. (More frequently if stamp media used).
Yearly Use an air can and vacuum to remove dust from all areas of the printers.

LCD MONITOR & KEYBOARDS
Every Visit Check that the customer keyboard is centrally aligned in the aperture and no obvious
damage or leaks are present, this should be checked at installation or repair of a
keyboard and on each visit.
Yearly If the face of the LCD or the vandal glass is dirty drop monitor back from the vandal glass
and clean the LCD face and the inside of the vandal glass. Ensure that the dust seal is
present and in good condition.
FLUIDITI CHECKS
The Yearly PM checks/tests for Fluiditi require ATM power to be both on and off. Every
visit check can be completed with the system armed however any repairs require the
system to be disarmed.
 Power on to disconnect the battery
 Power off to disarm the system
 Power on the run tests
 Power off to arm the system
 Power on to reconnect the battery
FLUIDITI - ICS & CS
Before completing the yearly checks/tests or any repairs, disconnect the battery and
disarm the system as described in the SAMM Fluiditi ATM Security and Fluiditi
Replenishment Security documents.
Every Visit Check (and repair if necessary):
Wiring Harnesses
All connectors on Alarm and PDS boards to see if cables are seated properly
Check battery voltage: under normal conditions 8.7 Volt minimum when the ATM is
switched on and minimum 11.2 when switched off. If the voltages are lower than these
limits when the ATM has been operating in normal conditions (i.e no prolonged period
without power), the battery pack should be replaced.
On ICS solutions, check the metal tangs or holding points on the cassette latches are intact
Yearly Check Switching Internal to External Status Led indicators, Shunt Switch, Door Timer.
Yearly Perform the following tests:
Test cassette position
Test ICS Servos
Test Cassette Tamper Position
Test Battery
Test Penetration Mats
Test tilt switches

POST PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS
GENERAL CHECKS
Every Visit Let the custodian/operator/first‐line maintainer run a test transaction.
CABINETRY & FASCIA
Every Visit On units that have Audio feature, ensure that the feature is working by using a head phone
set.
Every Visit Ensure that all Media Entry Indicators are operational.
Every Visit Check that all interlock switches operate properly.
Every Visit Perform the SOH task saying the suction cups have been replaced.
Every Visit Load the ATM with customer engineer test currency. Test dispensers to ensure proper
operation of all dispense modules.
Every Visit Dispense 1 bill to the front of the ATM; ensure proper delivery and firm grip.
Every Visit If there have been many rejected amounts or complaints about ATM keeping money,
dispense 40 bills to ensure no bills are catching on (clipping) the shutter. If clipping has
occurred, verify correct operation of the shutter. If clipping persists, then a module
replacement should be scheduled and noted in the log book. If applicable, adjust the
presenter height guide within the safe or on the safe door for proper dispensing out the
ATM.
Every Visit Check that all interlock switches operate properly.
Every Visit Perform the SOH task.
Every Visit Load the ATM with customer engineer test currency.
Test dispensers to ensure proper operation of all dispense modules.
Every Visit Dispense 1 bill to the front of the ATM; ensure proper delivery and firm grip.
Every Visit If there have been excessive purged notes or incorrect amounts dispensed, dispense 40 bills
to ensure no bills are catching on (clipping) the shutter.
If clipping has occurred, verify correct operation of the shutter.
If clipping persists, then a module replacement should be scheduled and noted in the log
book.
If applicable, adjust the presenter height guide within the safe or on the safe door for
correct dispensing.

MOTORIZED CARD READER/WRITERS
Every Visit Using the appropriate speed test card, run card reader speed test.
Every Visit Ensure speed is 24 +/‐3%. ‐(not appropriate on VE or IMCRW Card Reader).
Every Visit Where applicable check reading of track 1, 2 & 3 using diagnostics. ‐ No Errors reported.
Every Visit Where applicable check Smart card operation using diagnostics.
PRINTERS
Every Visit Check print quality for fully formed and legible characters and that receipts and statements
are delivered correctly, check knife operation and black dot being correctly cut. Check for
correct operation of paper low switch.
Every Visit Clear fitness. Clear SOH and ensure that state of health indicates "Terminal Healthy.
LCD MONITOR & KEYBOARDS
Every Visit Verify touch‐screen calibration accuracy within diagnostics.
Check that all keys on both the fascia and FDK keyboard assemblies are functioning
properly.
FINAL CHECK
Every Visit Mark the completed activities in the log book, and schedule any follow‐up module
replacements required.

Card Readers 1
Card Readers
DIP CARD READERS
If required, prepare the cleaning card (998‐0052929) by spraying lightly with head
cleaning fluid (603‐8000539).
1. Insert the cleaning card, with the felt side down, into the card reader.
2. Remove the card from the card reader.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 five times.
Note: Before using the card reader, wait five minutes for the cleaning fluid on the
reading head to evaporate.
SWIPE CARD READERS
If required, prepare the cleaning card (998‐0052929) by spraying lightly with head
cleaning fluid (603‐8000539).
Swipe the cleaning card through the reader five times.
If the cleaning card you have is single sided, swipe it through the reader five times with
the cleaning face to the right and five times with the cleaning face to the left.
Note: Before using the card reader, wait five minutes for the cleaning fluid on the
reading head to evaporate.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY May 2013

2 Card Readers
USB IMCRW
At each service call, the read heads and the rollers should be cleaned (see below). In
addition, perform the following tasks as needed:
 Remove the shutter assembly and clean the housing thoroughly
 Check throat to main transport alignment and adjust where necessary
 Check the width switch and shutter switch operation
 Make sure that the shutter operates freely
 Clean all sensors and LEDs
 Clean drive belt with alcohol and swabs.
Clean Read Heads and Smart Contacts
The read heads, and smart contacts where configured, should be cleaned at every
UIMCRW service call. Use the MCRW cleaning card (NCR part number 998‐0052929 or
equivalent) to clean the heads, as follows:
1. If required, prepare the cleaning card by spraying lightly with head cleaning fluid
(such as part numbers 603‐8000539 or 603‐9014721).
2. Select the Maintenance option from the System Application Main Menu.
3. Select the MCRW option from the Maintenance Menu.
4. Select the Cleaning Cycle Test option.
5. Insert the card to start the cleaning cycle.
6. When the cycle is finished, remove the cleaning card. If it is not removed, the card is
captured.
7. If the card readers supports smart cards, select the SC Cleaning Cycle Test option and
repeat the procedure.
May 2013 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Card Readers 3
Clean Rollers
At each service call, use a cloth moistened with iso‐propyl alcohol to clean the three
rubber rollers indicated in the following illustration.

4 Card Readers

S1 Currency Dispenser 1
Chapter Contents
SUMMARY CHECKLIST
Perform the following at each service call:
Inspect the pick module for wear or damage to:
 Pick cups and pick arm assembly
 Vacuum hoses and T‐connections
 Vacuum filter
 Gears and belts
 Ribbon cables to pick interface boards
 Sensors
 Reed switches.
Check D wheel timing within each pick module.
Check pick to pick timing between pick modules.
Inspect the presenter for wear/accumulation of dirt on:
 Sensors
 Belts
 Rollers.
Inspect cassettes and check how well cash is loaded.
Perform diagnostics to verify correct operation.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY March 2014

2 S1 Currency Dispenser
INSPECT THE PICK MODULE
Single Pick Module
Suction cups
Pick sensor
Pick arm
Keyplate
Timing disk
D wheels
Vacuum hose
Pick valve
March 2014 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Double Pick Module
Suction cups
Pick sensor D wheels
Pick arm
Keyplate
Timing disk
Pick valve
Vacuum hose
T connector
 Check pick vacuum hoses, replace if broken, cracked or bent.
 Measure the vacuum at each pick valve and at the filter (see Vacuum test in
Diagnostics section). It should measure >800mb (23.5 InHg) and be held for more
than 60 seconds after the motor stops.
 Check the hose T connectors for leaks, replace if damaged.
 Check the vacuum filter above the top pick module and clean out if necessary: heavy
dust contamination of the filter could reduce the vacuum and cause mis‐picks.
Notes:
 When you disturb the air filter some dust will drop down the tubing to the lowest
pick module. Disconnect the tube from the lowest pick valve and clean out the
dust from the tube and valve.

 Annual replacement of the filter is recommended. When replacing the filter, a
good fit with the vacuum hose tube can be achieved by either securing the
connection with a cable tie, or by cutting approximately 8 mm (0.3 to 0.4 in.) off
the end of the tube (leaving a little of the flared end of the tube makes it easier to
fit over the new filter). Do not use heat or chemicals to soften the pipe on top of
the filter in order to fit the tube over it: this will result in leaks.
Cable tie
 Check the pick arm assembly for cracks or wear, replace if necessary.
 Check the pick suction cups. Replacement is based on the number of bills picked per
pick module: replace when SOH Replace Soon message is displayed. The 66XX
threshold is 103 000 bills.
 Check for worn or broken gears and belts on the side and rear of the pick module.
Replace if necessary. (If gears are worn, check that all circlips on the associated shaft
are in place. Circlips which may have fallen off can cause lateral movement of shafts,
accelerating gear wear).
To prolong gear life, the pick module orientation can be swapped. i.e. on the four
high dispenser, the top and bottom modules can change places, as should the middle
two modules.
 Check for wear in the ribbon cables connecting the pick module interface boards to
each other and to the presenter control board. Replace if necessary.
 Check the alignment of the pick sensors and clean any accumulations of dirt/dust.
 Check that the cassette inserts fully and latches into place. If not, check for fouling
with pick sensor or bent keyplate.

 Check that the cassette low sensor reed switch housing on the pick arm is not
cracked. Replace if necessary. A damaged housing can lead to a Note Low condition
not being identified.
Keyplate
Reed Switch
and Pick LED
Assembly

PICK MODULE INTERNAL TIMING (D WHEEL TIMING)
To adjust a double pick module you must first isolate the gear trains of the two pick units
by removing the timing belt shown in the following figure. Retain the timing belt for
refitting at the end of the adjustment.
Timing belt
Timing disk
The relationship to be set within the pick unit is between the pick wheel and the cam
driven vacuum arm line.
Note: In a double pick unit make the adjustment on the upper pick unit first.
1. Position the teeth mesh between the drive segment and pick line so that the upper

tooth of the drive segment is above the upper tooth of the pick line.
2. Take off and retain the 26T idler gear directly below the pick line (left side of the
module looking from the currency cassette).
3. Rotate the gears of the pick module transport until the pick D wheel is free of its
mating tension wheel.
4. Rotate the drive cluster in a clockwise direction until the D timing mark on the timing
disk lines up with the timing sensor body.

5. Rotate the gears of the pick module transport until the interrupted part of the pick D
wheels is away from the pick arms. Turn the gears until a gap of 0.5 mm  0.5 mm
(0.02 in.  0.02 in.) exists between the leading edges of the pick D wheels and the
tension wheels as shown in the first figure above.
6. Replace the idler gear removed in step 2. Be careful not to dislodge the setting.
7. Carry out steps 1 to 6 on the lower pick unit in a double pick or on the next single pick
module.
8. Check the D wheel timing by inserting a note between the D wheel and drive roller
then, using finger pressure, pull on the note to test the pinch. Check both sides: if
there is a difference in the pinch is could indicate a bent frame which requires the
pick module to be replaced. If the pinch is equal but not sufficient for drive, replace
the pick line.
PICK MODULE TO PICK MODULE TIMING
When the internal timing of both pick units of a double pick module has been set, the
pick units have to be locked in a fixed timing relationship:
1. Rotate the gear train of the first (top) pick unit to move the timing disk in a clockwise
direction until the 1 timing mark on the drive cluster timing disk lines up with the
timing sensor body.
CAUTION
Always rotate the gear train in its normal direction of travel. The
pick timing disks should turn clockwise. Do not move the gear train
backwards and forwards.
2. Rotate the gear train of the second pick unit until the 2 timing mark on the drive
cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body. Continue as necessary,
setting the timing disk to 3 on the third pick unit and to 4 on the fourth.
3. Replace the timing belt removed earlier around the pulley wheel of the lower pick
position and put it on as many teeth as possible of the pulley wheel of the upper pick
position, taking care not to dislodge the settings. Turn the upper gear train in the
normal direction of travel (see Caution above) to ride the timing belt fully on to the
pulley wheel.
Note: The S1 dispenser does not require any timing relationship to be set between the
action of the pick modules and the presenter.

INSPECT THE PRESENTER
 Check for worn or broken belts. Replace if necessary.
 Check for worn or dirty rollers. Replace or clean if necessary.
 Check the alignment of the presenter sensors and clean any accumulations of dirt/
dust using compressed air.
S1 Front Access sensors
Exit
Transport Sensor TS4
Sensor Stack Sensor TS2
Transport Sensor TS3 & TS3A
From Pick
Modules LVDT
Purge Overfill Sensor TS1
S1 Rear Access sensors

Exit Stack Sensor TS2
Sensor Transport Sensor TS3 & TS3A Purge Overfill Sensor TS1
LVDT From Pick

Modules
INSPECT CASSETTES
 Inspect the cassettes for damage, dirt, sticky tape or residue. Replace damaged
cassettes. Clean inside and out if they are dirty, paying particular attention to the
cassette door and note height guide.
 Check that the pusher plate and the truck door sliding guides move freely.
 Check that the cassette id magnets, note width guides and cassette height spacers
are correct for the notes being dispensed.

 Inspect how well cash has been loaded. Poorly loaded or over‐stuffed cassettes will
result in mis‐picks and dispenser jams. The maximum stack size is indicated by the
label on the inside of the cassette.
Max. Stack
 Check for obvious defects such as:
 Adhesive tape, staples, pins or any foreign matter
 Torn or limp notes with pin holes
 Two or more notes stuck to each other
 Corner folds or folded notes.
Any notes considered to be unacceptable should be removed.
 Check for bowed notes caused by elastic bands or other packaging on currency which
can cause the notes to jam in the dispenser. Notes bowed across the width have
been specifically identified as causing jams in the Personas 86 dispenser and it is
recommended that these notes should be processed through a counting machine

where possible or at least manually fanned and flattened several times. Bowed notes
should be loaded in bundles of 100 notes, in alternating orientation to counter the
bow:
For notes bowed along their length, For notes bowed across their width,
load with the bow towards the pusher. load with the bow away from the pusher.
DIAGNOSTICS
Perform the following diagnostic tests to verify proper operation of the dispenser.
Vacuum:
 Perform a Diagnostic Clear command System Application to run the main motor
and drive the vacuum pump. Measure the vacuum with a gauge at each pick valve
in turn, starting at the lowest. The vacuum should measure >800mb (23.5 InHg)
and be held for more than 60 seconds after the motor stops. If the vacuum is
below this level, measure again at connections progressively higher up the
vacuum hose until the section with the leak is isolated (it will be directly below
where you first get a good vacuum reading). Replace the damaged hose then test
again.
 Perform the test again at the air filter. If it fails at the filter, the problem is either
the pump or one of the tube connections between it and the air filter.
Belt alignment:
Mark the dispenser drive belts with a straight line, run a note dispense test then check to
see if the belts are still in alignment. If not, check for dirt and clean as necessary. Check
for wear and replace as necessary.
Note skew:
Run a single dispense test from each pick module repeatedly while checking for note
skew in the stacking area. If notes are skewing, inspect the belts and roller in the pick
module and the presenter. If they are clean but the test continues to fail, the presenter
needs to be replaced.

Facia alignment:
Run a 40 bill dispense test through the facia to verify alignment of the dispenser to the
safe door opening and shutter. If the test fails, check the presenter to facia alignment.
Shutter:
Run the dispenser shutter test with halt on error enabled in the control menu, looping 50
times with the facia closed to verify shutter alignment. If the test fails, replace the
shutter.

SUMMARY CHECKLIST
Perform the following at each service call:
Inspect the pick module for wear or damage to:
 Pick cups and pick arm assembly
 Vacuum hoses and T‐connections
 Air filter
 Gears and belts
 Sensors
Check pick to pick timing between pick modules.
Inspect the SNT for wear/accumulation of dirt on:
 Sensors
 Belts
 Rollers
Inspect the carriage for wear/accumulation of dirt on:
 Sensors
 Belts
 Rollers
Inspect cassettes and check how well cash is loaded.
Perform diagnostics to verify correct operation.
CLEANING MATERIALS
The following cleaning materials are the only authorized materials for use on the S2
Currency Dispenser:
 Canned air (10 oz. ‐ NCR stock number 526487), or a soft brush.
 Damp, lint‐free cloth.
Only use these approved cleaning methods as use of other cleaners could damage the
module. Cleaners containing alcohol or other solvents and degreaser (such as Fedron)
can damage the plastics used in the sensor lenses and in the belts. This results in clouding
of the sensor covers and prisms, and also degrades the belts causing them to become
sticky.
INSPECT THE PICK MODULE
Refer to the S2 Dispenser service chapter for sensor location diagrams.
 Check pick vacuum hoses, replace if broken, cracked or bent.
 Carry out a Pick Valve Diagnostic Test.
 Check the hose T connectors for leaks, replace if damaged.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY August 2015

 Check the air filter above the top pick module and clean out if necessary: heavy dust
contamination of the filter could reduce the vacuum and cause mis‐picks.
Note: When you disturb the air filter some dust will drop down the tubing to the lowest
pick module. Disconnect the tube from the lowest pick valve and clean out the dust from
the tube and valve.
Note: Annual replacement of the filter is recommended. When replacing the filter, a
good fit with the vacuum hose tube can be achieved by either securing the connection
with a cable tie, or by cutting approximately 8 mm (0.3 to 0.4 in.) off the end of the tube
(leaving a little of the flared end of the tube makes it easier to fit over the new filter). Do
not use heat or chemicals to soften the pipe on top of the filter in order to fit the tube
over it: this will result in leaks.
Cable tie
 Check the pick arm assembly for cracks or wear, replace if necessary.
 Check the pick suction cups. Replacement is based on the number of bills picked per
pick module: replace when SOH Replace Soon message is displayed. The threshold is
1 800 000 bills.
 Check for worn or damaged gears and belts on the side and rear of the pick module.
Replace if necessary. (If gears are worn, check that all circlips on the associated shaft
are in place. Circlips which may have fallen off can cause lateral movement of shafts,
accelerating gear wear).
If gears on the upper pick module appear worn, gear life can be prolonged by
swapping the two the pick modules, i.e., on the four high dispenser, the two pick
modules can change places.
 Check for wear in the ribbon cables connecting the pick module interface boards to
each other and to the presenter control board. Replace if necessary.
 Check the alignment of the pick sensors and clean any accumulations of dirt/dust.
August 2015 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

 Check that the cassette inserts fully and latches into place. If not, check for fouling
with pick sensor or bent keyplate.
 If Serial Number Read (SNR) is fitted, clean the scanners in the SNR transport using
compressed air or a soft thin brush or a cotton bud. A build‐up of dirt can be removed
using a lint free cloth moistened with soapy water or with an alcohol free wipe.
Cleaning should be more frequent in units with high note volume or which are
installed in dusty locations.
SNR Scanners
SNR transport at rear of first pick
Note: After cleaning the sensors, use SysApp to reset all pick, SNT, carriage and
presenter sensors.
Select Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser >
Calibrate Sensors.
Pick Module to Pick Module Timing
When the internal timing of both pick units of a double pick module have been set, the
pick units have to be locked in a fixed timing relationship. Follow the S2 Double Pick
Module Timing Procedure as described in the S2 Dispenser service chapter.
Note: The S2 dispenser does not require any timing relationship to be set between the
action of the pick modules and the presenter.

INSPECT THE PRESENTER
Refer to the S2 Dispenser service chapter for sensor location diagrams.
 Remove obvious dust build‐up on the following:
 Carriage Position Sensor
 Purge Bin Sensors
 Pick Sensors
 Stack Entry Sensor
 Width Sensor
 Divert Entry Sensor
 Media Deflector Sensors
 Carriage Bunch, Pre‐Exit and Exit sensors
 Carriage Position Flag
 Check for worn or damaged belts. Replace if necessary.
 Check for worn or dirty rollers. Replace or clean if necessary.
 Check the alignment of the presenter sensors and clean any accumulations of dirt/
dust using compressed air.
Note: After cleaning the sensors, use SysApp to reset all pick, SNT, carriage and
presenter sensors.
Calibrate Sensors.

INSPECT THE CASSETTES
Refer to the S2 Dispenser Cassette service chapter for cassette cleaning, currency
preparation and currency loading instructions.
 Replace damaged cassettes.
 Inspect the cassettes for damage, dirt, sticky tape or residue. Clean inside and out if
they are dirty.
 Inspect how well cash has been loaded.
DIAGNOSTICS
Perform the following diagnostic tests to verify proper operation of the dispenser:
Pick Valve
Refer to the S2 Currency Dispenser service chapter for the Pick Valve Diagnostics Test
instructions.
Belt alignment
There are three sets of drive belts:
 Pick Transport Belts
 SNT Transport Belts
 Carriage Belts
Mark the belts with a straight line, run a note dispense test then check to see if the belts
are still in alignment. If not, check for dirt and clean as necessary.
Check for wear and replace as necessary.
Note Skew
Run a single dispense test from each pick module repeatedly while checking for note
skew in the stacking area.
If notes are skewing, inspect the following areas and replace if necessary:
 Cassettes
 Pick Modules
 SNT
 BAM
 Carriage
Bunch Splay
Dispense a maximum bunch size from the lower cassette.
If the bunch is purged or an issue with purged notes has been reported, this may be due
to excessive splay detected in the bunch and the following areas must be inspected:

 BAM
 Carriage links
 SNT exit
Splay at Present
If there is an unacceptable amount of splay when the bunch is presented, possibly
preventing all the notes from being taken, check the nose for a concave lower plate or
damage to the interface bridge.
Facia alignment
Run a 40 bill dispense test through the facia to verify alignment of the dispenser to the
safe door opening and shutter. If the test fails, check the presenter to facia alignment.
Shutter
Run the dispenser shutter test with halt on error enabled in the control menu, looping 50
times with the facia closed to verify shutter alignment. If the test fails, replace the
shutter.

Security Enclosure 1
Security Enclosure
Chapter Contents
GENERAL CHECKS
 Check the security enclosure interlock switch function by closing the security
enclosure door and running a motor test in diagnostics. Pull the security enclosure
door handle firmly while the motor is running
 If applicable, lubricate door hinges.
DOOR HINGE LUBRICATION
Lubricate the security enclosure door hinges with lubricant C, or a similar Special Purpose
Grease, at each (annual) preventive maintenance call.
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the security enclosure door.
2. Raise the door to the full height of the adjustment screw located in the hinge block.
Care must be taken when raising the door as damaged pins could fracture during this
process.
3. Clean the hinge pins. All corrosion or old lubricant should be removed from the pins.
4. Apply a small amount of grease to the hinges and wipe off the excess. Raise and lower
the door on the Allen screw to spread the lubricant over the surface of the hinge pin.
Realign the door to the security enclosure body. Make sure that there is an equal gap
between the door and the body at both the top and bottom of the door.

2 Security Enclosure

USB Receipt Printer 1
USB Receipt Printer

Chapter Contents
Perform the following tasks as necessary:
 Clean transport sensors
 Clean thermal print head
Transport Sensors
Clean the two pairs of transport sensors using compressed air to remove dust from the
surface of each sensor.
CAUTION
Sensors should not be removed from chassis for cleaning. If for any
reason sensors needs to be removed, they must be recalibrated.

2 USB Receipt Printer
Thermal Print Head
Clean the print head by wiping the black strip five times with a cleaning pen.
Description Part Number

Thermal Head Cleaner (box of 10) 497-0472684
When the printer is loaded with stamp sheets or other adhesive media, the thermal print
head should be cleaned on a regular basis as the adhesive may cause a build up of dust
on the head.
CAUTION
Do not clean the print head or any other area inside the printer with
detergent or alcohol as this may damage the print head and
electronics.

Security Enclosure Heaters 1
Security Enclosure Heaters

Chapter Contents
Terminals that are installed through the wall (TTW) into the outside world, are fitted with
a heater in the security enclosure. This heater is designed to keep the internal
temperature of the terminal above 10 degrees Celsius or 50 degrees Fahrenheit.
The terminal room is required to be at or above 10 degrees Celsius, 24 hours a day, 7
days a week, as defined by the NCR Site Preparation and Requirements.
NCR recommends that an annual check of security enclosure heaters and terminal room
heating systems is performed and reported back to the account support team.
SECURITY ENCLOSURE HEATER TEST
Pre–requisite
A Non–Flammable Freezer Aerosol propellant.
Below is a typical product, a local variant can be acquired to reduce cost.
Product Description Manufacturer Details

Ambersil, Freezer Spray—Fault AMBERSIL
Detection on Electronics Tel: +44 (0) 1278 727200
Fax: +44 (0) 1278 425644
E–mail: sales.uk@crcind.com
Web: www.ambersil.com
Test Frequency and Timing
Perform the security enclosure heater test annually, 2 months prior to the start of
normal cold temperature period.
Security Enclosure Heater Test Procedure
Perform the procedure below during a regular service visit in which the security
enclosure door is required to be opened, typically this would be on a Currency Dispenser
service visit:
1. Open the security enclosure door.
2. Retract the currency dispenser module or BNA to gain access to the security
enclosure heater, typically, this is mounted on either the back wall or the floor of the
security enclosure.
3. Ensure that the AC Interlock is overridden, ensuring that the heater has mains power
applied.
4. Locate the security enclosure heater thermostat, normally close to the heater

2 Security Enclosure Heaters
assembly.
5. Using your hand or fingers, check the airflow above the heater to ensure the heaters
are not on.
6. Spray the freezer aerosol onto the thermostat for 10 seconds.
7. Check the airflow above the heater to ensure the heater comes on.
8. In a few minutes it should get too hot to touch.
9. Record this in the WO remarks as SECURITY ENCLOSURE HEATER TESTED OK.
10. If the heater does not function. Does not come on or gets warm but not hot. Record
SECURITY ENCLOSURE HEATER TESTED FAIL. This action permits the material to be
ordered and a future WO set‐up to investigate and correct the issue.
ROOM HEATER TEST
The air surrounding the terminal is required to be at a minimum temperature of 10
degrees Celsius 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. Assuming the terminal operates for this
same period.
Use the remarks below for an existing Work Order to indicate the site conditions to the
account team. These remarks permit the account team to address any room heater
issues with the customer.
Room Heat Low
Use this remark to describe installations that set down the room heat to 1 to 3 degrees
Celsius in order to protect against water freezing level. This temperature is not enough to
ensure that our products operate correctly.
Room Heat Timed
Use this remark to describe installations with timed heaters to ensure Branch Staff are
warm during their working hours. This system is good and correct, but the heater
switches off at 17:00, and the temperature drops off during the evening and early
morning.
Room Heat Faulty
Use this remark to describe installations where the room heater occasionally fails and
the estates management team is unaware of this.
Room Heat OK
Use this remark to describe a site where the heating system operates at 24 hours a day,
seven days a week with the temperature continuously at or above 10 degrees Celsius.

USB 2D Bar Code Reader (UBAR) 1
USB 2D Bar Code Reader (UBAR)

Chapter Contents
CLEANING
On every service visit clean the viewing window on the outside of the facia with a soft
cloth or lens tissue dampened with water (or a mild detergent ‐ water solution). If a
detergent solution is used, rinse with clean lens tissue dampened with water only.
CAUTION
Do not touch the imager lens. If necessary, only use compressed air
to clean the lens.

2 USB 2D Bar Code Reader (UBAR)

SelfServ 23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual Section 3: Diagnostics
Section Divider
Section 3 - Diagnostics Overview

Section Divider

Diagnostics Overview 1
Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
Note: This chapter provides an overview of the diagnostic aids available on terminals
running APTRA XFS software. For terminals running APTRA Base software, refer to the
APTRA Base User Guide (B006‐7071) for ATM diagnostics.
The main route to fault finding and diagnosis is System Application, which is described in
general terms in this chapter. The details of the tests available for each device are
described in the device chapters of this manual. Also refer to the Diagnostic Status Code
Notebook (B006‐6237) for M_STATUS and M_DATA test results.
System Application also provides other functions, such as pro‐active device servicing and
configuration of the terminal and devices, which are described in detail in Self Service
Support ‐ System Application User Guide (B006‐6167).
This overview chapter covers the following areas of diagnostics:
 System Application
 Level 0 Diagnostics
 Test Tools, including Bootable System Application
SYSTEM APPLICATION
The APTRA XFS System Application provide access to the functions required to carry out
runtime configuration, diagnostics and maintenance. See the illustration at the end of
the chapter showing the some of the key menus in System Application.
Entering System Application
Access to diagnostic routines is only offered if a valid NCR USB Service Key is inserted
when System Application (Sys App) is started.
To enter diagnostics, proceed as follows:
1. From the Supervisor menu, select Diagnostics (or the owning organisation’s
equivalent).
2. Insert your NCR USB Service Key in the PC module.
3. Select System Application.
4. Follow the on‐screen prompts and enter your 6‐digit PIN.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY December 2012

2 Diagnostics Overview
The system application main menu will appear as shown below.
USB Service Key
Access to the various areas of System Application is determined by the level of
permission on the individual’s Service Key. For example a key could allow access to
Diagnostics and Self Tests only or could allow access to all areas of Sys App, except the
ability to validate the replacement of certain spare parts.
The functions to which a key does not provide access, will either not appear on the
System Application menus, or will appear but be unavailable.
If System Application is started without a USB key, or three unsuccessful attempts at
entering a key PIN have been made, the main menu screen will appear as shown below:
with certain options not available and the option ‘Maintenance’ in place of ‘Diagnostics’.
December 2012 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

The Maintenance option gives access to card reader cleaning tests and UEPP2 details
such as firmware version.
Functions on System Application Main Menu
The following functions on the System Application main menu are accessed through
FDKs or areas on the touchscreen.
Transfer Interface ‐
transfers the System Application interface between the operator panel and the front
interface on a rear access terminal.
After the transfer option has been selected at the rear, press any key at the front
interface, then at the prompt enter the password 2468 and press OK. This is to ensure
that only authorised users can access the System Application from the front interface. A
password is not required to transfer from the front to the rear interface.
Save NT Information ‐
saves the Windows application, system and security Event Logs to a removable memory
device. A prompt will be displayed if more than one storage device is needed to store this
information.
System Shutdown ‐
initiates the Windows operating system shutdown process. Once the system has written
unsaved data to the disk, a message appears indicating shutdown is complete. The
terminal can then be powered off.
If the user does not have the access rights to perform an operating system shutdown
then a prompt will be displayed indicating this and the Sys App main menu is re‐
displayed.
Exit ‐
terminates System Application and returns control to the software that was running
when Sys App was started.

Device Diagnostics
The Device Diagnostics option on the Sys App main menu provides access to all device
diagnostic test functions via the menu shown below. When this option is selected, an
information log entry is made to record the fact that diagnostics has been accessed.
Select the touchscreen area or numeric key for a device to access its diagnostic tests. See
the appropriate device chapter in this manual for details of the tests possible for each
device.
Control Menu
The Control Menu can be accessed from the Device Diagnostics menu or from the
individual device tests menus. It permits you to view or modify the current control
settings. The following settings are provided:
Possible
Control Option Description Default
Values
Halt On Error Determines whether or not a test continues regardless of any ON/OFF OFF
error returned from any action (loop mode or run-to-run only)
Delay Test Times Delays each test for a duration defined by the operator when 0 - 99 0
run in loop or run-to-run mode (the individual device tests are seconds
run sequentially as one test).
Log Updates and Used to enable/disable log and tally updating during the ON/OFF ON
Tallies operation of diagnostic tests.

Hardware Information and Recovery
The functions under this Sys App main menu option are:
Replace Device (Power Devices Down) ‐
This option allows all devices to be powered down except the PC core, so that a device
can be replaced without re‐booting the whole terminal. After selecting this option, you
will be prompted to confirm you wish to power down all devices, and you can then do so
using the CE service switch, located behind a cover beside the main on/off switch. A
narrow probe, such as the shaft of a screwdriver, is required to access the button. On
powering the devices back on, a result screen will display which devices are still present
from before the power down, and which devices have been added.
Replacing one of the following devices will trigger a status of “Device not authorised” on
the device status list:
 USB EPP2
 USB PPD
 USB iMCRW
 USB Smart Dip Card Reader
 USB Cash Dispenser
 USB GBRU.
The ‘Device not authorised’ status can be cleared from the list as usual provided a USB
Service Key with Parts Replacement permission is present in the PC core.
Reset Device (Cycle Power) ‐
This powers down all devices except the PC core, and then immediately restores power,
effectively resetting all devices. When the devices are powered back on, a results screen
displays which devices are still present from before the power down, and which devices
have been recovered by the reset.

Reset USB Ports ‐
This resets all USB ports, and displays a results screen listing which devices are still
present from before the reset and which devices have been recovered. This function
allows recovery of USB functionality, without re‐booting the terminal, in situations
where a USB connection is lost for an undetermined reason while the device is still
physically connected.
USB Viewer ‐
Lists all devices with functioning USB connections, and to which port they are attached
on which hub. Selecting a device from the list displays the detail of the connection,
allowing the USB cable to be identified and the connection to be traced from device to
hub(s) to core. This option provides an initial check whether or not the system is ‘seeing’
a device. Physical removal and replacement of a USB connector will be reflected in USB
Viewer almost immediately./
Device Manager ‐
Similar to Microsoft Windows Device Manager, this option allows the user to view the
status of the PC devices attached to the system, such as modems, comms ports and
networks cards.
Troubleshooting Example ‐
a device is reporting a loss of USB communications:
1. Check the USB connections at the device, the hub and the pc core. Re‐connect the
cables if they are disconnected. If they are connected correctly, proceed to the next
step.
2. Use USB Viewer to determine if the terminal is ‘seeing’ the device, now that the
cables have been checked. If not, proceed to next step. If the terminal has found the
device but the fault is still being reported, proceed to step 4.
3. Use Reset USB Ports to attempt to recover the USB connection. If this does not work,
proceed to next step.
4. Use Reset Device to attempt to recover the device driver. If this does not work,
proceed to next step.
5. Use Replace Device to power off all devices without re‐booting the pc core. Replace
the faulty FRU (field replaceable unit) on the device.

Device Self Tests
This option from the Sys App main menu provides access to device self tests which can
be run to check whether or not a device is operational, or to diagnose the cause of a
fault.
Use either the touchscreen or keypad to select one or more test, or choose the ‘Select
All’ option. Tests can be de‐selected by pressing the touchscreen area or numeric key
again. Then select ‘Run Test(s)’ to run the chosen test(s).
The self tests are run in the order in which they appear on the Device Self Tests menu.
During some self tests, prompts may be displayed requesting that an action is
performed. If these actions are not performed the test may not be completed
successfully.
After the tests have been run, a screen will display the results, showing which tests
failed, passed or were incomplete.
Event Logs
The Event Logs which can be selected from this option are:
 Software
 Communications
 Device.
A summary screen is displayed, listing all events in the selected log. From this screen,
detailed information can be displayed by selecting an event in the log, or the whole log
can be saved to a removable memory device.
Choosing the option ‘Filter’, allows you to display only the events for a particular device
or reason code, as appropriate.
The software events include:

 Sequence Number and Date/Time
 Source File Name
 Line Number
 Physical Process Name
 Logical Process Name
 Logical Thread Name
 String Data.
The communications events include:
 Service Name
 Severity
 M_Status.
The device events include:
 Service Name
 Device Name
 M_Status
 M_data
 T_code.
Service Tallies
The Service Tallies function provides access to a menu where a list of Tallies can be
displayed, cleared and saved to a removable memory device.

Device Status List
This function displays a list of all device states requiring attention.
The following information is provided for each device state:
 Device Name ‐ the name of the device that requires attention.
 Description ‐ a short description of the problem.
 Attention ‐ whether the state requires attention “now” or will require attention
“soon”.
 User category ‐ this specifies what type of user is able to deal with the state, a
Customer Engineer or an Operator. (A user category of “CE may be required”
indicates that an operator can attempt to deal with the state and if the operator fails
to clear it a CE should be called).
 Self Clearing ‐ whether the device state is self‐clearing or not. A self‐clearing device
state is automatically removed from the list when the user takes the required action.
For a non‐self‐clearing device state the user must indicate to System Application that
action has been taken, by clearing the state.
 Status ID ‐ the unique status id identifies the status at a system level and can be
useful when reporting and tracking faults.
Clearing a Device State
The user can choose to clear individual device states or to clear all the states at once. A
device state should only be cleared after the user has performed the actions required to
clear the device state.
Clearing an Individual State
1. Select the device state to be cleared.
2. If the selected device state can be cleared by more than one action, a screen will be

displayed for the user to indicate which action has been performed to clear the state.
3. If clearing a device state affects a device’s life counts then a prompt is displayed
asking the user to confirm that the action has been performed.
4. The device self test is run to check that the device is operational.
5. Select the ‘Previous’ FDK to return to the Device Status List screen.
Clear All
The Clear All option should only be used if all of the reported device states have been
dealt with.
1. Select the ‘Clear All’ FDK.
2. The device self tests are now run to check that the devices are operational.
3. Select the ‘Previous’ FDK to return to the Device Status List screen.
Device Servicing
This menu option should be used to report that a device servicing action (for example
replacing the cash handler suction cups) has been performed when the Device Status List
is not reporting that the action is required.
The user should only select an action on the menu after they have actually performed
that servicing action. Selecting an action will run a self test on the device, to check that
the action has been successfully performed and that the device is operational.
Save Module Life Counts
The Save Module Life Counts option saves the following module variable types to a
removable memory device:
 Tallies with no thresholds
 Life counts with single thresholds
 Life counts with double thresholds.
For each module variable, a record containing the following information is saved:
 Device Name
 Module Name
 Variable Name
 Variable Value
 Threshold 1 Value (only if variable has single or double thresholds)
 Threshold 2 Value (only if variable has a double threshold).

Self Service Configuration
Provides a set of options that are used to configure the terminal or display configuration
information. These options are:
 Display Hardware Details
 Display Software Details
 Set Device Configuration
 Set Date and Time
 Set Active Language
 Set Active Printer
 Set terminal Properties.
Display Hardware Details
Select the Display Hardware Details option to display the hardware configuration. This
information includes:
 Product Class
 Serial Number
 A list of all the fitted devices fitted.
This information can be saved to a removable memory device.
Display Software Details
Select the Display Software Details option to display the software configuration. This
information includes:
1. The Operating System name, version and build numbers.
2. The Self Service software name, version and build numbers.
This information can be saved to a removable memory device.
Set Device Configuration
Select the Set Device Configuration option to configure devices. A list of devices which
can be configured is displayed. See NCR publication “Self Service Support ‐ System
Application User Guide”, B006‐6167 for details of the configuration of devices.
The following devices have only a basic configuration parameter:
 Alarms
 Remote Relay
 Remote Status Indicator
 Proximity Detector
 Advert light
 Fascia Light.

These basic configuration parameters can be toggled between PRESENT and NOT
PRESENT for each device. Setting the parameter to NOT PRESENT will “hide” the
presence of a device from any software which requests details of the devices fitted to the
terminal. Setting the parameter to PRESENT will allow any software which requests
details of the devices to be made aware that this device is present. Changes to the
parameters for any of the devices require the terminal to be reset before the changes
take effect.
The following further options are available under Set Device Configuration:
Hardware Information and Recovery ‐
displays the following menu choices:
 Firmware version ‐ displays device firmware versions
 Device Recovery Wait Time ‐ allows the user to configure how long Sys App waits for
devices to be seen after power is either cycled or switched off and on, using Reset
Devices or Replace Device from Hardware Information and Recovery option under
the Device Diagnostics menu. Default value is 90 seconds.
 PC Information ‐ allows the user to perform PC troubleshooting by displaying PC
hardware and network information, such as details of bios, core, operating system,
disk drive, disk space remaining, communication ports.
 GBRU Power Off ‐ allows the user to specify whether or not the GBRU power supply is
included in the 24V power down or reset functions in the Hardware Information and
Recovery option under the Device Diagnostics menu. This option is only displayed if a
GBRU is configured in the terminal.
General Device Configuration ‐
allows device start‐up error logging to be enabled or disabled. Disabling logging reduces
the number of unnecessary event log entries, however, temporarily enabling device
startup error logging can be useful, for example to debug a startup error.
Set Date and Time
Modifies the settings of the operating system date and time. The date format is
DDMMYYYY and the time format is HHMMSS.
If the user does not have Windows access rights to change the operating system date
and time, then a prompt will be displayed indicating this and the user will be returned to
the Self‐Service Configuration menu.
Set Active Language
All terminals are supplied with at least one language, used by the System Application for
all text which it displays and saves to a removable memory device. Select the Set Active
Language option to view or modify the language used.
Set ATM Properties
The following properties are displayed:

 Product Class
 Manufacturing Plant Code
 Serial Number
 Tracer Number
 Geographic Address
 Location of Operator Panel.
Transaction Counters
The transactions on certain devices (dispensers, depositories, printers) are logged every
hour. These counters can either be viewed or saved to removable memory device via this
menu option, providing data for analysis by second level support, e.g. tracking
transaction trends and service level agreements.
The information displayed includes:
 Device name and id number
 Instance ‐ how many of this device have been installed
 Variable ‐ what is being counted
 Current Device Value ‐ transaction count for this instance of the device
 Number of Previous Devices
 Previous Devices Value ‐ total number of transactions counted for all previous
instances of the device.
LEVEL 0 DIAGNOSTICS
The Level 0 Diagnostics are contained in EPROM/ROM on most of the devices. The tests
are grouped into three types as follows:
 Power‐up diagnostics
 Switch selectable diagnostics
 Extended diagnostics.
The diagnostics tests for each device are detailed in the relevant device chapter in this
manual.
Power‐up Diagnostics
The central processing unit has diagnostic routines stored in an area of on‐board ROM.
These tests run at power‐up or reset and any errors found are indicated by beeper tones
on the speaker, messages on the monitor screen, and hexadecimal codes on a bank of
LEDs. The diagnostics are completed before loading the operating system and there is no
way of changing the order of the tests or of selecting individual tests.
Power‐up diagnostics are found on:
 Processor boards

 PC Communications Module
 Dispenser Control Board
 Depository Control Board.
The tests operate in four phases:
Initial Processor Diagnostics
Initial processor diagnostics make basic checks on the timers, the system I/O port, ROM
and RAM memory, the bus logic, DMA, Interrupt Controller and Peripheral Interface ICs
to verify that the board is functioning properly.
System Test And Initialization
After the initial diagnostics, the routines determine what system hardware is installed
and test and initialize that hardware. Progress is shown by test messages.
System Configuration Verification
When initialization is complete, the routines compare actual hardware found with the
definition of expected hardware held in battery‐protected CMOS memory. If these agree
then the level 0 phase is complete. If they differ, an error message is displayed and the
SETUP message is given.
Extended Rom Bios Diagnostics
Checks each of the boards present within the PC core to ensure that it is functional.
Switch Selectable Diagnostics
Switch selectable diagnostics can be accessed by operating a switch. This type of test is
found on the printers.
Extended Diagnostics
Extended diagnostics can be selected to run individually and the mode of operation can
also be selected by switches.
Some electronics boards are provided with an extended diagnostics test facility. ROM
resident diagnostic routines can be accessed by setting on‐board switches to select
individual tests. Test results are given in hexadecimal codes displayed on LEDs on the
boards.
TEST TOOLS
The following tools are required for diagnostic testing:
 NCR USB Service Key ‐ Product ID G531‐1004‐0000
 Bootable System Application ‐ Product ID G531‐1050‐0000

 Card reader test cards:
 Cleaning card (Sankyo No. EGCMC01881, NCR No. 998‐0052929)
 ST‐SW Card (throat microswitch SW1 adjustment) (Sankyo EGCMC0119)
 ISO Contact Position Smart Card Test Card (NCR No. 009‐0017008)
 Passbook.
Bootable System Application
The purpose of the Bootable System Application for APTRA is:
 To allow the diagnosis of hardware or APTRA XFS software faults, if System
Application cannot be accessed from within Supervisor or the terminal is in a
persistent restart state.
 To provide a reliable and consistent software platform to speed up analysis and issue
resolution, when it is not clear if the problem is caused by a hardware or a software
fault
 To provide diagnostics without using software on the hard disk.

16
Device Diagnostics Hardware Information & Recovery
0 Page Up 0 Page Up
1 Hardware Information & Recovery 1 Replace Device
2 Monitor 2 Reset Device
3 Alarms 3 Reset USB Ports
December 2012
4 Advert Light 4 USB Viewer
5 USB Cash Dispenser 5
6 USB Cash Dispenser 02 6

7 Cheque Processing Module 3 7
8 USB Receipt Printer 8

System Application Main Menu 9 Page Down
9 Page Down
0 Page Up
1 Device Diagnostics
2 Device Self Tests Device Status List

Product Class 6634.2
3 Event Logs Event Logs
4 Service Tallies 0 Page Up
0 Page Up
5 Device Status List
1 Software Log USB Cash Dispenser
Device Servicing Top Cassette Removed
6 1 Attention required now
2 Device Log Operator required
7 Save Module Life Counts State is self-clearing
3 Communications Log Status ID:155.1.6.7.0.65
8 Self-Service Confirguration
Clear
4
9 Page Down USB Receipt Printer
5 Paper Not Loaded
Attention required now
2
6 Operator required More CE
System Application Main Menu State is self-clearing Details Leadthrough
7 Status ID:138.0.4.10.0.12
0 Page Up
8
KEY SYSTEM APPLICATION MENUS
9 Page Down
1 Service Manual
9 Page Down
2 Transaction Counters

5
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

6
Self Service Configuration Set Device Configuration Hardware Information & Recovery
7
0 Page Up 0 Page Up 0 Page Up
8
1 Display Hardware Details 1 USB Integrated Motorised Card Reader/Writer 1 Firmware Version
9 Page Down
2 Display Software Detailsr 2 USB Graphical Operator Panel 2 Device Recovery Wait Time
3 Set Device Configuration 3 USB Receipt Printer 3 PC Information
4 Set Date & Time 4 Sound 4 GBRU Power Off
5 Set Active Language 5 USB Touch Screen 5
6 Set Active Printer 6 HID UPS Device 6
7 Set ATM Properties 7 Hardware Information and Recovery 7
8 8 General Device Configuration 8
9 Page Down 9 Page Down 9 Page Down

SelfServ 23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual Section 4: Product Cabling
Section Divider
Section 4 - Product Cabling

Section Divider

6623 Product Cabling 1

Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
This chapter covers the Power Distribution, Interconnect Diagrams and Functional
Electrical Drawings.

2 6623 Product Cabling
DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAMS
DC Distribution
With S1 Dispenser
PC CORE
24Vdc
DISPLAY
5V
TOUCHSCREEN
HARD DRIVE
5V 12V
DVD ROM
5V 12V
ADVERT LIGHT
24Vdc
PSU_INTEL_BOARD
PC O/P
DIP/IMRCW
24Vdc
DC_PSU_OUT
24 Vdc LOW PWR
24 Vdc LOW PWR CONTACTLESS
24 Vdc LOW PWR 24Vdc
24 Vdc IN
24 Vdc LOW PWR
24 Vdc LOW PWR
24 Vdc LOW PWR IFD
24 Vdc HIGH PWR 24Vdc
RECEIPT
24Vdc
Sunpower PSU
JOURNAL
AC IN 24 Vdc 1 24Vdc
24 Vdc 2
24 Vdc 3
USB HUB
24Vdc
UNIV. SHUTTERS
24Vdc
S1 DISPENSER
24Vdc
SWITCH 24Vdc I/L

With S2 Dispenser
PC CORE
24Vdc
DISPLAY
5V
TOUCHSCREEN
HARD DRIVE
5V 12V
DVD ROM
5V 12V
ADVERT LIGHT
24Vdc
PSU_INTEL_BOARD
PC O/P
DIP/IMRCW
24Vdc
DC_PSU_OUT
24 Vdc LOW PWR
24 Vdc IN
24 Vdc LOW PWR
24 Vdc LOW PWR
24 Vdc LOW PWR IFD
RECEIPT
24Vdc
Sunpower PSU
JOURNAL
AC IN 24 Vdc 1 DC SAFE
24Vdc
24 Vdc 2
24 Vdc 3
USB HUB
24Vdc
UNIV. SHUTTERS
24Vdc
S2 DISPENSER
24Vdc

AC Distribution
With S1 Dispenser
10 A Fused
AC Inlet
AC PSU
Live Live Live

Neutral Neutral Neutral
Earth Earth Earth
DISPENSER
Live
Neutral
Earth
With S2 Dispenser
10 A Fused
AC Inlet
AC PSU
Live Live Live

Earth Earth Earth
AUX POWER
Live
Neutral
Earth

USB Distribution
EPP
USB
CONTACTLESS
USB
MIDI-MISC
BARCODE
USB
USB
IMCRW TOUCHSCREEN
USB USB
FACIA
TOPBOX
USB HUB
CORE USB IN
USB 0
USB 1
USB 1
USB 2
USB 2
USB 3
USB 3
USB 4 USB 4
USB 5 USB 5
USB 6 USB 6
USB 7 USB 7
JOURNAL PRINTER C/E/CAMERA

USB USB
PSU_CONTROL SPS
USB USB
RECEIPT PRINTER
USB
CE USB KEY
USB
SAFE
Dispenser UPS
USB USB

USB Distribution without HUB
EPP
USB
DIP/IMCRW
USB
MIDI-MISC
USB
FACIA
TOPBOX
PSU_CONTROL
USB
CORE RECEIPT PRINTER

USB 0 USB
USB 1
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
USB 5 JOURNAL PRINTER
USB 6 USB
USB 7
CE USB KEY
USB
SAFE
Dispenser
USB

HARNESSES
AC Harness Assy
AC OUT AC INLET
L L
N N
E E
MAINS SWITCH
PSU INLET
1A (x2)
4B (x2) EARTH (x2)
2A (x2) NEUTRAL (x2)
5B (x2) LIVE (x2)
FUSE
FUSE IN
FUSE OUT
MAINS SWITCH
FUSE
5B 2A 4B 1A
L N L N L L
(brown) (blue) Live Neutral (brown) Live
L Live (brown) L
AC INLET N Neutral (blue) N PSU INLET
E Earth (green and yellow) E
(brown) L
(blue) N PSU INLET
(green and yellow) E
Live Neutral Earth
AC OUTLET L N E

Alarms Harness
GND_1
RIO_BOARD
ALARM_P3
ALARM_O/P
7 TAMPER TURNAROUND
9
ALARM P3
1 TAL_NC 6
1 2
3 TAL_CM 18
5 TAL_NO 5
2 DAL_NO 8
4 DAL_CM 21
6 DAL_NC 9
8 SAL_NO 19
10 SAL_CM 7 ALARM O/P
12 SAL_NC 20
1 13
14 CAL_NC 23 14 25
29 30 16 CAM_CM 10
18 CAL_NO 22
25 CTST_OUT 3
27 CTST_IN 16
28 12V 12
29 12V RTN 12V RTN 25
13 12V RTN 1
30
23 1 GND_1
20 CSTS_NC 1
22 DSTS_NC 3
24 SSTS_NC 5
26 TSTS_NC 7 RIO BOARD
15 GND 2
17 GND 4
19 GND 6
21 GND 8
11

Audio
Private Audio Athena Cab Harness
SWITCH
AUDIO
H / P_SOCKET
H / P_SOCKET
4 1 CIA Audio_LH 22AWG (white) 1
(green) 2 AUDIO
2 CIB Audio_RH 22AWG
3 1 6 4
3 CIC Detect 22AWG (brown) 3
4 CI_Shield GND 4
2
3 1
2 CID Sense 22AWG (red) 5

SWITCH
1 CIE GND 22AWG (black) 6
Private Audio Harness
GPIO
AUDIO
1 (white) 9
2 (green) 10
3 (orange) 8
AUDIO 4 Shield GND 7 GPIO
5 (red) 5
6 (black) 6
3
4

Auto Supervisor Safe harness
SW2_NO COM
FEMALE_NO
SW2_COM
FEMALE_NO 1 COM 1 SW2_COM
SW1_COM 1 NO 1 SW2_NO

DC/USB Tray Harness (View 1 of 3)
DC_PSU_OUT
PSU_INTEL
USB_TYPE_MINI_B
DC_TOPPER
DC_SAFE DC_IO
ALARMS
RECEIPT
USB_TYPE_B DC_RECEIPT
DC_HUB GPIO
RECEIPT
USB_TYPE_A
DIP/IMCRW
USB_TYPE_A
PSU_INTEL
USB_TYPE_A
DC_PC_CORE
DIP/IMCRW DC_DIP/IMCRW
USB_TYPE_MINI B

1 +24 V (black) 1
8 +24 V RTN (white) 3 DC_SAFE
(black) 2
(white) 4
2 +24 V (black) 1
9 +24 V RTN (white) 2 DC_RECEIPT
DC_TOPPER
3 +24 V (black) 1
10 +24 V RTN (white) 2 2
DC_PSU_OUT 1
4 +24 V (black) 1
11 +24 V RTN (white) 2 DC_IO
5 +24 V (black) 1
12 +24 V RTN (white) 2 DC_DIP/IMCRW
6 +24 V 1 (black) 1
13 +24 V RTN 2 (white) 2 DC_HUB
DC_JOURNAL
7 +24 V (black) 1
DC_CORE
14 +24 V RTN (white) 2
4 tsts (white) 5
5 gnd (white) 6
3 ssts (white) 7
ALARMS 6 gnd (white) 8 GPIO
2 dsts (white) 9
7 gnd (white) 1
1 csts (white) 11
8 gnd (white) 12

1 1
2 2
PSU_INTEL PSU_INTEL
USB_TYPE_MINI_B 3 3
USB_TYPE_A
4 5
4
1 1
2 2
DIP/IMCRW DIP/IMCRW
USB_TYPE_MINI_B 3 3
USB_TYPE_A
4 5
4
1 1
2 2
RECEIPT RECEIPT
USB_TYPE_MINI_B 3 3
USB_TYPE_A
4 5
4

Facia Harness (View 1 of 2)
GPIO_FDK GPIO_MEI GPIO
FDK_RIGHT FDK_LEFT
DC_IMCRW/DIP KBD_HEATER
MEI_DISP_SPUR
MEI_RECEIPT
MEI_CONTACTLESS
FACIA_HUB
MEI_IMCRW/DIP MEI_TASK
19 1
20 2 MEI_IMCRW/DIP
GPIO
17 1 MEI_RECEIPT
2 20 18 2
1 19
15 1 MEI_TASK
16 2
13 1 MEI_DISP_SPUR
14 2

FACIA_HUB 1 1
2 2 DC_IMCRW/DIP
1
KBD_HEATER
2
10 FDK_CONF 1 8
14 FDK1_TP 4
13 GND 2
FDK_LEFT
12 FDK 1_LW_MD 6
11 FDK 1_UP_MD 5
GPIIO_FDK
9 FDK 1_BT 7
1
3
4 FDK_CONF 2 8
8 FDK2_TP 4
7 GND 2
6 FDK 2_LW_MD 6 FDK_RIGHT
5 FDK2_UP_MD 5
3 FDK2_BT 7
1
3
11 1
GPIO_MEI MEI_CONTACTLESS
12 2

LVDS
LVDS Harness
P1 P2
1 LGP101
4 GND
2 LGP102
3 GND 3
1 2 P1 5 LVDSA_DATAON 5 P2 1
7 LVDSA_DATAOP 6
6 LVDSA_DATAIN 8
8 LVDSA_DATAIP 9
9 GND 10
10 GND 13
11 LVDSA_DATA2N 11
39 40 13 LVDSA_DATA2P 12 20
12 LVDSA_CLKN 14
14 LVDSA_CLKP 15
15 GND 20
16 GND 7
17 LVDSA_DATA3N 17
19 LVDSA_DATA3P 18
33 LGP103
34 GND
36 GND 4
38 VCC_LCD 1
40 VCC_LCD 2
LVDS Power Harness
P1 P2
1 12V_LCD 1
2 GND 2
P1 P2
3 LCD_BKL 3 Pin 1
Pin 1 4 CTRL_BRIGHT 4
5 GND

Mode Switch Harness
GPIO
COM
NO
NO 1 1
COM 1 2 GPIO
3
4
PSU Intel Harness
+
PSU
-
PSU_INTEL
+ COM 1
PSU PSU_INTEL
- NO 2

S1 Dispenser Harness (View 1 of 2)
DC_DISP
I2C_SHUTTER I2C
DC_SHUTTER
MEI_DISP
DC_SAFE USB TYPE MINI B
SW1_NO
AC_DISP SW1_CM AC_IN
MEI_DISP_SPUR
SW2_CM1
SW2_NO1
SW2_CM2
SW2_NO2
EARTH
DC_I/L
USB_TYPE_A
1 (black) 1
DC_SAFE 2 (white) 2 DC_SHUTTER
(black) 1
(white) 2 DC_DISP
1
SW_CM
(black) 1 SW_NO
1 2 DC_I/L
USB TYPE A 1 1 USB_TYEP_MINI_B
I2C 1 1 I2C
1 (black) 1
MEI_DISP_SPUR 2 (white) 2 MEI_DISP

S1 Dispenser Harness (View 2 of 2)
L 1 SW2_CM1
AC_DISP N 1 SW2_CM2
E 1 EARTH
1 1 SW2_NO1
AC_IN 2 1 SW2_NO2
3 1 EARTH

S2 Dispenser Harness
SHUTTER
USB
DC DC_S2
USB_S2
SHUTTER_S2
DC_SAFE
DC_SHUTTER
USB_S2 1 USB 1 USB
SHUTTER_S2 1 I2C 1 SHUTTER
1 +24 V (black) 1
DC_S2 DC
2 0V (white) 2
GND_S2 1 GND 1 GND
DC_SAFE 1 +24 V (black) 1

DC_SHUTTER
2 0V (white) 2

Speaker Harness
SPEAKER R
GPIO SPK
SPEAKER L
1 (black) 1 SPEAKER L+
2 (white) 1 SPEAKER L-
GPIO SPK
3 (black) 1 SPEAKER R+
4 (white) 1 SPEAKER R-

SPS Harnesses
Dual DC Power
POWER_OUT_2 POWER_IN
POWER_OUT_1
1 (black) 1
POWER_OUT_2 2 (white) 2 POWER_IN
(black) 1
POWER_OUT_1
(white) 2
IFD2 Control PCB to Coil Linker Harness
Drainwire 6
5 5
4 COIL I (white) 4
3 COIL I - DOT (green) 3
2 COIL 0 (red) 2
1 COIL 0 - DOT (black) 1

IFD2 Control PCB to IMCRW Electrode Linker Harness
8 Drainwire
1 5V Pos (black) 7
6 GND (green) 6
2 FB_SENSOR 1 (red) 5
7 FB_SENSOR 2 (black) 4
4 5V Neg (white) 3
3 SDA (black) 2
5 SCL (black) 1
IFD2 Control PCB to IMCRW Linker Harness
6
5 Drainwire
4 GND (white) 4
3 SPARE (green) 3
2 SHUTTER (red) 2
1 WIDTH (black) 1

IFD2 MCRW Short Linker Harness
1 24 V (black) 1
2 GND (white) 2
GND (white) 4
SPARE (white)
1 SHUTTER (red) 2
1 WIDTH (black) 1
USB Touch Screen Cable Assembly
P1 P2
P1 P2
1 Vbus (red) 1 5
2 D- (white) 2
3 D+ (green) 3
4 GND (black) 4 1
Shield 5


Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
This chapter covers the Power Distribution, Interconnect Diagrams and Functional
Electrical Drawings.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY June 2015

DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAMS
DC Distribution
PC CORE
24Vdc
DISPLAY
5V
TOUCHSCREEN
HARD DRIVE
5V 12V
DVD ROM
5V 12V
ADVERT LIGHT
24Vdc
PSU_INTEL_BOARD
PC O/P
DIP/IMRCW
24Vdc
DC_PSU_OUT
24 Vdc LOW PWR
24 Vdc IN
24 Vdc LOW PWR
24 Vdc LOW PWR
24 Vdc LOW PWR IFD
RECEIPT
24Vdc
Sunpower PSU
JOURNAL
AC IN 24 Vdc 1 24Vdc
24 Vdc 2
24 Vdc 3
USB HUB
24Vdc
UNIV. SHUTTERS
24Vdc
S2 DISPENSER
24Vdc
June 2015 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

AC Distribution
10 A Fused
AC Inlet
AC PSU
Live Live Live

Earth Earth Earth
HEATER DISPENSER
Live Live
Neutral Neutral
Earth Earth

USB Distribution
EPP
USB
CONTACTLESS
USB
COP
BARCODE
USB
USB
MIDI-MISC
TOUCH SCREEN
USB
USB
IMCRW SPS
USB USB
FASCIA
TOPBOX
CASH CAMERA
USB
USB HUB
CORE USB IN
USB 0 The Cash Camera would
USB 1 replace either one of the
USB 1 following devices:
USB 2
USB 2
USB 3
USB 3 Barcode
USB 4 USB 4 Contactless
USB 5 USB 5 SPS
USB 6 USB 6 UPS
USB 7 USB 7
PSU_CONTROL
USB
JOURNAL PRINTER
USB
RECEIPT PRINTER
USB
CE USB KEY
USB
SAFE
UPS
USB
Dispenser
USB

USB Distribution without HUB
COP
USB
MIDI MISC
USB
MCRW
USB
FACIA
TOPBOX
PSU_CONTROL
USB
CORE JOURNAL PRINTER

USB 0 USB
USB 1
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
USB 5 RECEIPT PRINTER
USB 6 USB
USB 7
CE USB KEY
USB
SAFE
Dispenser
USB

HARNESSES
AC Harness Assy
AC OUT AC INLET
L L
N N
E E
MAINS SWITCH
PSU INLET
1A (x2)
4B (x2) EARTH (x2)
2A (x2) NEUTRAL (x2)
5B (x2) LIVE (x2)
FUSE
FUSE IN
FUSE OUT
MAINS SWITCH
FUSE
5B 2A 4B 1A
L N L N L L
(brown) (blue) Live Neutral (brown) Live
L Live (brown) L
AC INLET N Neutral (blue) N PSU INLET
E Earth (green and yellow) E
(brown) L
(blue) N PSU INLET
(green and yellow) E
Live Neutral Earth
AC OUTLET L N E

Alarms
Alarms to Midimisc Harness
1
2
3
4
7 T STS 5
2 GND 6
5 S STS 7
4 GND 8
3 D STS 9
6 GND 10
1 C STS 11
8 GND 12

Alarms Harness
GND_1 RIO_BOARD
ALARM_P3
ALARM_O/P
7 TAMPER TURNAROUND
9
ALARM P3
1 TAL_NC 6
1 2
3 TAL_CM 18
5 TAL_NO 5
2 DAL_NO 8
4 DAL_CM 21
6 DAL_NC 9
8 SAL_NO 19
10 SAL_CM 7 ALARM O/P
12 SAL_NC 20
1 13
14 CAL_NC 23 14 25
29 30 16 CAM_CM 10
18 CAL_NO 22
25 CTST_OUT 3
27 CTST_IN 16
28 12V 12
29 12V RTN 12V RTN 25
13 12V RTN 1
30
23 1 GND_1
20 CSTS_NC 1
22 DSTS_NC 3
24 SSTS_NC 5
26 TSTS_NC 7 RIO BOARD
15 GND 2
17 GND 4
19 GND 6
21 GND 8
11

Audio
Private Audio Athena Cab Harness
SWITCH
AUDIO
H / P_SOCKET
H / P_SOCKET
4 1 CIA Audio_LH 22AWG (white) 1
(green) 2 AUDIO
2 CIB Audio_RH 22AWG
3 1 6 4
3 CIC Detect 22AWG (brown) 3
4 CI_Shield GND 4
2
3 1
2 CID Sense 22AWG (red) 5

SWITCH
1 CIE GND 22AWG (black) 6
Private Audio Harness
GPIO
AUDIO
1 (white) 9
2 (green) 10
3 (orange) 8
AUDIO 4 Shield GND 7 GPIO
5 (red) 5
6 (black) 6
3
4

Auto Supervisor Safe harness
SW2_NO COM
FEMALE_NO
SW2_COM
FEMALE_NO 1 COM 1 SW2_COM
SW1_COM 1 NO 1 SW2_NO

USB_TYPE_A
RECEIPT
DIP/IMCRW
JOURNAL
COP
DC_CORE
DC_PSU_OUT
DC_FACIA
DC_SAFE_IN DC_HUB
DC_SHUTTER
USB_TYPE_B
DC_RECEIPT
DC_COP
USB_TYPE_MINI_B
DC_DIP/IMCRW
DC_JOURNAL
USB_TYPE_MINI_B USB_TYPE_MINI_B

DC_SAFE_IN
1 +24 V (black) 1
8 +24 V RTN (white) 2 2
1
2 +24 V (black) 1
DC_RECEIPT
3 +24 V (black) 1 DC_JOURNAL

DC_PSU_OUT
4 +24 V (black) 1
11 +24 V RTN (white) 2 DC_COP
5 +24 V (black) 1
12 +24 V RTN (white) 2 DC_DIP/IMCRW
(black) 1 DC_FACIA
(white) 2
6 +24 V 1 (black) 1
13 +24 V RTN 2 (white) 2 DC_HUB
DC_SHUTTER
7 +24 V (black) 1
DC_CORE

1 1
2 2
JOURNAL JOURNAL
USB_TYPE_MINI_B 3 3
USB_TYPE_A
4 5
4
1 1
2 2
COP COP
USB_TYPE_MINI_B 3 3
USB_TYPE_A
4 5
4
1 1
2 2
DIP/IMCRW DIP/IMCRW
USB_TYPE_MINI_B 3 3
USB_TYPE_A
4 5
4
1 1
2 2
RECEIPT RECEIPT
USB_TYPE_MINI_B 3 3
USB_TYPE_A
4 5
4

GPIO_FDK GPIO_MEI GPIO
FDK_RIGHT FDK_LEFT
DC_IMCRW/DIP KBD_HEATER
MEI_DISP_SPUR
MEI_RECEIPT
MEI_CONTACTLESS
FACIA_HUB
MEI_IMCRW/DIP MEI_TASK
19 1
20 2 MEI_IMCRW/DIP
GPIO
17 1 MEI_RECEIPT
2 20 18 2
1 19
15 1 MEI_TASK
16 2
13 1 MEI_DISP_SPUR
14 2

FACIA_HUB 1 1
2 2 DC_IMCRW/DIP
1
KBD_HEATER
2
10 FDK_CONF 1 8
14 FDK1_TP 4
13 GND 2
FDK_LEFT
12 FDK 1_LW_MD 6
11 FDK 1_UP_MD 5
GPIIO_FDK
9 FDK 1_BT 7
1
3
4 FDK_CONF 2 8
8 FDK2_TP 4
7 GND 2
6 FDK 2_LW_MD 6 FDK_RIGHT
5 FDK2_UP_MD 5
3 FDK2_BT 7
1
3
11 1
GPIO_MEI MEI_CONTACTLESS
12 2
Heaters Harness
AC_OUT HEATER
AC_OUT 1 LIVE 1
HEATER
2 NEUTRAL 2
3 EARTH 3

LVDS
LVDS Harness
P1 P2
1 LGP101
4 GND
2 LGP102
3 GND 3
1 2 P1 5 LVDSA_DATAON 5 P2 1
7 LVDSA_DATAOP 6
6 LVDSA_DATAIN 8
8 LVDSA_DATAIP 9
9 GND 10
10 GND 13
11 LVDSA_DATA2N 11
39 40 13 LVDSA_DATA2P 12 20
12 LVDSA_CLKN 14
14 LVDSA_CLKP 15
15 GND 20
16 GND 7
17 LVDSA_DATA3N 17
19 LVDSA_DATA3P 18
33 LGP103
34 GND
36 GND 4
38 VCC_LCD 1
40 VCC_LCD 2
LVDS Power Harness
P1 P2
1 12V_LCD 1
2 GND 2
P1 P2
3 LCD_BKL 3 Pin 1
Pin 1 4 CTRL_BRIGHT 4
5 GND

Mode Switch Harness
GPIO
COM
NO
NO 1 1
COM 1 2 GPIO
3
4
PSU Intel Harness
+
PSU
-
PSU_INTEL
+ COM 1
PSU PSU_INTEL
- NO 2

S2 Dispenser Harness
SHUTTER
USB
DC DC_S2
USB_S2
SHUTTER_S2
USB_S2 1 USB 1 USB
SHUTTER_S2 1 I2C 1 SHUTTER
1 +24 V (black) 1
DC_S2 DC
2 0V (white) 2
GND_S2 1 GND 1 GND

Speaker Harness
SPEAKER R
GPIO SPK
SPEAKER L
1 (black) 1 SPEAKER L+
2 (white) 1 SPEAKER L-
GPIO SPK
3 (black) 1 SPEAKER R+
4 (white) 1 SPEAKER R-

SPS Harnesses
Dual DC Power
POWER_OUT_2 POWER_IN
POWER_OUT_1
1 (black) 1
POWER_OUT_2 2 (white) 2 POWER_IN
(black) 1
POWER_OUT_1
(white) 2
IFD2 Control PCB to Coil Linker Harness
Drainwire 6
5 5
4 COIL I (white) 4
3 COIL I - DOT (green) 3
2 COIL 0 (red) 2
1 COIL 0 - DOT (black) 1

IFD2 Control PCB to IMCRW Electrode Linker Harness
8 Drainwire
1 5V Pos (black) 7
6 GND (green) 6
2 FB_SENSOR 1 (red) 5
7 FB_SENSOR 2 (black) 4
4 5V Neg (white) 3
3 SDA (black) 2
5 SCL (black) 1
IFD2 Control PCB to IMCRW Linker Harness
6
5 Drainwire
4 GND (white) 4
3 SPARE (green) 3
2 SHUTTER (red) 2
1 WIDTH (black) 1

IFD2 MCRW Short Linker Harness
1 24 V (black) 1
2 GND (white) 2
GND (white) 4
SPARE (white)
1 SHUTTER (red) 2
1 WIDTH (black) 1

Upper Advert Harness
DC 3 DC_1
DC_2
1 +24 V (black) 1
DC_3 DC_1
(black) 1
DC_2
(white) 2
USB Touch Screen Cable Assembly
P1 P2
P1 P2
1 Vbus (red) 1 5
2 D- (white) 2
3 D+ (green) 3
4 GND (black) 4 1
Shield 5


SelfServ 23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual Section 05: Power Supplies
Section Divider
Section 5 - Power Supplies

Section Divider

Standard Power Supply (300W) 1
Standard Power Supply (300W)

Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
This is a switch mode power supply, with +24V DC output and a maximum output power
rating of 300W.
DESCRIPTION
The power supply is capable of operating with a single phase input voltage; 90Vrms min,
264Vrms max, 47 to 63 Hz. The power supply auto ranges ‐ external voltage range
selection switching is not required.
The unit can withstand power line transients as specified in CES 2‐11‐02 and EN61000‐4‐
11 without degradation of performance. It also incorporates Power Factor Correction
circuitry meeting the requirements of EN61000‐3‐2 to Class A limits for the harmonic
content of the input current, and EN61000‐3‐3, for magnitude of voltage fluctuations.
Note: There is no on/off switch, or fuse, within the power supply. They are product
specific and may be located either close to the supply or elsewhere in the product.

2 Standard Power Supply (300W)
Power Requirements
PSU AC Input Connector
The ac is connected to the PSU via the three screw terminals: Live, Neutral and Ground.
AC Input
+V -V N L
Live
Ground Neutral
Input Specification
Voltage
The PSU can operate with a single phase input voltage ranging from 90 V to 264 V rms
and 47 Hz to 63 Hz. Voltage range selection is automatic.
Input Current
The maximum input current under normal operating conditions is as follows:
Input Voltage Range Frequency Range Maximum Input

Range
(V rms) (Hz) Current (A)
115 90 ‐ 136 47 ‐ 63 5.0
230 180 ‐ 264 47 ‐ 63 2.5
Inrush Current
The inrush current, measured at full output load (during a cold or warm start and for a
max of one cycle):
 40 A peak maximum at 257 Vrms input; warm start, measured at TA = 20 deg C
DC Output Specifications
The following table defines the dc output specification of the PSU:
Performance Requirements
Nominal Voltage +24 Vdc

Standard Power Supply (300W) 3
Performance Requirements
Current Static ‐ Continuous Minimum 0Adc, Maximum 13A dc
Maximum Output Power 300W
Voltage Dropout
A 100% input voltage drop out for 16.6mS at full load will not cause the output voltage to
go outwith specified limits.
Subsequent to any input under voltage, outage, dip or interruption the power supply will
automatically restart and function normally when the input voltage returns to within its
operating range.
Overload Protection
The PSU will shut down to prevent damage in the event of:
 Overvoltage: trigger level is 27.6V min, 33V max
 Overcurrent
 Short circuit
 Overpower
 Abnormal temperature rise.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Restart after Shutdown
If the power supply shuts down due to overcurrent, short circuit or overpower
protection, it will automatically attempt to restart. If the fault condition continues; the
power supply will go into "tick mode" and will continue to shut down and attempt to
restart until the power or the fault is removed.
If the power supply shuts down due to overvoltage protection it will stay shut down until
input power is cycled.
ERROR MESSAGES
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
None.
STRAPPING
None.

4 Standard Power Supply (300W)
ADJUSTMENTS
None.
FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
There are no field replaceable parts in the power supply.
CABLING
None.
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS
Input/Output Pins
DC Output AC Input
+V -V N L
Live
DC +V DC -V Ground Neutral
TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS
None.

Uninterruptible Power Supply 1
Uninterruptible Power Supply
Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) unit, including:
Operation, Setup and Storage.
The UPS monitors the mains supply and provides a stabilised supply to the ATM. If the
mains supply fails, the UPS will supply the ATM from its integral battery‐backed power
supply. This supply duration is limited and is intended to provide for orderly termination
of any active transactions before the ATM shuts down.
DESCRIPTION
Definitions
Line Boost Capability
Line Boost Capability is the minimum voltage deviation below nominal that must be
handled via boosting without going on battery, while maintaining the output voltage
within the required output voltage range
Boost Mode
A shift to boost mode occurs during voltage variations in the AC input power. The boost
function maintain the output voltage supplied by the UPS within close tolerances around
the rated value even if significant voltage variations occur in the AC input power. This
avoids calling on battery power.
The values defining the voltage range are pre‐set and vary depending upon the nominal
voltage selected.
Specification
Model: UPS 230V and UPS 120V (where different):
 Nominal Frequency: 50/60 Hz auto‐selecting.
 Power Level: 1150VA, 770W
 Static Regulation (Battery Mode): ‐10% to +7% of nominal
 Boost: maintain output within 198‐273V (90‐153V)
 Battery Configuration: Internal batteries provided as one assembled part.

2 Uninterruptible Power Supply
Indicators
The illustration and table below explain the functions of the indicators on the UPS front
panel:
Item Description Specification Comments

1 On/Off button To start/stop the UPS Illuminated and locking button
Off-------------------------------------- System off
Solid green-------------------------- Power On
2 Load Pro- Off-------------------------------------- No output enabled
tected LED Solid green-------------------------- Output enabled
3 Downgraded Solid yellow-------------------------- Mains failure
Operation LED Flashing yellow --------------------- Battery failure
4 Non Protected Off-------------------------------------- Normal load
Load LED Solid red ----------------------------- Overload
5 Programmable Off-------------------------------------- Plug #1 not powered
Outlet 1 Solid green-------------------------- Plug #1 powered
6 Programmable Off-------------------------------------- Plug #2 not powered
Outlet 2 Solid green-------------------------- Plug #2 powered
7 Percentage 0 - 25% (LED 1 lit) LED 1 is to the left of the display
Load bar graph 26% - 50% (LEDs 1 + 2 lit)
LED 51% - 75% (LEDs 1 + 2 + 3 lit)
76% - 100% (All four LEDs lit)
8 Battery Charge 0 - 25% (LED 1 lit) LED 1 is to the left of the display
level bar graph 26% - 50% (LEDs 1 + 2 lit)
51% - 75% (LEDs 1 + 2 + 3 lit)
76% - 100% (All four LEDs lit)
Indications During Operation
This section describes the indications of the following UPS phases of operation:
 Start‐Up
 Shift to Booster Mode
 Operation on Battery Power.
The numbers in the text refer to the front panel diagram.
Start‐Up (1150VA)
Start‐up commences when the ON/OFF (1) button is pressed:
 The buzzer beeps and all the LEDs come on.
 The buzzer beeps two times during the self test, then button (1) remains ON,
indicating that the outlets are supplied with power.
Either:

 AC power is present, LED (2) is ON and LED (3) is not ON, and the protected
equipment is supplied by the AC power source.
or:
 AC power is absent, LED’s (2) and (3) are ON, and the protected equipment is
supplied by the UPS operating on battery power.
 All the connected equipment is supplied with power.
If button (1) is not ON, or if LED (4) is ON, there is a fault (see “Troubleshooting”).
Note: The battery is charged as soon as the UPS is connected to the ac power source,
even if button (1) is in the OFF position.
Boost Mode
When the boost mode is in operation the LED’s do not change to indicate that the
operation is active to show that there is a significant voltage variation in the ac input
power.
Operation on Battery Power
Operation on battery power takes place when AC input power has failed or is outside the
Boost range.
Transfer to Battery Power (1150VA)
While operating on battery power:
 LED (3) is illuminated
 The equipment connected to the UPS is supplied by the battery.
Threshold for the Low Battery Warning
The low battery warning threshold (Battery Low Threshold) is set via the self service
configuration menu and shows that there is very little remaining battery backup time.
The indications that the threshold has been reached are:
 The ATM application specification will close because UPS does not have automatic
shut down.
When the battery reaches the end of its backup time:
 The UPS shuts down and all the LEDs go OFF
 Equipment connected to the UPS is no longer supplied with power.
TROUBLESHOOTING
The LED numbers in the following tables appear on the diagrams in the “Indicators”
section.

1150VA Module
Indication Meaning Action
All LED’s go ON and LED The Remote Power Off Set the contact to normal
(3) remains ON contact has been position and restart
activated to shut down the
UPS. Preventing a restart
LED’s (2) and (3) are ON The percent load greater Check power drawn by
and and LED (7) flash than set overload or UPS connected devices and
capacity. disconnect non priority
devices. Check the overload
setting.
LED (4) goes ON Solid Red UPS overload. The power If LED (4) goes on perma-
and LED (7) flashing. drawn by the connected nently, check the power drawn
equipment exceeds UPS by the attached devices and
capacity. disconnect any non priority
devices.
LED (4) ON and LED (8) A battery fault was detected Replace the battery module
flashing. during the automatic
battery test.
LED (4) goes ON. UPS internal diagnostics Replace the UPS.
have detected an internal
fault. The connected
devices are no longer sup-
plied.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0
None
Level 1
Level 1 diagnostics tests available on the Uninterruptible Power Supply are:
 Test
 Report
Test
Selection of TEST from the UPS diagnostic test menu tests the UPS and reports its status.
Report
The REPORT test returns the present status of the UPS

Level 3
S_DATA
The level 3 diagnostics returned for the Uninterruptible Power Supply are:
S_Data Meaning
00 Good (Operation successful)
01 Routine (Command not supported, RS232 turnaround failure)
02 Warning (Battery low)
04 Fatal (Device failure, Battery failure, Command failure, Comms error,
Device inoperative)
Tallies
The tallies recorded for the Uninterruptible Power Supply are:
Tally Mnemonic
OUTAGES Number of times the UPS reported a power outage.
MSKD OUT Number of times that a power outage exceeded the time specified by the
outage mask time.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
The Self Service Configuration Menu for the UPS enables adjustment of following UPS
parameters:
 Mode
 Voltages
 Shut down Delay
 Startup Delay
 Battery Low Threshold
 Outage Mask time
 Battery Test Day
 Battery Test Hour
A description of each parameter, together with the permitted range of inputs and the
default settings, is shown in the table below.
Parameter
Description Range Default Value
Name
Mode This string identifies the mode (Control or 000 or 001 “000” - Control
Data) of the UPS and the device type. “001” - Data

Parameter
Description Range Default Value
Name
Voltages Identifies the level of the control voltages 000 - 111 111
for serial control lines, in order, CTS
(Power Fail), DCD (Battery Low), DTR
(Shut down).
“0” means negative voltage
“1” means positive voltage
Note: “Voltages” has no effect for USB
UPS.
Shut down This specifies the delay time in seconds of 0 - 999 120 seconds
Delay the interval between the issue of a shut
down command and the shut down of the
UPS.
Startup If mains has returned during shut down the 0 - 999 15 seconds
Delay Startup Delay is introduced after the Shut
down Delay. If mains is not present during
the Shut down Delay then the UPS will
restart as soon as mains returns.
Battery Low This is the capacity remaining threshold 0 - 1000 900
Threshold that indicates a low battery condition. If the (90%)
(BL) reported charge remaining is less than or
equal to this value then the Battery Low
indicator is True. The parameter is given in
1/10 percent units.
Outage This is the duration that the mains outage 0 - 99 15 seconds
Mask Time must exceed before the supply out indica-
tor is set true.
Battery Test This specifies the day on which the weekly 0 - 6 2
Day battery test should be performed. (Monday)
Battery Test This specifies the hour at which the weekly 00 - 23 04
Hour battery test should be performed. (4am)
Configuring The UPS
Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the UPS will supply standard mains power to the terminal.
Supply voltage deviations within the line boost will result in the UPS boosting (stepping
up) of the voltage via its internal transformer. This ensures that the voltage supply to the
rest of the product remains within the acceptable ranges of 198 ‐ 273 V for 230 V units or
90 ‐ 136 V for 120 V units. If necessary, the UPS internal batteries will be charging to
maintain 100% charge.
Short Term Outage Or Voltage Variation
In the event of a short term outage or input voltage variation (lasting less than the
configured Outage Mask Time), the UPS will automatically switch to supplying the
terminal from its integral batteries. On restoration of the normal mains supply the UPS
will automatically switch back to supplying a stabilised supply to the terminal from mains
power. The internal batteries will be charged to maintain 100% capacity when mains is
present.

Long Term Outage Or Voltage Variation
In the event of an outage or input voltage variation (outside the line boost and buck
capability) lasting longer than the Outage Mask Time, the UPS will automatically switch
to supplying the terminal from its integral batteries. At this point, under the control of
the application program, the terminal will take one of the following actions:
 Immediately initiate a shut down
 Go into standby mode until mains returns or until the battery capacity falls below the
Battery Low Threshold, at which point it will initiate a shut down
 Continue offering transactions until mains returns or until the battery capacity falls
below the Battery Low Threshold, at which point it will initiate a shut down.
The shut down is controlled, terminating any active transactions and leaving the terminal
in a safe and secure state. A control message is sent to the UPS to disengage.
Restart After Controlled Shut down
On restoration of the mains supply and restart of the terminal, the customer application
may either bring the terminal immediately back into service or wait until the battery
capacity is above the Battery Low Threshold before doing so.
A Low Battery condition will be displayed until the calculated battery capacity is equal to
the Battery Low Threshold
UPS Self Test
The UPS will carry out a self test on demand by selecting DEVICE SELF TEST from the
System Application Menu and UPS from the Device Self Test Menu.
If the battery is fully charged this test will verify battery health and that it is correctly
connected. If the battery capacity is less than 100% then the test will only verify the
connection.
MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
WARNING
Before removing the UPS: Switch off the ATM on/off switch.
Switch the UPS off using the UPS on/off button.
Disconnect the ATM external power cord. (For hard‐wired products
turn the mains isolation switch to off.).
The UPS module is heavy. Be sure that you have a clear path to
where you intend to set it down.

The UPS module can be installed in a number of locations depending on the ATM product
variant. (inside the safe, outside the safe and also in horizontal and vertical placements).
1. Access the UPS module in the ATM.
2. Remove any retaining bracket(s) and screw(s)
3. Disconnect the AC In, AC Out and USB cables at the rear of the module
4. Remove the UPS and lay on a flat surface.
Replacement of the UPS module is the reverse of the above procedures.
Battery Care And Replacement
Storing the UPS Batteries
If UPS batteries are stored for a long period, recharge them every 6 months by plugging
the UPS into a power outlet. The batteries charge to 90% in approximately 3 hours.
However, it is recommended that the batteries charge for 6 to 24 hours after long time
storage.
Replacing Batteries
The hot swappable battery feature allows the UPS batteries to be replaced without
turning off the UPS, or disconnecting the load.
If it is preferable to remove input power to change the batteries, press the ON/OFF
button to switch off the UPS and unplug the UPS from the power outlet shown in the
previous section.
WARNING
Batteries can present a risk of electrical shock or burn from high
short circuit current. The following precautions should be observed:
1. Remove watches, rings or other metal objects

2. Use tools with insulated handles.
3. Do not lay tools or metal parts on top of batteries.
4. Do not attempt to alter any battery wiring or connectors as this can cause injury.
5. Replace batteries with the same number and type as originally installed in the UPS
6. Do not disconnect the batteries while the UPS is in battery mode.
Battery Access
1. Remove and retain the two screws holding the left hand side of the front panel of the
UPS module.
2. Remove the left‐hand side of the front panel by sliding it slightly to the right and then
pulling it forward.

Battery Removal
Remove the battery for all model types as follows:
1. Disconnect the battery module by separating the two parts of the connector. Do not
pull on the cables.
2. Unhook the tangs of the metal cover plate by sliding it to the right and then lift it off
over the battery connector.
3. Hold the UPS part of the connector aside and pull out the battery by the plastic tag.
Do not pull the battery by its connector.

Battery Replacement
Replacement of the battery is the reverse of the above procedure. Take care to hold the
UPS connector aside so the it is not broken or the wires cut when sliding the new battery
into place.
Testing New Batteries
Run the Device Self Test from the System application menu and UPS from the Device
Self‐Test menu.
Recycling Used Batteries
Contact your local recycling or hazardous waste centre for information on proper
disposal of the used batteries.
WARNING
Do not dispose of the batteries in a fire. Batteries may explode.
Proper disposal of batteries is required. Refer to your local codes for
disposal requirements
CABLING
None.
No Information Available.
No Information Available.


SelfServ 23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual Section 06: Terminal Core and Communications
Section Divider
Section 6 - Terminal Core and

Communications

Section Divider

Mini PC Core 1
Mini PC Core
Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
The Mini PC Core may be fitted with either one of the following motherboards:
 a Lanier 945GSE motherboard providing Intel® ATOM N270 processor
 a Kingsway GL40 motherboard providing either Celeron 900‐ 2.2GHz/800/1M Cache
or Performance Core 2 Duo T7500‐2.2 GHz/800MHz/4M Cache processors
 a Riverside Q67 motherboard providing either Intel® Core i3–2120T,
Core i5–2500T, Core i5–2390T, or Celeron G530T processors
 a Lanier II NM10 motherboard providing an Intel® ATOM D2550 processor
Note: The illustration below shows the Mini PC Core with the Lanier Board.
System Fan Hard Disk
SO-DIMM
USB Breakout
Cable
Motherboard
Audio Breakout External DVD

I/O Shield Cable

2 Mini PC Core
DESCRIPTION
Motherboards
The Mini PC Core consists of a PC processor on the following motherboards with
additional Self Service functionality:
Features Lanier 945GSE Kingsway GL40

Processor ATOM 1.6 GHz N270  Celeron 900
 Core 2 Duo T7500
Chipset Intel 945GSE Intel GL40
Memory One DDR2 SO–DIMM Two DDR3 SO–DIMM
Video Integrated display adapter, Integrated display adapter, DVI, VGA out
DVI, VGA out
SATA Two SATA ports Three SATA ports
Expansion  One PCI connector for PCCM  One PCI connector for PCCM
Slots  One PCIe x1 connector (riser needed)
Serial Two RS 232 interfaces Two RS 232 interfaces

USB  Four USB ports on rear IO  Four USB ports on rear IO
 Four on breakout  Four on breakout
LAN support One Ethernet 10/100 One Ethernet 10/100

Base–T network interface Base–T network interface
Audio Line out for embedded audio Line out for embedded audio
DVD‐ROM Optional external DVD ROM Optional external DVD ROM
PCCM Optional PCCM communications system on Optional PCCM communications system on
separate plug–in card separate plug–in card
Features Riverside Q67 Lanier II NM10

Processor  Core i3–2120T ATOM D2550
 Core i5–2500T
 Core i5–2390T
 Celeron G530T
Chipset Intel Q67 Intel NM10 with Intel 82NM10 PCH

Memory Two DDR 3 SO–DIMM Two DDR 3 SO–DIMM
Video Integrated display adapter, Integrated display adapter with DVI and
DVI, VGA out VGA outputs
SATA  One SATA 2 port Two SATA 2 ports
 Two SATA 3 ports
Expansion  One PCI connector for PCCM  One PCI connector for PCCM

Slots  One PCIe x1 connector (riser needed)  One PCIe x1 connector (riser needed)
Serial Two RS 232 interfaces Two RS 232 interfaces
USB  Four USB ports on rear IO  Four USB ports on rear IO
 Four on breakout  Four on breakout
LAN support One Ethernet 10/100/1000 One Ethernet 10/100

Base–T network interface Base–T network interface
Audio Line out for embedded audio Line out for embedded audio
DVD‐ROM Optional external DVD ROM Optional external DVD ROM
PCCM Optional PCCM communications system on Optional PCCM communications system on
separate plug–in card separate plug–in card

Mini PC Core 3
PCI PCCM Board (Optional)
The PCI PC Communications Module (PCCM) board is an add‐in adapter that provides a
Band 3 communications interface. The PCI PCCM board has a level 0 diagnostic LED
(green).
Green LED
J1
J3
PCI Riser Board (Optional)
This board is connected to the Lanier 945GSE, Lanier II NM10 ,Kingsway GL40, or
Riverside Q67 motherboard providing a PCI slot.
A1
J1
B1
Disk Drives
The PC Core contains the following disk drives:
 S‐ATA DVD‐ROM optical drive (connected to S‐ATA channel 0) ‐ external to the core
 S‐ATA hard disk drive (connected to S‐ATA channel 1).
Note: An optional secondary S‐ATA hard disk drive is available for the Kingsway GL40
board and Riverside board.
S‐ATA DVD‐ROM Optical Drive
This optical storage drive is a DVD‐ROM drive (16X min.) and CD‐ROM drive (48X min.)
and has a Serial ATA interface supporting ATAPI commands. The drive has DVD video and
CD audio playback capability. The drive can play any standard DVD‐ROM and CD‐ROM
disks complying with the ECMA‐267 standard.

4 Mini PC Core
The table below lists the power requirements of the S–ATA DVD–ROM Optical Drive.
Voltage Current
+5VDC 2.0A
+12VDC 1.0A
S‐ATA Hard Disk Drive
The primary drive is an industry standard 3.5‐inch HDD that supports the ATA interface
standard and operates on a Serial ATA interface.
The optional secondary drive for the Kingsway and Riverside motherboards is an industry
standard 2.5‐inch HDD that supports the ATA interface standard and operates on a Serial
ATA interface.
The table below lists the power requirements of the S–ATA Hard Disk Drives.
S–ATA HDD Voltage Current

3.5–inch HDD +12 Vdc 0.56 A
+5 Vdc 0.72 A
2.5–inch HDD +5 Vdc 0.46 A
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Possible root causes Isolation Resolution
Loss of Motherboard battery The system date and time Replace battery.
configuration failure are excessively
data inaccurate.
No boot up HDD failure Use BIOS Setup Utility to Replace.
determine disk’s
presence.
Loose or incorrectly Check power and S‐ATA Reconnect or properly
connected cabling cables. connect cables to correct
sockets. Replace if worn.
RAM not seated correctly Check RAM Re‐seat correctly
RAM not configured Check RAM is configured
through BIOS Setup.

Mini PC Core 5

System does Memory refresh timer Reseat the memory, or
not start up error replace with known good
Parity error in base modules
memory (first 64Kb block)
Base memory read/write
test error
Motherboard timer not Fatal error indicating a
operational serious problem with the
Processor error system. Before replacing
the motherboard,
8042 Gate A20 test error eliminate the possibility
(cannot switch to of interference by a
protected mode) malfunctioning add‐in
General exception error card. Remove the
(processor exception expansion card then
interrupt error) insert it back into the
AMIBIOS ROM checksum system. If this does not
error solve the problem, the
cause may be a
CMOS shutdown register malfunctioning card.
read/write error
Cache memory test failed
Display memory error If the system video
(system video adapter) adapter is an add‐in card,
replace or reseat the
video adapter. If the
video adapter is an
integrated part of the
system board, the board
may be faulty.
Motherboard has not Has the system fan Check that pins 1 & 2 at
powered on started? JP3 are at power on. If
they are then check the
short circuit pins 2 ‐ 4 on
PANEL header for 1
second to see if the fan
starts and the
motherboard powers up.
Applies to Kingsway GL40 Replace the fan or
Motherboard only processor.
Processor faulty.
Could be the fan is
blocked and the
processor is overheating.

6 Mini PC Core
DIAGNOSTICS
For general diagnostic information see the Diagnostics Overview chapter in the
Diagnostics Overview section.
Power on Self Test
There are no beep codes and no diagnostic LEDs on the Mini PC Core.
Beep Codes
There are no beep codes on the Mini PC Core.

Mini PC Core 7
STRAPPING
Diagram 1 Lanier Board Diagram 1 Kingsway Board
H A D E E
A
I
J
J
I
G D
F
B G
C
C
F
B F
F
Diagram 1 Lanier II Board Diagram 1 Riverside Board
H I D E H E
J
G I
G
B
J
A
F
D
A
C C
B
F
F
Diagram 2 7
3
1
2
4 5 6

8 Mini PC Core
Diagram 1 - Plan view of the Motherboard

Key Description Key Description
A Processor F Powered serial port strap x 4
B SODIMM Slot s G RSD/FSD mode strap
C PCI Slot (1 off) H A_ON1 ‐ Auto power on strap
D Lithium battery I CMOS clear strap
E Internal audio header ‐ line out J USB headers
Diagram 2 - Side View of External Ports
Key Key Description
1 LAN 5 Serial x 2
2 Front USB (2 ports) 6 Front USB (2 ports)
3 VGA display output 7 Audio ‐ line out
4 DVI display output
Motherboard Jumpers
Serial Port Power Jumpers
Lanier and Kingsway Motherboards
The table below lists the serial port power jumpers for the Lanier, Lanier II, and Kingsway
board.
Serial Port Lanier Kingsway Lanier II

COM1 JP1 JCOM A J7
COM2 JP2 JCOM B J8
COM3 JP3 JCOM C J15
COM4 JP4 JCOMD J16
The table below list the strapping settings of the serial power port jumpers.
Function Jumper on Pins

5V 1 and 2
12V 3 and 4
RI (default) 5 and 6
The jumpers on the serial power ports must be positioned on Pin 5 and Pin 6 as shown
below.
Pin 1 Pin 2
Pin 3 Pin 4
Pin 5 Pin 6

Mini PC Core 9
Riverside Motherboard
The J39 header provides the strapping options for the serial power ports of the Riverside
board.
The table below lists the strapping settings of the serial power port jumper, J39.
Jumper on Pins Jumper on Pins Jumper on Pins Jumper on Pins

Function
COM D COM C COM B COM A
5V 3 and 6 9 and 12 15 and 18 21 and 24
12V 2 and 5 8 and 11 14 and 17 20 and 23
RI (default) 1 and 4 7 and 10 13 and 16 19 and 22
The jumpers in the J39 header must be positioned on pins 1 and 4, 7 and 10, 13 and 16,
19 and 22 as shown below.
5V 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24
12V 2 5 8 11 14 17 20 23
RI 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22
COMD COMC COMB COMA
CLR CMOS
CAUTION
Ensure that the core is powered off before moving this jumper.
The table below lists the jumper settings for the CLR CMOS jumper on the motherboards.
Function Lanier Lanier II Kingsway Riverside

Clear CMOS memory (jumper must be returned to 2 and 3 2 and 3 1 and 2 1 and 2
normal position before power‐on)
Normal operation (default) 1 and 2 1 and 2 2 and 3 2 and 3
WARNING
Do not use a metal or conductive implement to remove the battery.
A short circuit between the battery’s positive and negative
terminals can cause it to explode.

10 Mini PC Core
A_ON1–Auto Power On Jumper
Financial terminals do not provide an external power button for the motherboard. The
Auto Power–On jumper allows the motherboard to automatically power–on when
power is applied.
The table below lists the strapping settings of the auto power–on jumper.
Jumper on Pins Function

1 and 2 Auto power–on enable (FSD default).
2 and 3 Auto power–on disable
RSD/FSD Strap
The RSD/FSD Strap indicates whether the motherboard is installed in a Retail or Financial
system. The table below lists the strap settings of the RSD/FSD strap.
Jumper on Pins Function

1 and 2 FSD mode (default)
2 and 3 RSD mode
With strap in correct position, enter BIOS setup and load defaults.
The field replaceable units in the Mini PC Core are:
 System core fan
 Riser card and PCCM (optional feature)
 Hard Disk (HDD)
 Audio breakout cable
 USB breakout assembly
 External DVD
 Motherboard
 Memory (SO‐DIMM)
 I/O shield
 Processor (Kingsway and Riverside boards only)
 CPU Fan (Kingsway and Riverside boards only)

Mini PC Core 11
Removing the PC Core Lid
To remove the PC core lid, perform the steps below.
1. Remove the two screws that secure the lid to the core chassis. Keep the screws for
replacement of the lid.
Screws
2. Slide the lid towards the I/O panel and lift up from the chassis.
System Core Fan
To remove the core fan, disassemble in the following order:
1. Disconnect the power harness from the motherboard.
2. Take note of the connection of the fan harness on the motherboard and disconnect
the harness.
3. Remove and retain the two screws that secure the fan to the back of the core chassis.
Screws
4. Remove the existing fan from the chassis.

12 Mini PC Core
CAUTION
The correct direction of the air flow is out of the PC box. To replace
the fan in the correct position use the arrow marked on one of the
sides of the fan to make sure the air is blowing out of the PC box.
5. Locate the airflow arrow mark on the new fan and make sure it points out of the PC
core chassis.
6. Use the two screws to secure the fan to the core chassis
7. Connect the fan harness to the header on the motherboard.
PCCM Board (Optional Feature)
To remove the riser card and PCCM board, disassemble in the following order:
1. Disconnect the external cable from the PCCM board.
2. Insert a screwdriver through the hole at the side of the pc core chassis and remove
the screw securing the board to the chassis. Keep the screw for the replacement of
the PCCM board.
Screw PCCM Board
Riser Card
Hole

Mini PC Core 13
3. Pull the PCCM board out, detaching it from the riser card.
4. Insert the new PCCM board to the PCI slot on the riser card. Make sure that the tab
on the PCCM board bracket is inserted into the slot on the chassis.
PCCM board and bracket
Bracket slot on core chassis
5. Secure the board to the chassis with the screw.
PCCM Riser Card (Optional Feature)
To replace the PCCM riser card, perform the steps below.
1. Disconnect the external cable from the PCCM board.
2. Remove PCCM board as described above.
3. Remove the screw that secures the riser board bracket to the back of the core chassis.
Keep the screw for the replacement of the riser board.
Screw
4. Carefully detach the existing riser board from the PCI slot on the motherboard and
remove the card and bracket from the chassis.
5. Connect the new riser board to the PCI slot on the motherboard.
6. Secure the riser board bracket to the core chassis with the screw.

14 Mini PC Core
External DVD
To remove the external DVD, disassemble in the following order:
1. Disconnect the SATA harness from the DVD drive.
2. Remove the two screws that secure the right‐hand DVD bracket to the core chassis.
Keep the screws for replacement.
Screws
3. Slide the DVD backward to release the tangs of the left–hand DVD bracket.
4. Remove the screws that secure the brackets to the DVD. There are two screws for
each bracket.
5. Secure each bracket to the sides of the new DVD drive.
6. Fit the tangs of the left–hand DVD bracket to the slots on the core chassis and slide
the DVD forward to secure the left–hand bracket to the core chassis.
7. Use two screws to secure the right–hand DVD bracket to the core chassis.
Audio Breakout Cable
To remove the audio breakout cable, disassemble in the following order:
1. Take note of the connection of the audio cable on the motherboard and disconnect it
from the header.

Mini PC Core 15
2. Loosen the nut that secures the audio cable to the I/O panel and then remove the
cable.
Audio nut
3. Fit the audio connector to the hole in the rear I/O panel and secure it with the nut.
4. Connect the audio breakout cable header to the appropriate header on the
motherboard.
USB Breakout Assembly
To remove the USB breakout assembly, disassemble in the following order:
1. If fitted, remove the PCCM board.
1. Remove the three screws that secure the breakout assembly to the front of the core
chassis. Keep the screws for the replacement of the breakout assembly.
Screws
2. Note the positions and connections of all the USB cables.
3. Disconnect the cables then remove the USB breakout assembly.
4. Connect the headers of the new USB breakout assembly to the appropriate headers
on the motherboard.
Note: The plastic key in the USB breakout headers should be at the bottom when
connected to the motherboard headers. The ports will then be numbered 4, 5, 6, 7
from left to right.
5. Use three scews to secure the USB breakout assembly to the front of the core chassis.

16 Mini PC Core
Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
Single Hard Disk Drive
To replace the hard disk drive, perform the steps below.
2. Remove the USB breakout cable.
3. Remove the external DVD.
4. Disconnect the SATA power and data harness from the HDD.
5. Remove the four screws that secure the existing HDD to the bottom side of the core
chassis. Keep the screws for the replacement of the HDD.
Screws
6. Fit the new HDD to the core chassis and secure it the four screws.
Dual Hard Disk Drive
To replace the hard disk drive, perform the steps below.
2. Remove the USB breakout cable.
3. Remove the external DVD drive.
4. Disconnect the SATA power and data harness from the HDDs.

Mini PC Core 17
5. Remove four screws that secure the hard disk drives to the bottom of the core
chassis. Keep the screws for the replacement of the HDDs.
Screws
6. Loosen the four screws (two on each side) of the HDD that needs replacement.
Secondary HDD Screws

Secondary HDD
Primary HDD
Primary HDD Screws
7. Slide out the HDD along the key hole slots and remove.
8. Slide in the new HDD along the key hole slots and secure it to the brackets with two
screws on each side.
9. Fit the hard disk drives to the core chassis and secure it with four screws.
Note: When replacing the hard disks, make sure to connect hard disk 1 into SATA 1 and
if dual disk, hard disk 2 into SATA 2. Tidy up all cables using rivet ties where necessary.

18 Mini PC Core
Motherboard
To remove the motherboard, disassemble in the following order:
Note: The following illustrations show the Lanier motherboard, however the method of
removal is the same for other motherboards.
1. Disconnect the internal and external cabling from the existing motherboard.
2. Remove the memory modules from the defective motherboard. If re–usable, fit the
memory modules to the new motherboard. Refer to the “Memory Board (SODIMM)”
section of this chapter for the removal and replacement procedure.
3. For the Riverside and Kingsway board, remove the following modules from the
defective mother board and fit them to the new motherboard if they are still
re–usable:
 CPU cooler, refer to the “CPU Cooler” section for the removal and replacement
procedure
 processor refer to the “Processor” section for the removal and replacement
procedure
Note: Make sure to fit the processor socket protector of the new motherboard to
the defective motherboard socket to prevent damage to the socket pins during
handling or shipping.

Mini PC Core 19
4. Remove the four screws that secure the motherboard to the core box, then remove
the board by moving it back towards the fan before lifting clear of the I/O shield.
CAUTION
When removing and re‐fitting the motherboard, do not use the
heatsinks to leverage the board into the I/O shield. Handle the
board by the edges or LAN and PCI slot only.
Screws x 2
Screws x 2
5. Fit the new motherboard to the core chassis and I/O shield and secure it with the four
screws.
6. Fit the necessary modules and connect the necessary cables to their appropriate
connectors on the new motherboard.

20 Mini PC Core
Memory Board (SODIMM)
CAUTION
Hold the memory modules at the sides only. Never hold more than one module at a time.
Never bend or twist the memory modules as this can seriously damage the contacts.
Lanier and Lanier II Motherboards
To remove the memory board on the Lanier and Lanier II motherboards, proceed as
follows:
1. Pull the plastic retention clips outwards to unlock and release the existing memory
board from the SO–DIMM slot
2. Remove the existing memory board from the motherboard.
3. Match the notch on the new memory module with the notch on the SO–DIMM
connector.
Notch

Mini PC Core 21
4. Insert the memory module at an angle towards the connector.
5. Lightly press down each end of the memory board until the plastic retention clips
snap and lock the memory module in place.
Note: It may be necessary to manually close the clips.
Kingsway GL40 Motherboard and Riverside Motherboards
To remove and replace the memory board on the Kingsway GL40 and Riverside
motherboards, proceed as follows:
1. Flip open the plastic retention clips outwards and remove the memory board.
2. Match the notch on the new module to the notch on the SO–DIMM slot.
Notch
3. Insert the module without using undue pressure. Use both hands to press down on
each end of the module until the plastic retention clips snap shut, (it may be
necessary to manually close the clips).
4. Dual‐channel operation requires a pair of modules to be inserted. The first module
goes into the Channel A SO‐DIMM1 slot and the second module goes into the
Channel B SO‐DIMM2 slot.

22 Mini PC Core
CPU Cooler
To replace the CPU cooler, perform the steps below.
1. Loosen the four spring–loaded captive screws that secure the existing cooler to the
motherboard.
Note: Follow a sequential rotating pattern when loosening the spring–loaded
screws. Gradually loosen each screw to evenly raise the CPU cooler.
Screws Screws Screws
Riverside Cooler Kingsway Cooler
2. Remove all old thermal grease from the cooler heat sink and processor spreader plate
with a tissue or paper towel. Do not use a knife or screwdriver as this could damage
the surface of the spreader plate.
3. Apply thermal grease to the processor spreader plate in the pattern shown below.
thermal
grease
Riverside Processor
(Apply approximately one-half of the Kingsway Processor
contents of the thermal grease syringe)
CAUTION
Do not use the entire contents of the syringe. Too much grease
could degrade the performance of the cooler.

Mini PC Core 23
4. Fit the new cooler to the mounting holes with the back plate on the motherboard and
secure with the spring–loaded captive screws.
5. Connect the cooler power cable to the CPU fan connector on the motherboard.
Note: Make sure that the cooler cable does not obstruct the fan blades.
Processor
To replace the processor, perform the steps below.
1. Remove the CPU Cooler from the motherboard.
2. Remove all old thermal grease from the cooler heat sink and processor spreader plate
with a tissue or paper towel. Do not use a knife or screwdriver as this could damage
the surface of the spreader plate.
3. Unlock and remove the processor from its mounting as shown below.
CAUTION
Hold the processor by the edges only. Take care not to drop
anything into the processor socket. The pins are very delicate and
are easily damaged. If the pins are damaged, the motherboard will
have to be replaced.
a For the Riverside processor, unlatch the arm of the metal frame that secures the
processor to the motherboard, raise the metal frame, and remove the processor.
Processor
Metal Frame
Metal Arm

24 Mini PC Core
b For the Kingsway processor, rotate the lock to the unlock position as shown
below then remove the processor.
Lock
Processor
4. Match the arrow on the new processor to the arrow on the motherboard and
carefully place the processor into the socket. Lock the processor in its mounting plate
once it is properly seated.
Riverside Processor Kingsway Processor
5. Apply thermal grease to the processor spreader plate in the pattern shown below.
thermal
grease
Riverside Processor
(Apply approximately one-half of the Kingsway Processor
contents of the thermal grease syringe)

Mini PC Core 25
CAUTION
Do not use the entire contents of the syringe. Too much grease
could degrade the performance of the cooler.
6. Fit the cooler to the mounting holes on the motherboard and cooler back plate.
7. Secure the cooler with the spring–loaded captive screws.
I/O Shield
To remove the I/O shield, disassemble in the following order:
1. Remove the mother board as described in previous steps.
2. From the outside of the core, push on the outside edges of the I/O shield and remove
from the core chassis.
To replace the I/O shield, reverse the instructions above.

26 Mini PC Core
CABLING
Interconnection Diagrams
Lanier Motherboard
System
Fan
Serial ATA
Lanier 945GSe
Hard Disk
Motherboard
Serial ATA
DVD RW
+24V
Com 1
Com 2
Processor VGA
DVI-D
Ethernet
DDR2 Audio Line Out
SO- DIMM
Slot USB 0
USB 1
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
USB 5
USB 6
USB 7
Extender Card ATX
1 PCI

Mini PC Core 27
Lanier II NM10 Motherboard
System
Fan
Serial ATA
Lanier II NM10
Motherboard Hard Disk
Serial ATA
DVD RW
+24V
Processor
Com 1
Com 2
VGA
DDR3 DVI-D
SO- DIMM Ethernet
Slots
Audio Line Out
USB 0
USB 1
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
USB 5
USB 6
USB 7
Extender Card ATX
1 PCI
1 PCIe x 1

28 Mini PC Core
Kingsway GL40 Motherboard
System 2nd Serial ATA

Fan Hard Disk
Serial ATA
Kingsway GL 40
Hard Disk
Motherboard
Serial ATA
DVD RW
+24V
Com 1
Processor
Fan Com 2
VGA
Processor DVI-D
Ethernet
Audio Line Out
DDR3
SODIMM
Slots USB 0
USB 1
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
USB 5
USB 6
USB 7
Extender Card ATX

1 PCI
1 PCIe x 1

Mini PC Core 29
Riverside Q67 Motherboard
System
Fan 2nd Serial
ATA Hard Disk
Riverside Q67 Serial ATA

Motherboard Hard Disk
Serial ATA
DVD RW
+24V
CPU Fan
Processor
Com 1
Com 2
VGA
DDR3 DVI-D
SO- DIMM Ethernet
Slots
Audio Line Out
USB 0
USB 1
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
USB 5
USB 6
USB 7
Extender Card ATX

1 PCI
1 PCIe x 1

30 Mini PC Core
Cables
Audio Breakout Header Assembly
P1 (Chassis) P2 (Motherboard)
P1 (Chassis) P2 (Motherboard)
2
1 (yellow) 4 5
2 (red) 1
4
3 (white) 2
4 (black) 3
3 1
1 5
Rear View
Panel Mount Motherboard Power
Chassis Con Motherboard Con
Chassis Con Motherboard Con
1 Positive (+) (white) 3

2 Return (-) (black) 1
2
4

Mini PC Core 31
SATA Data and Power Cable (DVD and HDD)
SERIAL
Data
ATA
SATA
Power
Data
1 Drain 1 1
2 2 Pin 1
3 3
4 Drain 2 4
Drain 3 Pin 7
5 5
Pin 1(a)
6 6
Pin 7(a) 7 Drain 4 7
Pin 15(b) 1
2 (yellow) 1 Power
3
4
Pin 1
5 (black) 2
Pin 1(b)
6
7 Pin 4
8 (red) 3
9
10
11 (black) 4
12
13
14
15

32 Mini PC Core
USB 2.0 Breakout Assembly
P5
1 2
P1
P2 9 10 Keyed
P3 P6
1 2
P4
9 10 Keyed
1 Vbus red 1
2 Data - white 3
P1 Data +
3 green 5
Power Ground P5
4 black 7
1 2
1 Vbus red 2 9 10 Keyed

2 Data - white 4
P2
3 Data + green 6
4 Power Ground black 8
1 Vbus red 1
2 Data - white 3
P3 Data +
3 green 5
4 Power Ground black 7 P6
1 2
1 Vbus red 2
2 Data - white 4 9 10 Keyed
P4
3 Data + green 6
4 Power Ground black 8

Mini PC Core 33
Motherboard Connectors
Video ‐ Analogue (VGA)
The table below lists the pinout assignments for a standard DB‐15 connector on the rear
IO for a standard VGA monitor.
Pin Signal
1 RED
2 GREEN
3 BLUE
4 NC
5 GND
6 R_GND
7 G_GND
8 B_GND
9 5V Supply
10 GND
11 NC
12 DDC DATA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 DDC CLK

34 Mini PC Core
Video ‐ Digital (DVI)
The table below lists the pin assignments for a standard DVI–D connector on the rear IO
for a standard DVI monitor.
Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 TDMS DATA 2‐ 13 NC
2 TDMS DATA 2+ 14 +5V POWER
3 TDMS DATA 2/4 SHIELD 15 GND
4 NC 16 HOT PLUG DETECT
5 NC 17 TDMS DATA 0‐
6 DDC CLOCK 18 TDMS DATA 0+
7 DDC DATA 19 TDMS DATA 0/5 SHIELD
8 NC 20 NC
9 TDMS DATA 1‐ 21 NC
10 TDMS DATA 1+ 22 TDMS CLOCK SHIELD
11 TDMS DATA 1/3 SHIELD 23 TDMS CLOCK+
12 NC 24 TDMS CLOCK‐
C1 Not Connected
C2 Not Connected
C3 Not Connected
C4 Not Connected
C5 Not Connected
Audio
Line Out Header on Motherboard
The table below lists the pin assignments for the audio line out internal header.
Pin Signal
1 Right
2 Jack Detect
3 Audio Ground
4 Left
5 Audio Ground
Audio Output Connector
3.5mm stereo jack socket ‐ no colour coding.
Pin Signal
1 Audio Left
2 Audio Right
3 GND

Mini PC Core 35
Serial Ports
Standard RS–232 DB–9
Pin Signal
1 CD
2 RX‐
3 TX‐
4 DTR
5 GND
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 RI
Network Connector
Standard RJ45 Ethernet network 10/100/1000 Base‐T connection.
Pin Signal
1 TD+
2 TD‐
3 RD+
4 NC
5 NC
6 RD‐
7 NC
8 NC
USB
USB on Rear I/O
USB 2.0 compatible standard USB ports
Pin Signal
1 +5V
2 DATA‐
3 DATA+
4 GND

36 Mini PC Core
USB Internal Headers
The tables below list the pin out assignments of the internal USB headers on the
motherboard. Each header provides two USB ports.

1 +5 2 +5
3 DATA ‐ 4 DATA ‐
5 DATA + 6 DATA +
7 GND 8 GND
9 NC 10 GND
S–ATA
S–ATA Data Connectors
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 A+
3 A‐
4 GND
5 B‐
6 B+
7 GND
S–ATA Power Connectors
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 A+
3 A‐
4 GND

Mini PC Core 37
HDDs and Optical Drive S–ATA Connector
S‐ATA DC Power Segment
DC power is supplied through a S‐ATA 15 pin connector.
Pin Signal
1 3.3 V
2 3.3 V
3 3.3 V
4 GND
5 GND
6 GND
7 5 V
8 5 V
9 5 V
10 GND
11 Reserved
12 GND
13 12 V
14 12 V
15 12 V
S‐ATA Signal Segment
Signals are supplied through a S‐ATA 7 pin connector.
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 A +
3 A ‐
4 GND
5 B ‐
6 B +
7 GND
There are no special test and adjustment tools required.

38 Mini PC Core

USB 7 Port Hub 1
USB 7 Port Hub

Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
This chapter gives the information required to service the USB 7 Port Hub fitted in NCR
663X ATM’s.
DESCRIPTION
The USB Hub increases the number of USB ports connected to the PC Core. It provides
the following functionality:
 Operation from a single 24V power supply
 1 upstream facing port
 7 powered downstream facing ports
 Power management for each port
 Device connect/disconnect detection
 Bus fault detection and recovery
 High, full and low‐speed device support
 Transaction translator for each port to provide full unshared bandwidth for USB1.1
devices.
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY November 2007

2 USB 7 Port Hub
Power Requirement
The Hub requires the following dc voltage and currents:
Quiescent Current Continuous Current

+24 V +/-10% 125 mA min. + 125 mA for 1.0 A max.
each used downstream port
The +24 V supply is sourced from the ATM power supply. The current rating in the table
represents a total load which includes the current sourced for the following voltages:
 +5 V +/‐5% is derived from the 24 V using a Sipex SP7652 Power Blox switcher
 +3.3 V +/‐0.3V is derived from the 5 V using a low drop‐out linear regulator
 +1.8 V +/‐10% is derived from the 3.3 V using a low drop‐out linear regulator.
Maximum Cable Lengths
Port Speed Maximum Cable Length

Upstream All 5.0 m (16.40 ft.)
Downstream High 5.0 m (16.40 ft.)
Downstream Full 5.0 m (16.40 ft.)
Downstream Low 3.0 m (9.84 ft.)
TROUBLESHOOTING
The system has a USBViewer option which allows the user to verify which module is
allocated to which USB port and is accessed as follows:
Note: The user requires a USB Service Key to perform this function.
1. Select the DEVICE DIAGNOSTICS option from the SYSTEM APPLICATION menu.
2. Select HARDWARE INFORMATION AND RECOVERY option.
3. Select the USBViewer option.
4. The system will then display the following screen showing the module to port
November 2007 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

USB 7 Port Hub 3
allocation for NCR modules or USB Hubs which have a working USB connection.
Note: Modules or USB Hubs are dynamically shown on the screen. If a Module or USB
Hub is removed while screen is displayed the information relating to it will also be
removed from the screen.
5. The user can select a specific module and the system will then display the following
screen showing port details.

4 USB 7 Port Hub
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 1 Diagnostics
There are two LEDs for each port, which indicate the port status. The definitions of the
LEDs are shown below:
LED Colour Status

Green All OK
Amber Error condition
Off Non operational
Green (blinking On/Off) Software attention
Amber (blinking On/Off) Hardware attention
Green/Amber (blinking On/Off) Reserved
There is one LED positioned close connector J9 that indicates power on or off.
There are no other diagnostics for this device.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.
Note: Cables should be replaced into the same port from which they were removed.
Top Box Mounted Hub
1. Remove the screws holding USB mounting tray to the module tray.
2. Note the positions of all USB cables.
3. Unplug all cables from the hub.
4. Remove the hub assembly.
5. Replace the hub assembly.
6. Refit cables into the same ports noted in step 2.
7. Refit and secure USB mounting tray.
Safe Mounted Hub
1. Note the positions of all USB cables.

USB 7 Port Hub 5
2. Unplug all cables from the hub.
3. Remove the screws holding the cover to the safe.
4. Remove the hub assembly.
5. Replace the hub assembly.
6. Replace the cover.
7. Refit cables into the same ports noted in step 1.
CABLING
None.

6 USB 7 Port Hub
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT
Hub Board
The diagram below shows the Hub Board connectors.
** Indicates the two LEDs for each port.
Upstream Port J8
*
J1 *
*
*
J2
*
*
J3
*
Downstream Ports *
J4
*
*
J5
*
*
J6
*
*
J7
**
Power J9
Power LED Downstream

Port LEDs
ATM Interface
The Hub has two interfaces with the host ATM and up to seven interfaces with modules
in the ATM:
 Power

USB 7 Port Hub 7
 Upstream connector
 Downstream connectors.
Power Interface
Power is obtained from the host ATM via a 2‐pin right angled mini‐fit junior connector
(J9) on the connector board, with the following pinout:
Pin Signal
1 +24 V
2 0V
Upstream Connector
Communication to and from the host ATM is via a 5‐pin mini‐B connector (J8) on the
connector board, with the following pinout:
Pin Signal
1 VCC
2 D-
3 D+
4 N.C.
5 GND
Shell SHIELD
Downstream Connectors
Communication to and from the modules is via seven 4‐pin upright type A connectors
(J1‐ J7) on the connector board, with the following pinout:
Pin Signal
Shell SHIELD
1 VCC
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
Shell SHIELD
None.

8 USB 7 Port Hub

SelfServ 23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual Section 07: Card Readers
Section Divider
Section 7 - Card Readers

Section Divider

USB IMCRW 1
USB IMCRW
Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
Standard
Latchfast
Card Capture Bin
Card Capture Bin
The USB Integrated Motorised Card Reader Writer (UIMCRW) is capable of supporting all
current financial card technologies, both Magnetic and Smart (excluding Watermark) and
has the flexibility to be able to interface with future card technologies.
DESCRIPTION
The following illustration shows the main functional elements of the UIMCRW:
DC Motor
IC Contact Block
PCB (Main Control Board)
MEIs (Option)
Pre-head
Stage 1 PCB Option
(Attached to Underside)
NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY July 2014

2 USB IMCRW
Available variants of the UIMCRW are as follows:
 Track 2 ‐ Read Only
 Track 1/2/3 ‐ Track 1/2 Read, Track 3 Read/Write
 3 Track ‐ Track 1/2/3 Read/Write (HiCo).
The above variants are available in the following configurations:
 With or without Smart Card Reader (except HiCo which is Smart only)
 With or without Card Return On Power Fail and/or System Escape (CROPF/SE)
 With or without MEI (in throat)
 With or without Card Clamping.
The following options are available on Track 1/2/3 readers (Germany only):
 Card Identification Module (CIM)
 MM Security Module.
UIMCRW Firmware
The UIMCRW firmware contains code for all current software and hardware features,
such that if the hardware is available and is “switched on” by the software, it will
automatically operate.
On start‐up, the UIMCRW compares a downloadable software component on the ATMs
hard drive to its on‐board firmware and automatically performs the download if a
difference is found.
Card Detection and Pre‐head Detection
Control of the UIMCRW shutter is by means of a microswitch which detects the physical
presence and width of a card in the entry position and a pre‐head detection feature
which detects the presence of a magnetic stripe on the card. When the microswitch is
activated and the pre‐head detector recognizes a magnetic stripe a signal is applied to
the shutter solenoid to open the shutter and permit the card to enter the UIMCRW.
Card Transport
Movement of the card in the UIMCRW transport, and eject and capture instructions, are
controlled by the UIMCRW firmware in response to commands from the host
application.
Card Return/Capture
Under normal conditions, when the card is presented to the user at the end of a
transaction, the card will protrude a minimum of 25mm (except for warped cards) from
the throat of the UIMCRW. From this position, the card can still be captured by the
UIMCRW.
July 2014 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

USB IMCRW 3
Security ‐ Long and Short Card Detection
The UIMCRW automatically detects long or short cards and notifies the host that an
abnormal card has been inserted into the UIMCRW. Abnormal cards are ejected
immediately and can not enter the reader.
Reading and Writing To Magnetic Stripe Cards
The UIMCRW is equipped with four analogue methods of reading the magnetic track
and, in the event of a read error, will try a total of five times to read the card.
Digital Decoding
A digital method of reading poor quality cards is included in the UIMCRW. The
customer’s application has to be specially written to select digital decoding. If this is
enabled, the card read time will be longer because of the extra cycle which occurs after
the analogue read attempts.
Writing Magnetic Data
The Track 1/2/3 Read/Write (HiCo) UIMCRW has two write currents (High‐co and Low‐
co). The appropriate current is set by the UIMCRW using HiCoLoCo software detection. In
the event of a write error verified by a read after write, the UIMCRW will attempt a
further two times to write to the card and to verify the result.
Reading and Writing to Smart Cards
When a Smart Card IC Contact Block is fitted, the card is moved to the “Set” position (PDI
in the above illustration), the contact block lowered and Power (VCC), Clock (CLK) and
Reset (RST) applied. The ATR chip data from a successful read is sent to the host. Any
excess current on VCC while the Smart card is activated will result in an error signal being
generated.
UIMCRWs with the Smart facility permit reading and writing to Smart cards with contacts
in the ISO position and are provided with the electrical interface to one SAM card
mounted on the IC and SAM1 Contact Block.

4 USB IMCRW
Smart Card Standards
The UIMCRW with Smart Card facility complies with the following Smart card standards:
 EMV ‐ Europay, Mastercard and Visa
 GIECB ‐ Carte Bancaire
 ZKA ‐ German Banking Organisation
 Latest version of ISO 7816 part 3 and 4
 Memory Cards (For example: GPM896 & Siemens 4442 as supported by ICM300).
Hardware and software facilities are provided on the UIMCRW for the future
introduction of Contactless Smart Cards, Proximity Card and multiple SAM slots for CEPS
(Common Electronic Purse Scheme).
Sensor Locations
PD-3 PD-2 PD-4 PD-1
Shutter
Card Detect SW, Pre HD
Magnetic Card
IMCRW
Optional Features
Card Return on Power Failure or System Escape
Card Return on Power Failure (CROPF) and Card Return on System Escape (CROSE) are
provided as one optional feature on the UIMCRW. The combined feature is referred to as
CROPF/SE.
CROPF Battery
The CROPF option is provided with a re‐chargeable battery located on the module tray
below the UIMCRW.
The CROPF circuit is contained on the control board and the battery plugs into connector
J11. The battery is attached to the baseplate by two cable ties.

USB IMCRW 5
CROPF Operation
In the event of a power failure the battery will provide the power necessary to complete
the present magnetic or smart card transaction and then attempt to return the card to
the input slot and offer it to the user for recovery. If the user does not take the card
within 30 seconds, the card will be captured. If a card jams during a CROPF operation,
sufficient battery power is provided for three attempts to clear the jam and present the
card to the user, or capture the card, if not taken.
CROSE
In the event of a System Escape command being generated, while a card is in the
UIMCRW, the CROSE firmware will determine whether or not the Escape command was
generated due to a power up situation. If not, the card is presented to the user. If the
user does not take the card within 30 seconds, the card will be captured. In the event of
an Escape command being generated following a prolonged shutdown period, any card
in the UIMCRW will not be moved to the entry slot. Instead, the card will be captured.
Latchfast Card Capture
A Latch Fast Card Capture (LFCC) bin with electronic tamper indication is provided as an
option with the UIMCRW. The tamper indication system is automatically set up when
hardware interrogation reports the presence of the LFCC harness to the device firmware.
A microswitch on the bin cradle detects the presence of the bin. In the event of Card
Capture command being generated when a card is in the UIMCRW, the LFCC system will
check that the LFCC bin is present before depositing the card in the bin.
A photodetector on the bin cradle looks through holes in the sides of the bin at an LED
attached to the other side of the cradle. If the beam between the photodetector and LED
is broken by the cards stacking up from the base of the bin this indicates a FULL SOON
condition. A count is started in software, and incremented for each card captured.
Whenever the count reaches 12 cards a FULL signal is sent by the LFCC to the host and
the UIMCRW is made inoperable with a severity of FATAL.
The tamper switch on the LFCC bin detects any attempt to remove the bin from the
UIMCRW. Once the bin is removed, the cradle can be unclipped from the lugs in the base
by squeezing the sides inwards.

6 USB IMCRW
CIM/MM Validation
CIM Module
Bracket Securing
Screw
An optional CIM86/MM optical detection and identification feature can be fitted to the
UIMCRW enabling reading of the card optical track using an optical head reader and
either CIM86 or MM technologies.
The CIM 86 PCB is located in a metal box on the top of the UIMCRW with the optical
detector located above the card transport path. The metal box and optical detector are
screwed to a bracket that hooks under the rear cross tie of the UIMCRW and is secured
by a single screw (shown in the above illustration).
If an MM PCB is fitted (Germany, Austria & Switzerland), it is located in the ATM safe and
connected to the UIMCRW via a current loop to RS232 interface board and an RS232
interface. The successful correlation between the optical and Track 3 magnetic track of
the card confirms the authenticity of the card, otherwise the card is rejected.
When CIM86/MM is enabled and all magnetic tracks have been read successfully, the
card is moved to the front position, with the shutter open. In this position the card
doesn’t protrude from the throat. The CIM86/MM optical head is enabled and the card
driven back into the card reader and Track 3 read.
Media Entry Indicators
Media Entry Indicator (MEI) printed circuit boards and green indicators located inside the
plastic moulding of the throat of the UIMCRW are available. The MEI indicators may be
selected by the application to be on continuously or to be flashed at a frequency of
0.25Hz, 0.5Hz, 1Hz, 2Hz, or 4Hz.
Card Clamping
A card clamping device may be fitted for additional security measures from card jamming
fraud techniques. The card clamper locks the card in the throat when the reader detects
a card jam, thus prevents fraudsters from taking and using the jammed card.
Note: The card clamping feature cannot be installed together with the CIMM/MM
feature.

USB IMCRW 7
Anti‐Eavesdropping Kit
An Anti‐Eavesdropping Kit may be fitted for additional security measures to prevent
eavesdropping in ATM product configurations consisting of IMCRW or NU‐IMCRW
modules.
Note: The AEK Kit cannot be installed in product configurations with CIM/MM feature.

8 USB IMCRW
TROUBLESHOOTING
Device USB cable disconnected Check USB cable. Reconnect cable.
disconnected from MCRW
USB cable disconnected Check USB cable. Reconnect cable.
from hub
Power cable disconnected Check power cable. Reconnect cable.
from MCRW
Power cable disconnected Check power cable. Reconnect cable.
from power supply
Power supply fault. Check power supply Repair power supply.
voltage.
USB cable faulty Replace USB cable and Replace cable
retest.
Power cable faulty Replace power cable and Replace cable.
retest.
Read head fault Dirt on magnetic head Clean MCRW head. Retest.
Read head faulty Fault still present following Replace MCRW transport.
cleaning cycle.
Write head fault Dirt on magnetic head. Clean MCRW head. Retest.
Write head faulty Fault still present following Replace MCRW transport.
cleaning cycle.
Shutter jam Jammed card or foreign Check for jammed card or Clear jam, clean and retest.
object obstructing shutter foreign object.
Check if card clamping Release the clamped card,
module is fitted and if it is clean, and retest.
activated. Check for
clamped card.
Glue or gum on shutter or Check shutter and sensors. Use NCR approved cleaning
shutter sensors Shutter may move but solution to remove
switch is not working, or substance.
shutter may move slowly.
Solenoid/gear failure Run HW_DIAG looped If shutter not activated,
Shutter/Sensor test. replace MCRW throat.
Observe shutter activation.
Sensor failure Run HW_DIAG looped If sensor faulty replace
Shutter/Sensor test. MCRW throat.
Observe shutter switch
sensor Byte 2 Bit 0 (Jammed
Open) or Byte 2 Bit 1
(Jammed Closed). Verify
sensor changes.
PCB faulty Run HW_DIAG looped If shutter not activated,
Shutter/Sensor test. replace MCRW transport.

USB IMCRW 9

Card jam Jammed card or foreign Check for jammed card or Clear jam, clean and retest.
object obstructing card path foreign object.
module is fitted and if it is clean and retest.
activated. Check for a
clamped card.
Dirt on rollers Check rollers. Use air spray to remove dirt.
Moisture on rollers Check rollers Dry rollers
Oil/grease/glue/gum on Check rollers Use NCR approved cleaning
rollers solution to remove
substance.
Rollers damaged Check rollers Replace MCRW transport.
Card detect switch damaged Check switch for wear. If switch is worn, replace
MCRW throat.
Motor/gear failure Run HW_DIAG Run to Run If not, replace MCRW
Sequence 3. Observe transport.
motor/gear operate
correctly.
Belt failure Run HW_DIAG Run to Run If belt slipping, replace
Sequence 3. Observe belt to MCRW transport.
determine if slipping.
Sensor failure Run HW_DIAG looped If sensor faulty, replace

Shutter/Sensor test. Cover MCRW transport.
and uncover PD1, 1 PD2 and
PD3 sensors.
Verify sensor changes. (Byte
3 bit 0 = PD1 blocked, bit 1 =
PDS2 blocked,
bit 2 = PD3 blocked)
PCB faulty Run HW_DIAG Run to Run If not activated, replace
sequence 3. Observe MCRW.
motor/gear to determine
activation.
Invalid card Dirt/grease/oil on card Clean MCRW read head.
Dirt/grease/oil on rollers Check rollers. Run cleaning cycle and hold

cleaning card at throat for 3
seconds to ensure pinch is
cleaned thoroughly.
Error still reported after If error still reported,
cleaning cycle. Run replace MCRW transport.
HW_DIAG Run to Run
Sequence 3 on loop.

10 USB IMCRW

Customer Jammed card or foreign Check for jammed card or Clear jam, clean read head
tampering object obstructing throat. foreign object. and retest.
module is fitted and if it is clean, and retest.
activated. Check for a
clamped card.
Card detect switch Check switch for wear. If switch is worn, replace
damaged. MCRW throat.
Error still reported after Replace MRCW.
cleaning
CROPF failure CROPF failure Replace battery.
Capture bin Capture bin not inserted or Check capture bin. Insert capture bin.
removed not inserted correctly.
Harness disconnected. Check harness. Connect harness
Harness faulty. Bin is present and harness is Replace harness.
connected but bin removed
error is still reported.
MCRW PCB faulty Run HW_DIAG looped Replace MCRW transport.
shutter/sensor test.
Capture bin full/ Bin full. Check bin. Empty bin.
full soon Harness not connected. Bin full error reported when Connect harnessing.
bin empty. Check harness is
connected. Check
connectors on bin full
sensors.
Harness faulty. Bin full error reported when Replace harness.
bin empty and harness and
sensors are connected
correctly.
Bin full receiver or Bin full error reported when Replace bin.
transmitter sensor faulty bin empty, harnessing
checked.
MCRW PCB faulty. Bin full still reported when Replace MCRW transport.
empty.
SC stopper/Pin Faulty IC block. Run HW_DIAGS Run to Run Replace ICC block.
contacts Sequence 1. Observe IC
contact block movement.
SCIF error Faulty IC block. Run HW_DIAGS Run to Run Replace ICC block.
Sequence 1. Observe IC
contact block movement.
Switch pack Switches set incorrectly. Check switches ‐ should all Set all switches to off.
error be off. (See Strapping.)

USB IMCRW 11

CIM/M /I/F CIM PCB defective Replace CIM/MM interface Replace CIM/MM interface
comms error and retest. board (stage 1 PCB)
(M_Status = 90) Sensor dirty or obstructed. LED on CIM/MM module is Clean sensor on CIM
flashing. module.
Communications fault. LED on CIM/MM block is off. Run HW_DIAGS CIM or MM
Turnaround test.
CIM/MM/I/F CIM harness not connected. Check harness. Run Connect harness.
comms error HW_DIAGS CIM‐86
(M_Status = 91) turnaround test.
Sensor dirty or obstructed. LED on CIM/MM module is Clean sensor on CIM/MM
flashing. module.
Communications fault. CIM LED off. Run HW_DIAGS CIM or MM
Turnaround test.
Harness faulty Replace harness and run Replace harness.
CIM‐86 turnaround test.
CIM/MM interface faulty Harness checked or Replace CIM/MM interface
replaced, CIM‐86 board (stage 1 PCB)
turnaround test run and
error still reported.
CIM/MM interface comms Harness checked or Replace CIM module
error replaced, CIM‐86
turnaround test run, CIM/
MM interface replaced and
MCRW PCB faulty Harness checked, CIM Replace MCRW transport
module replaced, CIM‐86
test run and error still
reported.
CIM/MM CIM/MM defective Replace CIM module and Replace CIM module.
comms error retest.
M_Status = 88) Sensor dirty or obstructed. Check harness. Run Clean sensor on CIM
HW_DIAGS CIM‐86 module.
turnaround test.
Communications fault. LED on CIM module is Run HW_DIAGS CIM or MM
flashing. turnaround test.

12 USB IMCRW

CIM/MM Harness faulty Replace harness and run Replace harness.
comms error HW_DIAGS CIM‐86
M_Status = 89) turnaround test.
Sensor dirty or obstructed. LED on CIM module is Clean sensor on CIM
flashing. module.
Communications fault. CIM LED off. Run CIM or MM turnaround
test.
CIM/MM interface faulty Harness checked or Replace CIM/MM interface
replaced, CIM‐86 (stage 1 PCB).
turnaround test run and
CIM/MM interface comms Harness checked or Replace CIM module.
error replaced, CIM‐86
turnaround test run, CIM/
MM interface replaced and
MCRW PCB faulty Harness checked, CIM Replace MCRW transport
module replaced, CIM‐86
test run and error still
reported.
Removing Clamped Cards
To remove clamped cards from the reader, perform the following steps:
1. Locate the green gear on the card clamper and rotate it in the direction of the arrow
to loosen the grip of the clamper.
Release
2. Gently pull the card out from the green bezel of the reader.

USB IMCRW 13
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
Level 0 diagnostic tests run on the IMCRW control board at start‐up. The tests run in
either of two modes determined by the setting on the diagnostic switchpack on the
board. The location of the switchpack is shown in the illustration below:
Diagnostic
LED`s
LD1
LD2
Red Green
Diagnostic
4 3 2 1 Switches
ON
The two diagnostic modes are:
 Power On Self Test (POST) mode ‐ all switches off ‐ five tests execute once without
repeat at system start‐up (see table below)
 Selected Test mode ‐ switchpack set to test number ‐ selected test runs until the unit
receives a reset.

14 USB IMCRW
Switch Settings
The table shows the list of tests that can be selected and the tests that run at normal
start‐up and their sequence.
Test ID Switch Setting Test Description Start-Up Selected

SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1 (and order)
00 0 0 0 0 Normal boot‐up (POST)
01 0 0 0 1 Motor Test 1 X
02 0 0 1 0 Smart Card Signal Test* 4 X
03 0 0 1 1 SAM1 Signal Test* 5 X
04 0 1 0 0 Clear F‐ROM X
05 0 1 0 1 Shutter Test (including Throat 2 X
Sweep)*
06 0 1 1 0 IC Block Solenoid and Sensor Test 3 X
07 0 1 1 1 PD Sensor Slice Level Adjust Test X
08 1 0 0 0 Motor Speed Test X
09 1 0 0 1 Adjustment Start Sentinel Position X
0A 1 0 1 0 Single Cycle Test Mode X
0B 1 0 1 1 Reserved
0C 1 1 0 0 Reserved
0D 1 1 0 1 Reserved
0E 1 1 1 0 Cycle Test Mode X
(Sankyo)
0F 1 1 1 1 Reserved
Note: * These tests only run if the hardware is present.
The following notes describe the UIMCRW’s behaviour during POST and Selected Test
Mode:
Note
1 At power on, both LEDs are on. The green LED remains on during boot up, while the red
LED only remains on for 100 ms.
2 If there is no user code in Flash ROM (F‐ROM) the card reader must wait for a host
download. During this time the red light remains off while the green LED flashes (on 500
ms, off 500 ms).
3 During initial power on any test number set on the switches is ignored except if set for
the "Clear F‐ROM" test and, in this case, the test is performed.
4 During execution of the Clear F‐ROM test the red LED flashes at a rate of 0.5 Hz and the
green LED is off. This test can take up to 10 seconds to complete, after which the LEDs
report the test result. A pass is shown by a flashing red LED with the green LED on. A fail
is shown by the red LED on constantly with the green LED flashing at 0.5 Hz. At this
stage the LEDs are unable to flash the test and failure codes described below.
5 During all other selected tests the red LED flashes at 0.5 Hz and the green LED reports
the test result (see “Test Results”).
6 The UIMCRW performs the Power On Self Tests (POST) as listed in the section "Switch
Settings". If the UIMCRW fails during POST, then the red LED is lit constantly and the
green LED flashes a sequence to indicate a failure (See "Test Results").

USB IMCRW 15
Note
7 If boot up completes normally (that is, the UIMCRW runs user code), then both LEDs are
turned off. During normal operation no LEDs should be on.
8 If the switches have illegal settings, both the red and green LEDs flash at a constant rate
of 3 Hz.
9 During download to F‐ROM, the red and green LEDs flash together at 0.5 Hz
TEST REPORTING
Two LEDs on the control board, one red and one green, report the progress of level 0
diagnostics as follows:
Condition Red LED Green LED

Pass Flashes On for 2 seconds, then flashes at 0.25 second intervals to indicate the test
id number (1 flash for test 1, 2 flashes for test 2 and so on).
Fail Constant On for 2 seconds.
Flashes at 0.25 second intervals to indicate the test id number (1 flash for
test 1, 2 flashes for test 2 and so on).
Off for 1 second.
Flashes at 0.25 second intervals to indicate the error code (1 flash for code
1, 2 flashes for code 2 and so on).
Off for 1 second.
Sequence is repeated.
TEST DESCRIPTIONS
The following sections describe each test in turn.
Test 01H ‐ Motor
Purpose - To test the IMCRW motor.
Description ‐ The following sequence is repeated until a failure occurs:
1. Motor forwards 190 mm/s for 1 second approximately.
2. Motor backwards 190 mm/s for 1 second approximately.
3. Motor stopped for 2 seconds.
Note: This test can not be performed with a card in the reader.
Note: If a card is detected (width switch and shutter both open) when this test is running
in normal start‐up then the test will not fail.
Test Results:
Error Code Red Green Meaning

00 flashing off Pass
01 constant 1 flash CPU can not get encoder pulse
02 constant 2 flashes Card jammed
03 constant 3 flashes A card is in the reader

16 USB IMCRW
Test 02H ‐ Smart Card Signal
Purpose ‐ To test the smart card signal level.
Description ‐ The following sequence is repeated until failure:
 I/O line, Reset, and VCC, of ICC are toggled.
 VCC (5 V mode) ON (1 second)
 All OFF (1 second)
 All OFF (1 SECOND)
Test Results:

01 constant 1 flash Short circuit
Note: The CPU can detect only the excess current. The I/O, Reset, and VCC signal levels
are not checked.
Test 03H ‐ SAM1 Signal
Purpose ‐ To test the SAM1 signal level.
 I/O line, Reset, and VCC, of SAM are toggled.
 All OFF (1 second).
Test Results:

01 constant 1 flash Short circuit SAM1
02* constant 2 flashes Short circuit SAM2
Note: The CPU can detect only the excess current. The I/O, Reset, and VCC signal levels
are not checked.
Note: * These codes can occur only if SAM2‐5 PCB is fitted.
Test 04H ‐ Clear F‐ROM
Purpose ‐ To clear all F‐ROM contents except NCR file.

USB IMCRW 17
Description ‐ The program area (0x8000 ‐ 0x7FFF) of the F‐ROM is cleared. On the next
boot the IMCRW enters download mode which returns the Flash ROM to the original
shipping condition.
Test Results:

01 constant 1 flash Unable to clear
Test 05H ‐ Shutter (Including Throat Sweep)
Purpose ‐ To test the IMCRW shutter.
1. Open shutter for 2 seconds
2. Close shutter for 2 seconds.
If the high security throat is present then a full pre‐sweep cycle is executed. In normal
start‐up mode this test will only produce a twitch of the shutter.
Test Results:

01 constant 1 flash Shutter open
02 constant 2 flashes Shutter closed
03* constant 3 flashes Sweep error 1
Note: This test can not be performed with a card in the reader.
Note: This test must not be run with a card in the throat of the IMCRW (width switch
and shutter both open).
Note: * These codes can occur only if the high security throat is fitted.
Test 06H ‐ IC Block Solenoid and Sensor
Purpose ‐ To test the IMCRW IC block solenoid and sensor.
1. IC Block down 2 seconds.
2. IC Block up 2 seconds.
In normal start‐up mode the time is reduced to 0.5 seconds.

18 USB IMCRW
Test Results:

06 constant 6 flashes Movement error
Test 07H ‐ PD Sensor Threshold Level Adjust
Purpose ‐ To measure the threshold voltage of each PD sensor and store the value in
F‐ROM.
Description ‐ The following sequence is executed once:
1. Turn on all position PD (photo‐diode) sensor LEDs with half power.
2. Measure the voltage of each PD sensor.
3. Calculate each PD threshold voltage and write them into F‐ROM.
Test Results:

Test 08H ‐ Motor Speed Test
Purpose ‐ To measure speed of card movement.
1. Accept card entry.
2. Speed of card movement measured.
Test Results:

02 constant 2 flashes Card jammed
03 constant 3 flashes Unable to measure (out of range)
Test 09H ‐ Adjustment Start Sentinel Position
Purpose: To measure the start sentinel position and store the value in F‐ROM.
Description: The following sequence is executed once:
1. Accept card entry.
2. Measure start sentinel position

USB IMCRW 19
3. Write adjustment data to F‐ROM
Test Results:

01 constant 1 flash Not standard card or read error
02 constant 2 flashes Card jam
03 constant 3 flashes Unable to adjust (out of range)
06 constant 6 flashes Unable to save the data to F‐ROM
normally
Test 0AH ‐ Single Cycle Test Mode
Purpose ‐ To cycle the IMCRW.
1. Accept card entry (the card must have magnetic stripes).
2. Perform bit check on magnetic tracks 1, 2 and 3.
3. Set smart card position.
4. Turn smart card power on and receive ATR.
5. Turn smart card power off and release.
6. Eject card.
Test Results:

07 constant 7 flashes Card jam
Test 0EH ‐ Repeat Cycle Test Mode
Purpose ‐ To cycle the IMCRW.
Description ‐ The same sequence as test 0AH (above) is repeated until failure.

20 USB IMCRW
Level 1 Diagnostics
The following table shows level 1 diagnostic tests which are available on all UIMCRWs.
Additional tests for specific variants are shown in the subsequent tables.
Note: Test results (contained in M_STATUS, M_DATA and T_DATA) are given in the NCR
publication B006‐6273‐A000, Self‐Service Financial Terminals Diagnostic Status Code
Notebook.
All UIMCRW Variants
Test Description
MENU Displays a menu of the all the other tests to allow the user to select.
ENTER Accepts card entry. If the Accept fails then the rest of the test is skipped.
The test times out if no card is inserted within 10 seconds. On timeout
the reader is disabled and a late event is checked for.
READ ISO TRACK 1 Performs an ISO Track 1 read and displays all the data on the track (or
up to any detected error, if one exists). (Track 123 MCRW only).
up to any detected error, if one exists).
up to any detected error, if one exists). (Track 123 MCRW only).
WRITE ISO TRACK 3 Performs a read of ISO Track 3 and if successful the original track image
is stored. Performs a write to ISO track 3 of two different patterns of
104 characters. If the first write is unsuccessful then the second write is
not attempted. Two patterns are necessary to ensure that the write
capability is operational. If the original track image read and both writes
were successful then a write with the original card image is performed
to restore track 3. If a read or write error occurs during this test then
track 3 of the test card may be corrupted. Rewrite of the original data is
not attempted if the test write fails.
(Track 123 MCRW only)
Note:The first pattern is all ASCII zeros and the second pattern is
'0123456789=' repeated until the track (104 characters) is filled.
EJECT Returns the card to the exit position of the card reader and waits 10
seconds for it to be removed.
CAPTURE Captures the card from the reader.
SPEED TEST This test is present for compatibility with the MCRW and always returns
success. The card must already be in the reader when the test is
initiated.
SHUTTER/SENSOR Opens and closes the shutter to check the shutter switch for correct
TEST operation. Also reports the static state of the sensors.
RELAY AND BATTERY Operates the relays and shows the state of the battery (CROPF variants
TEST only).
CLEANING CYCLE Opens shutter and accepts card inputs. Cycles cleaning card 5 times,
then ejects card and closes shutter. The test times out if no card is
inserted within 10 seconds.

USB IMCRW 21
Test Description
DISPLAY DEVICE SERIAL Displays the UIMCRW serial number which is obtained from the registry
NUMBER DWORD value %ULYBASEKEY%/DeviceImage/USBIMCRW/MCRW‐01‐
USBMotorised/Serial Number.

22 USB IMCRW
Run to Run Tests
Every UIMCRW variant offers a set of run to run tests:
Test Description
RUN TO RUN SEQUENCE 1 The following sequence of tests is executed:
SHUTTER/SENSOR TEST
ENTER
READ ISO TRACK 1 (if configured)
READ ISO TRACK 2
CIM VERIFY (if configured)
SMART CARD STAGE (if configured)
SMART CARD RESET (if configured)
SMART CARD RELEASE (if configured)
WRITE ISO TRACK 3 (if configured)
EJECT
CAPTURE
Note that the SMART CARD RESET will check T‐DATA not
T‐CODE to ensure the Smart Card is functioning correctly.
ENTER
CAPTURE
ENTER
READ ISO TRACK 2
CIM VERIFY (if configured)
SMART CARD STAGE (if configured)
SMART CARD RESET (if configured)
SMART CARD RELEASE (if configured)
EJECT
Note that the SMART CARD RESET will check T‐DATA not
T‐CODE to ensure the Smart Card is functioning correctly.
RUN TO RUN SEQUENCE 4 This test is only provided if CIM is configured.
The following sequence of tests is executed:
ENTER SERVICE
CIM SERVICE
EJECT
Note: In a RUN TO RUN test, (with or without Looping), if no card is detected on an
ENTER then the RUN TO RUN test is terminated. If no card is present on a CAPTURE then
the CAPTURE test is skipped.

USB IMCRW 23
3‐Track Write UIMCRW
The following additional tests are available on 3‐track write UIMCRWs:
Test Description
WRITE BUFFER TRACK 1 The data from the specified track is read and saved. The first test
pattern is written to the appropriate buffer, and then is written to the
WRITE TRACK BUFFER 2 magnetic card. If both commands give good responses then the second
test pattern is written to the card in the same way. If good responses
WRITE TRACK BUFFER 3 are received and the original data was saved successfully then the
original card data is written back to the card.
The first pattern is all ASCII zeros and the second pattern is
0123456789=" for tracks 2 and 3 and
0123456789=ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ" for track 1 repeated
to maximum length as follows:‐
76 for Track 1
37 for Track 2
104 for Track 3
If at any point a Write Buffer or Write Card command fails then the rest
of the test is aborted.
WRITE 3 BUFFER The data from all three tracks is read and saved. The first test pattern
TRACKS of ASCII zeroes is written to all three buffers. If successful, the buffers
are written to the card. If successful, the second test pattern (see
above) is written to all three buffers. If successful the buffers are
written to the card. If successful, the original track data is written to
the buffers and then back to the card. Only the track data that was
successfully saved is restored.
Smart Card UIMCRW
The following additional tests are available on smart card UIMCRWs:
Test Description
SMART CARD STAGE Moves the card which is in the UIMCRW transport into the Smart
Card Reader Writer (SCRW) and brings the contacts down onto the
card.
SMART CARD RESET Power is applied to the card under the contacts and the 'Answer to
Reset' message is read from the card. The card is then powered off.
Note that this test will check T‐DATA not T‐CODE to ensure the Smart
Card is functioning correctly.
SMART CARD RELEASE Raises the contacts and moves the card out of the SCRW back into
the UIMCRW transport.
SMART CARD INITIALISE The device controller switches into SCRW mode. Any card present is
powered off. The controller switches to MCRW mode.
SCIF SOLENOID The Smart Card contact solenoid is energised and de‐energised in
sequence.
SCIF IDENTIFY The Smart Card Interface (SCIF) firmware identity number is read and
displayed as T‐DATA.
SC CLEANING CYCLE Opens the shutter to accept a SmartCard cleaning card. The card is
inserted then staged and released 5 times then ejected. The test
times out if no card is inserted within 10 seconds.

24 USB IMCRW
With Tamper Indication
The following additional test is available for all UIMCRW variants with tamper indication:
Test Description
TAMPER INDICATION The status of the UIMCRW tamper indicator is displayed.
With CIM
The following additional test is available for CIM UIMCRWs:
Test Description
CIM TURNAROUND Performs a functional check on the CIM Interface Module, the CIM‐
86 security module and the connecting harness. Test characters are
sent to the CIM‐86 via the interface and are echoed back unmodified.
Alternatively the interface only can be tested by connecting the
receive and send lines together on the CIM harness connector.
Note: The connection or disconnection of the CIM harness must only
be done while the ATM is powered off.
With MM
The following additional test is available for MM UIMCRWs:
Test Description
MM TURNAROUND Performs a functional check on the MM Interface Module, the MM
security module and the connecting harness. Test characters are sent
to the MM via the interface and are echoed back unmodified.
Alternatively the interface only can be tested by connecting the
receive and send lines together on the MM harness connector.
Note: The connection or disconnection of the MM harness must only
be done while the ATM is powered off.
Level 3 Diagnostics
The Level 3 Diagnostics returned for the UIMCRW are:
S_DATA
The S_DATA returned for the IMCRW are:
S_DATA Meaning
00 GOOD (No error).
01 ROUTINE (Minor fault).
02 WARNING (May require attention).
03 SUSPEND (Possible tampering)
04 FATAL (Device inoperative)

USB IMCRW 25
TALLIES
The tallies recorded for the IMCRW are:
Tally Description
CARDTRAN A card enters the transport.
SHTR JAM When a shutter jam (open or closed) is detected on
accept or eject.
SHTR SEN On accept when card enters reader but shutter is not
seen to open.
OVER LEN A card length error is detected, e.g multiple cards
READ OPS A read is attempted for the first time.
READ ERR A track cannot be read correctly after a full set of retries.
BLANKTRK A blank track is detected.
WRTE OPS A write is attempted for the first time.
WRTE ERR When track 3 read after write check fails after a full set of
retries.
WRTE RTY A read after write check fails on the first attempt but is
successful on a retry.
COM FAIL A read or write failed due to comms failure.
COMM RTY A successful read or write retry resulted from a comms
failure.
EJCT OPS An eject attempted for the first time.
EJCT JAM An eject attempt fails e.g. due to card jam or shutter
jammed closed.
REMOVED The card is removed after a successful eject (including
cleaning cycle eject). If another command is received
before the card is taken the tally will not be incremented.
CAPT OPS A capture is attempted for the first time.
CAPTURED A card is captured.
CAPT N‐D A capture was attempted but the card was removed
during capture.
CAPT JAM A capture attempt failed e.g. card jam.
CAPT RTY A capture failed on the first attempt but is successful on
a retry.
HEADPASS A card traverses the transport in one direction.
CARD JAM A card jam cannot be cleared by retries or error recovery.
JAM RTY A card jam is cleared by retries or error recovery.
WDTH JAM Width switch is permanently blocked during accept.
NO RDTK1 Track 1 cannot be read correctly after a full set of retries.
AJAMTHRT A card jams in the throat during the accept cycle and
cannot be cleared by retries or error recovery.
AJAMTRAN A card jams in the transport during the accept cycle and
EJAMTHRT A card jams in the throat during the eject cycle and
EJAMTRAN A card jams in the transport during the eject cycle and

26 USB IMCRW
Tally Description
CJAMTHRT A card jams in the throat during the capture cycle and
CJAMTRAN A card jams in the transport during the capture cycle and
RJAMTRAN A card jams in the transport during the read cycle and
WJAMTRAN A card jams in the transport during the write cycle and
NOWRTTK1 A read after write check fails after a full set of retries on
track 1.
track 2.
track 3.
FRDTTOPS The fraud throat is actuated, either during execution of a
THROAT SWEEP command or during card entry when a
Pre‐sweep is enabled.
FRDTTERR The fraud throat reports an error during operation.
NONSCDET The card present is detected not to be a smart card,
during execution of the command to power on the smart
card.
SCDETECT The card present is detected to be a smart card, during
execution of the command to power on the smart card.
NONMCARD A non‐magnetic card is entered.
CIM VRFY A CIM Verify is attempted for the first time, (not
Incremented for retries).
MM ATMPT The MM sensor is activated to read the optical stripe on
an ec card.

USB IMCRW 27
STRAPPING
The diagnostic switches on the main control board should all be set to OFF for normal
operation of the UIMCRW.
Diagnostic
LED`s
LD1
LD2
Red Green
Diagnostic
4 3 2 1 Switches
ON
ADJUSTMENTS
Pre‐head
The Pre‐Head position should set as follows:
1. Check that the Pre‐Head is set as shown in the illustration below, with distance A
equal to distance B.

28 USB IMCRW
2. If necessary, loosen screw (e) shown below. and move the Pre‐Head until A = B.
3. Tighten screw (e).
Heartbeat
If the card reader is being subjected to repeated resets (i.e. disconnects and reconnects)
then the heartbeat functionality should be disabled in Self Service Configuration menu in
Sys App, to eliminate it as the possible cause.
Card Detect Microswitch
The microswitch can be tested using ST‐SW Card (Sankyo EGCMC0119).
1. Insert the ST‐SW Card slowly into the card throat.
2. Listen for a click sound from the switch when position B on the card contacts the
microswitch actuator. This sound indicates that the microswitch has detected the card
and switched ON.
3. Draw out the ST‐SW Card slowly and again listen for the click sound when position A is
detected by the microswitch. This sound indicates that the microswitch has detected
removal of the card and has switched OFF.
4. Check that the microswitch operates correctly at each ST‐SW card position.
5. If necessary, loosen the microswitch adjusting screws and adjust the microswitch until
it operates correctly.
6. If the sound of the microswitch changing from ON to OFF and vice versa cannot be

USB IMCRW 29
heard, replace the bezel assembly.
FRU MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
The following modules are field replaceable items:
 Anti‐Eavesdropping Kit
 MEIs
 IC contact block
 Throat
 Battery
 Base transport
 Card Clamping:
 Card Clamping PCB
 Card Clamper

30 USB IMCRW
Anti‐Eavesdropping Kit
If fitted, AEK parts should be removed as required for FRU replacement as follows
1. Remove MCRW module from ATM detaching all the necessary cables.
2. Loosen the M3 Hex Pozdriv screw from the protective bracket as shown.
3. De‐align the hooks on AEK protective bracket and slide the AEK protective bracket
from front to back as shown, and remove it from the MCRW.
Bottom location of
Protective Bracket hooks.
Slide and remove Protective cover from MCRW

4. Remove the support bracket assembly by removing one M3 THF Comb Pozi screw and
one M4 M/C Screw.
M4 M/C Screw
Support Bracket Assembly
M3 THF Comb Pozi Screw

USB IMCRW 31
5. Loosen the M3 X 12 screw and self locking nut to remove the PCB (if fitted) and
bottom cover assembly.
6. Loosen the two M3 Hex Pozdriv 6.0 screws and remove the bottom cover.
7. Loosen the two screws and remove the Anti Drill Plate by carefully manipulating the
existing ‘Z’shaped ribbon membrane.
8. Replace the required AEK parts.
9. Re‐install the MCRW assembly on the module tray connecting all the required cables
to MCRW. Also tie up the cables using cable tie straps at appropriate positions.

32 USB IMCRW
MEIs
1. Disconnect the MEI harness from the main control board (CN4).
2. Unclip the tang at each side holding the MEI cover to the throat, and lift off the cover.
3. Lift the upper MEI PCB out from the groove behind the card entry slot.
MEI Cover
Upper MEI
4. Remove the three screws securing the lower MEI assembly to the underside of the
throat.
Securing Screws
Lower MEI
5. When replacing the MEI cover, make sure that the extension arm makes a good
grounding contact with the metal surface of the UIMCRW above the throat.

USB IMCRW 33
IC Contact Block
1. If CIM/MM is fitted, remove the screw securing the CIM/MM module to the top of
the card reader, and lift off the module.
CIM Module
Bracket Securing
Screw
2. Lift the clear plastic mylar strip and disconnect the ribbon cable from the main
control board. Remove the two screws securing the IC contact block, which are
accessed through the control board. Remove the IC contact block.

34 USB IMCRW
Throat
1. Undo the pre‐head connector at J22 on the LED board.
2. Remove the screws securing the throat to the UIMCRW base transport: 2 on the left‐
hand side and 2 on the right.
3. Disconnect the MEI harness from the outside of the main control board, and the
solenoid connector from the inside surface.

USB IMCRW 35
Battery
1. Remove the screw securing the UIMCRW to the module tray.
2. Unplug the battery connector J11 on the control board.
3. Slide the UIMCRW off the module tray.
4. Snip the cable ties securing the battery to the tray.
5. Remove and replace the battery and cable ties.
Note: When fitting new cable ties, the fastening end should be kept under the
module tray so that it doesn’t interfere with the seating of the UIMCRW.
Base Transport
To remove and replace the base transport, remove and replace all the other UIMCRW
modules as detailed in this section, and fit them onto a replacement base transport.
Card Clamping Module
Card Clamping PCB
To remove the card clamping PCB, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the reader upside down.
2. Move the securing clips upward to release the two ribbon cables from the main card
reader PCB.
3. Disconnect the two ribbon cables then feed them through the side frame of the card
reader.

36 USB IMCRW
4. Disconnect the two power harnesses from the card clamping PCB.
5. Remove and retain the card clamping PCB retaining screw.
Screw
6. Slide the PCB out of the card reader.
To replace the card clamping PCB, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the card reader upside down.

USB IMCRW 37
2. Partially slide the PCB into the guide rails.
3. Thread the ribbon cables through the side frame and over the card reader PCB.
4. Connect the power harnesses to the PCB.
5. Push the PCB the rest of the way into the card reader until the hole in the rear of the
PCB lines up with the card reader frame.

38 USB IMCRW
6. Secure the PCB with one screw.
7. Connect the ribbon cable to the card reader PCB.
8. Lock the ribbon cables by pushing down the securing clips.

USB IMCRW 39
Card Clamper
CAUTION
The lock blade protrudes from the main body of the card clamper.
Take care when handling the device.
To remove the card clamper, perform the following steps:
1. Ensure that the card clamping PCB is disconnected. If it is still connected, perform the
following steps:
a Turn the card reader upside down.
b Disconnect the two power harnesses.
2. Turn the card reader the right way up.
3. Remove and retain the M4 Pan head screw securing the card clamper to the card

40 USB IMCRW
reader.
4. Remove the card clamper from the card reader.
To replace the card clamper, perform the following steps:
1. Line–up the slot in the front of the clamper with the shaft in the card reader.

USB IMCRW 41
2. Align the notch on the clamper with the side frame of the card reader.
3. Secure the clamper with one M4 pan head screw.

42 USB IMCRW
PCB Slides and Ribbon Cable Edge Protector
These items are not field replaceable units. When a card reader fitted with a card
clamping device is damaged, a replacement card reader cannot be ordered with card
clamping. All parts of the card clamping module (including screws, guide rails, and the
edge protector) have to be moved from the damaged card reader to the new card
reader.
To remove the slides and ribbon cable edge protector, perform the following steps:
1. Using a pair of pliers, release the poppers securing the PCB guide rails to the side
frames of the card reader. Remove and retain the guide rails.
2. Remove and retain the ribbon cable edge protector from the card reader side frame.
Ribbon Cable
Edge Protector

USB IMCRW 43
To replace the PCB slides and ribbon cable edge protector, perform the following steps.
1. Push the poppers in each guide rail into the two holes in the card reader side frames.
2. Push the edge protector over the side frame where the ribbon cables are routed.

44 USB IMCRW
CABLING
CIM Harness
The illustration below shows the schematic of the harness for the CIM Stage 1 PCB to the
CIM Module.
CN11
1 +5V
V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
1
2 2
RESET
3 3
TXD RXD 4
4
RXD TXD 5
5
GND
CIM Module
CIM/MM Stage 1 PCB
6 6
CIM SENSING
7 7
GND
8 8
B AUD 1
9 9
B AUD 2
10 10
+5V 11
11
+5V 12
12
13 GND 13
GND 14
14
15
16

USB IMCRW 45
MM HARNESS
The illustration below shows the schematic of the harness for the CIM/MM Stage 1 PCB
to the MM Box.
CN11
1 +5V
V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
1
MM SENSING
2 2
RESET
3 3
TXD RXD 4
4
RXD TXD 5
5
GND
CIM/MM Stage 1 PCB
6 6
MM Box
7 7
GND
8 8
OPEN 9
9
OPEN
10 10
+5V 11
11
+5V 12
12
13 GND 13
GND 14
14
15
16
CARD CAPTURE BIN HARNESS
P7 +5V P3
V V V
8 1
V V
LED
PCB
GND
6 3
UIMCRW Base PCB J110
P2
1
V V V
Sensor
PCB
3
OVERFILL_DET
V
4 2
SW1
V V
Switch
3
Present
Bin
7 TICC_DET
V

46 USB IMCRW
CONNECTORS
The following diagram shows the connections between the modules of the UIMCRW.
USB Photo-Transistors
Communication J4 PDI, PD1, PD2,
with PC Core PD3, PD4
J801
LEDs - Pre head,
+24V DC J5 J21 LED J22 HDS1, HDS2,
J2 HDS3
Read/Write
J6
Head
J7 Motor
UIMCRW Main Control Board
J11 CROPF
Battery
12V
CN51
Regulator
CIM/MM PCB 5V
J101 CN101 CN52 Regulator
CIM/MM
CN11
Module
Latchfast Card
Capture Bin
J110 (Full Soon Sensor &
Bin Present Switch)
Card Width Switch

J301
Shutter Solenoid
IC Block PCB
J2 Contacts
J302 J1
J3 Solenoid
MEI PCB
J31 CN4

USB IMCRW 47
Main Control Board
The position of connectors on the main control board is as shown in the diagram below
and their pinouts are given in the following table:
J11
J302
J7 J2
J301
J801
J9
J5 J4
CN4 J110
CN1
J102 J101 J201 J6

J31
Connector Number Pin No. Signal Name

J801 (USB I/F) 1 VBUS (Power +5V DC)
(Connects to PC Core) 2 D‐ (USB Data (‐))
3 D+ (USB Data (+))
4 ID (NC)
5 SGN (Signal Ground)
J2 (Power) 1 +24V DC
(Connects to Power Supply 2 PGN (Power Ground)
via Uniharness)
J4 (Photo Transistor) 1 SGN (Signal Ground)
2 PD3 (Card Sensing)
4 PDI (Card Sensing)
7 +5V VCC
J5 (Card SENS.LED) 1 +12V VCC
2 HFLT (LED Half Light)
3 LEDON (LED On/Off)
4 PHD‐ (Pre Head‐)
5 PHD+ (Pre Head+)
6 FG2 (Frame Ground)
7 SGN (Signal Ground)
8 HDS1 (Head Detect1)
J6 (Read/Write Head) 14‐way connector

48 USB IMCRW

J7 (Motor) 1 LED+ (Motor Revolution Sensing)
2 PTR (Motor Revolution Sensing)
3 GND
4 Motor+
5 Motor‐
J9 (Spare Port) 10‐way connector
J11 (Battery) 1 BAT+ (Battery+)
(Connects to CROPF 2 BAT‐ (Battery‐)
Battery)
J31 (MEI Power and 1 +24V VCC
Control)
2 MEI
CN4 (Upper and Lower 1 +12V VCC
MEIs)
2 MEI A
3 MEI B
4 L‐back
5 SGN
J101 (Stage 1 CON1) 1 FG (Frame Ground)
(Connects to Stage 1 CIM
PCB)
2 GND
3 to 6 N/C
7 +24V VCC
8 N/C
9 CIMDT (CIM Detect)
10 MMDT (MM Detect)
11 SMTXD (CIM MM Transmit Data)
12 SMRXD (CIM MM Receive Data)
13 +24V VCC
14 SMRST (CIM MM Reset)
15 GND
16 to N/C
19
J102 (Stage 1 CON2) 8‐way N/C
J110 (Card Bin) 1 CUS (Capture Unit Sensing)
(Connects to latchfast card 2 & 3 N/C
capture bin harness)
4 EFS (Early Full Sensing)
5 & 6 N/C
7 CBES (Capture Box Exist Sensing)
8 +5V VCC

USB IMCRW 49
J201 (Stage 2 CON) 1 to 6 Contactless IC Card PCB Interface

8 to 22 CIM2‐5 PCB Interface
J301 (Shutter SOL Card 1 +24V VCC
Throat Switch) 2 Shutter SOL
3 GND
4 PI1 (Shutter Motion Sensor)
5 GND
6 SW1 (Card Throat SW)
CN1 (TK2 Read Head) 3‐way connector
J302 (IC Card Block) 19‐way connector
(Connects to J1 on IC Block
PCB)
CIM/MM PCB
The position of connectors on the CIM/MM PCB, located on the underside of the
UIMCRW, is as shown in the diagram below and their pinouts are given in the following
table:
Note: Connector CN101 is on the rear of the board.

CN51 (12V Reg.) 1 Reg.IN (24V)
2 GND
3 Reg.OUT (12V)
CN 52 (5V Reg) 1 Reg.IN (12V)
2 GND
3 Reg.OUT (5V)

50 USB IMCRW

CN11 1 +5V
(Connects to CIM Module) 2 MMDT (MM Detect)
3 Reset
4 TXD (Transmit Data)
5 RXD (Receive Data)
6 GND
8 GND
9 N/C
10 N/C
11 +5V
12 +5V
13 GND
14 GND
15 N/C
16 N/C
CN101 (Ribbon cable to
J101
on Base PCB)
CIM/MM With Security PCB
The position of connectors on the CIM/MM with security PCB, located on the underside
of the UIMCRW, is as shown in the diagram below and their pinouts are given in the
following table:.
CN22 CN21 CN51 CN52 CN23
CN32
CN11 CN31

CN51 (12V Reg.) 1 Reg.IN (24V)
2 GND
3 Reg.OUT (12V)
CN 52 (5V Reg) 1 Reg.IN (12V)
2 GND
3 Reg.OUT (5V)

USB IMCRW 51
CN11 1 +5V
(Connects to CIM Module) 2 MMDT (MM Detect)
3 Reset
4 TXD (Transmit Data)
5 RXD (Receive Data)
6 GND
8 GND
9 N/C
10 N/C
11 +5V
12 +5V
13 GND
14 GND
15 N/C
16 N/C
CN21 (P.EJ Sensor) 1 P.LED1 (Home sensor LED)
2 P.SEN1 (Home Sensor Tr.)
3 GND
4 P.LED2 (End Sensor LED)
5 P.SEN2 (End Sensor Tr.)
6 GND
CN22 (P.EJ. Motor) 1 PPH1
2 PPH2
3 PPH3
4 PPH4
5 +24V
6 +5V
7 PED (Power Eject Detect)
CN23 (Alge V Detect) 1 AVD (Algerian V Detect)
2 GND
CN31 (Throat Sweep 1 SW3
Sensor)
2 LED3
3 LED4
4 GND
5 LED1
6 SW1
7 LED2

52 USB IMCRW

8 SW2
9 GND
10 SW4
CN32 (Throat Sweep 1 TPH1
Motor)
2 TPH2
3 TPH3
4 TPH4
5 +12v
IC Block PCB
The position of connectors on the IC contact block PCB is as shown in the diagram below
and their pinouts are given in the following table:

J1 (19‐way ribbon cable to
Base PCB connector J302)
J2 (14‐way ribbon cable to
contact PCB)
J3 1 ICSOL+ (IC Contact SOL)
2 ICSOL‐ (IC Contact SOL)

USB IMCRW 53
Card Clamping PCB
The illustration below shows the connectors of the card clamping PCB.
CN32
CN31
CN101 CN102
The table below lists the pin and signal assignments of the connectors.

CN31(Card Clamper) 1 FS1
2 N/C
3 N/C
4 GND
5 N/C
6 N/C
7 N/C
8 N/C
9 GND
10 HEGDCT (Unit connection detect
(loop back))
CN32 (Card Clamper Motor) 1 PH1
2 PH2
3 PH3
4 PH4
5 COM
CN101 (19–way ribbon cable 1 N/C
to Base PCB connector J101)
2 GND
3 N/C
4 N/C
5 N/C
6 N/C
7 + 23 V

54 USB IMCRW

8 N/C
9 N/C
10 N/C
11 N/C
12 N/C
13 +23 V
14 N/C
15 GND
16 N/C
17 N/C
18 N/C
19 N/C
CN102 (8–way ribbon to Base 1 FSCK (motor pulse)
PCB connector J102)
2 FSAT (motor CW/CCW select)
3 FSEN (motor enable)
4 FS1 (unit SW signal)
5 N/C
6 HEGDCT (unit connection detect
(loop back))
7 N/C
8 N/C
CIM/MM Turnaround Plug
A turnaround plug (NCR Part No. 009‐0018452) is required to run the CIM/MM
diagnostic turnaround test.
Note: Connection or disconnection of the CIM or MM harness must only be done with
the ATM powered off.
The plug has the following components and arrangement:
 Wire‐PVC, UL Style 1061 24 AWG (7 x 30AWG), White, 006‐5830041
 Connector, 14‐way (2x7) Universal Ejection Style Pinless Headers, 006‐0088037

USB IMCRW 55
 Heat shrink.
Cards
The following cards are used to maintain and adjust the UIMCRW:
 Cleaning card (Sankyo No. EGCMC01881, NCR No. 998‐0052929)
 ST‐SW Card (throat microswitch SW1 adjustment) (Sankyo EGCMC0119)
 ISO Contact Position Smart Card Test Card (NCR No. 009‐0017008)

56 USB IMCRW

USB Smart Dip Card Reader 1
USB Smart Dip Card Reader

Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
The USB Smart Dip Card Reader is capable of reading cards with ISO magnetic tracks in
compliance with ISO/IEC 7810, 7811, 7813 standards and from smart cards to the ISO/IEC
7816‐3 I.C. card standard (Icc: 60mA mac). The card reader is also EMV compliant.
DESCRIPTION
The functions performed by the dip card reader are:
 Detects the insertion of a card (front position microswitch)
 Detects the card when fully inserted into the card reader (rear position microswitch)
 Reads data from track 1, 2 and 3 as the card is inserted into the reader or when the
card is removed from the reader
 Reads data from the smart chip on the card when the card is fully inserted and
latched
 Communicates with the PC Core through a USB port.
The card reader is located on the rear of the facia panel of ATMs.
There are no card capture, eject or power failure features fitted to the card reader. The
customer removes the card when the transaction is completed and after the card latch
has been released.

2 USB Smart Dip Card Reader
Magnetic Stripe Reading
The card is manually inserted into the card reader. During the insertion or removal the
magnetic stripe is read as it moves over the magnetic heads. If selecting either of the
diagnostic test options:
 Run to Run Sequence 1 ‐ Insert and remove card
or
 Run to Run sequence 2 ‐ Insert card and leave
then the card must be inserted fully until it is latched.
The card reader is capable of reading cards inserted at speeds between 10 cm/s and 100
cm/s (3.94 in./s and 39.4 in./s).
Note: A read failure will occur if the insertion/removal movement is stopped or jerked
during the insertion/removal action.
Smart Card Reading
The card is manually inserted into the smart dip card reader until the card is latched.
The data is read once the card is latched and power is applied to the smart card.
Security Feature
Provision is made on the Smart DIP PCB for future incorporation of a Security Access
Module (SAM) PCB.

TROUBLESHOOTING
Error message Possible Root Cause Isolation Procedure Resolution Procedure
Communications Failure USB cable removed. Inspect USB Insert USB plug.
Inspect_Now connections at hub,
PC core and card
reader
Card reader power Inspect power Switch off the
cable removed connections at PC power before
core and card reader inserting power
connector.
Card reader firmware Check for card reader Reset ATM
hung response
Card reader fault Card reader not Replace card reader
appearing
Magnetic Read Head Fault Read head is dirty. Clean the card
Clean_Soon reader heads.
Magnetic Reader Mechanism Magnetic reader Replace card reader
Failure Replace_Now mechanism fault
Latch Mechanism Failure Magnetic reader Replace card reader
Replace_Soon mechanism fault
Smart Reader Mechanism Smart reader Replace card reader
Failure ‐ Replace_Now mechanism fault
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
The only level 0 diagnostic self test performed at power up is on the solenoid operation
of the lock lever.
If the solenoid operation is not correct, i.e. jammed or similar, then a RED LED on the
card reader blinks 0.25s on, 0.25s off.
Level 1 Diagnostics
The following tests are provided:
Test Description
MENU This displays a menu of all the other Applets to allow an
operator to select one.
ENTER CARD AND REMOVE (READ_ON_WITHDRAWAL)
READ ISO TRACK 1
READ ISO TRACK 2
READ ISO TRACK 3

Test Description
ENTER CARD AND LEAVE INSERTED
SMART CARD RESET
READ ON WITHDRAWAL
FIRMWARE IDENTIFY The USBSDR driver revision and firmware identity numbers
are read and displayed as t‐data.
CLEANING CYCLE The following sequence of tests is executed:‐
ENTER CARD
SMART CARD RELEASE
EJECT CARD
Level 3 Diagnostics
S_DATA
The S_DATA returned for the smart dip card reader are:
S_DATA Meaning
00 GOOD (No error).
01 ROUTINE (Minor fault)
03 SUSPEND (Possible customer tampering)
04 FATAL (Device inoperative, USB comms error).
TALLIES
The tallies recorded for the smart dip card reader are:
Tally Description
CARDTRAN A card is fully inserted during accept.
NO DATA No data was read from the card during accept.
READ OPS Data verification is attempted.
READ ERR On read fails due to parity, or LRC.
BLANKTRK Card data has no start sentinel.
COMM_OPS An attempt to send a command to, or get a response
from the card reader driver, is made across the USB
interface.
COMM_RTY A USB comms retry is successful.
COMM_ERR A USB comms failure occurs.
NONSCDET The card present is detected not to be a smart card,
during the execution of the command to power on the
smart card.
SCDETECT The card present is detected to be a smart card, during
the execution of the command to power on the smart
card.
SCRESETS A smart card reset is carried out, during the execution of
the command to power on the smart card

Tally Description
SCRSTERR An error is found in the answer to reset, during the
execution of the command to power on the smart card.
SCCOMATT A communication is attempted between the card reader
and the smart card.
SCCOMRTY A communication retry was successfully carried out,
during the execution of a smart card related command.
SCRSPTIM The card reader reports that the smart card has failed to
respond within the specified timeout period.
UDIP INI Attempts to re‐initialise the device following a USB
disconnect.
STRAPPING
None
ADJUSTMENTS
There are no field adjustments.
None.
CABLING
No internal cabling.

USB mini‐B connector
Pin
Signal Name
No.
1 Vcc
2 D‐
3 D+
4 N/C
5 Gnd
Power connector
Pin
Signal Name
No.
1 24V
2 0V
The following test cards are required to perform level 1 diagnostic testing on the smart
dip card reader:
 ISO test card ‐ NCR part numbers 009‐0009494 (old) and 009‐0017008 (new)
 Cleaning Card ‐ NCR part number 998‐0052929.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
For the preventive maintenance schedule and details of the required tasks for the USB
Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo), refer to the Preventive Maintenance section of this
manual.

USB Contactless Card Reader 1
USB Contactless Card Reader

Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
This chapter gives servicing information for the USB Contactless Card Reader (USB CCR).
Antenna Unit LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4
Card
‘Landing Zone’
Antenna Overlay
DESCRIPTION
The USB CCR consists of two hardware components:
 An antenna unit (antenna, buzzer, 4 LED indicators and RF shield) housed in a
plastic case, mounted on the card orientation area of the facia (see illustration
above).
Note: By default the buzzer is disabled in the software.
 A control unit (power supply, digital and RF circuits) housed in a plastic moulded
case mounted inside the ATM.
The contactless interface is based on the industry standard ISO 14443 13.56MHz RFID
protocols, and supports a wide variety of contactless payment applications such as:
 MasterCard® PayPass™
 Visa Wave
 ExpressPay from American Express®
 MIFARE®
 Discover®

2 USB Contactless Card Reader
 JCB.
The USB CCR can be updated and upgraded in the field to add new contactless payment
applications.
For magnetic data type applications, customers wave or tap their contactless card, key
fob or other Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) enabled device on the front of the
'landing zone' indicated by the symbol shown below:
Both audio and visual acknowledgements can be returned to indicate to the customer
that their transaction is being authorized.
Note: Transactions requiring larger data sizes and/or transactions that require writing to
the card may require the card to be left on the 'landing zone' for longer, with audio and
visual indication specific to the application.
The USB CCR supports 24V operation and has USB 2.0 full‐speed communication
interfaces.

Antenna Unit Connectors
Control Unit Connectors

TROUBLESHOOTING
USB CCR Cable disconnected from Check cable Reconnect cable
disconnected USB CCR
USB cable disconnected Check cable Reconnect cable
from USB hub
Power cable Check power cable Reconnect power cable
disconnected from USB
CCR
Power cable Check power cable Reconnect power cable
disconnected from power
supply
Power supply fault Check power supply Repair power supply
actual voltage
USB CCR firmwear hung Check for card reader Reset ATM
response
USB CCR faulty Check for USB CCR Replace USB CCR
response
USB cable faulty Replace cable and reset Replace cable
Power cable faulty Replace power cable and Replace cable
reset
Not authorized USB CCR requires to be None Authorize USB CCR
authorized
DIAGNOSTICS
HW_DIAGNOSTICS Property
The USB CCR provides multiple diagnostic test Applets.
Note: Looping is allowed on all tests.
Applet ID Test Description

0 MENU This displays a menu of all the other Applets to allow an
1 Identification The following information is displayed:
1. Device Type: USB
2. Serial Number
3. Firmware Version


2 Detect Card The following sequence of tests is executed:
1. Start Transaction
2. Detect Card & Display either one of the following
card types:
 ISO 14443‐4 Type A
 ISO 14443‐4 Type B
 Mifare Type A (Standard)
 Mifare Type A (Ultralight)
 ISO 14443 Type A
 ISO 14443 Type B
3. Stop Transaction
If no card is present within 10 seconds then display
“Card Not Tapped” and the test will terminate.
HW_SELF_TEST Property
The USB CCR offers the following Applets for this property.

0 MENU This displays a menu of all the other Applets to allow an
1 Device Self Test The device self test.
1. The USBCCR is activated using Start
Transaction to detect a card ‐ if this
is unsuccessful then the test is
terminated and a ‘Fail’ Status
returned.
2. The operator is prompted to
present a card and allowed 10
seconds to do so ‐ if no card is
detected, the test fails with a ‘Not
Completed’ status, the USBCCR is
disabled and the test is terminated.
3. Upon card detection the card is
activated.
4. The Stop Transaction command is
issued ‐ if this is unsuccessful then
the test is terminated and a ‘Fail’
Status is returned.
5. End of test.

HW_MAINTENANCE PROPERTY
The USB CCR supports two Applets for this property.

0 MENU This displays a menu of the other Applets to allow an
1 Identification The following information is displayed:
1. Device Type: USB
2. Serial Number
3. Firmware Version
HW_CONFIGURATION PROPERTY
This feature supports device specific configuration and therefore provides a
configuration dialogue.

0 MENU This displays a menu of the other Applets to allow an
1 Report Device Type This Applet allows the operator to interrogate the
device for what type of device is present.
 Device Type: USB
2 Report Serial Number This Applet allows the operator to interrogate the
device for the Device Serial Number.
 Device Serial Number
3 Report Firmware Versions This Applet allows the operator to interrogate the
device for information relating to the device firmware.
 Firmware Version
 Loader Version
4 Set Device Configuration This Applet allows the operator to adjust configuration
parameters.
Note: If the Applet terminates due to a device fault then “Device Failure” will be
displayed.

STRAPPING
LEDs and MEEIs
The 4 LEDs on the antenna unit are dual purpose and act either as MEEIs or as
transaction progress indicators. An MEEI input on the control unit allows connection to
the Universal Misc I/F board to synchronize flashing with other MEEIs on the ATM.
Software on the control unit decides whether the LEDs are controlled by transaction or
by external MEEI input. If a transaction is taking place, the external MEEI input is ignored
and the LEDs indicate transaction progress as specified by the standards of the card
system being used.
Control Board
ADJUSTMENTS
None.
There are no field replaceable parts within the device.

CABLING
Harnesses
USB Contactless Card Reader LED Control
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 Pin Number
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 Wire Number
USB Contactless Card Reader RF
+24V Power
Molex 2‐way MiniFit Jnr. Pin2 MFBL.
Pin No. Signal Comment

1 +24V Vcc
2 0V 0V mates 1st
USB
USB 2.0 specification Mini‐B receptacle with through‐hole mounting tabs.

1 Vbus 5V
2 D‐ Data
3 D+ Data
4 ID N.C. (used for USB OTG)


5 Ground 0V
AUX
Connector providing additional control signals. Molex 87833‐1420.

1 +24V N.C. (Alternative +24V input)
2 0V N.C. (Alternative 0V)
3 +24V N.C. (Alternative +24V input)
5 N.C.
6 /MEEI_in (See Note2)
7 B DATA+in N.C. (See Note 1)
8 B DATA‐in N.C. (See Note 1)
11 TX0_232 N.C.
12 RX0_232 N.C.
13 /ISP‐INPUT N.C.
14 Vbus N.C. (Alternative Vbus connection)
Note 1: Alternative USB D+ connection only with population option ‐ not USB compliant.
Note 2: Input pin for MEEI. This pin is designed to be driven by a Universal Misc I/F MEEI
output. It must be pulled to 0V to illuminate the four MEEI LEDs. Otherwise, this pin must
be allowed to float. The pin contains an internal 10 k ohms pull‐up to +24V to drive the
MEEI detect circuit on the Universal Misc I/F.
R.F. Out
Molex micro fit connector providing R.F. to the antenna unit.
Note: Maximum cable length is 1.00 m (3.3 ft.).
Pin No. Signal

1 R.F.
2 Ground
LED/Buzzer
Connection between control unit and antenna unit. 8‐Way Molex milli‐grid.

1 +5V Supply from control unit
2 LED4 Logic 0 = LED on; Logic 1 = LED off


3 Buzzer Buzzer output from control unit
5 0V Supply from control unit
7 MOD_INDEX
None.

USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo) 1
USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo)

Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
Security Access Module (SAM)
LED
The USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo) is a Sankyo ICM330‐3R1395 Card Reader.
The card reader is capable of reading cards to the following standards:
Magnetic card
 ISO/IEC 7810
 ISO/IEC 7811
 ISO/IEC 7813
IC card
 ISO/IEC 7816/1‐3 (Icc: 60mA max)
 EMV ‘96 Ver 3.1.1
 EMV2000 Ver 4.0
Memory card
 GPM896
 SLE4442
 SLE4428
 I2C (24C01~24C256)
The card reader is encryption supported (triple DES and single DES).

2 USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo)
DESCRIPTION
Operation
Manual insert and pull out operation. Once inserted a card becomes latched and cannot
be removed until unlatched by the card reader.
Simultaneous read on ISO Tracks 1, 2 and 3.
Power
Power requirement:
Voltage DC 12V +/‐ 10%
Ripple <100 mVp‐p
Power impedance <1 omega
Current consumption:
Waiting (LED off) <100 mA
Solenoid on <400 mA
Rush (ICC on) <700 mA within 3ms
Interface Connections
1 15
J7
1 3 4
J1 1
CN1
1 2 2 1
LED
There is a single LED located at the front of the card reader.

USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo) 3
ERROR MESSAGES
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
For diagnostics, refer to the Diagnostics Overview section of this manual.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.
None.
CABLING
None.

4 USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo)
USB connector (J10)
Pin No. Signal Name
1 Vbus
2 D‐
3 D+
4 GND (signal)
DC power supply connector (J6)
Pin No. Signal Name I/O Function
1 +12V I +12V dc (main power supply)
2 PGN O Power ground (0V)
None.
Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo), refer to Card Readers in the Preventive Maintenance
section of this manual.

Card Recycler Module 1

Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the Card Recycler Module (CRM).
DESCRIPTION
Motorised Card Reader
The CRM is attached to the rear of the standard motorised card reader and has the
ability to capture customer cards, via the motorised card reader, in an open tray which
has a ten card capacity. The CRM also has the ability to store cards presented by the
customer in one of five bi‐directional slots. The bi‐directional slots enable cards to be
returned to customer via the motorised card reader.

2 Card Recycler Module
SPECIFICATIONS
Capacity
Slot Area Supports 5 card slots, card‐capture and return
Capture Tray CF66‐CR1A06A 10 cards
Electrical
Supply Voltage 24V DC ±20%
Power Consumption Idle Mode 2.0W, Load 7.0W
Environment
Acoustics <60db
Operating temperature ‐10°C to 50°C, (‐14°F to 122°F)
Storage temperature ‐20°C to 70°C, (‐4°F to 158°F)
Operating Humidity 90% RH or less, non‐condensing
Storage Humidity 10% to 90% RH
Other
USB USB 2.0 Hi‐Speed
Dimensions 125(L) x 102 (W) x 97(H)mm, 4.9(L) x 4.0(W) x 3.8(H)in
LED STATUS INDICATORS
Power Health Indicator
Capture Tray-Area Indicator

(OFF - no card in tray)
(ON - card in tray)
Slot Status Indicator
(OFF - no card in slot)
(ON - card in slot
TROUBLESHOOTING AND DIAGNOSTICS
None.
MAINTENANCE AND CONFIGURATION
None.

STRAPPING AND ADJUSTMENTS
None.
CAPTURED CARD REMOVAL
1. Locate the ATM Power Switch and turn to the OFF position ‘0’.
2. Disconnect the DC and USB cables from the rear of the module.
3. Remove and retain the four screws securing the CRM to the mounting plate.

4. Remove the CRM from the ATM and place on a clean flat surface.
5. Inspect the card carriage for any captured cards in the slots or the capture tray. Cards
found in the capture tray area can be removed through the access aperture in the top
of the module.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to the card slots if the next two steps are not
performed.

6. To permit the manual raising and lowering of the card slots, the card D‐Wheel needs
to be checked that it is in the clear position. Look through the inspection hole in the
frame to observe the grub screw. If the screw is in the position shown (facing
outwards) then the D‐Wheel is in the correct position.
7. If necessary, adjust the position of the grub screw using a 7mm nut runner to turn the
shaft clockwise.
Note: It is possible that a captured card is partially ejected at this point. It is therefore
essential that the card is extracted out the front of the module before moving the
carriage up or down.

8. The default position of the module card tray might not have any cards captured. You
may have to adjust the card slot vertical position to align the captured card with the
exit aperture in the front of the module. To do so, turn the shaft shown using a 7mm
nut runner; Clockwise to raise the slot and counter‐clockwise to lower the slot.

9. Push the card forward by hand from the rear of the module.
10. Pull the card to remove from the exit slot at the front of the module.
11. Repeat steps 8‐10 for each captured card.

12. Reset the card slot to the lowest position. (Reference step 8 to adjust).
Lowest card slot
13. Refit the CRM to the ATM and reconnect the USB and DC cables.
CABLING
CRM Power Harness
P3
3 2 1
2 (Black) 1
P1 (White) P2
1 2
None.
None.

SelfServ 23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual Section 08: Keyboards and Encryptors
Section Divider
Section 8 - Keyboards and Encryptors

Section Divider

Universal Encrypting PIN Pad (II) 1
Universal Encrypting PIN Pad (II)

Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the USB Encrypting PIN Pad II (U‐EPP II) used in the 66xx range of
terminals.
Heater Assembly
24V Power
USB Connector
The U‐EPP II gives protection to the cardholder’s Personal Identification Number (PIN)
and of the keys used to verify and encrypt these PINs.
DESCRIPTION
The U‐EPP II device operates as a USB 2.0 compliant full speed device attached to an NCR
PC Core and consists of the following hardware elements.
 16 key keyboard
 Integrated USB mainboard encompassing Secure Cryptographic functions.
Note: The U‐EPP II hardware does not support FDKs, or a PS/2 or USB QWERTY
keyboard.

2 Universal Encrypting PIN Pad (II)
Keyboard
The keyboard layout is configured during manufacturing and the U‐EPP II mainboard is
required to store the factory configuration information.
The keyboard will typically have digits 0 to 9 and function keys for clear, cancel, enter
and delete. When hexadecimal data entry is required the PIN pad will operate as a
regular hexadecimal key pad, providing one of 0 to 9 and A to F on any one key.
USB Mainboard
The U‐EPP II solution is implemented on a secure System on Chip (SoC). The board
cannot be removed from the keyboard.
Any attempt to disassemble the U‐EPP II will result in loss of all data within the security
module.
Removal Switches
The U‐EPP II incorporates removal switches, which detect the removal of the U‐EPP II
from the parent ATM. The U‐EPP II device monitors this switch, thus any security actions
can be directly invoked by the U‐EPP II. The ATM is notified via a device status change.
USB Interface
The USB interface is integrated into the mainboard. It supports USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 and
acts as a USB Full Speed device. The device uses a USB Mini B connector and is capable of
driving USB cables up to a maximum of 5m.

TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Possible Root Causes Isolation Resolution
Keys at end of life Number of key presses n/a Replace U‐EPP II
detected reaching end module
of rated life
Comms failure USB cable Check USB cable Re‐connect USB cable
disconnected from U‐
EPP II
USB cable Check USB cable Re‐connect USB cable
disconnected from
USB hub
USB cable faulty Replace USB cable and Connect USB cable
re‐test
Firmware validation Missing, incorrect or Contact software Re‐load firmware files
failed corrupt firmware files supplier
on hard disk
Firmware update Error updating n/a Replace U‐EPP II
failed firmware due to module
hardware failure
Tampered U‐EPP II device has n/a Replace U‐EPP II
detected a tamper module
condition and deleted
all keys
Requires initialisation Device cleared due to n/a Customer key loading
firmware update procedure
DIAGNOSTICS
If an alpha keyboard service only is present on the system then the following level 1
diagnostic tests are available:
 Key Detect Test
 Communications Echo Test
 PC Keyboard Test.
Looping is not allowed on the following tests:
 Key Detect Test
 Delete All User Keys
 PC Keyboard Test.
All tests are available from the rear panel, even those which require front interaction.
Tests will time out in absence of front keyboard interaction.
Level 0 Diagnostics
There are no level 0 diagnostics for the U‐EPP II.

Level 1 Diagnostics
The following level 1 diagnostic tests are available for the U‐EPP II.
Key Detect Test
A message is displayed asking the user to press each of the 16 numeric keys in turn, the
four left FDKs from top to bottom then the four right FDKs from top to bottom.
After each key press is detected the matrix code will be displayed (in hexadecimal). This
test will terminate if no key press is detected within 7 seconds of the previous key press.
This test runs until all keys have been pressed or the test times out. The test will not
complete if no key presses have been detected. If the position codes have the correct
values then this test passes, otherwise it results in a fail.
This test can only be conducted if the variant of the installed alpha keyboard service
indicates that FDKs are present.
Communications Echo Test
This tests the physical and link level layers. Bytes of data are first sent to the U‐EPP II. The
test then verifies whether the U‐EPP II responds with the same data bytes. If there is no
response from the device or the bytes are not correctly verified this test will return a fail.
Identify Command Test
Returns the identity of the U‐EPP II module and displays:
 Name and model
 Part number and key tip configuration
 U‐EPP II serial number
 Manufacturer serial number
 U‐EPP II firmware identifier and version
 Hardware version
 Security number.
This test will fail when there is no valid serial number or there is no response from the
device. Otherwise the test always results in a pass.
Report Status Test
This test displays the current status of the U‐EPP II including:
 whether the U‐EPP II is Good, has been Tampered or has been removed from the
fascia and requires re‐activation
 reporting the current security mode only ‘Secure’ option displayed.
If the status of the U‐EPP II is good then this test returns a pass, any other status returns
a fail.

PC Keyboard Test
Tests whether a PC keyboard key press can be detected.
The test will prompt for a key on the PC keyboard to be pressed. When a key press is
detected the Unicode code point will be displayed in hexadecimal, along with the
character (depending on the font used for the display). The test will terminate if no key
press is detected within 7 seconds of the previous key press.
This test will return a pass if at least one key press has been detected. If no key presses
have been detected then the test returns a fail.
Level 3 Diagnostics
S_DATA
S_DATA Meaning
00 Good (no error)
01 Routine (minor fault)
04 Fatal (requires immediate attention)
Tallies
Tally Description Tally ID Tally Mnemonic

PIN pad top key presses 0 KEYPRESS
Comms operations 1 COMM OPS
Comms retries 2 COMM RTY
Comms failures 3 REATTACH
Keys stuck 4 KEYSTUCK
Self Tests
The following tests are performed for the self test (see Level 1 Diagnostics for details of
the individual tests):
 Communications echo test
 Report status test.
 Key detect test
CONFIGURATION
The U‐EPP II supports configuration via the system application. Configuration Settings are
remotely viewable by default. However, they cannot be modified.
Configuration Options
The following options are available for configuration of the U‐EPP II:

Transfer Firmware Files
A memory stick/pen, flex disk or CD rom containing U‐EPP II firmware files will be
required for this operation. After the memory stick/pen, flex disk or Cd rom is inserted it
is checked for U‐EPP II firmware. Files found are then verified before being copied.
Once files are successfully copied, country version configuration may be required.
A shutdown and re‐boot is required for the changes to take affect.
Display Version Number
Displays the following information:
 U‐EPP II serial number
 MSN and the U‐EPP II firmware version (repeated if multiple modules are present)
 Security Configuration data
 Top‐level part number.
Select Country Version
Allows configuration of the country specific firmware versions. The system will prompt
for transfer of any required firmware files.
A shutdown and re‐boot is required for the changes to take affect.
Delete All User Keys
This option will delete all user keys. This option should typically be used if the U‐EPP II is
being removed from service. This option is only displayed if the Delete All User Keys pre‐
configuration parameter is enabled.
A confirmation message box will be displayed indicating that all the keys will be deleted
irreversibly if the OK button is pressed. If the OK button is not pressed within 10 seconds
the operation will be cancelled.
Note: If this option is completed the U‐EPP II will not function again until customer
encryption keys are reloaded.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

The U‐EPP II module is not a re‐workable item and has no serviceable parts therefore any
failure will require a complete replacement module.
Assembly Replacement
When unpacking a spare U‐EPP II assembly check for any signs of tampering. If tampering
is suspected then do not install the assembly.
If the assembly is tamper free:
1. Check and record the serial number of the new assembly in the NCR work order
system.
2. Locate the new serial number label.
3. Install the assembly exactly according to the kit instruction.
Note: Ensure that all grounding and safety precautions are followed as per installation
instructions.
4. Failure to follow the installation instructions may result in incorrect functioning of
the U‐EPP II
5. Fit the new serial number label to the ATM next to the tracer plate.
Defective Assembly Disposal
Damaged or defective assemblies must be returned to the customer for them to dispose
of as per their disposal procedures.
CABLING
No internal cabling.
None
None.


NCR SelfServ™ ATMs Service Manual Section 08: Keyboards and Encryptors
China Encrypting Pin Pad (USBCPIN) 1
China Encrypting Pin Pad (USBCPIN)

Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the USB China Encrypting PIN Pad (USBCPIN) used in the
terminals. The China‐EPP hereinafter will be referred as USBCPIN.
The USBCPIN gives protection to the cardholder’s Personal Identification Number (PIN)
and of the keys used to verify and encrypt these PINs.
Note: When a new USBCPIN is installed then CE must authorize the USBCPIN for
installation. See Authorise EPP for Installation.
Authorize EPP for installation
If the CE wants to remove the USBCPIN then the CE must authorize the USBCPIN for
removal. See Authorise for EPP Removal.
Authorize EPP for Removal
DESCRIPTION
The USBCPIN device operates as a USB 2.0 compliant full speed device attached to an
NCR PC Core and consists of the following hardware elements.
 16 key keyboard
 Integrated USB mainboard encompassing Secure Cryptographic functions.
There are four possible configurations for the USBCPIN.
 W/O heater, Hong Kong Layout
 With heater, Hong Kong Layout
 W/O heater, Taiwan Layout
 With heater, Taiwan Layout
Note: The USBCPIN hardware does not support FDKs, or a PS/2 or USB QWERTY
keyboard.

2 China Encrypting Pin Pad (USBCPIN)
Keyboard
The keyboard layout is configured during manufacturing and the USBCPIN mainboard is
The keyboard will typically have digits 0 to 9 and function keys for clear, cancel, enter
and delete. When hexadecimal data entry is required the PIN pad will operate as a
regular hexadecimal key pad, providing one of 0 to 9 and A to F on any one key. Keys are
made of stainless steel with etch engraving and colored graphics, front plate is Zinc alloy
die casting frame. All texts on the keypad is black, function keys with colored graphics
The two different keyboard layouts available are shown below.
HONGKONG LAYOUT TAIWAN LAYOUT
USB Mainboard
The USBCPIN solution is implemented on a secure System on Chip (SoC). The board
cannot be removed from the keyboard.Any attempt to disassemble the USBCPIN will
result in loss of all data within the security module.
Removal Switches
The USBCPIN incorporates removal switches, which detect the removal of the USBCPIN
from the parent ATM. The USBCPIN device monitors this switch, thus any security actions
can be directly invoked by the USBCPIN. The ATM is notified via a device status change.
USB Interface
acts as a USB Full Speed device. The device uses a USB Mini B connector and is capable of
driving USB cables up to a maximum of 5m.
Power Requirements
 Power supply: DC +5V +/‐ 10%, max 200mA
 DC +24V 1A for Heating; Environment temperature <0 deg C, start the highest
temperature not to exceed 50 deg C in the EPP surface (Optional).

Mechanical Characteristics
 Key lifespan: > 2,000,000 times
 Key bodies are zinc alloy and Keycaps are stainless steel, 12 keys 22 x 17mm with
R8.5 corners and 4 keys 31 x 17mm with R8.5 corners, with a raised dot on the "5"
key, embossing X/0/I and raised braille on function keys for aiding visually
handicapped users
 Key activation force: 2‐ 3N
 Key trip: >/=0.45mm
 Shell and key body material: zinc alloy
 Static load capacity <1000N
 Keycaps material: stainless steel
 Water‐proof device: a watertight gasket, silica material
ERROR MESSAGES
Keys at end of Number of key presses n/a Replace USBCPIN module
life detected reaching end of
rated life
Comms failure USB cable disconnected Check USB cable Re‐connect USB cable
from USBPIN
USB cable disconnected Check USB cable Re‐connect USB cable
from USB hub
USB cable faulty Replace USB cable and re‐ Connect USB cable
test
Tampered USBCPIN device has n/a Replace USBCPIN module
detected a tamper
condition and deleted all
keys
Keys at end of Number of key presses n/a Replace FDK Fascia
rated life

DIAGNOSTICS
If an alpha keyboard service only is present on the system then the following device
diagnostic tests are available:
 USBCPIN
 Key Detect Test
 PC Keyboard Test
 Key Detect Test
Level 0 Diagnostics
There are no level 0 diagnostics for the USBCPIN.
Device Diagnostics
The following level 1 diagnostic tests are available for the USBCPIN.
USBCPIN
This displays a menu of the all the other tests to allow an operator to select one.
Key Detect Test
A message is displayed asking the user to press each of the 16 numeric keys in turn, the
four left FDKs from top to bottom then the four right FDKs from top to bottom.
After each key press is detected the matrix code will be displayed (in hexadecimal). This
test will terminate if no key press is detected within 7 seconds of the previous key press.
values then this test passes, otherwise it results in a fail.
This test can only be conducted if the variant of the installed alpha keyboard service
This tests the physical and link level layers. Bytes of data are sent to the USBPIN feature
which forwards the message to the coredriver. The coredriver performs an Identify
command test in order to verify that the device is able to communicate. In that case, the
coredriver simulates the echo test response which is forwarded by the manager. Thus it

can be verified that the USBCPIN is available for communication. Additionally this test
ensures that response data is twisted and therefore misinterpreted. If there is no
response from the device or the bytes do not match what are expected this test will
return a fail.
This test ascertains the identity of the USBCPIN module and displays:
 M‐Status
 M‐Data
 EPP Type
 Loader Version
 Manufacturer Serial Number
 USBCPIN serial number
 Application Version
 Driver Version
 Tracer Number
 Part Number
 Name\Model Number
 Hardware Version
This test will fail when there is no valid serial number or there is no response from the
device. Otherwise the test always results in a pass.
Delete all User Keys
This test deletes all user keys irreversibly, but does not affect the keyspace structure.
When this test is invoked a menu will be displayed offering Yes or No options. The No
option will return the user to the diagnostic menu. The Yes option will display a message
box indicating that all the keys will be deleted irreversibly if the message box OK button
is pressed. If the OK button is not pressed within 10 seconds the operation will be
cancelled and the user returned to the Yes/No menu.
This option should typically be used if the USBPIN is being removed from service. If this
option is selected, the USBCPIN will not function again until customer encryption keys
are reloaded.
This test is only displayed if the Delete All User Keys pre‐configuration parameter is
enabled and always results in a pass, except where a timeout occurs when it is
considered not complete.

Report Status Test
This test displays the current status of the USBCPIN including:
 whether the USBCPIN is good, has been tampered or has been removed from the
fascia and requires re‐activation
 reporting the current security mode either ‘Secure’ or ‘Maintenance’ option
displayed
If the status of the USBCPIN is good then this test returns a pass, any other status returns
a fail.
PC Keyboard Test
Tests whether a PC keyboard key press can be detected.
The test will prompt for a key on the PC keyboard to be pressed. When a key press is
detected the Unicode code point will be displayed in hexadecimal, along with the
character (depending on the font used for the display). The test will terminate if no key
press is detected within 7 seconds of the previous key press.
This test will return a pass if at least one key press has been detected. If no key presses
have been detected then the test returns a fail.
PCI Audit Information Test
This test displays the PCI Audit Information as follow:
 Name\Model Number
 Loader Version
 Serial Number
Authorize EPP for Removal
This test prepares the EPP Device for a secure physical disassembly from an ATM. Key
commands are locked until the device is authorized for installation again. Following
authorisation removal of the USBCPIN will not result in tamper detection. On the other
hand, it is allowed to securely remove the device from the ATM without fearing to
activate tampering detection.
Authorize EPP for installation
In order to transport an USBCPIN device, key commands have to be locked (see
authorized for removal). After assembling the device on an ATM, key commands can be
reactivated by executing this test.

Device Self Test
The following device self tests are available for the USBCPIN.
USBCPIN
USBCPIN Self Test
The following tests (from the diagnostics tests) are performed for the self test:
1. A communications echo test command is sent to the ENCRYPTOR service. If this is
unsuccessful then the test is terminated and the test fails.
2. The report status test is used to identify whether there is a reason for the device to
not be fully operational. If this test fails then the test is terminated.
3. The key detect test is executed to ensure that the keyboard part of the pinpad is
operational, as the pinpad is used in the following test. The test is terminated if this
test fails.
4. The encryptor test is used to simulate a transaction, testing both the encryptor and
the overall operation of the device.
Tallies

CONFIGURATION
The USBCPIN supports configuration via the system application. Configuration Settings
are remotely viewable by default. However, they cannot be modified.
The following options are available for the configuration of USBCPIN.
USBCPIN
This test ascertains the identity of the USBCPIN module displaying:
 EPP Type
 Loader Version
 Manufacturer Serial Number
 Serial Number
 Application Version
 NAME\Model Number
 Part Number
Delete all User Keys
This test deletes all user keys irreversibly, but does not affect the keyspace structure.
When this test is invoked a menu will be displayed offering Yes or No options. The No
option will return the user to the diagnostic menu. The Yes option will display a message
box indicating that all the keys will be deleted irreversibly if the message box OK button
is pressed. If the OK button is not pressed within 10 seconds the operation will be
cancelled and the user returned to the Yes/No menu.
This option should typically be used if the USBCPIN is being removed from service. If this
option is selected, the USBCPIN will not function again until customer encryption keys
are reloaded. This test is only displayed if the Delete All User Keys pre‐configuration
parameter is enabled.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

The USBCPIN module is not a re‐workable item and has no serviceable parts therefore
any failure will require a complete replacement module.
When unpacking a spare USBCPIN assembly check for any signs of tampering. If
tampering is suspected then do not install the assembly.
If the assembly is tamper free:
1. Check and record the serial number of the new assembly in the NCR work order
system.
2. Locate the new serial number label.
CAUTION
Ensure that all grounding and safety precautions are followed as per
installation instructions.
Failure to follow the installation instructions may result in incorrect
functioning of the USBCPIN module.
4. Fit the new serial number label to the ATM next to the tracer plate.
CABLING
None.

Shown below are the connection points of the USBCPIN module.
Heater
USB mini B
USB mini B
Pin Signal
1 ‐5V
2 D‐
3 D+
4 GND
5 SHIELD
Heater
Pin Signal
1 24V
2 0V
None.
None.

Universal Encrypting Pin Pad (III) 1
Universal Encrypting Pin Pad (III)

Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the USB Encrypting Pin Pad III (U‐EPP III).
The U‐EPP III provides protection to the cardholder’s Personal Identification Number
(PIN) and of the keys used to verify and encrypt these PINs.
Heater Assembly
Labels
CAUTION

2 Universal Encrypting Pin Pad (III)
DESCRIPTION
The U–EPP III operates as a USB 2.0 compliant full speed device attached to an NCR PC
Core, uses PCI 3.x firmware features, and consists of the following elements:
 16 key keyboard
 Integrated USB mainboard that provides secure cryptographic functions
 Heaters (optional)
Keyboard
The keyboard layout is configured during manufacturing and the U–EPP III mainboard is
The keyboard has digits 0 to 9 and function keys for clear, cancel, enter, and delete.
When hexadecimal entry is required the PIN pad operates as a regular hexadecimal key
pad, providing one of 0 to 9 or A to F on any one key.
USB Mainboard
The U–EPP III solution is implemented on a secure System on Chip (SoC). The board
cannot be removed from the keyboard.
Any attempt to disassemble the U–EPP results in loss of all data within the security
module.
Removal Switches
The removal switches are used to detect removal of the U–EPP III from the parent
terminal.
The removal switches are normally closed when the EPP is fitted in the terminal. The
removal of the EPP from the terminal changes the state of the removal switches from
closed to open and automatically deletes the user encryption keys loaded in the EPP.
When the removal switches are in open state, PIN encryption operations are rejected
and PIN Entry mode is disabled.
Note: When the EPP has no power and is removed from the terminal, the user
encryption keys will be deleted on the next power–up.
A “Reset Removal Switches” command through the system application forces the
removal switches to change state from open to closed state. A transition of the removal
switches from open to closed state automatically activates removal switches monitoring.

USB Interface
acts as a USB Full Speed device.
The U–EPP III uses a USB Mini B connector and is capable of driving USB cables up to
maximum of 5m.
Power Requirements
Voltage Nominal Current Max Current
EPP Module USB 5V 140 mA 500mA
Heater 24V 1A
TROUBLESHOOTING
The following error messages are reported by the module. Refer to the sections “Module
Replacement” and “Adjustments” for detailed instructions on FRU actions. To de‐code
specific M_Status and M_Data use the Status Code Translator Tool available from
http://www.infoprod.ncr.com or refer to Diagnostic Status Code Notebook (B006‐6273).

Keys at end of Number of key presses n/a Replace U–EPP III module
rated life
Comms failure USB cable disconnected Check USB cable. Reconnect USB cable
from U–EPP III
USB cable disconnected Check USB cable. Reconnect USB cable
from hub
USB cable faulty Replace USB cable and Connect USB cable
re–test
Firmware Missing, incorrect or Contact software Re–load firmware files
validation corrupt firmware files on supplier
failed hard disk
Firmware Error updating firmware n/a Replace U–EPP III module
update failed due to hardware failure
Tampered U–EPP III device has n/a Replace U–EPP III module
detected a tamper
condition and deleted all
keys
Requires Device cleared due to n/a Customer key loading
initialisation firmware update procedure

DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics Overview section. To de‐code M_status and M_data use the Status Code
Translator Tool (available from http://www.infoprod.ncr.com) or refer to Diagnostic
Status Code Notebook (B006‐6273).
Level 0 diagnostics
There are no level 0 diagnostic tests for the U–EPP III.
Device Diagnostics
The U–EPP III provides the following Device Diagnostic Tests:
 Key Detect Test
 Identify Command Test
 Report Status
 Reset Removal Switches
 PCI Audit Information
If only an alpha keyboard service is present in the system, then only the following tests
are available:
 Key detect test
 PC keyboard test
 Key detect test
 Delete all user keys
 PC keyboard test
Key Detect Test
Asks the user to press each of the 16 numeric keys in turn, the four left FDKs from top to
bottom then the four right FDKs from top to bottom.
After each key press is detected the matrix code displays in hexadecimal format. This test
terminates if no key press is detected within 7 seconds from the previous key press.

values then this test passes, otherwise the test fails.
This test can only be performed if the variant of the installed alpha keyboard service
Tests the physical and link level layers of the EPP. Bytes of data are first sent to the EPP.
The test then verifies whether the U–EPP III responds with the same data bytes.
If there is no response from the device or the bytes are not correctly verified, this test
returns a fail.
Displays the following identification information of the U–EPP III module:
 Name and model
 Part number and key tip configuration
 U–EPP III serial number
 Manufacturer serial number
 U–EPP III firmware identifier version
 Hardware version
 Security version
This test fails when there is no valid serial number or there is no response from the
device. Otherwise, this test always results in a pass.
Report Status
Displays the current status of the U–EPP III. This includes whether the U–EPP III is Good
has been Tampered, or has been removed form the facia and requires re–activation
If the U–EPP III is not tampered, this test attempts to report whether there are keys
currently loaded into the encryptor.
If the status for the U–EPP III is good then this test returns a pass, any other status
returns a fail.
Reset Removal Switches
Forces a reset of the Removal Switches in the U–EPP III.
A confirmation window displays indicating that the removal switches have been
successfully closed.
Once the switches are closed, the EPP now monitors the state of the removal switches. A
transition of the switches from closed to open state deletes the user encryption keys and
blocks cryptographic commands.

PCI Audit Information
Displays the following PCI Audit information:
 Name/Model Number
 Loader Version
 Serial Number
Deletes all user keys. This option is used if the U–EPP III is being removed from service.
This option is only displayed if the Delete All User Keys pre–configuration parameter is
enabled.
A confirmation message box displays indicating that all the keys will be deleted
irreversibly if the OK button is selected.
If the OK button is not selected within 10 seconds, the operation will be cancelled.
If this operation is completed the U–EPP III will not function again until customer
This test always returns a pass, except where a timeout occurs when it is considered not
complete.
PC Keyboard Test
Tests whether a PC keyboard key press can be detected or not.
This test prompts for a key on the PC keyboard to be pressed. When a key press is
detected the Unicode code point is displayed in hexadecimal format, along with the
character (depending on the font used for the display.)
The test terminates if no key press is detected within 7 seconds of the previous key press.
This test returns a pass if at least one key press has been detected. If no key presses have
been detected then test returns a fail.
Device Self Test
The USB EPP III Self Test performs the following Device Diagnostic tests:
 Report status test
 Key detect test
Refer to the “Device Diagnostic” section for details of the tests.

Tallies
The table below lists the tallies that the U–EPP provides.

STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
The U–EPP III supports configuration through the system application. Configuration
settings are remotely viewable by default, however they cannot be modified.
The U–EPP provides the following configuration options:
 Transfer Firmware Files
 Display Version Number
 Select Country Version
Transfer Firmware Files
A memory stick/pen, flex disk or CD–Rom containing U–EPP III firmware files is required
for this operation. After the memory stick/pen, flex disk or CD–Rom is inserted it is
checked for U–EPP III firmware. Files found are then verified before being copied.
Once files are successfully copied, country version configuration may be required.
A system shutdown and re–boot is required for the changes to take effect.
Displays the following information:
 U–EPP III serial number
 MSN and the U–EPP III firmware version (repeated if multiple modules are present)
 Security Configuration data
 Top–level part number

Select Country Version
Allows configuration of the country specific firmware versions. The system will prompt
for transfer of any required firmware files.
A system shutdown and re–boot is required for the changes to take effect.
Deletes all user keys. This option is used if the U–EPP III is being removed from service.
This option is only displayed if the Delete All User Keys pre–configuration parameter is
enabled.
A confirmation message box displays indicating that all the keys will be deleted
irreversibly if the OK button is selected.
If the OK button is not selected within 10 seconds, the operation will be cancelled.
If this operation is completed the U–EPP III will not function again until customer
This test always returns a pass, except where a time–out occurs when it is considered not
complete.
The U–EPP III module is not a re–workable item and has no serviceable parts, any failure
requires a complete module replacement.
Damaged Assembly Disposal
Disassemble the faulty device removed from the terminal to activate the tamper sensors
and ensure permanent erasure of all sensitive information contained within the device.
When unpacking a spare U–EPP III assembly, check for any signs of tampering. If
tampering is suspected then do not install the assembly. Report the event to NCR, follow
the escalation procedure documented in process SSPD.2.5.1_PRO1_WCS_GLOBAL.
If the assembly is tamper free, perform the following steps:
1. Check and record the following information:
 Serial number of the new device
 Serial number of the faulty device
 Confirmation and erasure of sensitive data from faulty device
 Customer Engineer ID
2. Provide the recorded information to the key custodian.

CAUTION
Make sure that the terminal is powered off during the EPP
installation until such time the EPP is fully fitted to the terminal.
Make sure that all grounding and safety precautions are followed as
per installation instructions.
Failure to follow the installation instruction may result in incorrect
functioning of the U–EPP III.
4. Fit the new serial number label to the terminal next to the tracer plate.
Key Loading
Before loading user encryption keys, make sure that the key custodian verifies the
following:
 That the Customer Engineer ID is valid by checking against a list previously provided
by the customer service organisation.
 That the service call work order was scheduled and expected.
 That the EPP serial number of the device matches the serial number provided by
NCR.
If the key custodian cannot verify the CE ID, work order, or serial number, then the
customer keys must not be loaded and escalation procedure shall be implemented as per
the customer security policy.
After the user encryption keys are loaded, issue a Reset Removal Switches command
through System Application to ensure that the removal switches are closed and PCI 3.x
compliant firmware features are active.
CABLING
None

The illustration below shows the connector assignments for the U–EPP III.
USB Mini B Heater Connector

Molex 2-Way Mini-fit Junior
None.
None.

SelfServ 23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual Section 09: Display
Section Divider
Section 9 - Display

Section Divider

15 inch USB Projected Capacitive Touch Screen 1
15 inch USB Projected Capacitive Touch

Screen
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the 15 inch USB Projected Capacitive (USB PCAP) Touch Screen
which uses projected capacitive technology to provide accurate touch detection.
CAUTION
Make sure ESD precautions are observed.
DESCRIPTION
The USB Projected Capacitive Touch Screen module is made up of the following
components:
 Touch Screen Glass Sensor
 Two–Part controller (Controller Board and A/D Board)
 Flex circuit–10 circuit cable
The illustration below shows the interconnection diagram of the PCAP touch screen.
To USB HUB
CON 4
Flex Ciruit - 10 Circuit Cable CON3
CON2 CON1 Controller Board
Dual Flex
CON2
Glass Sensor
Single Flex
CON1
A/D Board

2 15 inch USB Projected Capacitive Touch Screen
Glass Sensor
The glass sensor is a chemically toughened glass with electrodes arranged into rows and
columns. Each electrode is routed back to the controller through a trace on the glass.
The sensor uses a dual flex tail cable to connect to the controller board and a single flex
tail cable to connect to the A/D board.
The location of the flex tail connectors and the active area of the touch screen varies
across products.
Two–Part Controller (Controller Board and A/D Board)
The USB PCAP touchscreen use a two–part controller for signal processing.
 Controller board
 A/D board
The controller and A/D board are connected to each other through a detachable Flex
Circuit–10 Circuit cable. The controllers use flex tail ZIF connectors to connect the flex tail
cables from the touchscreen and the flex circuit–10 circuit cable.
The controller board uses a 5–pin right angled header for USB connection.
Locations of the Controller board and A/D board vary across products the touch screen is
fitted in. The illustrations below show the locations of the boards in different
configurations.
Dual flex cable
Flex circuit-10 circuit cable
Controller board
A/D board
USB touch cable
Single flex cable
Configuration A
Flex circuit-10 circuit cable
Dual flex cable
A/D board
Single flex cable

Controller board
Configuration B

Controller Board
The illustrations below show the front view and rear view of the controller board.
Mounitng hole Double Stick Tape
CON 1 CON 2
1 34 1 34
Mounting
CON 3 holes
1
10
1 5
CON 4
Conductive Pad or
Front View Rear View
Mounting Hole
A/D Board
The illustration below shows the front view and rear view of the A/D board.
CON 1 Double Stick

Tape
CON 2
Front View Rear View
Projected Capacitive Technology
The touchscreen controller continually scans and monitors the capacitance of the
electrodes in the glass sensor. When a finger touches the surface of the touchscreen, it
pulls a small portion of charge changing the capacitance of the electrodes. The
controllers then determine the coordinates where the change in capacitance occurred to
locate the touched area.

Power Requirements
The sensor and A/D board are powered by the controller board.
The table below lists the power requirements of the PCAP touchscreen.
Input Voltage +5 Vdc (+‐ 5%) from USB VBUS
Input Current 150 mA max. (130 mA typical)
USB PCAP Touch Screen Feature Driver
Windows XP Operating Systems require the Touchbase UPDD driver (Tbupddwu.exe) to
be installed to support the USB PCAP Touch Screen feature. The Touchbase driver is
included in the USB Touch Screen install for third party driver support.
Windows 7 Operating Systems use native drivers.
ERROR MESSAGES
The PCAP touch screen does not send out any error messages. If no PCAP touch screen is
detected in SysApp, check the cable connections.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
There are no level 0 diagnostics.
Device Diagnostics
To verify correct screen calibration of the touchscreen, follow the steps below.
1. Access the System Application Menu.
2. Select Device Diagnostics.
3. Select USP PCAP Touch Screen.
4. Select Display Touch Coordinates to execute the touchscreen device diagnostic test.

5. Touch the screen anywhere. The test displays the last touched point on the screen as
a dot with the X and Y coordinates.
6. Touch the Cancel area to terminate the test.
Note: If no touch is detected within 30 seconds, the test automatically terminates.

Device Self Test
To perform the device self test of the touch screen, follow the steps below.
2. Select Device Self Test.
3. Select USB PCAP Touch Screen to execute the touch screen self test. The application
displays the test screen below.
4. Touch the screen anywhere. A status message that confirms the touch is displayed.
Note: If a touch is not detected within 5 seconds, the test times out and a message
that indicates the error is displayed.
STRAPPING
None

ADJUSTMENTS
Touch Screen Configuration
To calibrate the touch screen, perform the steps below.
2. Select Self Service Configuration.
3. Select Set Device Configuration.
4. Select USB PCAP Touch Screen.
5. Select Touch Screen Calibration to execute the calibration application.
Note: The calibration test can be cancelled using the cardholder keyboard.
6. Touch the various defined screen points to complete the calibration. Once the
calibration process is complete, the calibration application displays a test screen with
four buttons.
7. Touch the four buttons to test the accuracy of the calibration.
8. The calibration test returns a Pass/Fail condition of 11 (Calibration Immediate.)
Note: The calibration test always returns the Pass/Fail condition whether or not the
calibration is succesful.

The following are the field replaceable units of the USB PCAP Touch Screen:
 Touch Screen Glass Sensor
 Controllers
Note: The touch screen and controllers have different installation configurations across
products.
Touch Screen Glass
Configuration A
The recommended way to remove the touch screen for this configuration is to remove it
from the terminal together with the display and controllers as a single assembly.
1. Disconnect the following cables:
 VGA cable from the display
 USB touch cable from the USB hub
2. Remove the screws that secure the touch screen to the terminal as shown below.
Touch Screen Top Screws
Touch Screen Bottom Screws
3. From the front of the facia, hold the touch screen on the left and right side and push
upwards to slide the touch screen about 20‐40 mm, then lift the touch screen clear
from the facia moulding.
4. Place the assembly face down on a clean, flat, and non–abrasive surface.

5. Disconnect the following cables of the defective touch screen glass:
 dual flex cable from the controller board
 single flex cable from the A/D board
6. Remove the screws that secure the controllers and display assembly from the
defective touch screen glass and fit the assembly to the new touch screen.
Screws
Screws
7. Connect the flex cables of the new touch screen to the controllers.
8. Fit the new touch screen to the terminal. Make sure that there is no gap between the
touch screen and lower facia.
9. Secure the touch screen to the terminal with the screws removed earlier.
10. Connect the following cables:
 USB touch cable to the USB hub
 VGA cable to the display
11. Calibrate the touch screen using the Touch Screen Configuration test in SysApp to
make sure that the touch screen functions properly.
Configuration B
1. Disconnect the following cables:
 USB touch cable from the USB hub
 dual flex cable from the controller board
 single flex cable from the A/D board

2. Remove the screws that secure the facia to the facia brackets as shown below.
Screws Screws
3. On one side, lift the facia off from the bracket and insert the screw driver through the
access hole to remove the pan head screw.
Access
Hole

4. Refit the facia to the bracket and remove the equivalent screw on the other side.
Access
Hole
5. Secure the facia to the facia brackets with the screws removed earlier.
Note: The two pan head screws removed through the holes do not need to be
refitted later.
6. Remove the top and bottom screws of the touch screen.
Top Screws
Bottom Screws
7. From the front of the facia, hold the touch screen on the left and right side and push
upwards to slide the touch screen about 20–40 mm, then lift the touch screen clear
from the facia moulding.
8. Fit the new touch screen to the terminal. Make sure that the flex cables are properly
inserted through the slots in the facia frame. Make sure that there is no gap between
the touch screen and lower facia.
9. Secure the touch screen to the terminal with the screws removed earlier.

10. Connect the following cables:
 Dual flex cable to the controller board
 Single flex cable to the A/D board
 USB touch cable to the USB hub
Note: The A/D board may need to be removed from the display to have better
access to connect the flex cables as shown below.
make sure that the touch screen functions properly.

Controllers
Both the controller board and A/D board will be replaced if either one of them is
defective.
Configuration A
To replace the controllers, perform the steps below.
1. Take note of the routing of the flex cables from the touch screen to the controllers
and the flex circuit–10 circuit cable that connects the boards to each other.
2. Disconnect the following cables from the controller board:
 USB Touch cable
 Dual flex cable
3. Remove the screw that secures the controller board and its cover as shown below.
Screw
4. Remove the screws that secure the controller board to the cover.
Screws
Screws
5. Fit and secure the new controller board to the cover.

6. Connect the following cables to the controller board:
 dual flex cable
 flex circuit–10 ciruit cable
 USB touch cable
7. Disconnect the following cables from the A/D board:
 single flex cable
 flex circuit–10 circuit cable
8. Remove the screw that secures the A/D board and cover as shown below.
Screw
9. The A/D board is mounted using a double stick tape on the rear of the board as
shown below. Take note of the position and orientation of the board then carefully
remove the board from the cover.
Cover
A/D board
Double
stick tape
10. Attach the new A/D board to the cover.
11. Fit and secure the new board and cover to the terminal.
12. Connect the following cables to the A/D board:
 flex ciruit–10 ciruit cable
make sure the touch screen functions properly.

Configuration B
1. Take note of the routing of the flex cables from the touch screen to the controllers
and the flex circuit–10 circuit cable that connects the boards to each other.
2. Disconnect the following cables from the controller board:
 USB Touch cable
 Dual flex cable
3. Remove the screws that secure the controller board and its cover as shown below.
Screws
4. Remove the screws that secure the controller board to the cover.
Screws
Screws
5. Fit and secure the new controller board to the cover.
6. Connect the following cables to the controller board:
 dual flex cable
 flex circuit–10 ciruit cable
 USB touch cable
7. Disconnect the following cables from the A/D board:

8. Remove the screw that secures the A/D board and cover as shown below.
Screw
9. Bend the bottom part of the cover to open it and access the A/D board which is
mounted using a double stick tape on its bottom side. Take note of the position and
orientation of the board then carefully remove the board from the cover.
10. Attach the new A/D board to the cover.

11. Connect the following cables to the A/D board while the cover is still open as shown
below:
12. Close the cover, then fit and secure the new board and cover to the terminal.
make sure the touch screen functions properly.
CABLING
Flex Circuit ‐ 10 Circuit Cable
The illustration below shows the flat flexible cable used to connect the controller board
and A/D board.

Glass Sensor
The tables below lists the pinout assignments of the glass sensor flexi tail connectors.
Single Flex Connector

1 Y1 28 Y28
2 Y2 29 Y29
3 Y3 30 Y30
4 Y4 31 Y31
5 Y5 32 Y32
6 Y6 33 Y33
7 Y7 34 Y34
8 Y8 35 Y35
9 Y9 36 Y36
10 Y10 37 Y37
11 Y11 38 Y38
12 Y12 39 Y39
13 Y13 40 Y40
14 Y14 41 Y41
15 Y15 42 Y42
16 Y16 43 NC
17 Y17 44 NC
18 Y18 45 NC
19 Y19 46 NC
20 Y20 47 NC
21 Y21 48 NC
22 Y22 49 NC
23 Y23 50 NC
24 Y24 51 NC
25 Y25 52 NC
26 Y26 53 NC
27 Y27 54 NC

Dual Flex Connector
CON1 CON2
Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal
1 GND 1 NC
2 NC 2 X28
3 NC 3 X27
4 NC 4 X26
5 NC 5 X25
6 X56 6 X24
7 X55 7 X23
8 X54 8 X22
9 X53 9 X21
10 X52 10 X20
11 X51 11 X19
12 X50 12 X18
13 X49 13 X17
14 X48 14 X16
15 X47 15 X15
16 X46 16 X14
17 X45 17 X13
18 X44 18 X12
19 X43 19 X11
20 X42 20 X10
21 X41 21 X9
22 X40 22 X8
23 X39 23 X7
24 X38 24 X6
25 X37 25 X5
26 X36 26 X4
27 X35 27 X3
28 X34 28 X2
29 X33 29 X1
30 X32 30 NC
31 X31 31 NC
32 X30 32 NC
33 X29 33 NC
34 NC 34 GND

Controllers
Controller Board
The tables below list the pinout assignments of the controller board connectors.
CON 1

1 GND 18 X32
2 NC 19 X17
3 X1 20 X18
4 X2 21 X19
5 X3 22 X20
6 X4 23 X21
7 X5 24 X22
8 X6 25 X23
9 X7 26 X24
10 X8 27 X25
11 X9 28 X26
12 X10 29 X27
13 X11 30 X28
14 X12 31 X29
15 X13 32 X30
16 X14 33 X31
17 X15 34 NC
CON 2

1 NC 18 X48
2 X32 19 X49
3 X33 20 X50
4 X34 21 X51
5 X35 22 X52
6 X36 23 X53
7 X37 24 X54
8 X38 25 X55
9 X39 26 X56
10 X40 27 X57
11 X41 28 X58
12 X42 29 X59
13 X43 30 X60
14 X44 31 X61
15 X45 32 X62
16 X46 33 X63
17 X47 34 GND

CON 3
Pin Signal
1 VCD
2 NC
3 OE
4 VDD
5 Token
6 AVSS
7 Clock
8 AVSS
9 NC
10 NC
CON 4
Pin Signal
1 VUSB
2 D‐
3 D+
4 GND
5 Shield

A/D Board
The tables below lists the pinout assignment for the A/D board connectors.
CON 1

1 Y1 28 Y28
2 Y2 29 Y29
3 Y3 30 Y30
4 Y4 31 Y31
5 Y5 32 Y32
6 Y6 33 Y33
7 Y7 34 Y34
8 Y8 35 Y35
9 Y9 36 Y36
10 Y10 37 Y37
11 Y11 38 Y38
12 Y12 39 Y39
13 Y13 40 Y40
14 Y14 41 Y41
15 Y15 42 Y42
16 Y16 43 NC
17 Y17 44 NC
18 Y18 45 NC
19 Y19 46 NC
20 Y20 47 NC
21 Y21 48 NC
22 Y22 49 NC
23 Y23 50 NC
24 Y24 51 NC
25 Y25 52 NC
26 Y26 53 NC
27 Y27 54 NC
CON 2
Pin Signal Pins Signal

1 VCD 6 AVSS
2 NC 7 Clock
3 OE 8 AVSS
4 VDD 9 NC
5 Token 10 NC

There are no test and adjustment tools required for this device.
None.


Backlight Displays 1
Backlight Displays
Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the 7.0 inch and 10.4 inch colour backlight displays.
These TFT‐LCD panels are self‐contained replaceable units.
DESCRIPTION
 Signal Interface: LVDS
 Power consumption (Typical): 7 inch ‐ 3.7W, 10 inch ‐ 4.7W
 Display Colours: 262K/16.2M (6‐bit / 6‐bit + FRC)
 Input Voltage VDD (Typical): 3.3V
 Operating Temperature: ‐30 to 85 degrees C
 Storage Temperature: ‐30 to 85 degrees C
Interface Connections
CAUTION
Disconnect the power supply before inserting or removing the LVDS connector.
CAUTION
When inserting or removing the LVDS Connector, do not rotate or tilt the connector.

2 Backlight Displays
7.0 inch Display
1 LVDS Connector
20
4
1
Backlight Connector
10.4 inch Display
LED Driver
Light Bar Connector
3
Connector
1
1 5
20
1 LVDS Connector
ERROR MESSAGES
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
For diagnostics, refer to Diagnostics Overview section of this manual.

STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.
There are no field replaceable parts in the displays.
CABLING
There is no field replaceable internal cabling.

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENTS/PINOUTS
7.0 Inch Display
LVDS Connector

1 VDD 11 RxIN3‐
2 VDD 12 RxIN3+
3 UD 13 GND
4 LR 14 RxCLKIN‐
5 RxIN1‐ 15 RxCLKIN+
6 RxIN1+ 16 GND
7 GND 17 SEL68
8 RxIN2‐ 18 NC
9 RxIN2+ 19 RxIN4‐
10 GND 20 RxIN4+
Backlight Connector
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 ON/OFF (3.3V on, GND off)
3 Dimming (Analog 0‐5V)
4 VDD (12V Power Input)
10.4 Inch Display
LVDS Connector

1 VDD 11 RxIN2‐
2 VDD 12 RxIN2+
3 GND 13 GND
4 DPS 14 RxCLKIN‐
5 RxIN0‐ 15 RxCLKIN+
6 RxIN0+ 16 GND
7 GND 17 RxIN3‐
8 RxIN1‐ 18 RXIN3+
9 RxIN1+ 19 RSV
10 GND 20 SEL68

LED Driver Connector
Pin Signal
1 VCC (12V input)
2 GND
3 ON/OFF (5V on, 0V off)
4 Dimming (PWM)
5 NA
Light Bar Connector
Pin Signal
1 LED anode (red)
2 LED cathode (white)
3 LED cathode (black)
None.
None.


15 Inch Dynamo Displays 1

Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the 15 inch Dynamo Displays (Standard Bright and Sunlight
Readable) and Thermal Management Module (TMM).
DESCRIPTION
Dynamo 15 inch Standard Bright and Sunlight Readable displays will display at least
262,144 colours (6 bit colour) and will automatically scale VGA, SVGA and XGA formats to
fill the entire viewable area of the display.
The key functional elements of displays are listed below.
 Video Controller Board ‐ The video board includes a digital interface for DVI and an
analog interface for VGA. The scaling processor supports VGA, SVGA, XGA, and SXGA
resolutions from the PC Core. It also consists of LVDS and Back Light interfaces for the
LCD panel.
 OSD Button Board ‐ This is where the OSD controls can be accessed. The OSD buttons
are SWB1(Menu), SWB2(Select), SWB3(Up) and SWB4(Down).
 FSD Personality Board ‐ The FSD personality board includes thermal management
control, 4‐port USB Hub(3 ports for external use and 1port for microcontroller), DC‐
DC power management system and also contains flash based C8051F387
microcontroller.

2 15 Inch Dynamo Displays
 Dynamo Display Chassis ‐ The chassis supports the Back Light LCD Panel, Video
Controller Board, OSD Button Board and FSD personality Board. On the Sunlight
Readable display it also supports the Internal temperature sensor board.
 DC/AC Inverter Board ‐ Sunlight Readable display only. This device is a DC‐AC
Inverter unit for four CCFL lamps. It has brightness function, a sensing function for
running out of lamp (alarm output) and shutdown function.
Thermal Management Module (TMM)
The TMM is used along with Dynamo Displays to allow forced air cooling of the LCD panel
when under thermal load. The TMM firmware functionality is intended to maintain
display panel temperature within the range of 10°C to 40°C. TMM is physically 'module
swap' compatible with the existing products that use Dynamo or GDS displays. Also TMM
is specific to Dynamo or GDS dsplays and not compatible with each other.
When the panel is heated by the sun, air is pulled through the filter situated at the rear of
the cabinet by the fans mounted internally. The flow of air is directed over the top of the
display and then down the face of the LCD panel across the full width of the viewing area,
eventually exhausting from the bottom of the Display/TMM module when assembled in
a Product with an exterior Touchscreen or FDK bezel assembly. When the panel is cooled
by low temperature, the heater ensures the panel is kept within correct operating
conditions.
Temperature values acquired from the heater, internal, & external temperature sensors
are used to trigger the heater ON/OFF for maintaining bezel within the desired
temperature limits. If internal temperature sensor fails, external temperature sensor is
used to control the heater and vice versa. If all the temperature sensors fail, the heater
should never switch ON. The temperature sensors are listed below.
 Front Sensor
 Heater Sensor
 External Sensor (present only on specific products)
Power Requirements
The Dynamo Display receives power from the external +24V DC supply with parameters
+24V +10% tolerance, and 4.0 A current maximum. It then supplies power for the TMM
and the external USB devices.

Warm‐up Time
The Dynamo Displays and TMM units shall warm up and achieve full operating
specification within twenty (20) minutes of power being applied to the unit under normal
operating conditions. This time shall apply even in the event of momentary loss of
power.
Configuration
Dynamo Display
The Dynamo 15 inch display interfaces to the PC Core via two cables: a USB cable for USB
upstream, and a DVI or VGA cable for video communications. The Displays will support
the configuration below:
ERROR MESSAGES
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
None.
STRAPPING
None.

ADJUSTMENTS
Dynamo Display
The unit is equipped with controls to allow adjustment of the picture set‐up. These
controls are located on the rear of the unit and will allow the following adjustments:
 Contrast
 Phase
 Vertical Image Position
 Horizontal Image Position
 Clock

The Dynamo Displays and Thermal Management Module are "module‐swap" units.
These modules are not re‐workable and have no serviceable parts, therefore, any failure
will require a complete replacement module.
Thermal Management Module (TMM)
To replace TMM assembly from the Display unit which is already removed from the
product.
1. Identify the 6 mounting screws securing the TMM to the Display and remove them as
appropriate.

2. Identify and remove the Internal Sensor cable connector from the Display.
Internal Sensor Cable
3. Remove the nut on the Display mounting bracket and then take out the sensor
bracket.
Display Mounting Bracket
Sensor Bracket

4. Lift the TMM assembly and then detach the Fan and Heater conectors from Display
assembly.
Heater
Fan
Fan
5. Replace the TMM assembly and put back all the connectors and fasteners.
Display
TMM
Display Mounting
Bracket
Damaged or defective assemblies must be returned to the customer for disposal
according to their disposal procedures.

CABLING
None.
Dynamo Display
 USB ports ‐ The 15 inch Dynamo Display has four USB 2.0 ports. The mini USB port is
reserved for the C8051F387 microcontroller and the other three are for external USB
ports each with a capability of supplying up to 500mA.
 VGA Connector ‐ The Video Graphics Array (VGA) connector is a three‐row 15‐pin DE‐
15 connector.
 DVI Connector ‐ The Digital Video Interface (DVI) connector for the video board is the
DVI‐I (integrated ‐ digital and analog) connector.
 Sensor Connector ‐ Front/Heater Sensor cable or the External Sensor cable can be
attached here.
Sensor Connector
Sensor Connector
mini B USB Type A

DVI-I Dual USB
VGA Power Type A USB
 Heater Connector ‐ This connects the heater element from TMM to Display.

 Fan Connectors ‐ This connects the two fans in TMM to the Display.
Heater
Fan
Fan
Mini B USB Port
Pin Name Description

1 VBUS +5V
2 D‐ Data‐
3 D+ Data+
4 ID None
5 GND Signal Ground
Type A USB Single Connector

1 USBPWR +5V
2 USBD‐ Data‐
3 USBD+ Data+
4 USBGND Signal Ground
Type A USB Dual Connector

1 USB1PWR +5V
2 USB1‐ Data1‐
3 USB1+ Data1+
4 USB1GND Signal Ground
5 USB2PWR +5V
6 USB2‐ Data2‐
7 USB2+ Data2+
8 USB2GND Signal Ground

VGA Connector

1 Red Analog signal input
2 Green Analog signal input
3 Blue Analog signal input
4 Reserved NC
5 GND Ground
6 Red return Ground
7 Green return Ground
8 Blue return Ground
9 5v Supply Supply
10 GND Ground
11 Reserved NC
12 DDC DATA VGA DDC DATA
13 HS Horizontal Sync
14 VS Vertical Sync
15 DDC CLK VGA DDC CLOCK
DVI‐I Connector

1 CH2‐ ½ of Channel 2 differential
pair
2 CH2+ ½ of Channel 2 differential
pair
3 GND TMDS Data 2/R Shield
Ground
4 n/c Unused 2nd DVI Link
6 DDC_CLK DVI DDC Clock
7 DDC_Data DVI DDC Data
8 VS Vertical Sync / nc
pair
pair
11 GND TMDS Data 1/3 Shield
Ground
14 +5V Power for DDC EEPROM
15 GND Ground
16 LVHPDET Hot Plug Detect
pair


pair
19 GND TMDS Data 0/5 Shield
Ground
22 GND TMDS Clock Shield Ground
23 CLOCK+ ½ of Clock differential pair
24 CLOCK‐ ½ of Clock differential pair
25 Red Red / nc
26 Green Green / nc
27 Blue Blue / nc
28 HS Horizontal Sync /nc
29 GND Ground
30 GND Ground
Temperature Sensor 1

1 +V +5V
2 GND Signal Ground
3 SCL1 I2C Clock
4 SDA1 I2C Data
Temperature Sensor 2

1 +V +5V
2 GND Signal Ground
3 SCL1 I2C Clock
4 SDA1 I2C Data
Fan Control 1

1 +24V +24V Power
2 Fan Fan Speed
Fan Control 2

1 +24V +24V Power
2 Fan Fan Speed

Heater

1 +24V +24V Supply
2 Out Heater Out
Power Input

1 +24V +24V Supply
2 GND Power Ground
Vaccum cleaner for filter cleaning (optional).
None.

SelfServ 23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual Section 10: Printers
Section Divider
Section 10 - Printers

Section Divider

USB Receipt Printer

Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the USB receipt printer of which there are the following variants:
 Single roll
 One‐sided
 Two‐sided
 Dual roll
 One‐sided
 Two‐sided
 Value Added Media (stamp).
Each variant is available with or without a capture bin, except the stamp variant.
The printers are fitted with line thermal print heads which print on either one or both
sides of the receipt, and on one side of valuable media such as stamps. The dual feed
transport mechanism on the dual roll variants has two infeeds fitted on the print engine
to allow printing from two hoppers, either for increased capacity or for a second media
such as stamps.
4
Item Description Item Description

1 Transport 5 Rear paper hopper
2 Print engine 6 Front paper hopper
3 Dual feed mechanism 7 Capture bin
4 Value Added Media dual feed mechanism

2
USB Receipt Printer
DESCRIPTION
The USB receipt printer has the following features:
 Optional two sided printing
 Optional capture area (not on stamp variant)
 Optional dual feed
 Resolution 203 dpi
 Supports maximum receipt paper roll diameter of 228.6 mm (9 in.) for dual roll and
254mm (10in.) for single roll
 Thermal printing
 Optional value added media printing, such as stamps.
Power Requirements
The printer requires power from the ATM power supply (+24V DC ± 10%) and power
consumption is up to 10.0 A.
Paper Specification
The paper used in your printer must conform to the specifications given in NCR
publication Consumable Items for Self Service (B006‐4992). The publication also provides
ordering details of the ATM consumables which should be purchased from NCR
Systemedia.
Printable area
Black Mark Alignment
The printer will cut within the black mark according to adjustment parameters.
Registration will be automatically restored if lost.
Receipt Paper Low
Paper low is sensed when the paper roll outer diameter reaches 39 mm (1.53 in) and
after a further 10 receipts are printed, the paper low condition is reported. When a set
length of paper (default is 5000 mm) has passed through the printer after paper low is
reported, the printer will report paper out if a jam condition occurs after this point or if
the printer is dual roll with hopper usage set as single supply.

Sensor Locations
See the table on the following page for a description of sensors.
One‐sided Single Roll
Print Engine
Hopper
Cutter Transport
Motor
Transport
LF Motor Motor
HP
TJ Exit
Paper Low
PE
BD
CBF
CB
Two‐sided Single Roll

Print Engine
Hopper
Cover Open Cutter Transport
Motor
Transport
Cutter HP Motor
Paper Low 2ST
PE
BD 1ST ENG Ex Exit
2ND TJ
TOF
LF Motor
CBF
CB

4
USB Receipt Printer
One‐sided Dual Roll
Hopper Dual Feeder
DF_2a Print Engine
DF2 Motor
Cutter Transport
DF_2b Motor
Paper Low2 Transport
DF_1a
Motor
LF Motor HP
Paper Low1 Eng Ex TJ Exit
DF_1b
PE
BD
DF1 Motor
CBF
CB
Two‐sided Dual Roll
Hopper Dual Feeder
DF_2a DF2 Motor

Print Engine
Paper Low 2 DF_2b Cutter

DF_1a Cover OPN
Motor
Transport
Paper Low 1 HP
DF_1b Transport
2ST Motor
TOF 1ST Eng
DF1 Motor PE BD EX TJ Exit
LF Motor
CBF
CB
Sensor ID Sensor Name Location Function

Paper Low 1 Paper Low 1 Hopper Detects paper low.
Paper Low 2 Paper Low 2 Hopper Detects paper low.
DF_1a Dual Feed Dual Feed Detects which feeder is in use, acts as Paper End
Unit during reverse feed.
DF_2a Dual Feed Dual Feed Detects which feeder is in use, acts as Paper End
DF_1b Dual Feed Dual Feed Detects which feeder is in use, acts as Paper Edge
DF_2b Dual Feed Dual Feed Detects which feeder is in use, acts as Paper Edge
Cover Open Cover Open Engine Detects cover open. Stops all actions except
cutter.

Sensor ID Sensor Name Location Function

PE Paper End Engine Detects paper end, but not used for paper
positioning.
BD Black Dot Engine Black dot (mark) registration.
HP Home Position Engine Detects cutter home position.
TJ Transport Jam Transport Detects jam in transport.
Exit Exit Transport Detects paper presented to customer at exit.
Activates capture if paper not taken.
CB Capture Bin Transport Detects paper in capture bin.
CBF Capture Bin Full Transport Detects capture bin full and suspends capture
function.
Paper Low Paper Low Hopper Detects paper low.
TOF Top of Form Engine Detects top of form.
2ST 2 Sided Paper Engine Detects 2ST paper.
Engine Exit Engine Exit Engine Detects paper at exit.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Faults can be diagnosed using the LEDs on the logic board, and by using the ATM error
reporting system.
LEDs Location and Meanings
Two LEDs, one red and one green, are located on the logic board on single roll printers
and on the dual feed pcb in the hopper on dual roll printers. The LEDs can be used to
diagnose the conditions shown in the following table.

6
USB Receipt Printer
Single Roll LEDs
Red LED
Green LED
Dual Roll LEDs
Red LED
Green LED
Green Red Meaning

On Off On‐line
Fast blink Off IPL mode (firmware ready to download)
Off Fast blink Paper empty (standard or dual feeder bins empty)
Slow blink Off Paper low (standard or dual feeder bins near empty)
Off On Dual Feed jam
Off On Capture jam
Off On Transport jam
Off Fast blink Cutter jam, cover open or firmware error (ROM/RAM/EPROM)

Green Red Meaning

Off Slow blink Black mark error
Slow blink Off Capture bin full
Off Fast blink Unable to load paper
Off Off Power off
Module Error Messages
The following error messages are reported by the receipt printer. Refer to the “Module
Replacement” section for detailed instructions on replacing modules, and “Diagnostics”
for details of running diagnostic tests.
Error Messages Corrective Actions

Comms Error Check USB cable at the printer and at the hub. Check the
power cable at the printer and at the power supply. Re‐
connect or replace if necessary.
The printer may need to be re‐set. Run self test.
Control Board Hardware Error Replace print engine.
Under Voltage ATM power harnessing may be faulty ‐ test power from
module to distribution board to ATM power supply. Replace
harnessing if necessary.
ATM power supply may be faulty. Check and replace if
necessary.
Knife Life Low/Out Replace print engine.
Knife Jam Clear jam and reload paper. Run self test.
If no jam:
‐ May be faulty sensor or connector. Check knife sensor and
connector J9, run knife test. Clean sensor/re‐connect
connector. If necessary replace knife or print engine.
‐ May be faulty knife motors ‐ run knife test and observe
motor and gears. If necessary replace knife or print engine.
Print Head Life Low/Out Replace print engine.
Over Temperature Check operating conditions and if necessary, replace print
engine if printer is constantly over temperature.
Black Mark Error Check that black mark paper is being used, the black marks
are complete and the paper is loaded correctly (i.e. black
marks facing down).
Check black dot sensor is clean and unobstructed. Run Slew
to Black Mark test.
Check the sensor connector (J7) is securely attached.
If necessary, replace print engine.
Print Unit Open If open, close cover. Run self test.
If closed, printer open sensor or sensor cable may be faulty ‐
run Sensor Test, if this reports printer open, replace printer.
Paper Not Loaded/ Re‐load paper if paper was incorrectly loaded, or clear jam.
Front Hopper Not Loaded/
Rear Hopper Not Loaded

8
USB Receipt Printer

Transport Jam on Eject/on Clear jam from transport, at transport sensor.
Capture If not jammed:
‐ May be a motor/gear or belt failure: run Print Quality test,
observe motor/gears and belt (may be slipping). Replace
transport if necessary.
‐ May be PCB or sensor fault: run looped Sensor test. Cover
and uncover the sensor. Replace print engine if necessary.
Exit Jam on Eject/on Capture Clear jam from transport, at exit sensor. Also check facia.
If not jammed:
‐ May be a motor/gear or belt failure: run Print Quality test,
observe motor/gears and belt (may be slipping). Replace
transport if necessary.
‐ May be PCB or sensor fault: run looped Sensor test. Cover
and uncover the sensor. Replace print engine if necessary.
Capture Bin Full Empty capture bin. Check for paper blocking the capture bin
full sensor.
If empty, may be a PCB or sensor failure: run looped Sensor
test, cover and uncover the sensor. Replace transport if
failed sensor or print engine if failed PCB.
Paper Low/Out Load paper. If not empty, may be a PCB or sensor failure: run
Front Hopper Low/Out looped Sensor test, cover and uncover the sensor. Replace
Rear Hopper Low/Out hopper if failed sensor or print engine if failed PCB.
Transport Not Connected Unload paper. Check transport harness and reconnect if
necessary. Run Transport Forward test.
May be a connector failure: run looped Sensor test. Connect
and disconnect connector. If necessary, replace transport.
May be faulty PCB. Run looped Sensor test, cover and
uncover the sensor. Replace transport if necessary.
Dual Feed Mechanism Jam Clear jam from dual feed.
Check transport harness. Run Paper Feed Motor Test to
check motor and gears turn.
May be a sensor failure: run looped Sensor test. Connect and
disconnect connector. If necessary, replace dual feed.
May be faulty PCB. Run looped Sensor test, cover and
uncover the sensor. If necessary, replace dual feed.
General Checks
 Check that the power cable is connected securely at both ends.
 Check that the interface cables between the printer, the USB hub and the PC core are
connected securely.
 Check that the cable between the logic board (J3) to the drive board (J8) is connected
securely at both ends for 1ST printers.
 Check the cable between the logic board (J6) to the drive board (J15) is connected
securely at both ends for 2ST printers.
 Check the joint harness of the cutter motor is connected correctly.
 Check that the transport feed motor connector is correctly connected to the joint
harness underneath the dual roll engine block.

 Check that the interface cable for the module reporting a problem is connected
securely:
Problem Check cable
Frequent knife jams Cutter motor cable (J9)
Paper low not detected/ Frequent paper empty messages Paper low sensor cable (J2)
Frequent black mark errors Black mark sensor (J7)
Frequent capture jams CB sensor cable (J7)
Frequent transport jams Feed motor cable (J6)
Paper not feeding correctly Feed motor cable (J6)
Poor printing or none at all Thermal head cable (J3)
Printer open message can’t be cleared Open sensor cable (J4)
 Check if the fuse on the logic board has blown
 Check that the sensors are not obscured by foreign objects/paper dust.
 Check the 24V power supply to the control board.
 Check that correct type of thermal paper is being used (one or two sided), and that it
is not damp, dirty or dusty.
 Check for foreign objects in the feed path / stuck to the paper feed rollers or paper
guides. Clean the areas carefully.
 Clean thermal elements in print head with alcohol if there are print quality problems.
 Clean the transport belts with alcohol if there are frequent jams.
 Clean the transport sensors using compressed air without removing them from the
printer chassis. If for any reason sensors are removed, they must be recalibrated.
Refer to the “Recalibration” section for detailed instructions.
 Check for wear or lack of tension in the transport belts, replace transport assembly if
necessary.
 If an EEPROM error is detected, switch the printer off and on again to confirm the
diagnostic result. If there is no change, replace the print engine.

10
USB Receipt Printer
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
Level 0 diagnostic tests run on start‐up and reset.
LED Diagnostic Displays
The following table shows the codes displayed by the LEDs in the event of an error.
Green Red Meaning

On Off On‐line
Fast Blink Off IPL mode (firmware ready to download)
Off Fast blink Paper empty: single hopper or both dual feed hoppers
Slow Blink Slow Blink Paper empty: one of dual feed hoppers
Slow Blink Off Paper low: any hopper
Off On Paper jam
Off Fast Blink Firmware error (ROM, RAM or EPROM) or cover open or knife jam
Off Slow blink Black mark error
Slow blink Off Capture bin full
Off Off Power off
Device Diagnostics
All the Sys App device diagnostic tests that involve printing initialize the receipt printer in
the following manner:
 Top and bottom margins are set to 0 and 40
 Line spacing is set to 2.6 mm (1/9 in.)
 Top line position 25.4 mm (1 in.).
All the settings set on entry into diagnostics are restored on exit. Looping is allowed on
all tests. Tests that require paper out do not run if paper is left in, however, they still
return a good response.
Note that all tests will be printed on the paper loaded into the print engine, so if there is
valuable media loaded in the rear hopper, it is advisable to unload it from the print
engine prior to running diagnostics tests.
Sensor Test
The Sensor test reports, in M_DATA, status and sensor information. There should be no
movement of the printhead during this test.
Print Quality Test
Available on single feed printers only. The test produces a produces a receipt with:

 the NCR logo
 a full character set printout, single wide
 a solid black rectangle
 a “Check Solid Box For White Lines” statement.
If a 2ST printer is loaded with 1ST paper, the following statement will also be printed
 “Single‐sided Paper on 2ST Printer”.
On 2ST printers the reverse side will have:
 the 2ST logo
 a solid black rectangle
 a “Check Solid Box For White Lines” statement.
Print Quality Test ‐ Front Hopper
Available on dual feed printers only. This test produces a receipt from the front hopper
with the same information as for Print Quality Test and also the statement “Printed from
Front Hopper”.
Print Quality Test ‐ Rear Hopper
Available on dual feed printers only. This test produces a test print from the rear hopper
with the same information as for Print Quality Test and also the statement “Printed from
Rear Hopper”.
Print Alignment Test
This test prints a sheet of paper with several vertical lines across the paper width, then
cuts. The lines allow confirmation that the paper is not skewed.
Slew Test
The Slew Test prints “START” on the first line, slews nine lines, and then prints “FINISH”
and cuts.
Transport Forward Test
The test drives the transport for 5 seconds and then switches it off. Paper must be
removed from the printer for this test to run.
Paper Feed Motor(s) Test
The test drives the paper feed motor and the print head motor for 5 seconds. Paper must
be removed from the printer for this test to run.
Knife Cut Test
The cut test causes the knife to be actioned. There should be no paper in the printer for
this test.

12
USB Receipt Printer
Fascia Alignment Test
The test prints a graphic to allow the Field Engineer to determine whether the fascia/
receipt printer alignment should be adjusted.
Slew To Black Mark Test
This test slews to the next black mark and cuts the paper.
Note: This test is only offered on printers configured for black mark paper.
Cut And Capture Test
The printer slews to the next black mark and cuts the paper, then captures the receipt.
Note: This test is only offered on printers configured for black mark paper and with a
capture bin.
Important note: all test receipts should be removed from the printer prior to putting the
ATM back into service.
Service Tallies
The tallies returned for the receipt printer are:
Tally Description
RECEIPTS The number of receipts issued. Incremented following a cut function.
CAPTURE The number of receipts captured.
MARK ERR The number of times the device controller failed to detect the index mark on
preprinted paper while performing a form feed to black mark.
KNIF JAM The number of knife jams.
EXIT JAM The number of exit jams (exit jam on capture/exit jam on eject).
TRAN JAM The number of transport jams (transport jam on capture/transport jam on eject)
CAPT JAM The number of capture jams (transport jam on capture/exit jam on capture)
HOURS ON The number of hours the printer has been switched on.
PAP LEN The number of millimetres of paper that have passed under the printhead.
ERR RECO The number of error recoveries.
OVER HEAT The number of times the printer has over‐heated.
FLSH CYC The number of flash cycles.
HEAD OPN The number of times the head has been opened.
SUP VOLT The number of supply voltage anomalies.
USB COM The number of USB communications faults.
ILLEG SEQ The number of times an illegal sequence warning has occurred.
KNIFE CUT The number of knife cuts
DFEED JAM The number of time a dual feed mechanism jam has occurred

STRAPPING
Fuse
There is a 10A fuse on the logic board (F3 ‐ one sided printer) or (F1 ‐ two sided printer).
ADJUSTMENTS
The Configuration menu in System Application (Sys App) displays the following options
for the receipt printer:
Menu Description
Form Feed Sets the printer to feed to either:
Form Feed (front hopper) Black mark
Form Feed (rear hopper) Fixed length (min. value 1, max value 500).
Variable length, that is the length of printed date plus a margin
(minimum value for bottom margin is 77,
maximum value 500).
Printer Contrast Sets the printer contrast in the range:
0 (lightest) to 14 (darkest). Default value is 2.
Black Mark Cut Position Adjustment Sets where within the black mark the form is cut.
Minimum value is 0, maximum is 14. Default is 2.
Adjust Left Margin Sets the position of the left margin.
Adjustments are in steps of 0.125mm (0.005 in.) within the range of
minimum ‐1.875mm (‐0.075 in.) to maximum +1.875mm (‐+.075 in.)
Minimum value is 0, maximum is 30. Default value is 15.
Present Position Adjustment Sets the position of the first line of print relative to the top of the
page.
Minimum value is 1, maximum is 30. Default is 15.
Colour Sets the printer to use 2‐colour paper.
Printer Configuration Printout
To print out the current settings and functions, press and hold the feed button and press
the reset button. After the test is complete, reset the dip switch settings to OFF then
either power off or press the reset button (SW1) to reboot the printer.
The printout can also be performed in on‐line mode.

14
USB Receipt Printer
Printer Sensor Re–calibration Procedure
Sensors re‐calibration process is required when sensors are replaced.
One–sided (1ST) Single Roll with or without Capture
Perform the following steps to re–calibrate the sensors:
1. Remove all the paper from the transport or capture, and paper roll from the hopper.
2. Power–up the printer with DIP switches under 1 and 2 to ON, and 3 to OFF condition.
3. If the printer detects this status, two LEDs are off.
4. Briefly press the Feed button three times to select sensor adjustment.
Two LEDs indicate the status of the self test. The table below lists and displays the
status of the LEDs during the self test.
LED Status LED Display

Press Feed button
Red Green Red Green
0 (power–up state) Off Off
1 time Off On
2 times On Off
3 times On On
5. Press and hold the Feed button.
6. The firmware measures the level of sensors.
7. Load a BM paper roll into the hopper.
8. Press the Feed button.
The paper is loaded, cut, and presented. If a capture bin present, the paper is then
captured. The Sensor adjustment is performed during feeding.
9. If both LEDs are blinking, sensor adjustment is successful. If red LED is ON, sensor
adjustment is unsuccessful.
10. After re‐calibration, set all DIP switches OFF, and power the printer off and on.
Note: Black mark mode executes this procedure.

One–Sided (1ST) Dual Roll with or without Capture
1. Remove all paper from the transport or capture, feeders, and paper roll from both
hoppers.
3. If the printer detects this status, two LEDs are off.
Two LEDs indicate the status of the self test. The table below lists and displays the
status of the LEDs during the self test.

Press Feed button
Red Green Red Green
0 (power–up state) Off Off
1 time Off On
2 times On Off
3 times On On
7. Load BM paper rolls into both front and rear hoppers.
8. Feed the BM paper from front hopper to lower feeder and press the Feed button.
The paper is loaded, cut, and presented. If a capture bin is fitted, the paper is then
10. After re‐calibration, set all DIP switches off, and power the printer off and on.
Note: Black mark mode executes this procedure.

16
USB Receipt Printer
Two–Sided (2ST) Single Roll with or without Capture
Selecting Single Side Test Mode or Double Side Test mode
Perform the procedure below to select Single Side (1ST) test mode or Double Side (2ST )
test mode.
Set DIP Switch 1 and

2 ON, and 3 OFF
LEDs
Power-up Double side test mode
Briefly press the Feed

button Single side test mode

Double side test mode
button
Repeated pushing
alternates between 1ST
test and 2ST test
Press and hold the

To select 1ST or 2ST Feed button when Both LEDs are out
desired test is selected.

Sensor Re–calibration Procedure
1. Remove all paper from the transport or capture, and paper roll from the hopper.
3. Select 1ST or 2ST mode.
Two LEDs indicate the status of the self test. The table below lists and displays the LED
status during the self test.

Push Feed button
Red Green Red Green
1 time Off On
2 times On Off
3 times On On
5. Push and hold the Feed button.
7. Set a BM paper roll in the hopper.
The paper is loaded, cut and presented. If a capture bin is present the paper is then
9. Remove all the paper roll from the printer, and replace with 2ST paper roll.
The paper is loaded, cut and presented. And then it is captured if capture bin present.
The 2ST sensor adjustment is performed during feeding.
11. If both LED is blinking, sensor adjustment is successful. If red LED is ON, sensor
12. After re‐calibration, set all DIP switches OFF, and power the printer off and on.

18
USB Receipt Printer
Two–Sided (2ST) Dual Roll with or without Capture
Selecting Single Side Test Mode or Double Side Test mode
Perform the procedure below to select Single Side (1ST) test mode or Double Side (2ST )
test mode.
Set DIP Switch 1 and

2 ON, and 3 OFF
LEDs
Power-up Double side test mode

button Single side test mode

Double side test mode
button
Repeated pushing
alternates between 1ST
test and 2ST test
Press and hold the

To select 1ST or 2ST Feed button when Both LEDs are out
desired test is selected.

Sensor Re–calibration Procedure
1. Remove all the paper from the transport or capture, and paper roll from the hopper.
2. Power–up the printer with DIP switch under 1 and 2 to ON, and 3 to OFF condition.
3. Select 1ST or 2ST mode.
Two LEDs indicate the status of the self test. The table below lists and displays the LED
status during the self test.

Push Feed button
Red Green Red Green
1 time Off On
2 times On Off
3 times On On
7. Set BM paper rolls in the front and rear hoppers.
8. Feed the BM paper from front hopper to lower feeder, and press the Feed button.
The paper is loaded, cut, and presented. If a capture bin is fitted, the paper is then
9. Remove all BM paper rolls from the printer, and replace with 2ST paper roll into the
front hopper only.
10. Feed the 2ST paper from front hopper to lower feeder, and press the Feed button.
The paper is loaded, cut and presented. If capture bin present, the paper is then
captured. The 2ST sensor adjustment is performed during feeding.
adjustment unsuccessful.
12. After re‐calibration, set all DIP switches off, and power the printer off and on.

20
USB Receipt Printer
The procedures in this section describe the removal and replacement of the following
field replaceable units:
 Transport
 Dual feed mechanism
 Print engine
 Hopper
 Paper low sensor.
Transport
1. Disconnect the two harnesses (three on a capture bin variant).
2. Remove and retain the single screw on each side.
3. Loosen the two screws underneath the transport. On the capture bin variant, a long
blade screwdriver will be required to reach through the frame.
4. Remove the transport.

Dual Feed Mechanism (Standard)
The dual feed mechanism is supplied with the dual roll pcb and interconnection harness.
1. Remove the cable ties securing all harnessing from the dual feed mechanism back to
the dual feed PCB in the hopper.
2. Remove the two screws (one each side) that secure the front hopper lifting bar and
the two fixing screws securing the pcb cover. Remove the cover then disconnect all
the harnessing from the PCB.
Control Board Cover
Fixing Screw Lifting Bar Fixing Screw
3. Remove the screws securing the pcb to its mounting.

22
USB Receipt Printer
4. a) For single‐sided printers: Remove the retain the four screws (two each side)
securing the dual in‐feed mechanism to the print engine.
Remove Screw (2 off)
Cable Comnnector
Remove Screw (2 off)
b) For two‐sided printers: Remove and retain the two screws securing the dual feed
mechanism to the rear of the print engine. Loosen the screw on each side of the print
engine.
Loosen Screw (2 off)

Remove Screws
5. Lift the in‐feed mechanism clear of the print engine.

Dual Feed Assembly (Stamp)
The dual feed mechanism is supplied with the dual roll pcb and interconnection harness.
1. Remove the cable ties securing all harnessing from the dual feed mechanism back to
the dual feed PCB in the hopper.
2. Remove the screw securing the PCB cover to the underside of the printer, and
remove the cover.
3. Disconnect the 40‐pin connector and all other harnessing from the PCB.
4. Remove the two spacer screws from the base of the dual feed assembly and tilt the
assembly over towards the hopper to remove it.
Print Engine
One‐sided
1. Dual feed variants only: remove the dual feed mechanism as described in previous
section.
2. Disconnect the earth straps on each side of the print engine, and disconnect the
harness as shown below.

24
USB Receipt Printer
3. Remove and retain the two screws (one on each side), securing the print engine to
the frame.
Earth Strap x2
Harness
Screw x2
4. Disconnect the main sensor harness connector from the PCB.
Sensor Harness
5. Slide the engine lugs clear of the frame, and lift it up.

Two‐sided
1. Dual feed variants only: remove the dual in‐feed mechanism as described in previous
section.
2. Disconnect the earth straps on the rear of the print engine, then two screws (one on
each side), securing the print engine to the frame then slide the engine lugs clear of
the frame, and lift it off.
3. Remove the screw securing the control board cover beneath the print engine.

26
USB Receipt Printer
4. Disconnect the hopper low sensor harness from the PCB.
Fuse
One‐sided Printer
The fuse on the control board is accessible from the underside of the printer, or for
better access, first remove the print engine as described above, then:
1. Remove the two screws on top and the single screw on the side securing the control
boards cover.
Control Board Cover Screw (2 off)
Control Board Cover Screw
2. The fuse is visible from the underside of the print engine.

Two‐sided Printer
The fuse on the control board is accessible from the underside of the printer, as
shown below. On dual feed variants, the control board cover must first be removed.
Front Hopper
Single Roll
1. First remove the print engine and in‐feed mechanism as described in earlier sections.
2. Cut the cable tie holding the paper low sensor harness to the hopper, then disconnect
the connector located below the print engine tray.
3. Remove the two screws securing the earth straps then the two screws securing the
hopper assembly to the print engine.

28
USB Receipt Printer
Dual Roll
1. Remove the two screws securing the yellow lifting handle in the front hopper. Then
remove the two screws securing the dual feed PCB cover.
2. Disconnect the rear hopper low sensor harness from the dual PCB and remove all
harnessing from the front hopper.
3. Remove the four screws (two each side) securing the PCB to the hopper and remove
the PCB.
4. Disconnect the paper low sensor harness connector located below the print engine
tray and remove the lower two screws securing the earth straps to the hopper
assembly and print engine.
5. Remove the upper two screws securing the hopper assembly to the print engine and
remove the hopper.

Rear Hopper
1. Remove the four screws (two each side) that secure the two joining brackets between
the front and rear hoppers.
Hopper
Fixing Screws
Hopper
2. Remove the two screws securing the yellow lifting handle in the front hopper. Then
remove the two screws securing the dual feed PCB cover.
3. Disconnect the rear hopper sensor low harness from the PCB and remove the rear
hopper.

30
USB Receipt Printer
Hopper Low Sensor Harness
1. Release the harness from the cable ties.
2. Push out the two sensor pcb securing studs.
3. Disconnnect the harness from the control board.

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENTS/PINOUTS
Logic Board
One Sided
Top Side
J3
F3 J2
LED2 DSW1 SW1

LED1
J6
J8
Bottom Side J1
J4
J1 Not used J6 USB (Straight, type B)
J2 DRV Signal J8 Power
J3 Board to board connector

32
USB Receipt Printer
Two Sided
Top Side
J6
F3
LED2 DSW1 SW1

LED1
J5
J3
Bottom Side J2
J6 Board to board connector
J2 DIN power ‐ 3 pins (RSD)
J3 Power ‐ 2 pin (FSD)
J5 USB (Straight, type B)
Pin Assignments ‐ USB connector (J6)
(One and Two Sided Printers)
VBUS 1
D‐ 2
D+ 3
GND 4
Shield Shell

Single Roll Drive Board
One‐sided
J8
J3
J5 J1
J14
J4 J7 J6 J9 J2
J1 Not used J6 Feed motor
J2 Paper low & capture sensors J7 Black dot (mark) sensor
J3 Thermal head J8 Board to board connector
J4 Cover open sensor J9 Knife motor
J5 Paper end sensor J14 Logic signal
Two Sided
J15
J7
J6
J13 J11
J5 J10 J5
J4
J8 J2 J9 J1 J3
J1 Cutter motor J8 Exit sensor
J2 Combine Sensors J9 Feed Motor
J3 Transport/Hopper/Motor/Paper low sensor J10 TOF sensor
J4 PE Sensor J11 TOF LED
J5 RS232 J13 2ST PDET sensor
J6‐7 Thermal Heads J15 Board to board connector

34
USB Receipt Printer
Dual Roll Control Board
J2
J4 J1
J8
J6
J5
J9 J7
J3
J1 Paper low (2nd Bin) J6 Control Signal
J2 Sensor LED (1st Bin) J7 Motor (1st Bin)
J3 Sensor (1st Bin) J8 Motor (2nd Bin)
J4 Sensor LED (2nd Bin) J9 Feed Switch
J5 Sensor (2nd Bin)
CABLING
The dual roll printer has a ribbon cable signal harness which goes from the control board
to print engine.
None.
Receipt Printer, refer to the Preventive Maintenance section of this manual.

USB Journal Printer 1
USB Journal Printer

Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the USB journal printer, which uses a line thermal head to
perform high quality, high speed, quiet printing of characters and graphics.
DESCRIPTION
The USB journal printer has the following features:
 Supports maximum paper roll diameter of 83mm (3.2 ins)
 Resolution 203 dpi
 Downloadable firmware
 Remote diagnostics.
Power Requirements
The printer requires power from the ATM power supply (+24V DC ± 10%) and power
consumption is up to 6.0 A.

2 USB Journal Printer
Environmental Requirements
Operating the printer at either extreme of its temperature or humidity ranges may
degrade the print quality and may cause the firmware to disable printing. However, the
printer itself will not be damaged.
Condition Temperature Humidity Max Temp Change

Operating 5°C ‐ 50°C (41°F 20 ‐ 80% 10°C (50F)/hour
‐ 122°F)
Idle 0°C ‐ 55°C (32°F 10 ‐ 95% 10°C (50F)/hour
‐ 131°F)
Extreme power‐on 0°C ‐ 55°C (32°F 10 ‐ 95% 15°C (59F)/hour
‐ 131°F)
Storage ‐5°C ‐ 55°C (23°F 10 ‐ 90% 15°C (59F)/hour
‐ 131°F)
Dew point 26°C (78.8°F)
maximum
Paper Specification
Paper Roll
 Width: 80.0 mm (3.15 in.)
 Length: 83 m (272 ft.) max
 Diameter: 83 mm (3.26 in.) or less
 Paper core inner diameter: 12 mm (0.47 in.)
Printable Area
80 mm
(3.15 in.)
2.50 mm * 75.25 mm 2.25 mm
(0.10 in.) (2.96 in.) (0.09 in.)
6.9 mm (0.27 in.)

Minimum
22 mm (0.87 in.)
Typical
5 mm (0.20 in.)
Typical
* Left Margin Adjustable area ±1.875 mm (0.0738 in.)
Journal Paper Low
The paper low signal indicates when 5.8 m (19 ft.) ±40% remains on the supply roll.

Sensor Locations
Winding Wheel Thermal Head
SENSOR LOCATION ILLUS PE Sensor
Cover Open Sensor
Paper Roll Feed

Winding Jam Sensor
Motor
Winding
Motor
Paper Low Sensor
Sensor Function
Paper Low Detects paper low.
Cover Open Detects cover open, halts operation.
PE Detects presence of paper for controlling feed motor.
Winding Jam Detects winding wheel movement and controls winding.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Faults can be diagnosed using the LEDs on the control board, and by using the ATM error
reporting system.
LEDs Location and Meaning
Two pairs of LEDs are located one each side of the control board and are also visible
through holes at the bottom of the side frames. The LEDs can be used to diagnose the
conditions shown in the following table.
Green Red Meaning

On Off On‐line
Fast blink Off IPL mode (firmware ready to download)
Off Fast blink Paper out
Slow blink Off Paper low
Off On Winding jam
Slow blink Off Paper not wound
Off Fast blink Cover open / Unable to load paper
Off Off Power off

Module Error Messages
The following error messages are reported by the journal printer. Refer to the “Module
Replacement” section for detailed instructions on replacing modules, and “Diagnostics”
for details of running diagnostic tests

Printer Disconnected Check USB cable at the printer and at the hub. Check the power
cable at the printer and at the power supply. Re‐connect or replace
if necessary.
The printer may need to be re‐set. Run self test.
PCB Hardware Error Replace printer.
Printer Under Voltage ATM power harnessing may be faulty ‐ test power from module to
distribution board to ATM power supply. Replace harnessing if
necessary.
ATM power supply may be faulty. Check and replace if necessary.
Print Head Life Low/Out Replace printer.
Printer Over Temperature Check operating conditions against Environmental Requirements
(page 2). If necessary, replace printer if constantly over
temperature.
Printer Open If open, close print mechanism.
If closed, printer open sensor or sensor cable may be faulty ‐ run
HW_DIAG Sensor Test, if this reports printer open, replace printer.
Paper Not Loaded Re‐load the paper if it was incorrectly loaded, or clear jam.
Printer Not Winding Re‐load paper, ensuring is correctly fed into take‐up spindle.
Check winding motor cable is securely connected (J4).
Print Mechanism Jam Clear jam and re‐load paper.
Winding motor may be faulty ‐ unload paper, run HW_DIAG
Winding Motor test. Motor and gears should turn. If not, replace
printer.
Paper feed motor may be faulty ‐ unload paper, run HW_DIAG
Paper Feed Motor test. Motor and gears should turn. If not,
replace printer.
Paper Low/Out Re‐load paper.
Run HW_DIAG Sensor test. Cover and uncover the sensor. If
necessary, replace printer.
General Checks
The following general checks should determine the cause of the majority of errors with
the journal printer:
 Check that the power cable is connected securely at both ends.
 Check that the interface cable from the PC core is connected securely at both ends.

 Check that the interface cable for the module reporting a problem is connected
securely:
Problem Check cable

Paper low not detected / Frequent paper empty Paper low sensor cable (J1)
messages
Frequent “Unable to load paper” messages. Paper end sensor cable (J1)
Paper not feeding correctly / frequent jam messages Feed motor cable (J6)
Paper not winding correctly Winding motor cable (J4)
Poor printing or none at all Thermal head cable (J5)
Printer open message cannot be cleared Open sensor cable (J2)
 Check that the sensors are not obscured by foreign objects/paper dust.
 Check that the operating temperature complies with the specifications given in
section ‘Environmental Requirements’.
 Check that thermal paper is being used.
 Check that the paper is not damp, dirty or dusty.
 Check for foreign objects in the feed path or stuck to the reel guides, take‐up core,
drive gears or platen.
 Clean thermal elements in print head with alcohol (IPA), using a cotton bud.
 If an EEPROM error is detected, switch the printer off and on again to confirm the
diagnostic result. If there is no change, replace the printer.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
Level 0 diagnostic tests run on start‐up and reset or on entering self test mode via dip
switch DSW1.
Start‐up Tests
The following tests run at start‐up:
 Flash ROM CRC check
 Internal RAM check
 EEPROM test
 Microprocessor test.
In the event of an error in one of the tests the LEDs will indicate the error type. The error
state will be maintained until power is cycled or reset.

LED Diagnostic Displays
The following table shows the codes displayed by the LEDs in the event of an error.
Green Red Meaning

On Off On‐line
Fast blink Off IPL mode (firmware ready to download )
Off Fast blink Paper empty
Slow blink Off Paper low
Off On Winding jam
Slow blink Off Paper not wound
Off Off Power off
Test Selected By Dip Switch
The level 0 diagnostic tests that can be set by the logic board dip switch DSW1 are:
 Rolling ASCII print test
 ‘H’ print test
 Dot check pattern print test
 Sensor level adjustment.
Switch and LED Locations
Dip switch DSW1 on the control board is used to select the diagnostic tests. The LEDs
indicate the test selected. Switch SW1 is the reset button.
LED1 LED3 J5
J3
Fuse F3
CN2
J4
DSW1
CN1 SW1
J2
LED2 LED4 J1
How to Enter a Test
1. Ensure the printer is powered off.
2. Set bits 1 and 2 of DSW1 to ON and bit 3 to OFF.
3. Power up the printer.
4. The two LEDs should be off, indicating test mode.

5. Select the required self test by pressing the feed button briefly as follows. The LEDs
will indicate the test selected.
Feed
Button LED Test
Presses
Green Red
x0 OFF OFF Rolling ASCII print test (continuous
printing)
Mono or 2-colour options.
x1 ON OFF ‘H’ print test (continuous printing)
x2 OFF ON Dot check pattern print test
x3 ON ON Sensor level adjustment
6. Once the test is selected, push and hold the feed button and the test will be
performed.
Note: For the ASCII test to start, you have to briefly press the feed button then press
and hold the feed button again to start the test.
7. After the test is complete, reset the dip switch settings to OFF then either power off
or press the reset button (SW1) to reboot the printer.
Rolling ASCII Print Tests
These tests invoke the printer to continuously print the resident character set, in
standard pitch for 23 lines, then feed 2 lines. The page count is not stored in EEPROM.
After the test is complete, reset the dip switch settings to OFF then either power off or
press the reset button (SW1) to reboot the printer.
00000012
!”#$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFG
!”#$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGH
”#$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHI
#$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJ
00000013
$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJK
%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL
&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLM
’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMN
00000014
()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
)*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQ
+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR
“H” Print Test
This test causes the printer to continuously print “H” characters in the standard pitch. for
23 lines, then feed 2 lines. The page count is not stored in EEPROM. After the test is

complete, reset the dip switch settings to OFF then either power off or press the reset
button (SW1) to reboot the printer.
00000314
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
00000315
00000316
Dot Check Pattern Test
This test causes the printer to print a dot check pattern. The 12.5% slant line dot pattern
is created using character code 05H. After the test is complete, reset the dip switch
settings to OFF then either power off or press the reset button (SW1) to reboot the
printer.
Sensor Level Adjustment
The following sensors can be adjusted:
 Paper low sensor
 Winding sensor.
To adjust the sensors proceed as follows:
1. Ensure there is no paper in the transport.

2. Set dip switch bits 1 and 2 to ON, then power up the printer.
3. The firmware measures the sensors levels.
4. Place a paper roll in the hopper. and feed paper to the print mechanism entry slot,
then press the feed button.
5. The paper is fed through the print mechanism. Sensor adjustment is performed
automatically during this operation. The printer stores the adjustment value into
EEPROM and can be printed on the configuration printout.
6. After the test is complete, reset the dip switch settings to OFF then either power off
or press the reset button (SW1) to reboot the printer.
Printer Configuration Printout
This is not a test as such but a printout of several of the current settings and functions. To
perform the test, press and hold the feed button and press the reset button. After the
test is complete, reset the dip switch settings to OFF then either power off or press the
reset button (SW1) to reboot the printer. The printout can also be peformed in online
mode.
Level 1 Diagnostics
All the Level 1 diagnostic tests that involve printing initialize the journal printer in the
following manner:
 Margins are set to 0 and 40
 Line spacing is set to 2.6 mm (1/9 in.)
The settings set on entry into diagnostics are restored on exit. Looping is allowed on all
tests. Tests that require paper out do not run if paper is left in, however, they still return
a good response.
Sensor Test
The Sensor test reports, in M_DATA, status and sensor information. There should be no
movement of the printhead during this test.
Print Quality Test
The Print Quality test prints a line of LDTX in double wide then a line in single wide,
followed by graphics. This is followed by a solid black rectangle.
Winding Motor Test
The Winding Motor test drives the winding motor for 5 seconds. Paper must be removed
from the printer for this test to run.
Paper Feed Motor Test
The Paper Feed Motor test drives the paper feed motor for 5 seconds. Paper must be
removed from the printer for this test to run.

LEVEL 3 DIAGNOSTICS
The level 3 diagnostics returned for the journal printer are:
S_Data
S_DATA Meaning
00 GOOD (No error).
03 SUSPEND (Possible customer tampering).
04 FATAL (Requires immediate attention).
Tallies
Tally Description
WIND JAM The number of winding jams.
MECH JAM The number of print mechanism jams.
HOU ON The number of hours the printer has been switched on.
PAP LEN The number of millimetres of paper that have passed under the
printhead.
ERR RECO The number of error recoveries.
OVER HEA The number of times the printer has over-heated.
FLAS CYC The number of flash cycles.
HEAD OPN The number of times the head has been opened.
SUP VOLT The number of supply voltage anomalies.
USB COMM The number of USB communications faults.
STRAPPING
Switches
The following switches are found on the control board and are also accessible through
gaps in the printer frame.
 Switch SW1 is the reset switch.
 The 2‐pin dip switch (DSW1) on the control board is used to enter self test mode.
bit 0 bit 1 Contents

0 0 Online mode
1 0 Self test mode
0 1 Flash download mode
1 1 Sensor adjustment mode
The following tests can be accessed in self‐test mode:
 Rolling ASCII print test
 ‘H’ print test
 Dot check pattern print test

 Sensor level adjustment.
A pair of LEDs on each side of the board indicate the tests selected as well as indicating
errors.
ADJUSTMENTS
The Configuration menu in System Application (Sys App) displays the following menu
option for the journal printer:
Menu Description
Printer Contrast Sets the printer contrast in the range 1 (lightest) to 30
(darkest). Default is 15.
Adjust Left Margin Sets the position of the left margin. Adjustments are in
steps of 0.125mm (0.005 in.) within the range of min ‐
1.875mm (‐0.075 in.) to max +1.875mm (‐+.075 in.).
Minimum value is 0, maximum is 30. Default value is 15.
This section describes the removal and replacement of the head assembly. The assembly
is not advocated as a Field Replaceable Unit, but is available as a spare part.
Head Assembly
1. Remove and retain the four screws securing the rear cover. Remove the cover.
2 on each side

2. Remove the thermal head’s black earth harness from the connector on one side of
the frame.
3. Remove and retain the two screws securing the bottom cover. Remove the cover.
Cable Clamp
X2
4. Lift the cable clamp securing the harness. Lift harness slightly and slide the cover off.
5. Disconnect the thermal head connector from J5 on the board.

6. Remove and retain the two screws securing the print head.
1 on each side
7. Loosen the stop screw on the side of the printer until the head drops. Remove the
head assembly.
8. Disconnect the harnesses from the head assembly.

CABLING
None.
LED1 LED3 J5
J3
Fuse F3
CN2
J4
DSW1
board layout illus

CN1 SW1
J2
LED2 LED4 J1
CN1 USB J3 Feed motor

CN2 Power J4 Winding motor
J1 Winding jam, paper low, paper end sensors J5 Thermal head
J2 Cover open sensor SW1 Reset switch
Pin Assignments
USB connector (CN1)
VBUS 1
D‐ 2
D+ 3
GND 4
Shield Shell
None.

SelfServ 23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual Section 11: Dispense
Section Divider
Section 11 - Dispense

Section Divider

S1 Bill Alignment Dispenser 1
S1 Bill Alignment Dispenser

Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the Front and Rear Access S1 currency dispensers which form bill
stacks using the bill alignment mechanism.
As this type of dispenser has been developed and manufactured post EU RoHS
compliance guidelines it can only be serviced using appropriate RoHS compliant parts.
S1 Variants
The major area variants of the S1 Bill Alignment dispensers are:
 Mechanical:
 Rear Access (short transport)
 Rear Access (mid transport)
 Rear Access (long transport)
 Front Access.
 Electrical:
 The dispenser is available in 115 V and 230 V main motor variants
 The dispenser control board has USB connectivity.
 Software:
 Microsoft Windows XP and Aptra XFS 4.5 onwards.
Pick Modules
The Dispenser can use the Aria or the 56XX enhanced single and double pick modules.
The Aria pick modules are described in the Aria pick module chapter in the dispense
section of this manual. The description of the 56XX type is in chapter 17.6 of the Service
Aids Mini‐Manual (FM‐0547‐A).
Note: Where there is a mixture of Aria and 56XX enhanced pick modules, then the Aria
type must always be used in the lower positions.

2 S1 Bill Alignment Dispenser
Single and Dual Configuration
The ATM is available in either single or dual cash configuration. Each dispenser can be
configured to recognise up to seven denominations, but is limited to dispensing up to
four due to the maximum number of cassettes it can hold. In an ATM configured with
dual dispensers the total number of denominations can be 14 of which a maximum of 8
can be dispensed at any one time.
WARNING
It is recommended that currency denominations in a dual dispenser
are consistently mapped to the same cassette types in both
dispensers. This will ensure that the correct denomination is
inserted into the correct dispenser.
Operational Environment
The dispenser operates as an intelligent module under the control of its own on‐board
microprocessor. It communicates with the ATM central processing unit using the USB
Interface. Dispenser device control firmware resident in the dispenser memory
interfaces with the ATM transaction control and diagnostic programs.
Variants
The S1 dispenser is available in the following variants:
 Front Access
 Rear Access
 Short Transport
 Mid Transport
 Long Transport.
The following options are available on all variants.
 1, 2, 3 or 4 Standard width cassettes
 Standard Security
 Tamper Indicating Security
 Cash Security (Fluiditi/Axytrans)
 Open or latchfast purge bin
 115 V version
 230 V version

Containers
The dispenser is capable of using the wide currency cassettes developed to replace the
obsolete standard width cassette. A full description of the currency cassettes is given in
the Currency Cassette chapter of the Dispense section of this manual.
Note: Standard width currency cassette Type H8015‐STD‐01/02‐08 are obsolete and are
not recommended for use with this dispenser.
Currency Cassettes
 Latch Fast security (Standard). The security method takes the form of a cable tie or
similar through the door latch.
 Tamper Indicating security (TI). The cassette has a mechanical indicator to signal any
tampering via colour change to the indicator. In addition the catch can be fitted with
a seal.
 Fluiditi/Axytrans ATM security. The system protects currency cassettes when
installed in the ATM by injecting marking ink into the cassette upon the ATM being
attacked. It is important that correct handling procedures are observed when
handling this type of cassette.
 Fluiditi/Axytrans Replenishment security. The system protects the cassette while in
transit as well as when installed in the ATM by injecting marking ink into the cassette.
It is important that correct handling procedures are observed when handling this
type of cassette.
Purge Bins
 Open bin.
 Latch fast bin. The security method takes the form of a cable tie or similar through
the purge bin latch.
Note: An indicator is not available on the purge bin. A dispenser ordered with
mechanical TI is supplied with a latch fast purge bin.
Specifications
Power Requirements
The power requirement for the Control board is:
 Direct current:
 +24 V  10% 0.35 A
 +24 V Interlock.

 Alternating current:
 115 Vac, 5.5 A r.m.s., 20.0 A surge
or
 230 Vac, 3.0 A r.m.s., 10.0 A surge.
The S1 Control board supplies the following power:
 Direct current:
 +3.3 V  10% 0.5 A
 +5 V  10% 0.75 A
 +12 V  10% 0.5 A.
Weight
The weights of the component parts of the S1 dispenser are:
 Front Access Dispenser:
 Basic unit (2 double pick modules + presenter) = 38.9 kg (85.75 lb.)
 Presenter unit =20.9 kg (46.07 lb.)
 Rear Access Dispenser:
 Short unit (2 double pick modules + presenter) = 36.30 kg (80.02 lb.)
 Mid unit (2 double pick modules + presenter) = 36.90 kg (81.34 lb.)
 Long unit (2 double pick modules + presenter) = 39.10 kg (86.19 lb.)
 Presenter unit (Short) = 18.3 kg (40.34 lb.)
 Presenter unit (Mid) = 18.9 kg (41.66 lb.)
 Presenter unit (Long) = 21.1 kg (46.51 lb.)
 Single pick module = 6.3 kg (13.9 lb.)
 Double pick module = 9 kg (19.84 lb.)
 Currency cassette (Plastic) empty = 2.16 kg (4.76 lb.)
 Currency cassette (Plastic) full = 6.62 kg (14.60 lb.)
 Currency cassette (Metal) empty = 3.48 kg (7.67 lb.)
 Currency cassette (Metal) full = 8.21 kg (18.10 lb.)
 Open purge bin empty = 0.28 kg (0.62 lb.)
 Open purge bin full = 0.42 kg (0.92 lb.)
 Latch fast purge bin empty = 0.82 kg (1.81 lb.)
 Latch fast purge bin full = 0.96 kg (2.12 lb.)

Dispenser Dimensions
The dimensions of the S1 dispenser with four pick modules (excluding ATM interface
requirements) are:
 Front Access Dispenser:
 Width = 300 mm (11.81 in.)
 Height = 768 mm (30.24 in.)
 Depth = 750 mm (29.52 in.)
 Rear Access Dispenser:
 Width = 300 mm (11.81 in.)
 Height = 700mm (27.35 in.)
 Depth Short Nose = 726 mm (28.58 in.)
 Depth Mid Nose = 846 mm (33.30 in.)
 Depth Long Nose = 960 mm (37.79 in.)
DESCRIPTION
Bill alignment dispensers present a bunch of up to 40 bills/notes (50 bills for special
China version) in up to four denominations of currency to the cardholder. A detect and
purge system controls the movement of currency along the transport. Misfed or
damaged currency is bunched and driven into a purge bin. The option is available, via
application commands, to retract currency presented to the cardholder but not taken, to
the purge bin.
The following sections describe the operation of the dispenser’s mechanical, electrical/
electronic, and firmware components.
Path of Notes
The dispensers are built with two, three, or four pick modules suspended below the
presenter module.
The path of notes through the presenter is shown in the following diagrams:
Forming the Stack
Notes enter the presenter from the pick modules, pass the LVDT and are projected
against the bill stop gate of the bill alignment mechanism by the flicker shaft fingers.
They then fall on to the top of the note clamp transport where they form a stack.

S1 Front Access Stack
Bill Alignment Assembly

(Down)
Stack Sensor
From Pick
Note Stack Flicker Shaft
Modules
Stack Sensor
S1 Rear Access Stack
Stack Sensor Bill Alignment Assembly

(Down)
From Pick
Modules Note Stack
Flicker Shaft
Present
The note clamp transport is lifted up so that the note stack is held against the underside
of the top set of presenter transport belts. The belts are driven and the stack of notes is
moved to the facia exit slot where it is held for the cardholder.
S1 Front Access Present
Present Position of Stack Note Path Bill Alignment Assembly

(Down)
Cam
Note Clamp Note Stack

S1 Rear Access Present

Present Position of Stack Note Path (Down)
Note Clamp Cam
Note Stack
Reject
If the stack is not taken by the cardholder, or a mispick has been detected, then the
presenter transport is driven in reverse and the notes are moved into the purge bin.
S1 Front Access Reject
Bill Alignment Assembly (Up)
Purge Bin
Note Stack
S1 Rear Access Reject
Purge Bin
Note Stack

Purge
If the stack is not presented after the stacking process or a mispick is detected, then the
presenter transport is driven in reverse and the notes are moved into the purge bin.
S1 Front Access Purge
Purge Bin
Note Stack
S1 Rear Access Purge
Purge Bin
Note Stack
Sensors
The position of the sensors that detect the movement of notes is shown in the diagrams
below:

S1 Front Access Sensors
Exit
Sensor Stack Sensor TS2
Transport Sensor TS3 & TS3A
From Pick
Modules LVDT
Purge Overfill Sensor TS1
S1 Rear Access Sensors

Exit Stack Sensor TS2
Sensor Transport Sensor TS3 & TS3A Purge Overfill Sensor TS1
LVDT From Pick

Modules
Pick Module
The dispensers may be configured with two, three, or four pick modules hanging
vertically below the presenter module.
There are two types of pick module: the single pick module holds one currency cassette,
and the double pick module holds two cassettes, one above the other. The single and
double pick modules used are the Aria type 3 as described in Aria Pick Module chapter in
the Dispense section of this manual.
Pick positions are numbered 1 to 4, with number one immediately below the presenter.
Note: If a mixture of Aria and 56XX enhanced pick modules are used, then the Aria type
3 pick module is always in the lower position.
Presenter Module
The presenter module has the following functions:
 stack up to 40 bills/notes (50 bills for special China version) and present the stack to
the cardholder
 detect when the stack of bills is taken
 control the exit shutter behind the ATM facia

 provide a housing for the purge bin
 drive damaged, mispicked, or not‐taken currency into the purge bin
 detect when the purge bin is full
 drive, through gearing, all the pick modules
 detect the movement of bills through the transport
 create the timing signal for the measurement of bill singularity
 supply the pick vacuum to all the pick modules.
The components of the presenter which achieve these functions are:
 linear variable displacement transducer (LVDT)
 main timing disk
 flicker shaft, anti‐static brush, and deflectors
 bill alignment assembly and bill stop gate
 note clamp, note clamp sensors
 presenter transport and motor
 presenter timing disk
 transport sensors
 exit sensor
 shutter assembly (fascia mounted)
 purge bin location components
 purge transport
 purge sensor
 main motor and vacuum pump
 motor and sensing control circuits.
The following sections describe these components.

Linear Variable Displacement Transducer (LVDT)
Ferrite Cores
Sensing Coils
Protective Cover
Bills passed up from the pick modules enter the presenter via the LVDT transport. This
short transport is the only one in the presenter that is driven by the main motor and is
linked via a gear train to the first pick module transport.
Note: Care should be taken with regards to the sensing coils and ferrite cores as these
can be damaged by inappropriate handling.
The LVDT is a sensing device, situated in the transport just before the flicker shaft, which
gives an electrical output proportional to the displacement of two movable roller
assemblies caused by bills passing between them and fixed reference rollers. The rollers
are attached to ferrite cores which project through sensing coils printed on a pcb. The
output from the coils is digitized, integrated, and is compared to the expected value
(held in memory) for the currency being dispensed. In this way torn, folded, or multiple
bills are detected.
Note: There is no Pre‐LVDT sensor on the bill alignment presenters. The timing of the
calculation is carried out by the LVDT itself.
Main Timing Disk
The main timing disk pulley is driven by a toothed belt from the main motor. Thirty‐six
holes around the periphery of the timing disk create the timing pulses from an opto‐
electronic sensor. The output of the sensor is used to measure the movement of the bills
as far as the flicker shaft and as a reference in the measurement of bill width. The
interval between the interrupts represents a distance travelled by the bill of
approximately 1 mm.

Main Timing Disk ‐ Rear Access
Main Timing Disk
Main Timing Disk ‐ Front Access
Flicker Shaft, Anti‐Static Brush, and Deflectors
The plastic fingers on the flicker shaft impart an extra impetus to the notes as they leave
the LVDT transport so that they are projected against the bill stop gate of the bill
alignment assembly. This action is augmented by a second flicker shaft assembly with
short flicker fingers. The longer flicker fingers also drag the notes into the stack against
plastic guides attached to the LVDT transport.

Just as the notes leave the LVDT transport they pass through an anti‐static brush to
remove any electric charge that would hinder them forming into a stack. Above the anti‐
static brush two plastic note deflectors are clipped between tie bars so that they brush
across the upper surface of the note and provide a light downward pressure to keep the
trailing edge of the notes down and aid the action of the flicker fingers.
The bill stop gate of the bill alignment assembly hangs down into the path of the notes as
they are flicked out of the LVDT transport. Notes strike the gate, bounce back from it,
and fall down on to the top of the note clamp transport where they are dragged into a
stack by the action of the flicker fingers.
The neat formation of the stack of notes depends upon the bounce given to the notes by
the gate which, in turn, depends on the position of the gate. The gate hangs from a belt
transport driven by a stepper motor controlled by the dispenser firmware. The position
for the width of notes being dispensed is calculated by the firmware from the note width
stored in the dispenser bill configuration procedure. During a transaction, if the width of
notes to be dispensed varies, the gate is moved to the new position before the next size
is dispensed. The recommended method of forming the stack is from the smallest bills
first, getting progressively larger, so that the bill alignment mechanism moves out to
accommodate each larger size. The zero reference position of the bill alignment
mechanism is sensed by the stack sensor which is interrupted by a flag on the bill stop
gate when the mechanism has been driven fully forward. This is done at the start of
every dispense and the gate is driven from there to its calculated position.
When the stack of notes is completed, the gate is driven back slightly towards the rear of
the dispenser to clear the stack and the note clamp transport is then raised. If the stack
has been formed successfully, the notes will be driven forwards by the presenter
transport belts to be taken by the cardholder. If, however, a fault has been detected, the
notes will be driven to the purge bin. To achieve this, the presenter transport drives the
stack forward until its trailing edge just passes the stack sensor, then the bill alignment
mechanism is driven towards the rear of the dispenser. This action causes the bill stop
gate to be lifted out of the presenter belt transport by the action of passing over ramps
attached to the side frames of the presenter. The mechanism is sensed fully back and up
by a second flag on the bill stop gate interrupting the beam of the rear bill alignment
sensor. The bill alignment mechanism remains in this position during the purge cycle. The
presenter transport is then driven rearward to deliver the stack to the purge bin.

Bill Alignment Assembly ‐ Front Access
Bill Stop Gate Stack Sensor Bill Align Up Sensor
Bill Alignment Assembly ‐ Rear Access
Stack Sensor
Bill Align
Up Sensor
Bill Stop Gate

Note Clamp
The note clamp transport is a tray assembly that is raised and lowered by a semicircular
cam driven by a stepper motor via a gear train. The transport consists of a set of three
belts held between two shafts at either end of the metal tray. One of the shafts is driven
by the presenter transport stepper motor via a toothed belt and the other shaft is an
idler. The transport belts run on crown pulleys on the shafts.
Also fixed to the clamp tray is the plastic stack tray. When the note clamp transport is in
the down position this stack tray is higher than the transport belts so that the notes can
stack on its top surface. As the transport is lifted by the action of the cam the idler shaft
lifts in elongated holes in the stack tray so that the belts are lifted up above the surface
of the stack tray and lift the stack of notes from it. In this way, when the notes are driven
by the presenter transport they are not impeded by rubbing across the stack tray. Part of
the stack tray is shaped to project beyond the drive shaft to provide a support for notes
when being purged into the purge bin.
In its down position, the note clamp transport sits within a metal bracket, attached
between the presenter side frames, that has vertical plates to prevent notes from falling
off the sides of the note clamp transport. Fingers on the bill stop gate hang down
through the slots in the stack tray to prevent any notes from falling off the rear of the
note clamp transport.

Note Clamp Sensors
The note clamp transport is sensed in its up and down position by two sensors that are
interrupted by a flag on the shaft attached to the clamp lifting cam. The stack of notes is
sensed by the same sensor that detects the forward position of the note, looking down
through a hole in the tray of the clamp transport to an LED attached to the metal bracket
that provides the vertical side plates.
Clamp Up and Down Sensors
Bill Alignment Stepper Motor ClampCam Clamp Stepper Motor
Presenter Transport
The presenter transport consists of an upper set of three belts bearing against a lower
set of three belts, both sets driven by a stepper motor via toothed belts at the left hand
side of the dispenser. The transport belts pass across crown pulleys on the drive and
tension shafts. The lower set of belts runs from the exit of the dispenser to just above the
LVDT transport and the upper set runs from the exit and extends over the note clamp
transport.
Just after the note alignment mechanism backs away from the stack of notes, the note
clamp transport is raised by the rotation of the semicircular cam. The clamp is lifted so
that its belts press against the underside of the top set of presenter transport belts and
the note stack is held between both sets of belts. The stepper motor then drives the
presenter transport (and also through a gearwheel the belts on the note clamp
transport) so that the stack of notes is moved to the exit held between the upper and
lower presenter transport belts. The toggle shaft at the exit compensates for different
thicknesses of stack and permits the stack to be pulled from the dispenser by the
cardholder.

Presenter ‐ Front Access
Presenter ‐ Rear Access

Presenter Timing Disk
An opto‐electronic sensor controls the time that the presenter stepper motor has to be
powered to drive the transport and stop it with the bills projecting from the exit slot. The
sensor beam is chopped by the segments on a timing disk attached to the presenter
transport drive shaft to produce interrupts equivalent to travel of the stack of 1.6 mm.
Timing Disk
Transport Sensors
The progress of the notes through the presenter transport is monitored by a number of
infra‐red sensors as shown in the illustrations below and also diagrams in the section
“Path of Notes”.
The illustration of the Front and Rear access dispensers show the sensors T3 and T3A
arranged across the width of the transport. These sensors and their respective LEDs are
wired in series to improve detection of certain currencies that have a transparent section
as part of the bill design.

Transport Sensors ‐ Front Access
Transport
Sensor T3A
Transport
Sensor T4
Exit Sensor T5
Transport
Sensor T3
Transport Sensors ‐ Rear Access
Exit Sensor T5
Transport
Sensor T3
Transport
Sensor T4
Transport
Sensor T3A
Exit Sensor
The last sensor on the transport is the exit sensor T5 which sees the stack in the present
position and detects it being taken by the cardholder.

Purge Bin Location Components
The purge bin is held in the presenter so that it is accessible from the same position as
the currency cassettes. It is supported by guide rails and is locked in position by a latch. A
microswitch is operated by the inserted purge bin to inform the electronics system that
the bin is in place.
When a latchfast purge bin is installed, a keyplate enters holes in the top front of a
latchfast purge bin and pushes the truck door up into the top. The rear door of the
latchfast purge bin is secured by a sealable latch.
Keyplate Foam Rollers Purge Overfill Sensor Foam Rollers
LED
Bin Present Microswitch
Purge Transport
The purge transport consists upper and lower foam roller shafts driven via toothed gears
from the presenter transport and upper and lower plastic guides. The extended portion
of the note stack tray forms the lower note support guides and an upper set of plastic
guides is attached between the drive shaft of the upper presenter transport belts and the
upper foam roller shaft.
On a purge, either due to a mispick being detected or the stack of notes not being taken
by the cardholder, the direction of the stepper motor driving the presenter transport is
reversed, (the bill alignment mechanism having been previously driven to its rearmost
and up position), thus moving the stack into the note guides which direct the notes from
the belts in between upper and lower foam roll shafts. A friction clutch arrangement
makes sure that the foam roll shafts only drive when the presenter motor is reversed and
the notes are driven in the direction of the purge bin. The foam rollers complete the task
of pushing notes into the bin.
Purge Sensor
The movement of the currency notes into the purge bin is detected by a sensor and LED
that look across the path of the notes at the foam rollers. This sensor also detects a bin
overfill condition.

Main Motor and Vacuum Pump
The main motor drives the LVDT transport and all pick modules via toothed timing belts.
It also drives the vacuum pump to provide a vacuum to the pick line via 6 mm bore
tubing. A vacuum reservoir is located near the pump to improve the system vacuum, and
an air filter in the tubing above the first pick module protects the pump from damage
caused by ingress of grit particles. In both front and rear dispensers the power is supplied
in 115V and 230V options.
Rear Access
The dispenser the motor and pump assemblies for rear access dispensers is located in a
separate electronic box assembly that also houses the dispenser control board. This box
is attached below the exit transport nose of the dispenser.
Dispenser Motor
(In Electronics Box)
Dispenser Control
Board
Electronics Box
Front Access
The dispenser motor and vacuum pump assembly for front access dispensers is located
at the rear of the presenter next to the LVDT transport. The dispenser control board is
attached to the upper pick module.


Currency Dispenser Control Board
The following illustration shows the Currency Dispenser Control Board.
J11 J9
Intelligent Cassette Security LVDT
J8
Transport
LED’s & Sensors
Diagnostic
LEDs
J5
Clamp Sensor
Diagnostic
Swtiches
J6
Motor Sensor
J17
+24V Connector
SW3
J4
Pick Modules
J13
Stepper
Motors
SW2 J2
USB Connector
J21 J20
J18 TTL Shutter 2
+24V Fascia I C
Connector
Interlock
The Control Board controls the operation of the currency dispenser. It is a Coldfire
Processor based control board, responsible for collating all sensor information and
operating the individual pick modules, the presenter, the ac motor and stepper motors,
bill alignment and clamp motors and also communicating commands and responses to
the ATM core processor.
The Control Board is a mixed technology pcb employing both Surface Mount Technology
(SMT) and Plated Through Hole (PTH) components.

The functions of the Control Board can be summarised as follows:
1. To co‐ordinate operation of the currency dispenser transport hardware including all
motors, sensors, and actuators.
2. To process instructions from and provide responses to the ATM core electronics via a
USB interface.
3. To provide a power and logic interface to the associated single and double pick
modules.
Voltage and Current
The power requirement for the S1 (USB) Control board is:
 Direct current:
 +24 V  10% 0.35 A
 +24 V Interlock.
The S1 (USB) Control board supplies the following power:
 Direct current:
 +3.3 V  10% 0.5 A
 +5 V  10% 0.75 A
 +12 V  10% 0.5 A.
The S1 Control Board is fitted with a 32V Slow Blow 3 A surge protection fuse to protect
the 24V supply to the pick module control boards. In the event of the fuse failing new
Control Board has to be fitted and the Control Board Authentication procedure in this
chapter has to be carried out.
Compatibility
The USB Currency Dispenser Control Board is designed for operation in the NCR S1
Currency Dispenser.
Dispensers Security Switch
Switch SW3 on the Control Board is used in the authentication process as required and to
authorize running level 1 diagnostic tests: STACK, PRESENT, and DISPENSE. Refer to Level
1 Diagnostic Tests.
Configuration Switches
Eight configuration switches provided for configuration use and Extended Level 0
Diagnostics.
Diagnostic LEDs
A bank of Eight LEDs are provided to display Operating System LED configurations. A
second bank of Four LEDs are show the Extended Level 0 Diagnostics information during
start‐up.

The illustration shown below shows the positions of Dispenser Security switch,
Configuration switch and the Diagnostic LEDs.
Operating
System
LEDs
Diagnostic
Swtiches
Dispenser
Security
Switch
Reset
Switch Level 0 Diagnostic
LEDs
Firmware Description
The Currency Dispenser Device Firmware provides device control, including full error
recovery procedures in the USB peripheral environment.
The firmware interface provides dispensing of up to four different currency
denominations with a single dispenser and up to eight denominations with dual
dispensers. It accepts, executes, and returns status information in response to device
control commands from the next level process.
The firmware operates under control of the VxWorks real time kernel by soliciting
commands from the USB Secondary software and sending solicited and unsolicited
responses to the USB secondary for transmission to the host system.

The Currency Dispenser firmware will operate as a dual implementation module and is
programmable. New versions of firmware is downloadable via the USB Loader Service.
The Currency Dispenser firmware can be configured for up to eight cassettes in the
operational environment. The purpose of this is to allow up to eight cassettes to be
present in a self‐service terminal.
The USB dispenser has some new T_CODE, M_STATUS, SOH modules or message IDs.
Some additional M_DATA values have been added to indicate faults within new
dispenser mechanisms.

TROUBLESHOOTING
Module State Table
Error M_Status Possible root causes Isolation Resolution
Note jam at pick sensor Poor quality media Check media path for Remove debris
Invalid pick sensor 5 Poorly loaded cassettes debris Fill cassette
interrupt Check cassette for poorly See also
loaded bills Troubleshooting
Procedures section.
Cassette removed N/A Cassette 1/2/3/4 out Push cassette fully home Insert cassette
and ensure latched
No magnets present Check magnets present
and in
correct order
Cassette empty 4 Cassette 1/2/3/4 Check cassette is empty Fill cassette
empty
Poor stack Check media stack Fill cassette
Cassette parameters not 40 Media length and Set media length and Set parameters
configured singularity values not singularity values
set for each cassette
Too many rejects Poor quality media Check purge bin for Check cassette
damaged or folded
2 media
Unable to learn Poorly loaded media in Check cassette to ensure Check cassette
cassette media loaded neatly
Too many pick failures 3 Poor quality media Check purge bin for Check cassette. See also
damaged or folded Troubleshooting
media Procedures section.
Poor stack Check media loaded in Check cassette
cassette
Purge bin removed 7 Purge bin removed Check purge bin present Insert purge bin
Purge bin nearly full Purge bin nearly full Clear software count Check purge bin
Poor quality media Check purge bin for Check cassette
damaged or folded
N/A
media
cassette
Purge bin full Purge bin full Check purge bin for Emptying purge
damaged or folded bin
media
Poor quality media Check purge bin for Check cassette
8
damaged or folded
media
cassette


Note jam in main transport 5 Media jam or debris Clear jam Check jam cleared. See
at LVDT also Troubleshooting
Procedures section
Note jam between the pick Poor quality media Clear Jam Clear jam. See also
module and the LVDT causing jam Troubleshooting
5 Procedures section.
cassette
Main transport timing disk 16 Timing sensor dirty Clean sensor Clean sensor
failed
Presenter timing wheel 29 Dirty sensor Clean sensor Clean sensor
failed Worn down gear Replace worn down gear See Troubleshooting
Procedures section
Note jam or transport Media jam or debris Clear jam See Troubleshooting
sensor failure 18 Procedures section
Dirt on rollers or belts Clean
Interlock open 35 Interlock switch not Check switch operation Make contact by
made pushing dispenser fully
home
Shutter jam open 13 Media jammed in Check for jammed media Clear jammed media
shutter
Shutter jam closed 14 Media jammed in Check for jammed media Clear jammed media
shutter
Pick module deconfigured 41 A START/END Disable MANIP in the
(when performing a start EXCHANGE must be service provider
exchange during performed when registry.
manipulation of cassettes.) manipulating the Or
cassettes to avoid a A START/END exchange
‘deconfigured’ state, must be incorporated
resulting in the inability into the application.
to learn bill
parameters.
SNR transport open 64 SNR transport open Remove top cassette Close transport
check SNR
USB serial number too ‐ Build up of dirt on SNR ‐ Clean SNR camera. See
many invalid characters Adjustments section.
USB serial number too ‐ Build up of dirt on SNR ‐ Clean SNR camera. See
many invalid serial Adjustments section.
numbers
Communications failure to 64 Communications Check comms Re‐connect comms or
SNR connection to SNR connections to SNR repair cable
board disconnected board on pick module
USB serial number reader 64 Control board failure ‐ Replace pick module
control board failure
USB serial number reader 64 Fixed guide flex circuit Check flex circuit Re‐connect flex circuit.
fixed guide camera failure not connected. connection at fixed Replace pick module if
(top CIS) Faulty camera or guide and at control necessary.
control board board.


USB serial number reader 64 Moving guide flex Check flex circuit Re‐connect flex circuit.
moving guide camera circuit not connected. connection at moving Replace pick module if
failure (bottom CIS) Faulty camera or guide and at control necessary.
control board board.
Troubleshooting Procedures
Additional troubleshooting procedures for the following M_Status codes:
M_Status 3 ‐ Pick Failure
 Inspect cassette ‐ check how well the cassette is loaded (no bands/clips, cash is
ATM‐fit and neatly stacked) then remove the cash and check that the cassette is
clean, that the garage door is undamaged and that the cassette is set to the
correct height/width for the currency. Check that the cassette can be inserted
fully into the dispenser and that the latch is operational.
 Inspect pick module ‐ check the pick arm assembly, filter and suction cups for
wear or damage. Replace if necessary. Check for white dust or noisy operation
indicating worn gears. Check for black dust indicating worn belts.
 Check the pick line vacuum ‐ attach a vacuum gauge to the solenoid on the lowest
tube and perform a Clear diagnostic test. Check the vacuum reaches 800mBar
(23.5 IN HG) and is held for 1 minute after the motor stops. If the test fails, then
re‐check at the air filter, if the test passes at the air filter, replace all vacuum
tubes and T‐pieces. If the test fails at the air filter replace the motor pump
assembly (rear access) or the presenter (front access).
 Check the ‘D wheel’ timing within each pick module ‐ the timing disk on the
outside of the pick module should be set to ‘D’ with the ‘D wheels’ inside the pick
module set with a 0.5mm gap before touching the drive roller. Use the D‐wheel
setting gauge to re‐time if needed. Refer to the Aria Pick Module chapter or the
Preventive Maintenance chapter for more detail on timings.
 Check pick‐to‐pick module timing ‐ the first pick unit on the upper pick module
should be set to 1 on the timing disk and the second pick unit should be set to 2.
The first pick unit on the lower pick module should be set to 3 and the second
pick unit should be set to 4. Refer to the Aria Pick Module chapter or the
Preventive Maintenance chapter for more detail on timings.
 Check the pick interface PCB ‐ make sure that the cassette id pick interface PCB is
fully located against the side frame and is secure. Check that the pick interface
connections are fully home.
M_Status 5 ‐ Sensor Failure/Currency Jam in Main Transport
 All the procedures for M_Status 3 (above) also apply to M_Status 5, and in addition:
 Check for bill skew ‐ inspect the cassettes to ensure that bills are not skewing when
exiting through the garage door. If the bills are skewing, check for poorly loaded cash
or incorrect cassette configuration. Run a single bill dispense test from each pick
module multiple times while observing for bill skew when entering the stacking area

of the presenter. If bills are skewed, inspect the belts and rollers in the pick module
and the presenter, clean or replace as necessary. If the bills continue to skew on
exiting the pick module, replace the pick module; if they skew after entering the
presenter, replace the presenter.
M_Status 12 ‐ Presenter Clamp/Alignment Mechanism Failure or Jam
 Clean and inspect the presenter clamping mechanism (bill alignment mechanism).
Check for binding in the mechanism. Run a dispense diagnostic test first with one bill
then with 40 bills to verify proper operation. If the test fails, replace the presenter.
M_Status 13/14 ‐ Shutter Jammed Open/Closed
 Check for signs of damage to the shutter which could indicate fraudulent activity.
 Run the dispenser shutter diagnostic test with halt on error enabled and looping 50
times (facia should be in normal operational position). If the test fails, remove the
shutter to clean it and inspect it for binding when operated manually. Re‐fit the
shutter and re‐run the test. If the test continues to fail replace the shutter assembly.
M_Status 18 ‐ Currency Jam in Presenter Transport/Sensor Failure
 Check for bills jammed in the presenter transport and for damaged or unfit bills in the
purge bin.
 Check belt alignment: mark the presenter belts with a straight line then run a belt
drive diagnostic test, observe if the belts are still in line after the test. If they are out
of alignment, clean the belts and rollers then re‐run the test. If they are still out of
alignment replace the presenter.
 Check for bill skew: run a single bill dispense test from each pick unit multiple times
while observing for bill skew or delay on entering the stacking area of the presenter.
If bills are skewed or damaged during the dispense, inspect the belts and rollers in
the pick module and the presenter, clean or replace as necessary.
 If the bills are skewed during the stack part of the dispense operation, check for
problems in the LVDT area such as damage to belts, flickers, deflectors or badly
located ESD brushes. Also check for skewed bills coming from the pick module
into the LDVT area ‐ use the troubleshooting procedures for M_Status 3 and 5.
 If the bills are skewed during the present part of the dispense operation, there
may be an issue with the stack table. Check the error log for M_Status 12 errors in
the last 30 days, if there are none try fitting shims to the stacking table or replace
the presenter.
 If the bills are skewed after they have cleared the stack table, check the transport
belts for dirt.

M_Status 29 ‐ Timing Disk/Motor Failure
 Check the Hardware Device Error Logs for M_Status 29 events. These may be of
varying severity and frequency and will typically be found as M_Data 06 34 XX,
although other M_Data may also be found in association with this problem.
 Check for worn gears:
 Check for white powder around the area of the gears on the Presenter side
frame.
 Hold the gear in position and see if there is excessive movement or “play.”
 Replace worn gears. Before refitting a gear to a shaft, clean the shaft using a clean
cloth. Remove any existing gear wear white powder from around the Presenter side
frame. Some of the shafts will have a pin that drives the gear (Item 1 in the
illustration below). Ensure that the pin does not fall out. Start at the topmost gear
(Item 1) and progress down the gear train, replacing one gear shaft at a time. Gear 4
(Item 4) must be removed first to replace the right hand gear 3 (Item 3). Refit in
reverse order.

DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostic tests on the dispenser when installed in an NCR ATM are described in the
following sections:
Level 0 Diagnostics
This chapter describes the Level 0 Diagnostic which are performed to verify the basic
elements of the control board fitted to the S1 Currency Dispenser module.
The tests are carried out after a power‐up or hard reset. The device specific function
sysGpioInit is called up by the start‐up code before any diagnostic tests are started.
Note: These tests are not performed after a soft reset.
Level 0 Tests and Result Codes
When the level 0 diagnostic tests are being performed the test ID is displayed on the
bank of 4 programmable LED’s. If a failure occurs the result will be displayed on the LED’s
for one second followed by the test ID again for one second after the test has been
completed. This action will continue until the board is reset. If no failure is detected the
system performs the next in the sequence until the entire start up sequence is complete
at which time the LED’s are cleared.
Once the Level 0 Diagnostics have been completed, any usage of the LED’s is now
entirely device specific.
Note: There are no switch selectable or run to run tests available.
Test 1 ‐ Flash sum check
This is a checksum test to verify the contents of the Flash ROM. The USB bootloader is
checked and the Device Realtime Software (if present). If the USB bootloader checksum
test fails an error code is displayed and the board fails to boot up. If the Device Realtime
Software sum check fails the application_loaded flag is cleared and a forced download of
new software is performed.
Test 1 Results
LED Code Status
0x0D Bootloader checksum fail
Test 2 ‐ SRAM test
This test is to ensure that the SRAM is available and the following steps are performed:
 The data bus is initially tested by performing a walking 1’s test at address 0.
 The wiring for the bus is tested by performing a walking 1’s test on the address bit to
check for aliasing. The test will diagnose a single‐bit address such as stuck‐high,
stuck‐low, as well as shorted pins.

 The physical memory integrity is tested by performing an increment/decrement test
over the entire region. Every storage bit in the device is tested as a zero and a one
during the process.
Test 2 Results
LED Code Status
0x08 Data bus error
0x09 Address bus error
0x0A Internal data error
Test 3 ‐ EEPROM test
This test is performed after the level 0 diagnostics have been completed. The test
performs a basic check on the EEPROM device (NVRAM#1). The test performs the
following steps:
 The system attempts to read a known header in the top 4 bytes of the device. The
location of a header is defined as a pass for this test.
 If the system does not locate a header the test will the try to write and read back a
header. If this fails, the system indicates a faulty device.
Test 3 Results
LED Code Status
0x08 EEPROM write/read error
Level 1 Diagnostics
This section describes the level 1 diagnostics for the S1 currency dispenser, including the
tamper indicating variant which are accessed via the System Application menu.
The M_STATUS codes and M_DATA returned for currency handling modules are listed in
the NCR publication, B006‐6273‐A000 56xx/Personas Self‐Service Financial Terminals
Diagnostic Status Code Notebook and in the Status Code Translator ‐ an application for
PC or Blackberry ‐ available from http://www.infoprod.ncr.com/
Tests on the Currency Dispenser Diagnostic menu are:
 Clear
 Set Notes
 Stack
 Present
 Dispense
 Main Motor
 Self Test
 Exit Shutter
 Sensor/Switch Status

 Presenter Bill Drive
 Learn Bill Parameters
 Presenter Clamp
 Pick Valve
 Run To Run
 Tamper Indication
 Get Serial Numbers
 Serial Number Read Sensors Status.
Looping is allowed on certain tests.
Clear
The Clear test drives any bills left in the transport into the purge bin.
Set Notes
The Set Notes test allows you to set the number of notes to be picked, from each
cassette type present. If the combined maximum number of notes is greater than 40 (50
bills for special China version), the test fails and displays “Invalid number of notes”. You
are then prompted to “Set notes for cassette X”.
A default of five notes is picked from each cassette type if no number is entered.
Stack
The Stack test picks a number of bills, from each cassette type, and stacks them for
presentation.
A default of five bills is picked, from each cassette type, unless changed using the “Set
Notes” option.
Note: This test is not offered unless there has been a change of state of the dispenser
security switch after entry to diagnostics, and the “Cash Enable” option on the control
menu is set ON.
Present
The Present test moves previously stacked bills to the exit slot for removal.
security switch after entry to diagnostics.
Dispense
The Dispense test performs the Stack and Present tests in a single operation.
A default of five bills is picked, from each cassette type, unless changed using the “Set
Notes” option.

security switch after entry to diagnostics, and the “Cash Enable” option on the control
menu is set ON.
Main Motor
The Main Motor test tests the vertical transport drive motor.
Self Test
The Self Test test picks one bill from each pick module with a cassette installed, moves
the bills into the purge bin and then activates/exercises the exit shutter.
Exit Shutter
The Exit Shutter test checks the exit shutter sensors while the shutter is energized (open)
and again when it is de‐energized (shut).
Sensor/Switch Status
The Sensor/Switch Status test determines the state of all sensors and switches and
reports them as M_DATA. The sensor reading is taken with the LEDs on.
Presenter Bill Drive
The Presenter Bill Drive test activates the presenter bill drive at two speeds, fast and
slow, in both the forward and reverse directions.
Learn Bill Parameters
The Learn Bill Parameters test instructs the firmware to learn the bill parameters. The
test is only offered for configured cassettes. 5 bills are picked from a selected cassette,
inspected for width and singularity, and then deposited in the purge bin.
The bill width and singularity is returned as T_DATA.
Presenter Clamp
The Presenter Clamp test exercises and monitors the presenter clamp and the bill
alignment mechanism. Before the clamp test is performed the bill alignment mechanism
will be moved to the home position if required. The outcome of the test is returned as
M_DATA.
The clamp test initially checks the position of the presenter clamp. If it is not in the home
position, it is driven until it reaches home. When it is home it is driven to the present
position and then driven back to home. Failure in any of these operations is reported.
The bill alignment test initially checks the position of the bill alignment mechanism. If it is
not at home, the mechanism is driven until it reaches home. When it is in the home
position it is driven to the smallest bill position and then driven back to home. Failure in
any of these operations is reported.

Pick Valve
The Pick Valve test energizes the main motor and the pick valve of the pick module, in
the selected position, for a period of 10 seconds.
Note 1: No feedback is provided for this test. You have to manually confirm the
operation of the valve.
Note 2: All currency cassettes must be removed from the dispenser for this test to run.
Run‐To‐Run
The Run‐To‐Run test automatically performs, in sequence, the following tests:
 Clear
 Sensor/Switch Status
 Presenter Clamp
 Self Test
 Exit Shutter
 Dispense (only if the security switch has been operated, refer to “Dispense Test”)
 Clear.
Tamper Indication
The Tamper Indication test displays the status of the dispenser tamper indicator as
M_DATA.
Get Serial Numbers
If Serial Number Read hardware is present in the pick module, then all serial number,
denominations and images will be displayed for the notes picked from the prior
Dispense, Stack or Self Test command.
Serial Number Read Sensors Status
If Serial Number Read hardware is present in the pick module, this test returns the status
of the Serial Number Read image and SNR transport sensors.
Actual To Virtual Cassette Mapping
Error codes returned by a Self Test or Dispense test are mapped to the virtual type (VT)
of the cassette. This section enables you to determine which cassette type has returned
which code.
The following algorithm is used:
 Map codes returned by physical cassette types 1 to 4, into the corresponding virtual
type.
 Map physical extended types 5 to 7 into the unused virtual type entries in ascending
order.

 Set any unused virtual type slots to their physical types.
The following examples explain how the error codes can be traced to the correct cassette
position in the dispenser.
Example 1
Step 1 Byte 0 1 2 3
VT 1 2 3 4
Physical
1 2
Position Type
1 5
2 1
3 2
4 1
Note: In this example two cassettes are

Type 1. To achieve a code for each
Type 1 run the test with one removed
in turn.
Byte 0 1 2 3
Step 2
VT 1 2 3 4
Physical
1 2 5
Position Type
1 5
2 1
3 2
4 1
Step 3 Byte 0 1 2 3
VT 1 2 3 4
Physical
1 2 5 4
Position Type
1 5
2 1
3 2
4 1

Example 2
Step 1
Byte 0 1 2 3
VT 1 2 3 4
Physical
3 4
Position Type
1 3
2 4
3 6
4 7
Byte 0 1 2 3
Step 2
VT 1 2 3 4
Physical
6 7 3 4
Position Type
1 3
2 4
3 6
4 7
Step 3 - No further mapping required. All fields filled by steps 1 and 2.
Level 3 Diagnostics
The level 3 diagnostics returned for the S1 currency dispenser are:
S_DATA
The S_DATA returned for the currency dispenser are:
S_DATA Meaning
00 GOOD (No error).
03 SUSPEND (Possible customer tampering).

Tallies
The mnemonics for these tallies are accessed via the REPORT_TALLY_MNEMONICS
command and are not part of the TMS Interface Support Area NVRAM.
Tally Description
PKFAIL 1 Pick attempt failure. A dispense attempt reported a pick failure on virtual
cassette number 1. This tally is not incremented if the cassette low media
sensor is activated.
PKFAIL 2 As PKFAIL 1 for virtual cassette number 2.
SIZEERR1 Bill size errors. A dispense attempt was not successful because at least one
undersize, oversize or extra bill was detected from virtual cassette number 1.
SIZEERR2 As SIZEERR1 for virtual cassette number 2.
DOUBLE1 Double bill errors. A dispense attempt was not successful because at least one
double bill was detected from virtual cassette number 1.
DOUBLE2 As DOUBLE1 for virtual cassette number 2.
REJECT1 Bills picked from virtual cassette number 1 and purged due to bill verification
errors. This count does not include good bills picked and purged during
dispense by position.
REJECT2 As REJECT1 for virtual cassette number 2.
PICKED 1 Bills picked and successfully stacked from virtual cassette number 1 or
successfully diverted during dispense by position.
PICKED 2 As PICKED 1 for virtual cassette number 2.
DISP OPS Dispense, dispense by position or clear main transport operations attempted.
TRANSEN Dispenser transport sensor fault or transport jam. A dispense or zero dispense
attempt was not successful because a fault was detected on one of the
dispenser transport sensors:
The fault may have occurred for a number of reasons:
‐ Sensor blocked initially (jam or sensor fault).
‐ Bill not seen under sensor at correct time (jam or sensor fault)
‐ Bill did not clear sensor at correct time (jam or sensor fault)
‐ Main motor timing disk failure (jam or sensor fault).
COMMINIT Reserved
COMMRET Reserved
COMMFAIL Reserved
RES 5070 Reserved for H‐8010‐5070‐XX‐08 currency dispenser.
EXITSHUT Exit shutter faults detected. The conditions causing this tally to be incremented
are:

Tally Description
‐ Exit shutter sensors indicate that shutter failed to open during a present
operation
‐ Exit shutter sensors indicate that shutter is not closed on initiation of a
dispense, dispense by position, clear dispense, purge, or present operation
‐ EXIT_SHUTTER_TEST or DIAG_SHUTTER_TEST failed.
PRES OPS Present operations attempted.
PRSTROPS Other presenter operations attempted, for example, clamp or purge.
PRSTRJAM Presenter mechanism was not in the correct position or jammed during a
dispense, dispense by position, clear dispense, purge or present operation.
PRES_ERR Reserved
EXITSENS Reserved
PRESDISK Presenter timing disk failed to operate correctly.
PRESJAM Presenter bill jam was detected:
‐ Presenter transport sensors failed to block/clear while tracking bills
‐ Sensors failed static on/off test
‐ Sensors blocked initially on present or at end of purge.
SER READ Number of serial number scan operations.
INVNOTES Number of invalid notes scanned.
SERCHARS Number of serial number read characters.
INVCHARS Number of invalid characters.
SNROPERR Number of serial number read (SNR) transport open errors.
The Tally record types listed are defined in the Module Management Subsystem FS with
the remaining Tallies being part of the TMS Interface Support Area NVRAM.
The tally mnemonics listed are not reported by the firmware in any response message,
but are included for maintainability purposes due to them being used in the source code
when operating with tally values.

STRAPPING
Currency Dispenser Control Board
D1
Diagnostic
LEDs
D8
SW1
Diagnostic
Swtiches Dispenser
Security
SW8 Switch
Level 0 Diagnostic
LEDs

The strapping associated with the Currency Dispenser Control board has the following
default position:
 First Dispenser command switch pack (SW1) — set switches 1 to 8 to OFF for normal
operation.
 Second Dispenser command switch pack (SW1) — set switch 1 to ON and switches 2
to 8 to OFF for normal operation.
 EPS2 functionality:
 Switch pack SW1, switch 4 down (ON) — EPS 2 Full Enable feature enabled.
This feature activates full EPS2 functionality, including ‘fatal on detection’ and
‘auto present’, following attack detection.
 Switch pack SW1, switch 5 down (ON) — EPS 2 Auto–Purge feature enabled.
This feature provides EPS 2 full functionality with the exception of ‘auto–present’.
The Auto–Purge feature may be ordered in combination with EPS2 Full Enable
feature.
 Switch pack SW1, switch 6 down (ON) — EPS 2.2 enabled.

ADJUSTMENTS
Drive Belt Tension
Proceed as follows to adjust the tension of the drive belt from the main motor to the
intermediate pulley. Refer to the illustrations following the procedure for each type of
dispenser.
 Check for a deflection of 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) when a force of 1.0 N (0.21 lb.) is applied
to the mid span of the drive belt.
 If the tension is wrong, loosen the four motor mounting screws.
 Move the main motor to adjust the belt tension.
 Tighten the screws and check the tension again.
 Repeat the adjustment until the correct tension is achieved.
Drive Belt Arrangement ‐ Rear Access
1.0 N (0.21 lb)
Motor Mounting Screws

(4 places)
Drive Belt Arrangement ‐ Front Access
Motor Mounting
Screws
(4 Places)
1.0 N (0.21lb)

Currency Evaluation Qualification Procedure
Note: The S1 Currency Dispenser is calibrated in the same way as the other dispensers in
the 58XX and 56XX ranges of ATMs and singularity values previously calculated for these
are valid.
When the first dispenser is received in each country the local Field Engineering
organization must establish the singularity values for each type of currency to be
dispensed. These singularity values must then be entered to every ATM dispensing that
currency, upon initial installation or whenever the dispenser control board or the LVDT
has been changed or repaired.
The currency evaluation qualification procedure can only be performed on a calibrated
dispenser. Attempting the procedure on an uncalibrated or incorrectly calibrated
dispenser will give incorrect results.
Calibrating the Dispenser
Note: Dispensers are shipped pre‐calibrated by the manufacturing plant. Calibration is
required if the LVDT or control board are replaced or NVRAM is corrupted or a new
version of firmware is download.
The dispenser maintains an internal compensation factor in NVRAM on the dispenser
control board. This compensation factor allows for differences that exist between the
singularities calculated by different LVDT assemblies because of mechanical tolerances.
The dispenser adjusts the LVDT compensation factor automatically as bills of a known
singularity value are dispensed. While bills are dispensed the actual average of good
single bill singularities is measured over 255 bills. This average is compared to the
singularity figure typed in at installation time and the compensation factor is adjusted
accordingly. Initially the compensation factor is set to 80H (equivalent to 1.00) and this is
changed automatically by the dispenser and updated every 255 bills.
To achieve dispenser calibration at least 255 bills of a known singularity must be
dispensed after a power reset. This may be local currency or test media.
The following procedure describes how to calibrate a dispenser on a terminal running on
the XP platform using SYSTEM APPLICATION. For details of System Application, refer to
NCR Self Service Support, System Application User Guide (B006‐6167).
Level 1 diagnostic tests are required to dispense cash and for this reason you need to
insert the field engineer’s Service Key.
The procedure is as follows:
1. For each cassette type, adjust the cassette guides if necessary to accept the test
currency, and set the cassette magnets for the required cassette type. Refer to
currency cassette chapter in the dispense section of this manual for details.
2. Load the test currency into the cassette.

3. Insert the cassette into the dispenser.
4. Put the ATM into supervisor mode.
5. Select the SELF‐SERVICE CONFIGURATION option from the SUPERVISOR menu.
6. Then select the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION option.
7. Then choose the USB CASH HANDLER option. The system will then instruct the CE to
wait while the Dispenser Transport is cleared.
8. The system with display the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu.
9. Then choose the SET option.
10. The system will then display the NOTE CONFIGURATION set up menu as shown below.
The menu is spread over two pages which is navigated using page up and page down
options.
11. To start changing the note configuration activate the Reset option.
12. Enter Note Size for Type 1. This is repeated for Types 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7.
13. Enter the Singularity for Type 1. This is repeated for Types 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7.
14. To accept all the changes made select OK.
15. The system will redisplay the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu shown below.

16. To finally confirm the changes activate the Toggle option to change the NO option to
YES.
17. Return to the SYSTEM APPLICATION main Menu and select the DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC
option.
18. Select the CASH HANDLER option from the DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC menu.
19. Operate the dispenser security switch.
20. Select SET NOTES option from the CASH HANDLER menu. The number of notes to be
picked is 40 (50 for special China version) from cassette type 1
21. Change the Loop Off option to Loop On.
22. Select the DISPENSE option and allow the loop count to reach at least 7 before
stopping the command.
The dispenser is now calibrated and you can evaluate the currency to be dispensed as
described in the next section.
Establishing Singularity and Size
In this procedure you have to cause the ATM to calculate the singularity and size of 40
(50 bills for special China version) dispensed bills five times for each currency you wish to
evaluate. Due to the nature of the currency the singularity calculated may vary for each
attempt. Add the five figures shown in the Parameters Option and take the average
(divide by five and round to the nearest whole number) and the answers are the
singularity and size values you enter to the ATM and to all ATMs using the same
currency.
To achieve a good singularity figure the currency loaded for this procedure should
comprise of new bills. Load the currency so that the same side of each bill is facing the
truck door of the cassette. Put the bills into the cassette in 50 bill bunches, alternately
right way up and upside down (see the following illustration). This makes sure that
variations in inking are allowed for.

The singularity procedure is as follows:
1. Prepare cassettes to accept the denominations of currency you will normally be
dispensing from the ATMs. Refer to currency cassette chapter in the dispense section
of this manual for the method of adjusting cassettes to currency size.
2. Set the cassette magnets to indicate cassette types 1, 2, 3 and 4 as required. Refer to
currency cassette chapter in the dispense section of this manual for this setting.
3. Load at least 200 bills of each denomination of the currency into the cassettes and
insert the cassettes into the dispenser.
5. Select the SYSTEM APPLICATION option from the ATM opening menu.
6. Select the SELF‐SERVICE CONFIGURATION option.
7. Then choose the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION option.
8. Then choose the CASH HANDLER option. The system will display the following screen.
9. Then choose the LEARN option.
10. Select the SET NOTES option to change the number of bills to be dispensed during the
LEARN process.
11. The system will display the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu showing the cassette types
available (only those present in the ATM) as shown below.

12. Select Type 1 from the menu shown below and the system will display the menu
below which allows you to change the number of bill to be dispensed.
13. Return to NOTE CONFIGURATION menu and activate Type 1.
14. The system will perform a test and return the message shown below.
15. The system will return to the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu.
16. Make a note of the singularity and size figures on the screen against the cassette and
type selected or all cassette types if applicable. The figures are obtained through the
Parameters Option
17. Empty the purge bin as necessary.
18. Repeat steps 11 to 18 until you have five readings of singularity and size for each
cassette type loaded.
19. Add each set of five figures and divide the total by five to obtain an average
singularity and size for each cassette type.
20. Select the PARAMETER option from the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu
21. Modify as appropriate the parameters you require to change.
22. To accept all the changes made select OK and the changes will be accepted.

YES.
25. Return the system to the SYSTEM APPLICATION MAIN menu.
The procedure is now complete. From the UTILITIES menu you can now enter level 1
diagnostics and dispense notes to test the validity of the singularity values. A minimum
of one cassette full of used notes and one cassette full of new notes of each
denomination should be dispensed. New notes must be loaded with alternate packs right
way up and then upside down. Bowed notes must be loaded with the bow towards the
note pusher.
A reject rate less than 1.5% must be achieved when dispensing an average of 2.5 bills per
transaction. If the reject rate is greater than this the singularity and size values should be
recalculated.
Calculation of Reject Rate
The reject rate is calculated using the following formula. The numbers for rejected bills
and total bills picked are taken from tallies.
Total Number of Rejected Bills
Reject Rate = x 100%
Total Bills Picked + Total Number of Rejected Bills
Error Messages
Errors occurring during bill configuration procedures result in the error messages
described below.
Dispenser Clear Transport Error
When the DISPENSER BILL CONFIG option is selected from the CONFIGURATION menu a
CLEAR command is sent to clear the transport of any bills. If the clear operation fails then
the following error screens shown below are displayed. Each screen is displayed for five
seconds before the next one is displayed. You return to the CASH HANDLER menu via the
SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION menu.

Change Parameter Errors
The currency parameters are checked for errors as they are entered. If an error is
detected then the error message shown below is displayed. The incorrect entry is
highlighted and you can re‐enter a correct value in the error position.
The message is shown for five seconds and then you are prompted to enter the new
parameter value again. Once all the parameter values have been changed and checked,
the main dispenser screen reappears with the new parameter values. If a mistake
becomes apparent at this point then the user can select CHANGE again.
The dispenser parameter error messages are as follows:
 ERROR ‐ VALID RANGE XX ‐ XXX ‐ Parameter value is outside the permissible range.
This applies to bill sizes and singularity values
 DUPLICATE VALUE IN SEQUENCE ‐ A duplicate value has been entered in the
presentation order
 ERROR ‐ INVALID SEQUENCE ‐ The user has input fewer than four values for the
presentation order.

Learn Parameter Errors
Cassette Errors During Learn - If an attempt to learn the parameters from a particular
cassette type fails then, providing the error is not fatal, the operation will be tried
repeatedly until successful, or a fatal error occurs. Should a fatal error occur then the
error screen shown below appears, and after five seconds, you are returned to the NOTE
CONFIGURATION menu.
Dispenser Error During Learn - The following screen appears if a fatal dispenser error

occurs while learning parameters from the dispenser. Any changes made up to this point
can not be written to the dispenser therefore you are returned to the CASH HANDLER
menu via the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION menu.
Dispenser Read/Write Errors - If, while communicating with the dispenser, an error occurs

which is not fatal, then the operation is tried repeatedly until it is successful or until a
fatal error occurs. When a fatal error is encountered then a DISPENSER COMMS ERROR
screen showing one of the following messages is displayed. The CONFIG MENU activator
on the screen returns you to the configuration menu.

Unable To Read Parameters ‐ A fatal error has occurred while reading data from the
dispenser. Unable to read the currently configured dispenser parameters so can not
continue with configuration.
Configuration Not Completed ‐ Fatal error while writing data to the dispenser. The
configuration data is written to the dispenser NVRAM using three separate dispenser
calls. One sets the new bill sizes, one sets the new singularity values and the third sets
the new presentation order. Because the data is split into three parts, if this type of error
occurs then the dispenser configuration is incomplete.
Cleaning Serial Number Read Transport Cameras
The upper and lower SNR transport cameras should be cleaned as part of regular
preventive maintenance, especially in dusty environments. Cleaning will also be required
to clear the states of health ‘USB serial number read too many invalid characters’ or ‘USB
serial number read too many invalid serial numbers’ which are triggered when the
number of invalid characters or invalid serial numbers read reaches the configured
thresholds (default 10% and 5% respectively).
Clean the cameras using compressed air or a soft thin brush or cotton bud. Ingrained
grime can be removed using a lint free cloth moistened with soapy water or an alcohol
free wipe.
SNR camera
on fixed guide
SNR camera
on moving guide

Removing the Electronics Box (Rear Access)
On the Rear Access Currency Dispenser the electronics box contains the main motor
and pump assembly, solid state relay, and motor run capacitor. It also provides a
mounting place for the dispenser control board. Its removal gives access to these
components and also to the LVDT assembly.
Dispenser Motor
Dispenser Control
Board
Electronics Box

1. Disconnect the cable at the bottom left‐hand side of the control board.
Screw
Harness
Control Board
Cover
Screw
Cable
2. Push out the cable ties holding the harness to the top and left‐hand side of the
control board cover.
3. Loosen the two screws on the left‐hand side of the control board cover.
4. Unscrew and remove the screw at the bottom right‐hand side of the control board
cover.
Dispenser
Harness
Cables
Screw
5. Remove the control board cover from the electronics box.

6. Push out the cable ties holding the dispenser harness on to the electronics box.
7. Disconnect the cables from the lower right‐hand side of the electronics box.
8. Disconnect the remaining cables from the control board. Check that each connector is
labelled with its control board connector number.
9. Unscrew and remove the two screws securing the green turning wheel in position.
10. Remove the green turning wheel from the presenter drive wheel and then ease off
the timing belt.
11. Remove the two plastic rivets securing the timing disk sensor in position by pushing
the rivet centre on the timing disk side of sensor. Move the sensor clear of the timing
disk.
Plastic Timing Disk

Rivets Sensor

12. Loosen the four main motor mounting screws and ease the timing belt off the rear of
the timing disk gear towards the presenter side frame.
Timing Belt
Screws
(4 off)
13. Lift the timing belt over the timing disk.
Screw
Earth
Strap
14. At the upper left‐hand side of the electronics box remove the screw attaching the
earth strap to the presenter.
15. Remove the air hose from the pump.
Air Hose

16. Remove the two top screws (1 each side) holding the electronics box to the presenter.
17. Remove the two bottom screws (1 each side) holding the electronics box to the Upper
Pick Module.
18. Lift the electronics box to release its hooks from the presenter tie shaft, and lift it
clear of the dispenser
Replacing the Electronics Box
Fitting the replacement electronics box is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Removing the Control Board
Before removing the control board to resolve a dispenser performance issue (when Stack
or Present command are not working for example), perform the following to make sure
that the board is in fact the root cause:
1. Check the connections to the board are all seated correctly.
2. Check that the connectors are undamaged.
3. Set switches 3 and 8 to ON, then perform a reset to re‐boot the system.
4. Re‐calibrate the dispenser in System Application (Self Service Configuration menu), to
set the note configuration and parameters.
5. Authorise and authenticate the control board.
6. Use Device Diagnostics to issue a Stack command with one note. Observe the note’s
movement: it should exit the stack table smoothly and should not hesitate at the
interface between the stack table and the presenter.
7. Use Device Diagnostics to issue a Present command with one note. Observe the
note’s movement as it moves to the exit.
8. Use Device Diagnostics to issue a Clear (retract) command with one note. Observe the
note’s movement as it moves to the purge bin.
9. Repeat the Stack, Present and Clear commands for a 40 note stack.
10. Repeat the sequence of commands for a one note stack and then a 40 note stack a
further two times each.
11. During the tests, there should be no present errors such as skewing or splaying; no
pick failures (M_Status 3); no purges except for the ones under the Clear command;
no sensor failures or jams in the main transport (M_Status 5) or presenter transport
(M_Status 18); or presenter clamp/alignment mechanism problems (M_Status 12).
12. If after this process, the original error is still evident, proceed with removing and
replacing the control board.

Dispenser Control Board ‐ Rear Access
Screw
Harness
Control Board
Cover
Screw
Cable
Remove the control board as follows:
Dispenser
Harness
Cables
Screw
3. Unscrew and remove the screw on the bottom right‐hand side securing the control
board cover to the electronics box.

6. Disconnect the remaining cables from the control board. The strain relief fixing for
the USB cable must be released prior to removal.
7. Unscrew and remove the screws securing the heat sink to the left‐hand side of the
electronics box.
8. Unscrew and remove the four screws securing the control board to the electronics
box and then remove the control board.
Replacing the Control Board
Fitting the replacement Control Board is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Dispenser Control Board ‐ Front Access
On the Front Access Dispenser the control board is attached to its mounting plate by four
M4 Pozidrive screws into stand‐offs and a further two M3 screws through the heat sinks,
as shown in the illustration below
The control board mounting plate is hung in slots in the presenter side frames and
fastened by a screw at each side in the positions indicated in the illustration below:
Slot
(Both Sides)
Screw
(Both Sides)
Removing the Main Motor
For the Rear Access Presenter procedure, see the section “Removing the Electronics
Box”.

Front Access
Proceed as follows to remove the main motor from the front access:
SSR
Assembly
Cable
Guard
Main Motor
Screws Timing
(4 Places) Disk
Timing Disk
Sensor
Handwheel
1. Remove the cable guard (3 screws) at the left‐hand side of the dispenser and let it
hang free.
2. Remove two connectors from the SSR assembly and then the 4 screws (two at each
side) and remove the assembly.
3. Remove the green handwheel (2 screws).
4. Remove the circlip and retaining washer and slip off the timing belt between the
handwheel and main motor shaft.
5. Remove the plastic rivets holding the timing disk sensor and move the sensor clear of
the timing disk.
6. Slacken the four screws holding the main motor to the side frame.
7. Ease the timing belt off the timing disk gear towards the presenter side frame.
8. Remove the timing disk from its shaft and lift the timing belt off the main motor
pulley.
9. Remove four motor screws, slackened in step 6, and lift the motor out of the slot in
the side frame.
10. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the pump.
Removing the LVDT
Dispenser LVDT ‐ Rear Access
In the Rear Access dispenser the LVDT assembly is attached between the side frames of
the presenter by two screws at either side. To remove the LVDT proceed as follows:
Note: There is no field adjustment on this LVDT version.
1. Make sure you have access to both sides of the dispenser.

2. Remove the electronics box as described in the previous procedure.
3. Remove the four screws attaching the LVDT assembly to the presenter side frames ‐
two at either end
Screws
Screws
4. Slide the LVDT forward and out via the space vacated by the electronics box, taking
care not to trap any wires.

Dispenser LVDT ‐ Front Access
Remove the LVDT assembly from the Front Access dispenser as follows:
LVDT Shield Screws

(2 at each side)
LVDT Assembly Screws

(2 at each side)
LVDT Transport
Drive Shaft
1. Remove the main motor, refer to section “Removing the Main Motor”.
2. Remove the LVDT shield (2 screws in presenter side frames at both sides).
3. Remove the circlips inside and outside of the right‐hand side frame, on the drive shaft
of the LVDT upper belt transport.
4. Slide the shaft out of the presenter right‐hand side frame so that the tension is
removed from the transport belts.
5. Remove the screws from the LVDT assembly (2 screws in the presenter side frames at
both sides).
6. Ease the LVDT assembly out between the belts.

Replacing the LVDT
Fitting the replacement LVDT is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Electronic Verification of LVDT
The LVDT should be verified by following the Calibrating the Dispenser procedure section
of this chapter.
The only additional action required is to check that the LVDT calibration ratio returned in
the last byte of M_DATA is 80H ± 12.5%, that is between the following limits:
 Minimum: 50H
 Mean: 80H
 Maximum: B0H
NOTE: Values outside the range given above indicate that further investigation of the
LVDT may be necessary, but values less than 60H and greater than A0H should be
investigated.
Pick Module Timing
The S1 dispenser does not require any timing relationship to be set between the action
of the pick modules and the presenter. The pick module to pick module relationship
does, however, still require to be set. The adjustment procedures are described in Aria
pick module chapter of the dispense section of this manual.

CABLING
Internal Cables
The diagrams in this section are the schematics of the internal cables of the Currency
Dispenser. Refer to the Aria pick module section of the Dispense Chapter of this manual
Aria pick module internal cables.
Dispenser Main Motor
DISP AC
J18 Motor Jumper
P1 J1
1 LIVE 1
V
4 2
V
33
V
V
V
V
Main Motor
Filter*
NEUTRAL
V
2 1 1
V
3 1 1 SSR SSR 2 2
V
V
V V
GROUND 3
Jumper
V
3 22 V
V
V V
1 2
V Motor Run
Frame Capacitor
Ground 1
SSR J1
1
V
3 SSR
V
4 SSR
V
2
V
* The filter is present only on OEM dispenser models

Dispenser Interconnection Diagram
AC Interlock Main
SSR
Motor
External S1 Devices
Sensors: Exit, Transport Sensors 3, 3A, 4,
5, Purge Overfill, Stack.
UNI
DC J8
J1 LEDs: Exit, Transport LEDs 3, 3A, 4,
M1 5, Purge Overfill, Stack.
Clamp Motor
USB J13 Align Motor

J2
Interface
Present Motor
Timing Disks - Main, Present, Clamp Sensors,

J6
Dispenser Control Board
Up, Down, Align Home
J9 Note Thickness Sensor/LVDT
Pick Sensor
Pick LED
J4 J1 Double J5 Solenoid Valve
Pick Pick Arm Timing
Interface Disk
J4 To Lower Pick
Module I/F (P1)
J18 +24V Interlock
J5 Clamp Mid Sensor and LED
External S1 Devices
J5 Exterior Shutter Motor
Interior Shutter Motor

J20 J3 Fascia Shutter I2C J1
J4 To Power Supply
J21 TTL Shutter (For Non S1 Dispensers)
J11 Fluiditi ATM Security
J17 +24V Power Supply

Front Access Presenters Cabling (Sheet 1 of 4)
J8 P1
AC MOT ON (WHITE) 1
V V V V V V V
1
V V
+5 V SSR
2 2
TSEN1 (GREEN) G T1
V V
3
TSEN1+ (WHITE)
5 W SENSOR
T1LED+ (RED)
4 R
V V
T1LED (BLACK) T1 LED
6 B
TSEN2 (GREEN)
7 G T2
V V
TSEN2+ (WHITE)
W SENSOR
V V V V V
9
T2LED+ (RED)
8 R
V V
10 B
11 TSEN3 (GREEN)
G
V V
T3
13 W SENSOR
LINK1 (GREEN) G
V V
T3A
TSEN3+ (WHITE) W SENSOR
12 T3LED+ (RED)
R
V V
V V
T3
14 B LED
LINK2 (BLACK) R
V V
T3A
T3LED (BLACK) B LED
TSEN4 (GREEN)
V V V V V V V V V V
15 G T4
V V
TSEN4+ (WHITE)
17 W SENSOR
TLED4+ (RED)
16 R
TLED4 (BLACK) V V T4 LED
18 B
T5SEN (GREEN)
19
V V
G T5
T5SEN+ (WHITE)
21 W SENSOR
T5LED+ (RED)
20 R
V V

22 B
GND
23 C Purge Bin
V V
PURGE INb
24 NO Microswitch

Front Access Presenter Cabling (Sheet 2 of 4)
J13
PRES A+
V V V V
4
V V V V
7
PRES C+
8 3 Presenter
1 PRES B+ Motor
2
PRES D+
Dispenser Control Board 2 1
CLAMP A+
V V V V
9 1
V V V V
10 CLAMP C+ 2 Clamp
3 CLAMP B+ 3 Motor
4 CLAMP D+ 4
ALIGN A+
V V V V
V V V V
11
12 ALIGN C+ 2 Align
ALIGN B+ 3 Motor
5
ALIGN D+
6 4
J20 GND
V V V V V V
V V V V V V
1 1
GND
2 2
12C_SDA_BUF
3 3 Fascia
GND Shutter
4 4
12C_SCL_BUF PCB
4 5
GND
5 6
External S1 Device

J6
CLAMP UP LED (RED)
V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
R
V V V V
1
GND (BLACK) Clamp
3 B
+5 V (WHITE) Up
5 W Sensor
CLAMP UP (GREEN)
7 G
CLAMP DOWN LED (RED)
9 R
V V V V
GND (BLACK) Clamp
11 B
+5 V (WHITE) Down
13 W Sensor
15 CLAMP DOWN (GREEN)
G
ALIGN LED (RED)
V V V V
2 R
GND (BLACK)
4 B Align
+5 V (WHITE) Home
6 W
ALIGN HOME (GREEN)
8 G
PRES TDISK (RED)
10 R
V V V V
GND (BLACK)
12 B Timing
+5 V (WHITE) Disk
14 W
PRES TDISK (GREEN)
16 G
MAIN TD LED (RED)
18
V V V V
R
GND (BLACK) Main
20 B
+5 V (WHITE) Timing
22 W Disk
MAIN TDISK (GREEN)
24 G
19
17
CONFIG 1
23
21

J4 J1
CAS ID1b 40C
V VV VV V V V V V V VV V VV V V V V V VV V V V V V V V VV V V V V V V V V
V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V VV V V VV V V V
1
2 GND
39
CAS ID2b 38
3
GND 37
4
CAS ID3b
5 36
6 GND
35
CAS ID4b
7 34
GND
8 33
CAS TEMPb
9 32
GND
10 31
CASLOWb
11 30
12 GND
29
13 N/C 28
LEDON_PICK
14 27
GND
Pick Interface Board

15 26
GND
16 25
S0 24
17
S1 23
18
DISABLEb
19 22
COILENb
20 21
PICK
21 20
PSEN1
22 19
PSEN2
23 18
PSEN3
24 17
PSEN4
25 16
PICK_TXD
26 15
PICK_RXD
27 14
GND
28 13
29 GND
12
+12 V
30 11
+5 V
31 10
+5 V
32 9
GND
33 8
GND
34 7
35 GND
6
36 GND
5
+24 V
37 4
+24 V
38 3
+24 V
39 2
+24 V
40 1

Rear Access Presenter Cabling (Sheet 1 of 4)
J8 P1
AC MOT ON (WHITE) 2
V V V V V V V
1
V V
+5 V (BLACK) SSR
2 1
TSEN1 (GREEN) G T1
V V
3
TSEN1+ (WHITE)
5 W SENSOR
T1LED+ (RED)
4 R
V V
6 B
TSEN2 (GREEN)
7 G T2
V V
TSEN2+ (WHITE)
W SENSOR
V V V V V
9
T2LED+ (RED)
8 R
V V
10 B
11 TSEN3 (GREEN)
G
V V
T3
13 W SENSOR
LINK1 (GREEN) G
V V
T3A
TSEN3+ (WHITE)
W SENSOR
12 T3LED+ (RED)
R
V V
V V
T3
14 B LED
LINK2 (BLACK) R
V V
T3A
T3LED (BLACK)
B LED
TSEN4 (GREEN)
V V V V V V V V V V
15 G T4
V V
TSEN4+ (WHITE)
17 W SENSOR
TLED4+ (RED)
16 V V R
TLED4 (BLACK) T4 LED
18 B
T5SEN (GREEN)
19
V V
G T5
T5SEN+ (WHITE)
21 W SENSOR
T5LED+ (RED)
20 R
V V

22 B
GND
23 C Purge Bin
V V
PURGE INb
24 NO Microswitch

J13
PRES A+
V V V V
4
V V V V
7
PRES C+
8 3 Presenter
1 PRES B+ Motor
2
PRES D+
2 1
CLAMP A+
V V V V
9 1
V V V V
10 CLAMP C+ 2 Clamp
3 CLAMP B+ 3 Motor
4 CLAMP D+ 4
ALIGN A+
V V V V
V V V V
11
12 ALIGN C+ 2 Align
5 ALIGN B+ 3 Motor
ALIGN D+
6 4
J5
CLAMP_MID_LED (RED)
V V V V
V V V V
1 3
CLAMP_MID
GND (BLACK)
2 4
+5V (WHITE)
3 1
CLAMP_MID (GREEN)
4 2
J20 GND
V V V V V V
V V V V V V
1 1
GND
2 2
12C_SDA_BUF
3 3 Fascia
GND Shutter
4 4
12C_SCL_BUF PCB
4 5
GND
5 6
External S1 Device

J6
CLAMP UP LED (RED)
V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
R
V V V V
1
GND (BLACK) Clamp
3 B
+5 V (WHITE) Up
5 W Sensor
CLAMP UP (GREEN)
7 G
CLAMP DOWN (RED)
9 R
V V V V
GND (BLACK) Clamp
11 B
+5 V (WHITE) Down
13 W Sensor
CLAMP DOWN (GREEN)
15 G
ALIGN LED (RED)
V V V V
2 R
GND (BLACK)
4 B Align
+5 V (WHITE) Home
6 W
ALIGN HOME (GREEN)
8 G
PRES TDISK (RED)
10 R
V V V V
GND (BLACK)
12 B Timing
+5 V (WHITE) Disk
14 W
PRES TDISK (GREEN)
16 G
MAIN TD LED (RED)
18
V V V V
R
GND (BLACK) Main
20 B
+5 V (WHITE) Timing
22 W Disk
MAIN TDISK (GREEN)
24 G
19 CONFIG 1a P87_J1 P87_P1
17
V
CONFIG 1b
23 CONFIG 2a
V
MUD_J1 MUD_P1 Link Open = P86

21 CONFIG 2b Link Closed = P87
V

J4 J1
CAS ID1b 40C
1
2 GND
39
CAS ID2b 38
3
GND 37
4
CAS ID3b
5 36
6 GND
35
CAS ID4b
7 34
GND
8 33
CAS TEMPb
9 32
GND
10 31
CASLOWb
11 30
12 GND
29
13 N/C 28
LEDON_PICK
14 27
GND

15 26
GND
16 25
S0 24
17
S1 23
18
DISABLEb
19 22
COILENb
20 21
PICK
21 20
PSEN1
22 19
PSEN2
23 18
PSEN3
24 17
PSEN4
25 16
PICK_TXD
26 15
PICK_RXD
27 14
GND
28 13
29 GND
12
+12 V
30 11
+5 V
31 10
+5 V
32 9
GND
33 8
GND
34 7
35 GND
6
36 GND
5
+24 V
37 4
+24 V
38 3
+24 V
39 2
+24 V
40 1

This section includes pinouts of the connectors on the Currency Dispenser Control Board.
USB Connector
The USB Interface connector (J2) provides the USB interface to the USB dispenser control
board. The connector is a standard right‐angled USB Type‐B connector with the following
pinout.
1 BUS_PWR
2 USB_D‐
3 USB_D+
4 NC
5 GND
Transport LEDS and Sensors
The connector (J8) carries the signals to the currency dispenser transport LEDs and
sensors 1 to 5, and also provides interfaces to the purge bin and ac motor. This connector
is a 24‐way right‐angle header with the following pinout:
AC_MOTOR_ONb 1 2 +5 V
TSEN1 3 4 T1LED_POS
TSEN1_POS 5 6 T1LED
TSEN2 7 8 T2LED_POS
TSEN2_POS 9 10 T2_5LED
TSEN3 11 12 T3LED_POS1
TSEN3_POS 13 14 T3LED
TSEN4 15 16 T4LED_POS
TSEN4_POS 17 18 T4LED
TSEN5 19 20 T5LED_POS
TSEN5_POS 21 22 T2_5LED
GND 23 24 PURGE_INb

Pick Modules
The connector J4 provides the interface to the currency dispenser pick modules. It is a
40‐way right‐angle latched header connector with the following pinout:
CAS_ID1b 1 2 GND
CAS_ID2b 3 4 GND
CAS_ID3b 5 6 GND
CAS_ID4b 7 8 GND
CAS_TEMPb 9 10 GND
CASLOWb 11 12 GND
N/C 13 14 LEDON_PICK
GND 15 16 GND
S0 17 18 S1
DISABLEb 19 20 COILENb
PICK 21 22 PSEN1
PSEN2 23 24 PSEN3
PSEN4 25 26 PICK_TXD
PICK_RXD 27 28 GND
GND 29 30 +12 V
+5 V 31 32 +5 V
GND 33 34 GND
GND 35 36 GND
+24 V 37 38 +24 V
+24 V 39 40 +24 V
Note Thickness Sensor/ LVDT
The connector (J9) provides the interface to the Note Thickness sensor (LVDT). This is a
10‐way right angled latch header connector with the following pinout:
+5 V 1 2 GND
STRAIN_REF 3 4 NTS1
NTS2 5 6 NULL_NTS
NULL_OK 7 8 N/C
LVDT_GAIN_SELb 9 10 N/C
Stepper Motors
The connector J13 provides the interface to the three stepper motors used in the
currency dispenser. This is a 12‐way right‐angled header with the following pinout:
PRES_A_POS 7 1 PRES_B_POS
PRES_C_POS 8 2 PRES_D_POS

CLAMP_A_POS 9 3 CLAMP_B_POS
CLAMP_C_POS 10 4 CLAMP_D_POS
ALIGN_A_POS 11 5 ALIGN_B_POS
ALIGN_C_POS 12 6 ALIGN_D_POS
Intelligent Cassette Interface
The connector (J11) provides the interface from the USB dispenser control board to the
ICS module. This is a 10‐way right‐angle header with the following pinout:
+24 V 1 2 +24 V
GND 3 4 GND
+5 V 5 6 GND
ICS_TXD 7 8 ICS_RXD
GND 9 10 N/C
Clamp Middle Position Sensor
The connector (J5) provides the interface to the Clamp Tray Mid‐Position sensor. The
connector is a 4‐way right‐angle header with the following pinout:
1 CLAMP_MID_LED
2 GND
3 +5V_MID‐SEN
4 CLAMP_MID
Motor Sensors
The connector (J6) provides the interface to the stepper motor sensors. The connector is
a 24‐way right‐angle header with the following pinout:
CLAMP_UP_LED 1 2 ALIGN_LED
GND 3 4 GND
+5V_CLAMP_UP 5 6 +5V_ALIGN_HOME
CLAMP_UP 7 8 ALIGN_HOME
CLAMP_DOWN_LED 9 10 PRES_TD_LED
GND 11 12 GND
+5V_CLAMP_DOWN 13 14 +5V_PRES_TDISK
CLAMP_DOWN 15 16 PRES_TDISK
CONF1 17 18 MAIN_TD_LED
GND 19 20 GND
CONF2 21 22 +5V_MAIN_TDISK
GND 23 24 MAIN_TDISK

+24V Connector
The connector (J17) provides the +24v power supply to the onboard regulators which
generate +12v, +5V and +3.3V. The connector is a 2 way right angled header with the
following pinout:
+24V 1
GND 2
+24V_Interlock Connector
The connector (J18) provides the +24v interlock power supply to the motor drive and
solenoid drive. The connector is a 3 way right angled header with the following pinout:
+24V_INT 1
GND 2
+24V _INT 3
Fascia Shutter I2C Connector
The connector (J20) provides the I2C interface to the fascia shutter. The connector is a 6
way right angled header with the following pinout:
GND 1
GND 2
2
I C_SDA_BUF 3
GND 4
2
I C_SCL_BUF 5
GND 6
TTL Shutter Connector
The connector (J21) provides the interface to the TTL shutter. The connector is a 4 way
right angled header with the following pinout:
1 SHUT_OPEN
2 GND
3 SHUT_ONb
4 Shut_LOCK

 Vacuum gauge and adaptor.
 Test notes.
For the preventive maintenance schedule and details of the required tasks for the S1
dispenser, refer to the Preventive Maintenance section of this manual.

Aria Pick Module 1
Aria Pick Module

Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
There are two types of Aria pick module; the single pick module holds one currency
cassette, and the double pick module holds two cassettes, one above the other. The
term Pick Unit is also used in this chapter to mean a cassette position, that is, there is one
pick unit provided by a single pick module and two pick units in a double pick module.
The Aria single pick module is shown in the illustration below.
The Aria double pick module is shown in the following two illustrations:

2 Aria Pick Module
Specifications
Weight
The weights of the pick module and cassettes are:
Single pick module = 6.3 kg (13.9 lb.) Currency cassette empty = 3.2 kg (7.05 lb.)
Double pick module = 9.7 kg (21.38 lb.) Currency cassette full = 6.0 kg (13.2 lb.)
Voltage And Current
The Pick Interface Board circuits require the following voltages at the currents shown:
 + 5 V  0.25 V at 0.2 A (maximum)
 +12 V  1.20 V at 0.1 A (maximum)
 +24 V  2.40 V at 0.5 A (maximum).
Functions of the Pick Module
The functions performed by pick modules are to:
 provide support for currency cassettes
 identify the inserted cassettes
 open the front of the inserted cassettes
 lift (pick) bills one by one from the cassettes
 detect when currency is running low
 transport the bills to the pick module above or to the presenter.
The components of the pick modules and presenter to achieve the above functions are:
 cassette guides and latch
 cassette identity sensors
 pick module keyplate
 pick action:
 pick arms
 vacuum cups
 pick timing:
 timing disk
 pick solenoid
 pick sensor
 cassette low sensor
 belt transport
 main motor and vacuum pump
 pick interface boards
 serial number read.

Aria Pick Module 3
Cassette Guides and Latch
The currency cassette rests on rails on the side frames of the pick module. Upper plastic
guides on the side frames and the spring loaded catch hold the cassette firmly in
position.
Cassette Identity Sensors
A printed circuit board on the side of the pick module carries two sets of four
encapsulated reed switches. Each set of switches is in close proximity to an inserted
currency cassette and is influenced by the magnetic fields of small permanent magnets in
a housing on the side of the cassette.
The magnets can be moved within the housing or left out so that certain combinations of
reed switches SW1, SW2, SW3, SW4, are operated. This achieves a binary code which is
used to identify the cassette as type 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7. When the currency cassette is
inserted into a pick module in any position in the dispenser, it signals its identity via the
reed switches. The firmware identifies each cassette and so is able to select the proper
one for dispensing bills of a specific denomination.
Pick Module Keyplate
When the cassette is inserted into the dispenser the prongs of the pick module keyplate
enter the holes in its base. The cassette door is pushed into the cassette base, leaving the
front open to permit the currency to be picked and dispensed.
Pick Action
The stack is formed by the action of the bill alignment mechanism, so the S1 dispenser
does not require the accurate presenter/pick module timing relationship that the 56xx
stacker wheel type of presenter does, however, the Aria pick module timing should still
be set to ensure clean delivery of the bills from the cassette into the pick module
transport.

4 Aria Pick Module
Pick Timing
The pick shaft gets its oscillating motion from the gear segment attached to a crank
which is driven by a cam follower riding in a track in the cluster drive cam. The cluster
drive is driven from the transport through an idler gear. The pick arms move
continuously between a position where the pick vacuum cups are above the
D wheels to where the vacuum cups are pushing the currency back into the cassette.
Attached to the cluster drive cam is a plastic disk printed with timing marks. A cut out
section of the disk forms a timing arc which is detected by an optical switch and is used
(ANDed with a signal from the currency dispenser control board) to produce the
electrical pulses that energize and de‐energize the pick solenoid valve. The solenoid
valve is energized following a transition through sensor clear to sensor blocked and it
remains energized while the segment on the disk is obscuring the optical sensor. This
time corresponds to the time when the pick arms are just reversing away from the
currency in the cassette until they are above the D wheels.
When the solenoid valve is de‐energized it closes off the pump section of tubing. The
tubing to the pick arm vents to atmosphere via backflow through the de‐energized
solenoid. The note drops off the suction cups and is gripped by the D wheels and pinch
rolls.
The letter D and numbers 1, 2, 3, and 4 printed on the timing disk are used to set and
check the timing of individual pick modules and this adjustment is described in the
“Adjustments” section of this chapter.
Pick Sensor
The pick sensor consists of two assemblies hard wired to the pick harness. A photo‐
transistor is on one assembly and an infra‐red light emitting diode is on the other. The
light emitting diode is in the same assembly as the cassette low sensor (see next section).
The pick sensor and the LED are attached so that they “look” across the path of the notes
between the pick mechanism and the transport. When a note blocks the light path, it is
detected. The pick sensor output is converted into note width by monitoring the number
of interrupts while the sensor is blocked with the interrupts generated by the main
transport timing disk on the presenter. A difference of plus 3 or minus 5 timing wheel
ticks in width from the known width of the currency (stored in NVRAM) will cause the
note to be rejected to the purge bin and the pick to be attempted three more times.

Aria Pick Module 5
Cassette Low Sensor
Keyplate
Reed Switch
and Pick LED
Assembly
The cassette low sensor consists of a reed switch attached to the pick module keyplate.
The assembly also houses the pick LED. The reed switch is held on a bracket which
projects into the open door of the cassette. It operates when a permanent magnet
attached to the cassette currency pusher mechanism approaches the front of the
cassette as the currency is dispensed. In the plastic cassette, the position of this magnet
can be set in two positions to actuate the switch when 75  50 or 200  50 notes are left
in the cassette.
Belt Transport
In the pick module transport the D‐Wheel shaft and the pinch wheel shaft are driven
through a gear train. The gear train of the top pick module meshes with the gear train of
the presenter. In the Aria double pick module, the gear train of the second pick position
is driven by a toothed belt from the top module.
Notes are driven from the D‐Wheel/pinch wheel shafts into plastic note guides that
deflect them into the vertical transport. The vertical transport consists of three belts
stretched between an upper (driven) shaft and a lower idler shaft. These belts press the
notes against smooth plastic skid plates while driving them upwards into, either the
transport of a higher pick module or the presenter transport. The top shaft of the pick
module vertical transport is driven by a toothed belt from a pulley wheel fixed to the
D‐Wheel shaft.
Main Motor and Vacuum Pump
The dispenser main motor drives the LVDT transport and all pick modules via toothed
timing belts. It also drives the vacuum pump to provide a vacuum to the pick line via 6
mm bore tubing. A vacuum reservoir is located near the pump to improve the system
vacuum, and an air filter in the tubing above the first pick module protects the pump
from damage caused by ingress of grit particles.
The motor control circuits are located on the dispenser control board.

6 Aria Pick Module
Pick Interface Boards
The boards act as an interface between the actuators and sensors in the currency
dispenser pick module and the currency dispenser control board.
The interface boards use mixed technology, with both Surface Mount Technology (SMT)
and Plated Through Hole (PTH) components. A ribbon cable harness connects the boards
to cascaded pick interface boards in two, three, or four cassette dispensers. All the
control lines from the dispenser control board, and the sensor information returning to
that board, are routed via a parallel bus interface. Signals between cascaded pick
interface boards are boosted where necessary.
The following diagrams show a Single Pick Interface plus a Double Pick Interface board
and two Double Pick Interface Boards connected to the Currency Dispenser Control
Board.

Aria Pick Module 7
Single Pick Interface Board
The following illustration shows the layout of the components on the front and rear of
the single pick interface board.
Double Pick Interface Board
The following illustration shows the layout of the components on the front and rear of
the double pick interface board.

8 Aria Pick Module
Serial Number Read
The serial number read (SNR) transport is an optional anti‐fraud feature in the double
pick module, primarily for the China market. A pair of scanners reads the denomination
and serial number of every note as it passes from the pick to the presenter, and also
takes an image.
SNR camera
on fixed guide
image from PIM?
SNR camera
on moving guide

Aria Pick Module 9
There is an SNR control board mounted on the side of the pick module.
CN2 CN3 CN4
CN1 Input CIS Head CIS Head
(not used) (SNR open sensor) (Moving guide) (Fixed guide)
CN5 CN6
DC Power Input USB HS
(to dispenser board) (to USB hub)
Note that the scanners are calibrated by the manufacturer and matched to a specific
control board by serial numbers, so boards and scanners must not be swapped out
individually. The Field Replaceable Unit for the Serial Number Read function is the entire
pick module.

10 Aria Pick Module
ADJUSTMENTS
Pick Module Timing
S1 dispensers use a bill alignment mechanism to form the note stack and do not require
any timing relationship to be set between the action of the pick modules and the
presenter.
The pick module to pick module relationship does, however, still require to be set. The
adjustment procedures in this section are described for single and double pick modules.
The aim of these procedures is to attach correctly timed pick modules below the
presenter with the timing disks of the pick units aligned to the timing marks 1, 2, 3, and 4,
reading from the topmost pick module to the bottom.
1 High Dispenser 2 High Dispenser 3 High Dispenser 4 High Dispenser

Presenter Presenter Presenter Presenter
P1 Timing Disk = 1 P2 Timing Disk = 1 P2 Timing Disk = 1 P2 Timing Disk = 1

Timing Disk = 2 Timing Disk = 2 Timing Disk = 2
P1 Timing Disk = 3 P2 Timing Disk = 3
Timing Disk = 4
P1 = Single Pick Module
P2 = Double Pick Module
Note: Where there is a mixture of Aria and 56XX type pick modules, then the Aria type
must always be the bottom pick module.
You must carry out the procedures in the order given:
 Separating the Pick Units of the Double Pick Module
 Pick Unit Internal Timing
 Double Pick Module Pick Unit Relationship
 Pick Module to Presenter Timing
 1 High Dispenser
 4 High Dispenser.

Aria Pick Module 11
Separating the Pick Units of the Aria Double Pick Module
To adjust a double pick module you must first isolate the gear trains of the two pick units
by removing the timing belt shown in the following figure.
Retain the timing belt until required to reinstall it in the procedure “Joining the Pick Units
of the Double Pick Module”.
Pick Unit Internal Timing
The only relationship to be set in the pick unit is between the pick wheel and the cam
driven vacuum arm line.
Note: In a double pick unit make the adjustment on the upper pick unit first

12 Aria Pick Module
The method of setting is as follows:
1. Position the teeth mesh between the drive segment and pick line so that the upper
tooth of the drive segment is above the upper tooth of the pick line.
2. Take off and retain the 26T idler gear directly below the pick line (left side of the
module looking from the currency cassette).

Aria Pick Module 13
3. Rotate the gears of the pick module transport until the pick D wheel is free of its
mating tension wheel.
4. Rotate the drive cluster in a clockwise direction until the D timing mark on the timing
5. Rotate the gears of the pick module transport until the interrupted part of the pick D
wheels is away from the pick arms. Turn the gears until a gap of from 0.5 mm  0.5
mm (0.02 in.  0.02 in.) exists between the leading edges of the pick D wheels and the
tension wheels as shown in the first figure above.
6. Replace the idler gear removed in step 2. Be careful not to dislodge the setting.
7. Carry out steps 1 to 6 on the lower pick unit.
Double Pick Module Pick Unit Relationship
When the internal timing of both pick units of the double pick module has been set, the
pick units have to be locked in a fixed timing relationship. Proceed as follows:
1. Rotate the gear train of the upper pick unit to move the timing disk in a clockwise
timing sensor body.
CAUTION
2. Rotate the gear train of the lower pick unit until the 2 timing mark on the drive
cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body.
3. Place the timing belt (removed in the procedure “Separating the Pick Units of the
Double Pick Module”) around the pulley wheel of the lower pick position and put it
on as many teeth as possible of the pulley wheel of the upper pick position, taking
care not to dislodge the settings. Turn the upper gear train in the normal direction of
travel (see Caution above) to ride the timing belt fully on to the pulley wheel.
Presenter Timing
The S1 bill alignment dispenser does not require any timing relationship to be set
between the action of the pick modules and the presenter.
PIck Module to Presenter Timing
Once the pick modules have been prepared, as in the previous procedures, the pick
modules can be assembled with a presenter to produce the complete currency
dispenser. There are no timing adjustments to the presenter.

14 Aria Pick Module
CAUTION
The dispenser is heavy. Get help to lift it.
1 High Dispenser
1. Rotate the gear train of the single pick module to move the timing disk in a clockwise
timing sensor body (see above illustration).
CAUTION
pick timing disk should turn clockwise. Do not move the gear train
2. Attach the pick module to the presenter.
3. Check that the 1 timing mark is in line with the timing sensor body.
2 High Dispenser
1. Rotate the gear train of the double pick module to move the timing disks in a
clockwise direction until the 1 timing mark on the upper drive cluster timing disk lines
up with the timing sensor body.

Aria Pick Module 15
CAUTION
2. Check that the 2 timing mark on the lower drive cluster timing disk lines up with the
timing sensor body.
3. Attach the double pick module to the presenter.
4. Check that all the timing marks are aligned. Timing marks 1 and 2 should be in line
with their respective timing sensor bodies.
3 High Dispenser
1. Rotate the gear train of the double pick module (observe the caution below) to move
the timing disks in a clockwise direction until the 1 timing mark on the upper drive
cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body.
CAUTION
pick timing disk should turn clockwise. Do not move the gear train
timing sensor body.
3. Attach the pick module to the presenter.
4. Rotate the gear train of the single pick module (observe the caution above) to move
the timing disks in a clockwise direction until the 3 timing mark on the cluster timing
5. Attach the single pick module to the bottom pick module of the double pick module.
6. Check that all the timing marks are aligned. Timing marks 1, 2, and 3 should be in line
with their respective timing sensor bodies and a presenter timing arrow should be
next to the timing stud.
4 High Dispenser
1. Rotate the gear train of the first double pick module to move the timing disks in a
clockwise direction until the 1 timing mark on the upper drive cluster timing disk lines
up with the timing sensor body.

16 Aria Pick Module
CAUTION
timing sensor body.
3. Attach the double pick module to the presenter.
4. Rotate the gear train of the lower double pick module (observe the caution above) to
move the timing disks in a clockwise direction until the 3 timing mark on the upper
drive cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body.
timing sensor body.
6. Attach the double pick module to the bottom of the first double pick module.
7. Check that all the timing marks are aligned. Timing marks 1, 2, 3, and 4 should be in
line with their respective timing sensor bodies.
Note 1: For dispenser assembly the procedure can be carried out by building from pick
unit 4 upwards with the presenter added last.
Note 2: Re‐configuration is required when downgrading from four to three or three to
two pick modules. The NVRAM must be cleared to de‐configure the removed pick
modules.
TEST TOOLS
None.
INTERNAL CABLES
The diagrams in this section are the schematics of the internal cables of the Aria single
and double pick modules.

Aria Pick Module 17
Aria Single Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 1 of 2)
J2
SEN1- (GREEN)
V V V V V V V V V V V V
1 G
V V
SEN1+ (WHITE) PICK_SEN1
2 W
TEMP1 LOOP (WHITE)
3
LED GND (BLACK)
B
V V V V
6

LED PICK 1+ (RED) Cassette
5 R
CASLOW1- (WHITE) Low &
7 1
LED_1
GND (WHITE)
10 2
LED PICKARM 1- (WHITE)
11 3
V V V
LED PICKARM 1+ (BLACK) Timing
12 2
PICKARM 1 (WHITE) Disk 1
13 1
VLV1 ON- (TP WHITE) VALVE_1-2
15
+24 V (TP BLACK)
16 VALVE_1-1

18 Aria Pick Module
Aria Single Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 2 of 2)
J4 J1
CAS ID1- 40C
1
2 GND
39
CAS ID2- 38
3
GND 37
4
CAS ID3-
5 36
6 GND
35
CAS ID4-
7 34
GND
8 33
CAS TEMP-
9 32
GND
10 31
CASLOW-
11 30
12 GND
29
13 GULP- 28
LEDON_PICK
27
14
GND

15 26
GND
16 25
S0 24
17
S1 23
18
DISABLE-
19 22
COILEN-
20 21
PICK
21 20
PSEN1
22 19
PSEN2
23 18
PSEN3
24 17
PSEN4
25 16
PICKTXD
26 15
27 PICK RXD
14
GND
28 13
29 GND
12
+12 V
30 11
+5 V
31 10
+5 V
32 9
GND
33 8
GND
34 7
35 GND
6
36 GND
5
+24 V
37 4
+24 V
38 3
+24 V
39 2
+24 V
40 1

Aria Pick Module 19
Aria Double Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 1 of 2)
J5
SEN1- (GREEN)
V V V V V V
1 G
V V
2 W
LED PICK1+ (RED)
R
V V V V
6
CASLOW1- (WHITE)
7 1 Cassette
LOOP1 (WHITE) GND (BLACK) Low &
3 B
GND (WHITE) GND (WHITE) LED_1
5 2
LED PICKARM1- (BLACK) Splice 1
V V V V V
B
V V V
9
LED PICKARM1+ (RED) Timing
10 R
Disk 1
Double Pick Interface Board
PICKARM1 (GREEN)
11 G
+24 V
14 VALVE_1-2
VLV1 ON-
13 VALVE_1-1
SEN2- (GREEN)
V V V V V V
17 G
V V
18 W
LED PICK2+ (RED)
22 R
V V V V
CASLOW2- (WHITE)
23 1 Cassette
LOOP2 (WHITE) GND (BLACK) Low &
19 B
GND (WHITE) GND (WHITE) LED_2
21 2
Splice 2
LED PICKARM2- (BLACK)
V V V V V
V V V
25
LED PICKARM2+ (RED) Timing
26 R
Disk 2
PICKARM2 (GREEN)
27 G
+24 V
30 VALVE_2-2
VLV2 ON-
29 VALVE_2-1

20 Aria Pick Module
Aria Double Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 2 of 2)
J1 J2
CAS ID1- 40C
1
2 GND
39
CAS ID2- 38
3
GND 37
4
CAS ID3-
5 36
6 GND
35
CAS ID4-
7 34
GND
8 33
CAS TEMP-
9 32
GND
10 31
CASLOW-
11 30
12 GND
29
13 GULP- 28
LEDON_PICK
27
14
GND

15 26
GND
16 25
S0 24
17
S1 23
18
DISABLE-
19 22
COILEN-
20 21
PICK
21 20
PSEN1
22 19
PSEN2
23 18
PSEN3
24 17
PSEN4
25 16
PICKTXD
26 15
27 PICK RXD
14
GND
28 13
29 GND
12
+12 V
30 11
+5 V
31 10
+5 V
32 9
GND
33 8
GND
34 7
35 GND
6
36 GND
5
+24 V
37 4
+24 V
38 3
+24 V
39 2
+24 V
40 1

Aria Pick Module 21
STRAPPING
Fuse FS1
Fuse FS1 is in the 24 V dc line to the pick solenoid on each Single Pick Interface board.
There is one fuse on the double pick interface board, protecting the line to both pick unit
solenoids. refer to the following diagrams for location of the fuse.
The fuse is a 125 V, 1.0 A pigtail fuse, part number 007‐9830118.

22 Aria Pick Module
This section shows the pinouts of the connectors on the Single and Double Pick Interface
boards and explains the function of the signals.
Connector J1
Connector J1 on the Pick Interface Board provides an interface to the Currency Dispenser
Control Board and also to cascaded Pick Interface boards. The interface consists of power
lines from the Currency Dispenser Control Board or cascaded Pick Interface Board,
control lines from the Currency Dispenser Control Board, and sensor information and
Cassette Data Bus signals to the Currency Dispenser Control Board. Provision is also
made for an Intelligent Cassette interface.
J1 is a dual 20‐way connector with the following pinout:
CAS_ID1_OUT 1 2 Ground
TEMP_OUT 9 10 Ground
CASLOW_OUT 11 12 Ground
GULP‐ 13 14 LEDON
P0 15 16 P1
S0 17 18 S1
DISABLE‐ 19 20 COILEN
PICK 21 22 PSEN1
PSEN2 23 24 PSEN3
PSEN4 25 26 TXD
RXD 27 28 Ground
Ground 29 30 +12 V
+5 V 31 32 +5 V
Ground 33 34 Ground
Ground 35 36 Ground
+24 V 37 38 +24 V
+24 V 39 40 +24 V
The function of the signals on connector J1 are described in the following table:
Signal Name Function

Control lines from the Dispenser Control Board:
DISABLE‐ LO = disables the operation of the pick valve solenoid
P0, P1, S0, S1 Decoded on the pick interface board to select the appropriate pick unit
to pick from.
PICK HI = enables the pick valve solenoid driver

Aria Pick Module 23

LEDON HI = enables all LEDs associated with the pick sensors.
CAS_IDX_OUT‐ LO = magnet is next to ID reed switch X in selected cassette.
CASLOW_OUT‐ LO = currency is low in selected cassette.
COILEN, TXD, RXD Reserved for use with intelligent cassette interface
PSENX Analogue signal from bill picked sensor on Pick Module X.
TEMP_OUT‐ Pick module temperature low (below 10 deg.C) ‐ See Note.
Note: Aria pick modules do not have the low temperature sensing thermistor that is
fitted to 56XX pick modules. The harness attached to connector J2 of the Single Pick
Interface or J5 of the Double Pick Interface, loops the TEMP1 signal to ground so that a
logic 1 is produced by the circuit, representing “temperature good”.
Connector J2 (Single Pick) and J5 (Double Pick)
Connector J2 (Single Pick I/F Board) or J5 (Double Pick I/F Board) provides the interface to
the sensors and actuators of the pick units.
Connector J2 has the following pinout:
SEN1‐ 1 2 SEN1+
TEMP1 3 4 N/C
LED_PICK1+ 5 6 Ground
CASLOW1‐ 7 8 N/C
GULP_FEED (Not Used) 9 10 Ground
GROUND_REF 11 12 PICKARM_1+
PICKARM_1 13 14 N/C
VLV1_ON‐ 15 16 +24V_FUSED
Connector J5 has the following pinout:
SEN1‐ 1 2 SEN1+
TEMP1 3 4 N/C
Ground 5 6 LED_PICK1+
CASLOW1‐ 7 8 N/C
Ground 9 10 LED_PICKARM1+
PICKARM_1 11 12 PICKARM_1+
GULP_FEED (Not Used) 15 16 Ground
SEN2‐ 17 18 SEN2+
TEMP2 19 20 N/C
Ground 21 22 LED_PICK2+
CASLOW2‐ 23 24 N/C
Ground 25 26 LED_PICKARM2+
PICKARM_2 27 28 PICKARM_2+

24 Aria Pick Module
The function of the signals on connector J2/J5 are described in the following table:

Sensors and Actuators
PICKARM1+ Provides voltage to optotransmissive switch transistor and LED.
PICKARM_1 Connects optotransmissive switch emitter to comparator to detect when switch
blocked or clear and enable the pick valve solenoid logic.
LED_PICK1+ Provides voltage to LED anode of the cassette low sensor. The LED return is
connected to ground at connector J2.
CASLOWX‐ Signals a cassette currency low state.
SEN1+, SEN1‐ Connection to the pick sensor optical transistor.
VLV1 ON‐ Switches the pick solenoid valve.
GULP_FEED Not used ‐ see text below.
TEMPX Connected to ground by harness ‐ see text below.
Gulp Feed Detector
The Aria pick modules do not have a gulp feed detector. If Aria and 56XX pick modules
are mixed and a gulp feed occurs on the 56XX type, then the GULP_FEED signal is still
passed via the Aria modules to the Currency Dispenser Control Board where it will
immediately stop the dispenser main motor.
Low Temperature Thermistor
The Aria pick modules do not have a low temperature thermistor. The pick harness
provides a short to ground of signal TEMPX to pin 6 of connector J2 or to pins 5 and 21 of
connector J5 so that the TEMP_OUT‐ signal to the Control Board always indicates high
(above 10 deg. C) temperatures.
Connector J3 (Single Pick) and J3/J4 (Double Pick)
Connector J3 on the Single and Double Pick Interface Boards is provided for the
intelligent cassette interface. It has the following pinout:
+24 V 1 2 +24 V
Ground 3 4 Ground
+5 V 5 6 Ground
TXD1_OUT 7 8 RXD1_IN
INT1_PRES‐ 9 10 COILEN1
The Double Pick Interface Board has an additional identical connector (J4) for the the
intelligent cassette interface for Pick Unit 2. The signal names are TXD2_OUT, RXD2_IN,
INT2_PRES‐, and COILEN2.

Aria Pick Module 25
Connector J4 (Single Pick) And J2 (Double Pick)
J4 (Single Pick I/F Board) or J2 (Double Pick I/F Board) is a dual 20‐way connector which
carries the bus input lines to a cascaded Single Pick Interface board or Double Pick
Interface board. It has the following pinout:
+24 V 1 2 +24 V
+24 V 3 4 +24 V
Ground 5 6 Ground
Ground 7 8 Ground
+5 V 9 10 +5 V
+12 V 11 12 Ground
Ground 13 14 RXD
TXD 15 16 N/C
SEN4_IN 17 18 SEN3_IN
SEN2_IN 19 20 PICK_OUT
COILEN 21 22 DISABLE_OUT‐
S1_OUT 23 24 S0_OUT
P1_OUT 25 26 P0_OUT
LED_ON_OUT 27 28 GULP‐
Ground 29 30 CASLOW_IN‐
Ground 31 32 TEMP_IN‐
Ground 33 34 CAS_ID4_IN‐
Ground 35 36 CAS_ID3_IN‐
+24 V 37 38 CAS_ID2_IN‐
+24 V 39 40 CAS_ID1_IN‐
Control Signals
Control signals from the Dispenser Control board are output on connector J4/J2 via open
collector drivers to maintain signal levels. The table below lists the input signal alongside
the equivalent output to the cascaded board.
Signal from Control Board Signal to Cascaded Board

PICK PICK_OUT
LEDON LED_ON_OUT
S0 S0_OUT
S1 S1_OUT
DISABLE DISABLE_OUT
Sensor and Cassette Data Bus Signals
The signals from the transport sensors are buffered by unity gain operational amplifiers.
The cassette bus interface signals from the cascaded Pick Interface board are buffered on

26 Aria Pick Module
entry to higher position Pick Interface boards. The table below lists the names of the
incoming signals against those sent to the Control board.
Signal from Cascaded Pick Interface Signal to Control Board

CAS_ID1_IN‐ CAS_ID1_OUT‐
TEMP_IN‐ TEMP_OUT‐
CASLOW_IN‐ CASLOW_OUT‐
SEN2_IN PSEN2
SEN3_IN PSEN3
SEN4_IN PSEN4
The signals GULP‐, RXD, TXD, and COILEN‐ are directly connected between the bus
output and the bus input connectors (J1 and J4/J2).

Currency Cassettes 1
Currency Cassettes
Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
NCR Currency Cassettes are portable containers, moulded in high impact polycarbonate,
that are designed to store and release currency under the control of the parent currency
dispenser sub‐system.
DESCRIPTION
The following versions of the currency cassette are available for use in ATMs:
 Wide currency cassette:
 standard security variant
 tamper indicating variant
 Fluiditi Replenishment Security variant
 Fluiditi ATM Security variant.
 1000 Rupee wide cassette
 standard security variant
 tamper indicating variant
All variants of the cassettes can be mechanically adjusted to hold currency of different
lengths and widths and electro‐mechanically adjusted to provide a currency
denomination code.
The mechanical adjustments allow the cassette to be set to accept a world wide range of
currencies. The dimensions of the currency which can be used in the cassette vary
depending on whether the cassette is to be used in a 50xx, 56xx or Personas terminal.
Wide currency cassettes accept currency of the following dimensions:
 Minimum width and length 62 mm x 120 mm (2.44 in. x 4.72 in.)
 Maximum width and length 95 mm x 172 mm (3.74 in. x 6.77 in.)
1000 Rupee Wide Currency Cassette variant:
 Minimum width and length 62 mm x 120 mm (2.44 in. x 4.72 in.)
 Maximum width and length 95 mm x 177 mm (3.74 in. x 6.97 in.)
The electro‐mechanical adjustments enable a cassette to be given a cassette
identification code. Up to seven codes are possible, with each code allowing a different
currency denomination to be loaded into a cassette. See “Cassette Identification Code”
in this chapter.

2 Currency Cassettes
Cassette Variances
Fluiditi currency cassettes use the small magnet housing but the side of the cassette is
marked to accept the longer housing, indicating that the cassette is the wide type.
Wide Currency
Cassette
1
3 2
5 4
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
R G
Location Moulding For

Long Magnet Housing
Fluiditi
Currency Cassette
1
3 2
5 4
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Location Moulding For
Long magnet Housing
1000 Rupee Wide Cassettes Distinguishing Features
The distinguishing features that enable you to tell wide cassettes from 1000 Rupee wide
cassettes are listed below:
No. 1000 Rupee Wide Cassette Wide Cassette

1 Warning Label N/A
2 Label N/A
3 Door shutter rib is cut off Standard shutter
4 Lid bracket N/A
5 Shutter guide (Colour-Gray) Standard shutter guide (Col-
our-Brown)

No. 1000 Rupee Wide Cassette Wide Cassette

6 The head of clip magnet Standard clip magnet holder
holder is cut off
7 Note runner (Colour-Gray) N/A
Refer to the following illustrations:

Standard Security Currency Cassettes
5
7 6
1
2 F
G
3
A Seal Can Be 4
Attached To The 5
Hasp Of The Latch
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
The standard security cassettes are containers which offer the capability to seal the
access lid. When the cassette is inserted into the dispenser, a mechanism opens a door in
the cassette to allow the currency to be picked from the cassette and fed through the
currency dispenser sub‐system.
When the cassette is removed from the dispenser the door is automatically closed and
latched. To gain access to the cassettes interior, the optional seal is broken and the
access lid opened and removed.
Tamper Indicating Currency Cassettes
1
3 2
5 4
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
R
G
Insertion Counter
Window
The tamper indicating currency cassettes differ from the standard security cassettes in
that they provide evidence of unauthorized attempts to open the container or that the
cassette has been removed from the ATM and re‐inserted.

The cassette contains a mechanism and a coloured indicator in addition to the provision
for sealing the access lid.
When the cassette is being prepared for insertion into the ATM, the mechanism is
primed, with the indicator showing that it is primed (colour green), the currency is
loaded into the cassette and then the access lid is closed and the seal fitted.
When the container is inserted into the ATM, then subsequently removed, a door is
opened and closed in the same way as for the standard cassette, however the
mechanism causes the coloured indicator to advance to show that the cassette has been
inserted (colour white).
Should it be necessary to remove the cassette between replenishment operations, for
example to clear a jam, this can be done up to six times before the container needs to be
reset (primed) again. The indicator shows the insertions as 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6.
When the container is returned for replenishment it should be inspected according to
local practice and the indicator checked that a single insertion/removal has occurred. If
the indicator shows that more than one insertion/removal has occurred the
circumstances must be investigated and verified. The access seal can then be broken to
gain access for emptying and refilling.
Fluiditi Currency Cassettes
Fluiditi
Currency Cassette
1
3 2
5 4
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Ink Injection Block
There are two types of Fluiditi currency cassettes: the Fluiditi ATM Security cassette and
the Fluiditi Replenishment Security cassette. Both are designed to fit into a security
system that injects a marking ink onto the currency within the cassette if the ATM is
attacked. The currency is permanently stained and therefore no longer of any use.
Because of this, it is very important that the correct procedures be observed when
handling this type of cassette.
The Fluiditi ATM Security cassette looks exactly the same as a wide cassette, except for a
small black plastic block on the right hand side. This block allows the ink to be fed into
the cassette from the ink injection tank mounted on the side of the dispenser module.

Inside the cassette lid is a spray bar with a series of small holes, through which the ink is
sprayed onto the currency.
Spray Bar
(Fluiditi Only)
The Fluiditi ATM Replenishment cassette is the same as the ATM Security cassette except
that is doesn’t have a green carry handle. Instead, it has holes on the front of the
cassette to accept the pins on the Carrisafe hood that is used to remove and carry the
cassette.
1
3 2
5 4
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
R G
Once a cassette has had the security marking ink released into it, the cassette can no
longer be used and should be disposed of in accordance with the appropriate
instructions provided in Chapters “Fluiditi ATM Security” and “Fluiditi Replenishment
Security”.
NCR recommends that only the service engineer should handle activated cassettes or
clean spillages inside the ATM. Care must be taken when handling activated cassettes, as
the ink is corrosive and stains permanently.

Cassette Components
The following illustrations show the open cassette (wide and standard types) looking
from the rear (handle) end towards the front (truck door) end.
Cassettes are moulded in high impact polycarbonate in three major parts: the body, the
lid, and the base.
Wide Plastic Cassette ‐ Components
The illustration below shows the components of the tamper indicating wide plastic
cassette.
Cassette Lid
Currency Width
Note Guide Lid Spacers
Spray Bar
(Fluiditi Variants)
Note Low
Spring Finger Block
Currency Length Spacers

Note Guide
Cassette
Body
1
2 Door
3
4
Shutter
5
6 Pusher
7 A
B
C
D Pusher
E
F
Pawl
NC NC
R GR
Ink Injection Block
(Fluiditi Variants)
Cassette Base
Spring Plunger Cassette ID Code
Magnet Housing
Insertion Counter Window (TI)
Tamper Indicators
All cassettes have the following features to indicate tampering:
 Door shutters have a notched section that breaks off when stressed
 Plastic roller door has a deformable strip.
The Cassette Body
The cassette body holds the currency. It contains a spring‐loaded pusher mechanism that
moves along a slot in the bottom of the body, to push the currency stack to the front of

the cassette into the pick position. The currency stack is held between the left and right‐
hand note guides. These adjust to suit currency of different lengths. The front ends of the
note guides have spring fingers that help to separate the notes as they are picked from
the stack.
Incorporated in the pusher is a note low block magnet to operate a reed switch in the
pick module. This magnet can be set in either of two positions. A housing on one side of
the cassette body contains up to four magnets which again operate reed switches on the
pick module to signal the cassette identification code.
Also in the body compartment are the left and right spring‐loaded door shutters, the
currency separator brushes and fingers, and the anti‐reset plunger. On the outside of the
body are the lid latch and cassette carrying handle, the projecting lug which is used to
latch the cassette into the pick module, and the embossed cassette identification code
label.
The Cassette Lid
The lid hooks into locating slots at the front of the body and is latched at the rear. It holds
note guides and spacers which adjust to suit currency width. A spring plunger in the body
compartment of tamper indicating cassettes (refer to the illustration of the wide plastic
cassette) is pushed down by the lid into the insertion counter mechanism (see the
section “Insertion Counter”). An internal baffle at the latch end of the lid gives additional
protection against an attempt to prise up the lid and fish for currency.
The lid is shaped so that it will not close properly if the pusher is not released or the
cassette is overfilled.
The Cassette Base
The illustration below shows the components inside the tamper indicating cassette base.
Door Link Lockout Lever Index Pawl Link Index Pawl
Reset Lever
Rubber Bumper
Truck Door Rachet Slide Rachet Lever Door Lockout Lever
The base of the cassette holds the truck door and its retraction mechanism, the pusher
ratchet slide and lever, and the insertion counter and window (TI cassettes). The shape of
the base forms rails which slide into the cassette guides in the pick module.

Cassette Operation
Keyplate
Cassette
Retaining
Catch
Currency Low
Reed Switch
Cassette
Stop
Cassette
Present and
ID Reed Switches
The above illustration shows the components of the dispenser pick module which mate
with the cassette. When the cassette is inserted into the dispenser the prongs of the pick
module keyplate enter the holes in the base of the cassette and push against locking
pawls on the truck door. The door is pushed into the cassette base, leaving the front
open to permit the currency to be picked from the cassette and dispensed.
Several other actions happen as the truck door is opened:
 The door shutters are disengaged from the door and are pushed back by the pick line
 The fingers next to the currency separator brushes drop down clear of the currency
stack. The function of these fingers is to prevent notes at the front of the stack being
dragged down by the opening door
 The ratchet slide attached to the door lowers the ratchet lever so that it disengages
from the pusher pawl
 On TI cassettes the insertion counter is advanced one place (see the section
“Insertion Counter”).
As the currency is dispensed the pusher moves forward under spring pressure to keep
the stack of currency in position. The pick line has an eccentric motion which tends to
push the currency stack back into the cassette against the action of the pusher. It is to
permit this to and fro motion that the ratchet lever disengages from the pusher when
the cassette is in the dispenser. When the pusher moves close to the front of the
cassette the magnet in its base comes alongside metal plates under the floor of the
currency compartment. These plates strengthen the magnetic field and transfer it to
operate a reed switch on the pick module keyplate. This switch signals that the currency
in the cassette is running low.

Removal of the cassette from the dispenser automatically closes and latches the front
door and the interior of the cassette can only be reached by opening the top access lid.
The ratchet is raised by the action of the door closing and is again in a position where it
will engage with the pusher pawl. In this way the pusher is locked close to the currency
stack so that the currency is held in place while the cassette is being carried.
When the pusher is in its locked position the cassette lid can not be closed.
Pusher Operation
To load currency into the cassette the pusher is manually moved fully to the rear and
locked until the currency is put in. It is then released against the back of the currency
stack to keep it under pressure. Failure to release the pusher from its locked position will
prevent the cassette lid from closing. You move the pusher by lifting the pusher pawl
arms, sliding it to the rear, and then holding it in that position while lowering the arms so
that the pusher pawl engages with the ratchet. There is one locking detent on the
extreme rear end of the ratchet.
CAUTION
Lift the pusher pawl arms - do not squeeze.
LIFT - DO NOT SQUEEZE
Pusher

Insertion Counter
Door Link Cam Lockout Spring Index Pawl Link Index Pawl
Pawl Spring
Door Lockout Lever Reset Lever
When the tamper indicating cassette is being prepared for insertion into the ATM, the
mechanism is primed by pressing the reset lever to the side and releasing it until the
indicator shows green. The currency is loaded into the cassette and then the access lid is
closed and the seal fitted.
When the container is inserted into the dispenser, then subsequently removed, the front
truck door is opened and closed in the same way as the standard cassette. The door also
pushes a link which turns a cam linked to the index pawl engaged with the counter
wheel. Each time the door is opened the wheel is advanced by the index pawl one
fourteenth of a revolution. The wheel is marked on the edge and top with two sets of
indications which show through two windows, one at the back of the cassette and one in
the bottom of the currency compartment. The indications count the insertions as Green
(cassette primed), White (first insertion), 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
On the sixth insertion a spring‐loaded follower, pressing against the edge of the counter
wheel, moves into a detent in the wheel and locks it. This movement permits the spring‐
loaded door lockout lever to move in front of the door link when the cassette is pulled
out of the pick module preventing the cassette from being used in the dispenser again
until the insertion counter is reset. The anti reset plunger stops any movement of the
reset lever while the cassette lid is closed. When the lid is opened the plunger spring lifts
it clear of the lever mechanism and the counter wheel can be reset.
Further security is provided by the lockout lever which is driven out through the side of
the cassette base by the action of the door link when the door is opening. This lever
engages with a stop on the side frame of the pick module and prevents the cassette
being pulled out of the pick module with the truck door open.
Cassette Identification Code
Each currency cassette shipped with an ATM is set with a code that can be read by the
ATM software so that the cassette can be identified regardless of its position in the
dispenser. The software matches the cassette code to a specific denomination of
currency. Cassettes with the same code will be loaded with notes of the same value.
Normally four cassette codes are recognized but up to seven codes are possible where
extended cassette IDs have been selected in software (see the section “Setting the
Cassette Identification Code”). Cassettes should be marked to show which code is set.

The identification code of a cassette is set by up to four magnets contained in a plastic
housing attached to the cassette side by a clip as shown in the illustration below of the
Standard Width and Fluiditi currency cassette.
4
3
2
1
The Wide Currency Cassette has space in the plastic housing for six magnets (positions A,
B, 1, 2, 3 and 4) as shown below, but only four (positions 1, 2, 3 and 4) are currently used.
Clips
The four magnets interact with four reed switches located on a printed circuit board
attached to the frame of the dispenser pick module associated with the cassette location
in the dispenser subsystem. Depending on whether a magnet is installed, or not, and the
orientation of the magnet in positions 1, 2, 3 and 4, all four of the reed switches provide
a code representing the cassette identification number.
When the currency cassette is inserted into a pick module in any position in the
dispenser, it signals its identity via the reed switches. The firmware identifies each
cassette and so is able to select the proper one for dispensing bills of a specific
denomination.

Cassette Body to Lid Identification
The cassettes provided with an NCR four position dispenser could each be set to a
different code, say Code 1, Code 2, Code 3 and Code 4, to dispense four different
denominations or these could be changed so that, for example, the dispenser will
dispense two different denomination notes from the four cassettes, that is with two
cassettes set to Code 1 and two to Code 2. Because, also, the cassette has to be adjusted
internally to accept a specific denomination of currency, lids and bodies of cassettes
should be marked so that they can be kept together.
The currency cassette can be identified by writing the currency denomination on the
inside or outside of both the body and lid, using an indelible ink pen.
The H‐8015‐STD1‐01/02‐08 Standard Plastic Cassette (shown below) has embossed
numbers 1 to 5 on the body that can be used to identify cassette codes.
The letters H and L marked against positions 1 and 2 do not apply to ATMs. The wide
plastic cassette has embossing on the body and lid as shown in the following figure
and identification may be made as follows:
 A: Colour coded stick‐on labels 10 mm x 15 mm (0.4 in. x 0.6 in.) approx.
 B: Numerics for denoting cassette identification type
 C: Recessed areas for either marking with indelible ink pens or for attaching adhesive
labels to denote currency denomination, etc. at the discretion of the financial
institution

 D: Alphas for denoting additional cassette identification types or, for same use as B
B 3 2
1
5 4
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Power Requirements
None.
TROUBLESHOOTING
No information available.
DIAGNOSTICS
None.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
Currency Length Adjustment
The currency length adjustment, which is, in effect, across the width of the cassette, is
made by repositioning two note guides and four spacers located in the base of the
cassette.
Adjustment is provided to allow the cassette to accommodate currency of lengths from
120 mm (4.72 in.) to 177 mm (6.97 in.).
There are two types of spacers available for currency length adjustment; segment and
fixed size.

Segment Type Note Adjustment Spacers
The note guides in the body of the cassette bear against spacer blocks known as E
spacers. These blocks have to be cut to certain lengths so that the note guides are
supported the correct distance apart corresponding to the length of the currency being
dispensed.
A sharp knife and a medium size cross‐head screwdriver are required to make these
adjustments.
Fixed Size Note Adjustment Spacers
There are four fixed size spacers, also known as E spacers, which provide the same
function as the Segment Type spacers described above. The fixed size spacers must be
changed to suit the currency being dispensed, they can not be cut to size.
X
Spacer
Code
Note Low Sensing - In addition to the currency length and width adjustments, provision is

also made to change the note low sensing in a cassette. Two note low sensing conditions
are available:
 75 notes +/‐ 50

 200 notes + /‐ 50.
Note Low Sensing Block
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC G
R
Currency Width Adjustment
The currency lid holds note guides and spacers which adjust to suit currency width, which
is, in effect, the internal height of the cassette. There are two types of spacers available
for currency width adjustment; segment and fixed size.
The currency width adjustment is made by cutting the eight spacers between the upper
note guides and the lid. Four of these spacers are the same as the currency length E
spacers and four are known as yellow spacers (shown below).
2
3
4 11
5 1 0
6 9
7 8
8 7
9
6
0
1 5
11 4
12 3
2
1
A sharp knife and a medium size cross‐head screwdriver are required to make these
adjustments.

There are eight fixed spacers which provide the same function as the Segment Type
spacers described above. Four of these spacers are the same as the currency length E
spacers and four are known as yellow spacers (shown above). The fixed size spacers must
be changed to suit the currency being dispensed, they can not be cut to size.
Spacer Code

Currency Length, Note Guide and “E” Spacer Codes
Wide Currency Cassette
A B
Note Guide
Left Hand
Side Right Hand
Side
E-Spacer
(4 off)
Truck Door End
Note Guide E. Spacer

Currency Length (mm/in.)
L.H. R.H. L.H. R.H.
Note Guide B to left, A to right:

Note Guide Note Guide
B A
120 (4.72) B3 A2 E9 E10

121 (4.76) B3 A2 E9 E10
122 (4.80) B3 A3 E9 E9
123 (4.84) B3 A3 E9 E9
124 (4.88) B3 A3 E9 E9
125 (4.92) B4 A3 E8 E9
126 (4.96) B4 A3 E8 E9
127 (5.00) B4 A4 E8 E8
128 (5.04) B4 A4 E8 E8
129 (5.08) B4 A4 E8 E8
130 (5.12) B5 A4 E7 E8
131 (5.16) B5 A4 E7 E8
132 (5.20) B5 A5 E7 E7


L.H. R.H. L.H. R.H.
133 (5.24) B5 A5 E7 E7
134 (5.28) B5 A5 E7 E7
135 (5.32) B6 A5 E6 E7
136 (5.36) B6 A5 E6 E7
137 (5.40) B6 A6 E6 E6
138 (5.44) B6 A6 E6 E6
139 (5.48) B6 A6 E6 E6
140 (5.52) B7 A6 N/R E6
141 (5.56) B7 A6 N/R E6
Note Guide A to left, B to right:
A B
142 (5.60) A5 B5 E5 E5
143 (5.64) A5 B5 E5 E5
144 (5.68) A5 B5 E5 E5
145 (5.72) A5 B5 E5 E5
146 (5.76) A6 B5 E4 E5
147 (5.80) A6 B5 E4 E5
148 (5.83) A6 B6 E4 E4
149 (5.87) A6 B6 E4 E4
150 (5.90) A6 B6 E4 E4
151 (5.94) A7 B6 E3 E4
152 (5.98) A7 B6 E3 E4
153 (6.02) A7 B7 E3 E3
154 (6.06) A7 B7 E3 E3
155 (6.10) A7 B7 E3 E3
156 (6.14) A8 B7 E2 E3
157 (6.18) A8 B7 E2 E3
158 (6.22) A8 B8 E2 E2
159 (6.26) A8 B8 E2 E2
160 (6.30) A8 B8 E2 E2
161 (6.34) A9 B8 E1 E2
162 (6.38) A9 B8 E1 E2
163 (6.42) A9 B9 E1 E1
164 (6.46) A9 B9 E1 E1
165 (6.50) A9 B9 E1 E1
166 (6.54) A10 B9 E E1
167 (6.58) A10 B9 E E1
168 (6.62) A10 B10 E E
169 (6.66) A10 B10 E E
170 (6.70) A10 B10 E E
171 (6.74) A11 B10 N/R E
172 (6.78) A11 B10 N/R E
(N/R - No E spacer required)

1000 Rupee Wide Currency Cassette

L.H. R.H. L.H. R.H.
Note Guide B to left, A to right:

B A
120 (4.72) B3 A3 E9 E9
121 (4.76) B3 A3 E9 E9
122 (4.80) B3 A3 E9 E9
123 (4.84) B4 A3 E8 E9
124 (4.88) B4 A3 E8 E9
125 (4.92) B4 A4 E8 E8
126 (4.96) B4 A4 E8 E8
127 (5.00) B4 A4 E8 E8
128 (5.04) B5 A4 E7 E8
129 (5.08) B5 A4 E7 E8
130 (5.12) B5 A5 E7 E7
131 (5.16) B5 A5 E7 E7


L.H. R.H. L.H. R.H.
132 (5.20) B5 A5 E7 E7
133 (5.24) B6 A5 E6 E7
134 (5.28) B6 A5 E6 E7
135 (5.32) B6 A6 E6 E6
136 (5.36) B6 A6 E6 E6
137 (5.40) B6 A6 E6 E6
138 (5.44) B6 A6 E6 E6
Note Guide A to left, B to right:

A B
139 (5.48) A5 B5 E5 E5
140 (5.52) A5 B5 E5 E5
141 (5.52) A5 B5 E5 E5
142 (5.60) A5 B5 E5 E5
143 (5.64) A5 B5 E5 E5
144 (5.68) A6 B5 E4 E5
145 (5.72) A6 B5 E4 E5
146 (5.76) A6 B6 E4 E4
147 (5.80) A6 B6 E4 E4
148 (5.83) A6 B6 E4 E4
149 (5.87) A7 B6 E3 E4
150 (5.90) A7 B6 E3 E4
151 (5.94) A7 B6 E3 E4
152 (5.98) A7 B7 E3 E3
153 (6.02) A7 B7 E3 E3
154 (6.06) A8 B7 E2 E3
155 (6.10) A8 B7 E2 E3
156 (6.14) A8 B8 E2 E2
157 (6.18) A8 B8 E2 E2
158 (6.22) A8 B8 E2 E2
159 (6.26) A9 B8 E1 E2
160 (6.30) A9 B8 E1 E2
161 (6.34) A9 B9 E1 E1
162 (6.38) A9 B9 E1 E1
163 (6.42) A9 B9 E1 E1
164 (6.46) A10 B9 E E1
165 (6.50) A10 B9 E E1
166 (6.54) A10 B10 E E
167 (6.58) A10 B10 E E
168 (6.62) A10 B10 E E
169 (6.66) A11 B10 N/R E
170 (6.70) A11 B10 N/R E
171 (6.74) A11 B11 N/R N/R
172 (6.77) A11 B11 N/R N/R
173 (6.81) A11 B11 N/R N/R
174 (6.85) A11 B11 N/R N/R
175 (6.89) A11 B11 N/R N/R
176 (6.93) A11 B11 N/R N/R


L.H. R.H. L.H. R.H.
177 (6.97) A11 B11 N/R N/R
(N/R - No E spacer required)
Currency Loading
This section describes the procedures that should be followed when replenishing a
currency cassette. Included are the procedures to:
 Open the cassette
 Remove any currency left in the cassette
 Prepare the new currency for loading into the cassette
 Reset the tamper indicating cassette
 Load the currency into the cassette
 Identify the cassette body to the cassette lid
 Close the cassette.
The procedures assume that the cassette has been removed from the dispenser and that
Fluiditi cassettes have also been removed from their secure transport hoods and sleeves.
CAUTION
Once a Fluiditi cassette has had the security marking ink released into it, the cassette can no longer
be used and should be disposed of in accordance with the instructions provided in s66720 “Fluiditi
ATM Security” and s66721 “Fluiditi Replenishment Security”.
Note: NCR recommends that only a service engineer should handle activated cassettes
or clean spillages inside the ATM.
Opening The Cassette
WARNING
Wear protective clothing when handling Fluiditi cassettes that have had the marking ink released
into them.
To open a currency cassette perform the following procedure:
1. Place the cassette on a flat table.
2. If the cassette is a tamper indicating variant, perform the recommended security
procedures of the financial organization’s control documentation.
3. Remove the latch seal.

4. Press the lower latch hasp down then pull the bottom of the latch towards you.
1
3 2
5 4
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC G
R
5. Lift the latch up a small amount. Pull the top of the latch towards you then hinge it
down.
1
3 2
6 5 4
7
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
R G
6. Raise the lid and, applying slight pressure at the front of the lid to help disengage the

tags, remove the lid completely from the cassette base.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
R G

Removing Unused Currency
Pusher Operation
The currency cassette may be fitted with either of the following types of pusher arm
assemblies.
LIFT - DO NOT SQUEEZE
Pusher
WARNING
Wear protective clothing when handling Fluiditi cassettes which have had the marking ink released
into them.
If the cassette is fitted with pusher arms as shown in the following illustration, lift the
pusher arms: DO NOT SQUEEZE.The following procedures show the new pusher arm
assembly.

Currency Release
To remove any unused currency remaining in the cassette, place the handle end of the
cassette against a suitable stop,such as a wall, then perform the following procedure:
7. Lift the pusher arms then move the pusher to the rearmost position by pushing with
the right hand against the pusher.
8. Latch the pusher in the rear position by applying gentle pressure near the base of the
pusher, then releasing the pusher arms.
9. Remove the remaining currency and balance the transaction in accordance with the
financial institution’s procedures.

Preparing Currency
Before loading the currency into a cassette it must be prepared correctly as follows:
Used currency should be prepared by holding a bundle of approximately 100 notes in
one hand and separating out with the other. While separating out, the currency should
be checked for obvious defects such as:
 Adhesive tape on the surface of the currency
 Staples, pins,clips or any foreign matter attached to the currency
 Torn or limp notes with pin holes or missing sections in the body of the currency
 Tears exceeding 13mm (0.5 in.) from any edge of the currency
 Damage or tears to the leading edge (direction of travel) of the note
 Two or more notes stuck together
 Corner folds more than 13mm (0.5 in.) along any edge (straighten as required)
 Folded notes
New or uncirculated currency should be separated (fanned) out several times before
loading into the cassette. Any notes considered to be unacceptable should be removed.
The packaging of new currency can cause it to be set into a bow shape. This bow shape
may be either across the length or the width of the notes and can cause the notes to jam
in the dispenser. Notes bowed across the width have been specifically identified as
causing jams in the Personas 86 dispenser and it is recommended that these notes
should be processed through a counting machine where possible. If this is not possible
then the notes should be manually fanned and flattened several times. If the bow
persists follow the instructions that are given in the section “Loading The Cassette” for
notes that are deformed in this way. Notes that are bowed by 3mm (0.125 in.) or more
should be removed.
Note: Good currency preparation will enhance the performance of the currency
dispenser.

Resetting The Tamper Indicating Cassette
The tamper indicating version of the cassette has a mechanical device which, on
insertion of the cassette into the currency dispenser, moves the insertion counter and
opens the currency exit door. On withdrawal of the cassette from the dispenser the exit
door is locked but the counter is not moved.
The indication on the counter depends on the number of times the cassette has been
inserted into and removed from the dispenser, that is White (one insertion and removal)
2, 3, 4, 5 and 6.
Before loading the cassette the mechanism must be reset to give the number of
insertions required (up to six).
Operate the reset control by moving it to the right then releasing it the appropriate
number of times until the insertion counter indicates Green.
Reset
Loading The Cassette
When loading a cassette with currency, care must be taken to ensure that notes of the
correct denomination are loaded in accordance with the cassette identification code on
the label attached to the cassette.
CAUTION
Once a Fluiditi cassette has had the security marking ink released
into it, the cassette can no longer be used and should be disposed of
in accordance with the instructions provided in Chapters “Fluiditi
ATM Security” and “Fluiditi Replenishment Security”.
To load a cassette with currency observe the “Pusher Operation” procedure given under
the heading ‘Removing Unused Currency’ in this Chapter and proceed as follows:

1. Lift the pusher arms then pull the pusher to the rear of the cassette and lock in
position.
2. Align the edges of the notes in both planes by holding a bundle loosely between the
fingers and thumbs of both hands and tapping lightly on a flat surface, then tapping
the note ends.
3. It is recommended that the cassette be placed at an angle so that each note stack can
be loaded without it falling over. For example, stand the cassette at an angle, with the
handle end at the bottom, and against a wall as shown. Load the notes into the
cassette. For notes bowed along their length, load the cassette with alternate packs/
bundles of 100 notes turned as shown,and make sure that any bowed notes are
loaded with the bow towards the pusher. For notes bowed across their width, lload

the cassette with alternate packs/bundles of 100 notes turned as shown,and make
sure that the bow is pointing away from the pusher.
4. Continue loading until the required amount is loaded, or a 295 mm (11.6 in.) stack is
loaded. This maximum stack size is indicated by the maximum load point label on the
inside of the cassette.
Max. Stack

5. Lift the pusher arms and push the pusher and the note stack upwards until the
currency stack touches the front support, then release the pusher arms.
The currency should now remain between the front support and the pusher in an upright
position, neatly stacked between the cassette guides.
Closing The Cassette
Having loaded and, where required, reset the cassette, it should be closed as follows:
Note: Make sure that the pusher is not locked in the rear position before closing the
cassette. The lid can not be closed if the the pusher has not been released or the cassette
has been overfilled.
1. Insert the tongues on the cassette lid into the slots in the cassette base then lower
the lid on to the cassette base.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
R G

2. Lift the latch up and forward until it hooks on to the lid latch block.
2 1
5 4 3
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
R G
3. Pull the latch down and forward until it clicks into the locked position.
2 1
5 4 3
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
R
G
4. Check that the insertion counter indicates green (tamper indicating versions only).
5. Seal the latch, if required, and complete the third party documentation.
The cassette is now ready for transportation to the ATM.
Setting The Cassette Identification Code
Note: When the denomination of the currency held in a cassette is to be changed the
identification code for the cassette may also have to be changed. It is also important to
determine the opacity or singularity value of the new currency and, if necessary,
reconfigure the parent system with this value.

It is essential that the magnets are pointing in the correct direction. Therefore, each
magnet has a marked end, a painted dot, to indicate which way round it should be
installed in the housing..
Painted Dot
Note: Early versions of the magnet are of square section, later versions are of round
section
The following table shows the location and orientation of the four magnets to produce
the seven cassette identification codes.:
Magnet Positions
A (wide B (wide 1 2 3 4
Code cassette cassette
only) only)
1 (High*) not used not used X X 0 0
2 (Low*) not used not used X 0 0 X
3 not used not used X 0 X 0
4 not used not used X X X X
5 not used not used 0 X X 0
6 not used not used 0 X 0 X
7 not used not used 0 0 X X
Note 1: High* and Low* apply to the M80‐05 Currency Dispenser. X indicates a magnet
inserted in the housing, 0 indicates magnet not present in the housing. The bar above or
below the X indicates if the magnet should be placed in the housing with the marked end
up or down.

Note 2: Codes 5, 6, and 7 are recognized only in ATMs where extended cassette IDs
have been enabled in software. The following illustration shows magnets in place for
code.
No
Magnet
No
Magnet O
X
O
X
Painted Dot
Changing Cassette Identification Code
When it is required to change the identification code of a cassette, say as in this example,
to change the setup of a cassette from code 1 to code 2, so that two cassettes can
dispense notes of the same denomination, perform the following procedure:
1. Open and remove the cassette lid.
2. Release the clip(s) holding the plastic housing to the cassette side frame and remove
the plastic housing complete with the

magnets from the cassette.
1
3 2
5 4
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Clips
3. Remove the magnet from positions 2.
4. Replace the magnets in the housing so that they are positioned and orientated for the
code required as shown. For example, to set the cassette to Code 2 a magnet should
be inserted in position 1 with the dot end up. Another magnet should be inserted in
position 4 with the dot end down. No magnets should be inserted in positions 2 and
3.
4
3
2
1
B
A
4
3
2
1
5. Attach the housing complete with the magnets to the cassette frame using the clip(s)
released in step 1. The housing should be inserted with the longer of the two legs
towards the handle end of the cassette.
6. Close the cassette lid.
7. Mark the cassette body and lid with the currency code according to local practice.

Mechanical
The standard security, Fluiditi, and tamper indicating variants of the currency cassette
can be adjusted to hold currencies of different lengths and widths and to change the
note low sensing facility.
Note: The terms “left” and “right” in the following adjustments and setting tables apply
to the cassette when looked at from the front (truck door) end.
th
Leng
ncy
rre
Cu
Right Hand Side

Currency
Width
$
Left Hand Side
 The length adjustment is made by changing the position of two note guides located in
the base of the cassette.
 The width adjustment is made by changing the height of the spacers located between
two more note guides and the cassette lid.
 The note low sensing adjustment is made by changing the note low block position in
the base of the cassette.

The locations of the note guides, spacers and the note low block are shown in the
illustration below.
Lid Spacers
Currency Width
Note Guide
Note Low Block
Spacers
Currency Length
Note Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Currency Length Adjustment
The currency length adjustment is made by first establishing the length of the currency to
be loaded into the cassette then using this measurement to determine the position of
two note guides in the base of the cassette.
Adjustment is provided to allow the cassette to accommodate currency of lengths from
120 mm (4.72 in.) to 177 mm (6.97 in.).
Once the length of the currency is known, this is used to determine a guide code and the
length of a spacer, which together, are used to determine the position of two note
guides located along the floor of the cassette compartment.
The two note guides are installed along the left‐hand and right‐hand sides of the
cassette, as viewed from the front (that is, the truck door end) of the cassette. A
triangular pointer on the front of the guide and a triangular mark at the rear line up with
numbers embossed on the floor of the cassette compartment. This number is part of the
guide code.
The other part of the guide code is a letter, A or B, which is embossed on the note guides,
A on one note guide and B on the other. The A or B note guides can be installed along
either the right or left hand side of the cassette floor (as shown) depending on the guide

code but must always be installed with the spring finger end of the guide pointing to the
number embossed at the front end of the cassette.
Note Guide Note Guide Note Guide Note Guide

A B B A
OR
Cassette Floor
The segment type spacer is embossed on one side with the letter E and the numbers 1 to
15 and is known as the E spacer. The E spacer is designed to snap into position without
the use of tools.
The following example shows how to adjust a cassette for currency of length 120 mm
(4.72 in.).
1. Determine the length of the new currency (in this case 120 mm (4.72 in.)).
2. Use the table given under the heading “Currency Length, Note Guide and “E” Spacer
Codes for the Wide Currency Cassette” at the end of this section to determine the
guide code and the E spacer setting for the currency. For this example the left hand
guide (L.H.) will have a guide code of B3 and the right hand guide (R.H.) a code of A3.
The spacers will have a setting of E9 for both the left hand guide and the right hand
guide.
Note: The letters A and B in the tables indicate which note guide should be placed to
the left and which to the right. Remember that right and left are considered when
looking on the front of the cassette (the end with the truck door). The number 1 to
12, after the letter, corresponds to the numbers embossed on the floor of the
currency cassette. The triangular pointer at the front of the note guide and the
triangular mark at the rear should line up with the same number as given in the table.
3. Remove the two note guides from the cassette base as follows:

 Unscrew and remove the screws and flat washers securing the note guides to the
cassette base as shown.
Screw and
Flat Washer
 The note guides may be secured in position with green plastic clamps. If these are
fitted, unscrew and remove them as shown.
 Slide the pusher back to reveal the front edge of the guides.

 Remove each note guide by pushing the guide towards the rear of the cassette
and, at the same time, raising the rear end of the guide then lifting it out of the
cassette as shown. Take care not to damage or bend the spring fingers.
 Unclip and remove the four E spacers from the base of the cassette as shown.
Note: The two E spacers located near the handle end of the cassette should be
turned through 90 degrees before pulling upwards.
4. Prior to fitting in the cassette, set four new E spacers to the spacer code for the new
currency for example, E9 for the left hand guide and E9 for the right hand guide as
follows:
 Hold the spacer so the letter E and the numbers 1 to 15 can be read.

 Using a strong sharp knife, cut the spacer just above the number, for this example
9. You should be left with a spacer, similar to that in the following illustration,
that has the letter E and the number 9 on it.
 Remove any burrs left after cutting.
5. Snap‐in the four new E spacers into the slots in the cassette base.
6. Insert the note guides back into the cassette so that the pointers at either end of the
guide are pointing at the code numbers for the new currency. For this example the
left hand guide (B) should be inserted with the triangular pointer pointing at the
number 3 and the right hand guide (A) pointer pointing at the number 3. The
following illustration shows an example of the left hand guide. To lock the guide in
place, press down on the guide and slide it towards the front of the cassette.
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7. Replace the flat washers and screws in the base of the cassette or screw in the green

plastic clamps if these are fitted.
Screw and
Flat Washer
The spacer is embossed on one side with the letter E and a number from 1 to 15 (E1, E2,
E3 etc.) and is known as the E spacer. The E spacer is designed to snap‐in to position
without the use of tools.
X
Spacer
Code
Note: The following is an example of how to adjust a cassette for currency of length 120
mm (4.72 in.).
1. Determine the length of the new currency (in this case 120 mm (4.72 in.)).
2. Use the tables given under the heading “Currency Length, Note Guide and “E” Spacer
Codes for the Wide Currency Cassette” at the end of this section to determine the
guide code and the E spacer setting for the currency. For this example the left hand
guide (L.H.) will have a guide code of B3 and the right hand guide (R.H.) a code of A3.
The spacers will have a setting of E9 for both the left hand guide and the right hand
guide.
Note: The letters A and B in the tables indicate which note guide should be placed to
the left and which to the right. Remember that right and left are considered when

looking on the front of the cassette (the end with the truck door). The number 1 to
12, after the letter, corresponds to the numbers embossed on the floor of the
currency cassette. The triangular pointer at the front of the note guide and the
triangular mark at the rear should line up with the same number as given in the table.
3. Remove the two note guides from the cassette base as follows:
 Unscrew and remove the screws and flat washers securing the note guides to the
cassette base as shown.
Screw and
Flat Washer
 The note guides may be secured in position with green plastic clamps. If these are
fitted, unscrew and remove them as shown.
 Slide the pusher back to reveal the front edge of the guides.

 Remove each note guide by pushing the guide towards the rear of the cassette
and, at the same time, raising the rear end of the guide then lifting it out of the
cassette as shown. Care should be taken not to damage or bend the spring
fingers.
 Unclip and remove the four E spacers from the base of the cassette as shown.
Note: The two E spacers located near the handle end of the cassette should be
turned through 90 degrees before pulling upwards
4. Snap‐in the four new E spacers in to the slots in the cassette base.
5. Insert the note guides back into the cassette so that the pointers at either end of the
guide are pointing at the code numbers for the new currency. For this example the
left hand guide (B) should be inserted with the triangular pointer pointing at the
number 3 and the right hand guide (A) pointer pointing at the number 3. The
following illustration shows an example of the left hand guide. To lock the guide in

place, press down on the guide and slide it towards the front of the cassette.
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6. Replace the flat washers and screws in the base of the cassette or screw in the green
plastic clamps if these are fitted.
Screw and
Flat Washer
Currency Width Adjustment
The currency width adjustment is made by first establishing the width of the currency
that the cassette is to hold then using this measurement to determine the setting of
spacers located between two note guides and the cassette lid. The setting of the spacers
can be adjusted to accommodate currency of varying widths:
 Minimum width 62 mm (2.44 in.)
 Maximum width 95 mm (3.74 in.).
As with the length adjustment there are two types of spacers:

 Segment type
 Fixed size.
Cassette Lid - E and Yellow Spacer Locations - Depending upon the type of cassette, the
lid will be fitted with two yellow spacers and either three or two E spacers. Newer lids are
designed to accept the spray bar of the Fluiditi system and this occupies the position
formerly taken by a central E spacer. Both types of lids are shown in the following
illustrations.
Spacer Screws
(10 off )
Note Guide Welding Peg

( Non TI Lid -
see text )
"E" Spacers (6 off )
Yellow
Spacers
(4 off )
Note Guide
Cut-Outs
To Outside
Note Guide
Yellow Spacers
‘E’ Spacer
‘E’ Spacer
Note Guide
Cut-outs
To Outside
The E spacers are the same as the E spacers used when adjusting the currency length.
Each E spacer is attached to the lid note guides by a cross‐headed screw.

The other four spacers are known as Yellow spacers (shown below), and are designed to
clip into the cassette lid. Each Yellow spacer is also attached to the lid note guides by a
cross headed screw.
2
3
4 11
5 1 0
6 9
7 8
8 7
9
6
0
1 5
11 4
12 3
2
1
The following example shows how to adjust the cassette for currency of width 67 mm
(2.64 in.) on a lid with two E spacers and two yellow spacers.
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the cassette and remove the lid.
2. Using a cross‐head screwdriver, remove the two note guides from the lid by undoing
the cross‐head screws from the two Yellow spacers then use the same screwdriver to
remove the E spacers from the note guides.
3. Remove the Yellow spacers from the lid by pressing in the two spring legs of each
spacer then pushing them out of the lid.
4. Determine the width of the new currency (in this case 67 mm (2.64 in.)).
5. Use the table given under the heading “Currency Width Spacer Codes” at the end of
this section to determine the spacer code for the currency:
6. Set the four new Yellow and four (or six) new E spacers to their spacer codes. For this
example the Yellow spacers should be set to C8 and the E spacers to E10. The
procedure to set the E spacer is the same as that when adjusting for currency length,
that is, cut the spacer above segment 10. The procedure to set a Yellow spacer to its
spacer code is as follows:
 The Yellow spacers are embossed on one side. Looking at this side, you see two
sets of numbers 1 to 12 reading in opposite directions. One end has the letter C
on it and the other has the letter D.
 The Yellow spacer code is C8 so count from the C end to segment 8 and, using a
sharp knife, cut the spacer just above the number 8 so that you are left with a
spacer that has C and segments 1 to 8, refer to following illustration.

 Fit a locking wedge into the first gap in the cut Yellow spacer as shownRemove
any burrs left after cutting..
5
6
7 8
8 7
9 6
10 5
11 4
12 3
2
1
C
7. Install the four new Yellow spacers in the cassette lid by pressing the legs of the
spacer together and pushing them into the apertures in the cassette lid. The legs of
the spacers should be pointing towards the centre of the cassette lid as shown in the
following illustration.
8. Using the cross‐head screwdriver, attach the new E spacers to the lid note guides.
9. Using the cross‐head screwdriver, attach the lid note guides to the cassette lid. Make
sure the cut outs on the note guides are facing towards the outside edges of the
cassette lid as shown in the following illustration.
Note Guide
Yellow Spacers
‘E’ Spacer
‘E’ Spacer
Note Guide
Cut-outs
To Outside
Cassette Lid ‐ E and Yellow Spacer Locations
Depending upon the type of cassette, the lid will be fitted with two yellow spacers and
either three or two E spacers. Newer lids are designed to accept the spray bar of the
Fluiditi system and this occupies the position formerly taken by a central E spacer.

In this section the example shows how to adjust the cassette for currency width on a lid
with two E spacers and two yellow spacers. Older cassettes will require another E spacer
to fit in the central position of each note guide.
The fixed size E spacers are the same as those used when adjusting the currency length.
Each E spacer is clipped in to the lid note guides ‐ see the following illustration.
Note Guide
Yellow Spacers
‘E’ Spacer
‘E’ Spacer
Note Guide
Cut-outs
To Outside
The other four spacers are known as Yellow spacers, and are designed to clip into the
cassette lid. Each Yellow spacer is also clipped in to the lid note guides ‐ see the following
illustration.
Spacer Code
The following example explains how to adjust a cassette for a currency of width 67 mm
(2.64 in.).
Proceed as follows:
2. Unclip and remove the two note guides from the lid then remove the E spacers from
the note guides.
3. Remove the Yellow spacers from the lid by pressing in the two spring legs of each
spacer then pushing them out of the lid.
4. Determine the width of the new currency (in this case 67 mm (2.64 in.)).

5. Use the table given under the heading “Currency Width Spacer Codes” at the end of
this section to determine the spacer code for the currency.
6. Select four new Yellow and four new E spacers by their spacer codes. For this example
the Yellow spacers should be C8 and the E spacers E10.
Spacer Code
Spacer Code
X
X
7. Install the four new Yellow spacers in the cassette lid by pressing the legs of the
spacer together and pushing them into the apertures in the cassette lid. The legs of
the spacers should be pointing towards the centre of the cassette lid as shown in the
following illustration.
8. Clip the four new E spacers to the lid note guides.
9. Clip the lid note guides to the cassette lid. Make sure the cut outs on the note guides
are facing towards the outside edges of the cassette lid as shown in the following
illustration.
Note Guide
Yellow Spacers
‘E’ Spacer
‘E’ Spacer
Note Guide
Cut-outs
To Outside

Currency Width Spacer Codes
Currency Width Yellow Spacer E Spacer Currency Width Yellow Spacer E Spacer
mm (in.) Code Code mm (in.) Code Code
62 (2.44) C9 E11 79 (3.11) D3 E4
63 (2.48) D8 E10 80 (3.15) C3 E4
64 (2.52) D8 E10 81 (3.19) C3 E4
65 (2.56) C8 E10 82 (3.23) D2 E3
66 (2.60) C8 E10 83 (3.27) C2 E3
67 (2.64) D7 E9 84 (3.31) C2 E3
68 (2.68) C7 E9 85 (3.35) D1 E2
69 (2.72) C7 E9 86 (3.39) C1 E1
70 (2.76) D6 E8 87 (3.43) C1 E1
71 (2.80) C6 E7 88 (3.46) D E1
72 (2.83) C6 E7 89 (3.50) C N/R
73 (2.87) D5 E7 90 (3.54) C N/R
74 (2.91) C5 E6 91 (3.58) C N/R
75 (2.95) C5 E6 92 (3.62) N/R N/R
76 (2.99) D4 E6 93 (3.66) N/R N/R
77 (3.03) C4 E5 94 (3.70) N/R N/R
78 (3.07) C4 E5 95 (3.74) N/R N/R
(N/R - Spacer or guide not required)
Note: On H‐8015‐STD1‐01/02‐08 non‐tamper indicating lids, when the yellow spacer is
set to C or D, cut off the two welding pegs at both sides of the lid at the opposite end to
the latch. (Refer to the following illustration). This permits the note guides to sit level.
Spacer Screws
(10 off )
Note Guide Welding Peg

( Non TI Lid -
see text )
"E" Spacers (6 off )
Yellow
Spacers
(4 off )
Note Guide
Cut-Outs
To Outside
There are no welding pegs on Wide Plastic cassettes.

Note Low Sensing Adjustment
The cassette contains a note low block that provides the parent ATM with an indication
of a note low condition. The block can be set to give two note low settings:
 75 +/‐ 50 notes
 200 +/‐ 50 notes.
The settings are indicated by spherical pips on the block such that if the pips are towards
the truck door end of the cassette, it is set for the 75 note setting. If the pips are set to
the rear of the cassette then it is set for the 200 setting. Refer to the following illustration
for the location of the pips.
Spherical Pips
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC G
R
To change the note low setting proceed as follows:
2. Press the flaps of the note low block together and then pull the block upwards and
out of the pusher body.

3. Turn the block around so that the pips face the opposite way then insert the block
back into the pusher.
4. Press down firmly until the block clicks into place.
CABLING
None.
None.
TOOLS
 A sharp knife,
 Amedium size cross‐head screwdriver.


INTRODUCTION
The S2 Currency Dispenser is also referred to as the USB Media Dispenser.
CAUTION
Carriage
Carriage
Umbilical
Single Note Transport
(SNT) Bill Aligner Module
(BAM)
Nose Main Motor & Pump

Assembly
Double Pick Module
Purge Bin Presenter Core
Status Indicator
Lights
4–High Pick Support Frame
Currency Cassettes
5–High Pick Support Frame
Single Pick Module

DESCRIPTION
The dispenser, upon command from the ATM processor, selects bills from the cassettes;
tests for singularity and irregularities, stacks them into a single bunch then presents the
bunch to the customer. The presented bunch will remain in the present position until
removed by the customer or retracted under application control.
S2 Dispenser modules and cassettes are not interchangeable with earlier designs of
dispenser.
The dispenser is an assembly of the following:
 Presenter Core ‐ front or rear access
 Nose
 Carriage ‐ front or rear access
 Bill Aligner Module (BAM)
 Single Note Transport (SNT)
 Main Motor and Pump Assembly
 Double Pick Module(s)
 Pick Support Frame
 Currency Cassettes
 Purge Bin ‐ open, latchfast, lockable latchfast
 Status Indicator Lights
 Main Control Board
 5/6 Hi Expansion Board (optional)
 Single Pick Module (optional)
 Serial Number Read (optional)
Weight
The weight of the basic 4‐high unit with empty currency cassettes is 61.5 kg (136 lb).

Presenter Core
Carriage Cam
(Primary)
Carriage Umbilical Flex
Purge Bin
Sensors
Cam Motor
Vacuum
Sensor
Vacuum
Reservior
Module Latch
Sensor
24VDC
Interlock
Switch
Purge Bin
Carriage Position CIC
Switch
Cam CIC Sensor
Carriage Cam
Purge Bin (Secondary)
LED Interface
Purge Bin Latch

Sensor
Nose
Carriage Present Flag
Variants:
 144.5 mm Front Access
 154.0 mm Front Access
 172.0 mm Rear Access

Carriage
Chassis Cover
CIC Sensor Target
Front Access Rear Access

Closed Closed
Lower Plate
Carriage Position
Sensor Front Access
Open
Exit/Pre-Exit & Bunch
Sensors
Rear Access
Open
Pre-Exit Sensor Bunch Sensor
Exit Sensor
Timing Disk
Belt Motor
Carriage with chassis cover removed

Bill Aligner Module (BAM)
Finger Rack
Edge Register
Motor
Sensor
Single Note Transport (SNT)
Media Deflector Sensors
Divert Gate
Media Deflector
Fingers
Stack Entry Sensor

(PurgeSen)
Flickers
Divert Entry Sensor
Divert Gate
Sensor
Width Sensor
Line 2 Timing Sensor Hall Effect Thickness Sensor

(TimeDiscSen) (HETS)

Main Motor and Pump Assembly
Main Motor
Vacuum Pump

Double Pick Module
Suction
Cup
Note Low
Pick Sensor Sensor Pick Sensor
LED
Key Plate
Pick Arm
Motor
Quad CIC Board
Pick Arm
D Wheel Shaft
Position Sensors
Position Sensors
Solenoid Valve
Vacuum Hose

Single Pick Module
Suction
Cup
Note Low
Pick Sensor Sensor Pick Sensor
LED
Key Plate
Pick Arm
Motor
Dual CIC Board
Pick Arm
Position Sensor
D Wheel Shaft
Position Sensor
Solenoid Valve
Vacuum Hose
Currency Cassette
Refer to the NCR S2 Dispenser Cassettes Operator Guide (B006‐6966) and the S2
Currency Cassette chapter in this service manual.

Purge Bin
Open Purge Bin
Latchfast Purge Bin
Lockable Latchfast Purge Bin
Retract Reject
Divert
Purge Bin Areas
Height Width Length

Open bin 142 mm (5.6 in.) 218 mm (8.6 in.) 361 mm (141.2 in.)
Latchfast bin 140 mm (5.5 in.) 237 mm (9.3 in.) 361 mm (141.2 in.)
Lockable latchfast bin 140 mm (5.5 in.) 237 mm (9.3 in.) 368 mm (141.5 in.)

Status Indicator Lights
The status indicator lights can be configured by the owning authority.
The default configuration is:
Indicator Light Possible Root Cause

Solid Red Dispenser in service.
Action is required before dispenser can be racked in.
Flashing Red Dispenser out of service.
Action required before dispenser can be brought into service.
Solid Amber Dispenser in service.
Action required to repair dispenser.
Flashing Amber Dispenser in service.
Action required to replenish dispenser.
Solid Green Dispenser in service.
No action required.

Vacuum System
Vacuum Sensor
Vacuum Pump
Vacuum Reservoir Main Motor
Air Filter
Pick Arm Motor
T Connector
Suction Cup
Pick Line Solenoid Valve

Main Control Board
J16 J1 J2 J3 J4 J5
J15
J6
J7
J8
J9
J14 J25
J18
J13 J12 J19 J11 J10
Number Harness Number Harness

J1 Presenter Harness J11 Lower Pick Module Harness
J2 Presenter Harness J12 Lower Dual cassette ID Harness
J3 SNT Harness J13 SOH Harness
J4 SNT Harness J14 Upper Dual cassette ID Harness
J5 Main Motor J15 SOH Harness
J6 USB Mini Cable J16 RJ45 Cable to shutter PCB
J7 +24VDC Power J18 Interface Harness
J8 Upper Pick Module Harness J19 Interface Harness
J9 Upper Pick Module Harness J25 BAM Harness
J10 Lower Pick Module Harness

5/6 Hi Expansion Board
J1 J2
J3
J6
J7
Number Harness
J1 Interface Harness
J2 Interface Harness
J3 Single or Double Pick Module Harness (Motor and Vacuum Solenoid)
J6 Single or Double Pick Module Harness (PA/DW PCB Sensor)
J7 Single or Dual Cassette ID Harness

Serial Number Read
The serial number read (SNR) transport is an optional anti‐fraud feature mounted in pick
1 of the upper double pick module, primarily for the China market. A pair of scanners
reads the denomination and serial number of every note as it passes from the pick to the
presenter, and also takes an image.
There is an SNR control board mounted on the side of the pick module.
CN 3 CN 4
CN 1 CN 2 CIS Head CIS Head
(not used) (not used) (Moving guide) (Fixed guide)
CN 5 CN 6
DC Power Input USB HS
(to dispenser board) (to USB hub)
Note that the scanners are calibrated by the manufacturer and matched to a specific
control board by serial numbers, so boards and scanners must not be swapped out
individually. The Field Replaceable Unit for the Serial Number Read function is the entire
pick module.

Electrical System
K
Carriage Sensor A Media Deflector Motor
J
B Purge Bin Sensors
Presenter Carriage PCB Vacuum

Timing Disc J1 Sensor Purge Bin LEDs Interface
J5
Sensor J2 J4 J3 Carriage Position HETS
Sensor 24VDC Presenter
J2 Interlock CIC
J3 J1 Switch
Presenter Relay PCB Carriage
Purge Bin
Motor Motor
Switch
Width Sensor
F/A Flex Interface R/A Cam Purge Bin Latch Sensor
C Motor Divert Gate
J3
J2 Solenoid
J1
Module Latch Sensor
BAM Motor
J4
Shutter PCB SNT Sensor Board

E
Status Indicator
J16 J1 J2 J3 J4 J5
D Main Motor
(optional) (Exit/Entry)
J15 USB Hub Divert/Transport Sensor
J6
H
+24VDC Main PSU
J7
Divert Gate Flag Sensor
BAM CIC
J8 Pick1 Motor
Timing Disc Sensor

J9
J14
J25 J18
G Quad CIC
F Pick2 Motor
J13 J12 J19 J11 J10
Pick1 Sensor Pick1
Dual Cass ID CIC Solenoid Value
for Cassettes 1 & 2 G L
Pick1 LED
F
Dual Cass ID CIC Pick Module Pick2 Sensor

for Cassettes 3 & 4 for Cassettes 3 & 4 Pick2
Pick2 LED Solenoid Value
Harnesses L
A. Umbilical Flex Harness
J1 J2
B. Carriage Position Sensor Harness
C. Presenter Harness
D. State of Health Harness
E. SNT Harness
F. Dual Cassette ID Harness
G. Double Pick Module Harness
H. BAM CIC Harness
J. Purge Bin Interface Harness
K. Purge Bin Interconnect Harness
L. Interface Harness

5/6 Hi Expansion Board ‐ 5 High
Main Control
Board
J19 J18
Harnesses
L. Interface Harness L L
M. Single Cassette ID Harness
N. Single Pick Module Harness
J1 J2
J3
Motor Dual CIC
M
J7 J6
Sensor
N Solenoid Value
5/6 Hi Expansion LED
Board
Single Cass ID CIC
5/6 Hi Expansion Board ‐ 6 High
Main Control
Board
J19 J18
Harnesses
F. Dual Cassette ID Harness L L
G. Double Pick Module Harness
L. Interface Harness
J1 J2
J3
Pick5 Motor
F
J7 J6
G Quad CIC
5/6 Hi Expansion Pick6 Motor
Board
Pick5 Sensor Pick5
Solenoid Value
Dual Cass ID CIC
Pick5 LED
for Cassettes 5 & 6
Pick6 Sensor
Pick6
Pick6 LED Solenoid Value

Sensors
Front Access Carriage
Carriage Open Carriage Closed
Presenter Timing Disc

Sensor Carriage Flag
Rear Access Carriage Carriage Position
Sensor
Bunch Pre-Exit Exit
Purge Bin Sensors

Carriage CIC
Nose Media Deflector Sensors Nose
(Front Access) (Rear Access)
Stack Entry Sensor
BAM CIC
Purge Bin
Latch Sensor Clamp Cam
Purge Bin CIC
Present Sensor Divert Entry Sensor Width Sensor
Vacuum Sensor
HETS Pick Sensor
Cassette Latch Sensor

Pick 1
Cassette ID Sensor
Note Low Sensor
Pick Sensor LED
Pick 2
Double Pick Module
(typical)
Pick Line Pick Line

Position Sensor Position Sensor
D Wheel Shaft
D Wheel Shaft Position Sensor
Position Sensor
Quad CIC Board
Dual CIC Board
Single Pick Module Pick Sensor
Cassette Latch Sensor

Pick 5
Cassette ID Sensor
Note Low Sensor
Pick Sensor LED

TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Messages
The following error messages are reported by the module. Refer to the sections “Module
Replacement” and “Adjustments” for detailed instructions on FRU actions. To de‐code
specific M_Status and M_Data use the Status Code Translator Tool available from
http://www.infoprod.ncr.com or refer to Diagnostic Status Code Notebook Volume 1
(B006‐6273).
Control Board
Module ID 1
Error M Status Possible root causes Isolation Resolution

NVRAM access failure 1 NV RAM corrupt Inspect control Replace control
board board
Faulty control pcb Inspect control Replace control
board board
USB comms failure 2 Check USB connections Inspect harness Push connector
home
Faulty USB harness Inspect harness Replace USB harness
No power to device Inspect harness Push connector

home
Faulty control PCB Inspect harness Replace PCB
I2C comms failure 3 Faulty I2C connections Inspect harness Inspect harness

connections connections
Faulty I2C harness Inspect harness Replace harness
No power to device Inspect power Inspect power

harness harness
Faulty shutter Run SysApp Replace shutter
diagnostic test
Instance ID not configured 6 Dual dispense instance N/A Configure instance in
not configured SysApp
Non authorised dispenser 8 Non authorised N/A Authorise device in
control board fitted SysApp
dispenser control board
fitted
Device not authenticated 9 Device not N/A Authenticate device
authenticated at in SysApp
installation or control
pcb replacement

Pick Module
Module ID 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

ICS activated – replace all 4 ICS activated Confirm ICS triggered Replace affected
affected parts modules
Pick sensor failed 25 (p1) Jam under pick sensor Inspect pick sensor Clear jam
26 (p2)
27 (P3) Faulty harness / PCB Run SysAppSysApp Replace pick module
28 (p4) diagnostic test
29 (p5) Pick sensor not Run SysApp diagnostic Configure pick
30 (p6) calibrated test module
Faulty control PCB Run SysApp diagnostic Replace control PCB
test
Pick arm sensor fault Faulty harness / PCB Run SysApp diagnostic Replace pick module
test
Faulty pick module Run SysApp diagnostic Replace pick module
test
Incorrectly fitted pick Inspect pick PCB Re‐seat pick PCB
PCB
test
D‐wheel sensor fault Faulty harness / PCB Run SysApp diagnostic Replace pick module
test
Faulty pick module Run SysApp diagnostic Replace pick module
test
Incorrectly fitted pick Inspect pick PCB Re‐seat pick PCB
PCB
test
Pick arm motor fault 45 (p1) Poor cassette loading Check cassette loading Re‐load cassette
46 (p2) and run multiple
47 (p3) test notes
48 (p4) Faulty pick arm motor Run SysApp diagnostic Replace pick module
49 (p5) test
50 (p6)
Faulty control PCB Run multiple test Replace control PCB
notes
Bill jam at pick sensor 64 (p1) Poor media quality/ inspect pick module clear jam/reload
65 (p2) cassette loading or and cassette cassette/remove
66 (p3) foreign object present foreign object
67 (p4) Faulty pick transport Inspect pick module Replace pick module
68 (p5)
69 (p6) Faulty cassette Inspect cassette Replace cassette
Faulty pick sensor Run SysApp diagnostic Replace pick module

test

Media detected at pick 74 (p1) Foreign object at pick Inspect pick Clear foreign object

sensor at wrong time 75 (p2) sensor
76 (p3) Poor cassette loading Check cassette loading Re‐load cassette
77 (p4)
78 (p5) Faulty pick sensor Run SysApp diagnostic Replace pick module
79 (p6) test
Faulty cassette Inspect cassette Replace cassette
Pick sensor dirty N/A Sensor dirty Inspect sensor Clean sensor
Pick unit missing Faulty harness Inspect harness Replace harness
Faulty CIC sensor Run SysApp diagnostic Replace pick module

test
Pick unit tamper N/A
Pick unit not configured Faulty CIC sensor Run SysApp diagnostic Replace pick module

test

Cassette
Module ID 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13

Cassette not latched 6 Cassette not latched Inspect cassette Rack cassette into
correctly correctly latch device
Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace pick frame
diagnostic test
Faulty cassette latch Inspect latch Replace pick frame
Cassette parameters not 7 Cassette parameters N/A Configure cassette in

configured not configured SysApp
Cassette ID sensor fault 25 (p1) Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace pick module
26 (p2) diagnostic test
27 (P3) Missing CIC target Inspect cassette CIC Replace cassette
28 (p4) target location
29 (p5)
30 (p6) Faulty CIC target Run SysApp Replace cassette
diagnostic test
Faulty control PCB Run SysApp Replace control PCB
diagnostic test
Cassette latch sensor fault Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace pick frame
diagnostic test
Faulty cassette latch Inspect latch Replace pick frame
Cassette low sensor fault Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace pick module

diagnostic test
Faulty cassette Run SysApp Replace cassette
diagnostic test
Pusher Plate Stalled Poor cassette loading Inspect cassette Re‐load cassette
contents
Faulty cassette Inspect cassette Replace casette

Cassette empty 81 (p1) Cassette empty Inspect cassette Replenish cassette

82 (p2) contents
Too many bad media 83 (p3) Incorrect or poor Inspect cassette Re‐load media /
items picked 84 (p4) quality or poorly contents Replenish with
85 (p5) loaded media in correct media
86 (p6) cassette
Incorrect cassette Check note Set note
configuration configuration in configuration in
SysApp SysApp
HETs not calibrated Confirm correct Configure singularity
singularity in SysApp
Faulty SNT Run SysApp Replace SNT
diagnostic test
Unable to learn media Incorrect or poor Inspect cassette Re‐load media /
parameters quality or poorly contents Replenish with
loaded media in correct media
cassette
diagnostic test
Too many consecutive Incorrect or poor Inspect cassette Re‐load media /
mis‐picks quality or poorly contents Replenish with
loaded media in correct media
cassette
Faulty / worn suction Inspect suctions Replace suction cups
cups cups
Vacuum filter blocked Run SysApp Replace vacuum filter
diagnostic test
Vacuum system fault Run SysApp Replace motor /
diagnostic test pump module
Faulty pick module Run SysApp Replace pick module
diagnostic test
Faulty pressure sensor Run SysApp Replace presenter
diagnostic test
Cassette removed N/A Cassette removed Inspect cassette Insert cassette
location
Cassette low Cassette low Inspect cassette Replenish cassette
contents
Cassette not configured N/A

Purge Bin
Module ID 14

Bin removed 6 Bin removed Inspect bin location Insert bin
Faulty bin present Run SysApp Replace presenter

switch diagnostic test
Bin not latched correctly Bin not inserted fully Inspect bin latch Rack bin into device
Faulty bin latch Run SysApp Replace presenter

diagnostic test
Faulty bin latch Run SysApp Replace presenter
sensor diagnostic test
Divert Area
Module ID 15

Bin full 91 Bin compartment full Inspect bin Empty bin (all
compartment compartments)
Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace SNT
diagnostic test
Bin nearly full N/A Bin compartment full Inspect bin Empty bin (all
Reject Area
Module ID 16

Faulty harness / Run SysApp Replace SNT

Retract Area
Module ID 17

Bin retract operations limit 6 Bin compartment full Inspect bin Empty bin (all
exceeded compartment compartments)
Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace SNT
diagnostic test
Carriage
Module ID 18
See also ‘Troubleshooting Procedures’ for detailed guidance on diagnosing the cause of
faults in the carriage.

Carriage bunch sensor 22 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
fail
Faulty harness / Run SysApp Replace carriage
Jam in carriage Inspect carriage Clear jam
Foreign object in Inspect carriage Clear foreign object

carriage
Faulty carriage Run SysApp Replace carriage
diagnostic test
Faulty umbilical Run SysApp Replace umbilical
diagnostic test
Carriage pre‐exit 22 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
sensor fail

carriage
diagnostic test
diagnostic test

Carriage exit sensor 22 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
fail

carriage
diagnostic test
diagnostic test
Carriage position 22 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
sensor fail
carriage
diagnostic test
Carriage home 22 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
position sensor fail
Faulty harness / Run SysApp Replace presenter
Missing target Inspect carriage Replace carriage
target location
Faulty target Run SysApp Replace carriage
diagnostic test
Faulty control PCB Run SysApp Replace control PCB
diagnostic test
Carriage belt timing 22 Broken timing disk Run SysApp Replace carriage
disk fail diagnostic test
Carriage drive motor 42 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
fail
diagnostic test
Faulty motor / Run SysApp Replace carriage
harness diagnostic test
Faulty presenter Inspect tracks Replace presenter
tracks
Foreign object in Inspect presenter Clear foreign object
presenter
diagnostic test

Carriage belt motor fail 42 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’

Faulty carriage Inspect timing disk Replace carriage
timing disk
diagnostic test
Carriage Jammed 42 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’

diagnostic test
Faulty presenter Inspect tracks Replace presenter or nose
tracks
Foreign object in Inspect presenter Remove foreign object
presenter
diagnostic test
Media jam at the 62 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
bunch sensor
Jam or foreign Inspect carriage Clear jam or remove foreign
object in carriage object
diagnostic test
diagnostic test
Media jam at the pre‐ 62 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
exit sensor
diagnostic test
diagnostic test
Media jam at the exit 62 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
sensor
diagnostic test
diagnostic test

Bunch sensor is dirty N/A Sensor dirty Run SysApp Clean sensor

diagnostic test
Pre‐exit sensor is dirty
Exit sensor is dirty
Carriage tamper N/A N/A
Too many consecutive N/A Poor quality Inspect cassette Replenish cassette

splays in carriage currency contents
Splay threshold set Check splay Set splay threshold
incorrectly threshold
Foreign object in Inspect carriage Remove foreign object
carriage
diagnostic test

Single Note Transport
Module ID 19

HETS sensor fail 21 Faulty harness / Run SysApp Replace SNT
Faulty control PCB Run SysApp Replace SNT
diagnostic test
Width sensor fail Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam
Sensor dirty Inspect sensor Clean sensor
Sensor not calibrated Run SysApp Calibrate device

diagnostic test
Main timing disk sensor Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam
fail
Faulty SNT timing disk Inspect SNT Replace SNT
Stacker entry sensor failed Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam
Foreign object in SNT Inspect SNT Clear foreign object

diagnostic test

Divert bin entry sensor Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam
failed

diagnostic test


Media deflector home 21 Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam

sensor failed

diagnostic test

diagnostic test
Media deflector extended Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam
sensor failed

diagnostic test

diagnostic test
Divert gate fail / divert 21, 41 Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam
gate sensor fault
Faulty SNT solenoid Run SysApp Replace SNT
diagnostic test
Media deflector failed 41 Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam

diagnostic test
Divert Gate Jam at Divert Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam

diagnostic test

Unrecoverable media jam 61 Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam

in the SNT
Misaligned belts Inspect SNT Re‐seat belts
Damaged belts Inspect SNT Replace SNT
Unrecoverable media jam Jam in vertical Inspect vertical Clear jam

between pick modules and transport transport
SNT Misaligned belts Inspect SNT and Pick Re‐seat belts
Damaged belts Inspect SNT and Pick Replace SNT / Pick
Media detected at HETS 70 Poor cassette loading Inspect cassette Re‐load cassette

sensor at wrong time contents
Foreign object in SNT Inspect SNT / Pick Remove foreign
/ Pick object
Media detected at width Poor cassette loading Inspect cassette Remove foreign
sensor at wrong time contents object
Foreign object in SNT Inspect SNT / Pick Clear jam
/ Pick
HETS calibration out with N/A Wrong media loaded Inspect cassette Replenish cassette
acceptable range contents
Wrong singularity Confirm correct Configure singularity
configured singularity in SysApp
Faulty HETs sensor Run SysApp Replace SNT
diagnostic test
Stacker entry sensor is Sensor dirty Inspect sensor Clean sensor
dirty
Divert bin entry sensor is
dirty
Width sensor is dirty
HETS sensor is dirty
SNT tamper N/A N/A N/A

Presenter
Module ID 20

Interlock disconnected 5 Device not fully racked Inspect device Rack device into
safe
into safe
Faulty interlock switch Run SysApp Replace presenter
diagnostic test
Faulty module rack Inspect module rack Replace module
rack
Presenter configuration 7 Presenter learn routine N/A Run learn hardware
unknown required in SysApp
Clamp sensor failed 8 Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace presenter
diagnostic test
Missing CIC target Inspect cassette CIC Replace cassette
target location
Faulty CIC target Run SysApp Replace cassette
diagnostic test
Faulty motor / harness Run SysApp Replace presenter
diagnostic test
Faulty carriage Inspect carriage Replace carriage
Purge entry sensor fail 8 Bin full Inspect bin Empty bin (all

compartments)
Foreign object over Inspect sensor Clear foreign object
sensor
Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace presenter
diagnostic test
Retract entry sensor fail 8 Bin full Inspect bin Empty bin (all
compartments)
Foreign object over Inspect sensor Clear foreign object
sensor
Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace presenter
diagnostic test
Module unlatched 8 Device not fully racked Inspect device Rack device into
into safe safe
Faulty interlock switch Run SysApp Replace presenter
diagnostic test
Faulty module rack Inspect module rack Replace module
rack
Clamp motor failed 9 Faulty motor / harness Run SysApp Replace presenter
diagnostic test
Faulty carriage Inspect carriage Replace carriage
Faulty clamp sensor Run SysApp Replace presenter

diagnostic test

Main motor failed 9 Faulty motor / harness Run SysApp Replace presenter

diagnostic test
Faulty SNT timing disk Inspect SNT Replace SNT
Faulty presenter Inspect presenter Replace presenter
Purge entry sensor is dirty N/A Sensor dirty Inspect sensor Clean sensor
Retract entry sensor is Sensor dirty Inspect sensor Clean sensor

dirty
Presenter tamper N/A N/A N/A
Exit Shutter
Module ID 21

2
I C communications fault 3 Check I2C connections Inspect harness Re‐plug harness
connections
Faulty I2C harness Inspect harness Replace I2C harness
Faulty shutter Run SysApp Replace Shutter

diagnostic test
No power to device Inspect power Replace power
harness harness
Shutter jam – open 44 Shutter jam Inspect shutter Clear jam
Shutter jam – closed
Shutter tamper N/A N/A

Suction Cups
Module ID 22

Suction cups on pick N/A Suction cups damaged Inspect suction cups Replace Suction cups
module 1 must be replaced / worn and check pick
soon counter
Suction cups on pick
module 2 must be replaced
soon
soon
soon
soon
soon
Media Aligner
Module ID 23

Media Aligner sensor fail 31 Jam in carriage Inspect carriage Clear jam

carriage
Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace Media
diagnostic test Aligner
Faulty motor / harness Run SysApp Replace Media
diagnostic test
Media Aligner motor fail 51 Jam in carriage Inspect carriage Clear jam

carriage
diagnostic test
Faulty motor / harness Run SysApp Replace Media

Vacuum System
Module ID 24

Vacuum sensor fault 32 Faulty harness / Run SysApp Replace presenter
sensor diagnostic test core or main PCB.
Vacuum system fail 52 Faulty vacuum pipe Replace presenter or
work pneumatic tubing or
equal T connector or
90 degree vacuum
connector or air
filter.
Vacuum system failing N/A Faulty vacuum pipe Replace presenter or
work pneumatic tubing or
equal T connector or
90 degree vacuum
connector or air
filter.
Faulty vacuum pump Replace motor and
pump assembly.
Serial Number Read
Module ID 25

USB Serial Number too N/A Build up of dirt on Inspect SNR Camera Clean SNR Camera
many invalid characters SNR
USB Serial Number too N/A
many invalid serial
numbers
USB Serial Number reader N/A N/A
de‐configured
Communication failure to 95 Communications Check comms Reconnect comms or
SNR device connection to SNR connections to SNR repair cable
board disconnected board on pick
module
USB Serial Number Reader 95 Control board failure Replace SNR device
control board failure
USB Serial Number Reader 95 Fixed guide flex circuit Check flex circuit Reconnect flex
fixed guide camera failure not connected. Faulty connection at fixed circuit. Replace pick
(top CIS) camera or control guide and at control module if necessary.
board. board
USB Serial Number Reader 95 Moving guide flex Check flex circuit
moving guide camera circuit not connected. connection at moving
failure (bottom CIS) Faulty camera or guide and at control
control board. board

Troubleshooting Procedures
Additional troubleshooting checks and resolutions for carriage errors (M_STATUS 22, 42,
43 or 62).
Carriage Alignment
Incorrect alignment can be indicated by carriage drive motor failures (M_STATUS 42),
carriage jams (M_STATUS 62) and presenter clamp jams (M_STATUS 43).
 Delivery failures may also occur due to carriage not being correctly positioned in the
present position.
 Check that the carriage tie bar is parallel to the dispenser nose. Anything more than
2mm deviation when the tie bar is level with the dispenser nose is not parallel. If not,
remove and re‐insert the carriage, referring to ‘FRU Module Removal and
Replacement’ section. While the carriage is removed, carry out the checks listed in
section ‘Checks with Carriage Removed from Presenter’.
Carriage Motor Cover
An incorrectly fitted or missing motor cover can be indicated by carriage jams between
park and present (M_STATUS 42, Byte 3 0A).
 Check that the motor cover does not collide with the presenter nose.

 Ensure that the cover is snapped into place around all the edges and that the screws
are fitted.
Carriage Umbilical Cable
A damaged or incorrectly fitting umbilical in the carriage will be indicated by carriage
motor failures (M_STATUS 42) or carriage sensor failures (M_STATUS 22).
 Check for damage to the umbilical, replace if necessary.

 Check that the umbilical is fitted correctly in the connectors in the presenter and in
the carriage. Also check that it is fitted into the correct connector in the carriage.
Front access connector Rear access connector
Carriage Plates Parallel When Open
Incorrect carriage plate opening can be indicated by presenter clamp jams (M_STATUS
43).
 Check that the front edge of the lower carriage plate is parallel to the upper plate
when the carriage opens. Use the ‘Clamp (with Carriage at Home Position)’ diagnostic
test and observe the movement. The lower plate should not be more than 20mm
from parallel with upper plate.
 If it does not open evenly, carry out the following checks:
 Is the carriage aligned correctly? ‐ see Carriage Alignment in this section.

 Are the carriage magnets configured correctly? Re‐configure them if possible, or
replace the carriage is magnets are missing.
Closed cam
(driven) side
Open cam
(non-driven)
side
If the carriage still does not open evenly following the above checks, remove the carriage
from the presenter ‐ refer to ‘Removing the Carriage’ in the FRU Removal and
Replacement section ‐ and follow the instructions in section ‘Checks with Carriage
Removed from Presenter’.
Carriage Movement
Problems with the movement of the carriage can be indicated by carriage jam
(M_STATUS 42).
 Slowly move the carriage manually along the full length of the presenter track in both
directions. Check that the carriage runs smoothly along the track and does not collide
with any components. Remove any obstructions.
 Check that the carriage is aligned correctly ‐ refer to ‘Carriage Alignment’ in this
section.
 Ensure that the Single Note Transport is fitted correctly and that all three mounting
screws are tightened to prevent the carriage colliding with the SNT. Refer to
‘Replacing the SNT’ in the FRU Removal and Replacement section.
If the carriage still does not move smoothly following the above checks, remove the
carriage ‐ refer to ‘Removing the Carriage’ in the FRU Removal and Replacement section
‐ and then follow the instructions in section ‘Checks with Carriage Removed from
Presenter’

Checks with Carriage Removed from Presenter
 Are there any damaged or dislocated links or arms on the carriage? If so, replace the
carriage.
 Is there any damage on the lower link mount? If so, replace it (part number 445‐
0757100 ‘service assy ‐ lower linkage mount with carriage lower linkage’).

 Are there any loose, damaged or missing screws in the lower plate shaft? Replace any
missing screws (check none have fallen into the carriage). Tighten screws to 0.45 Nm.
 Rotate the green thumbwheel to check that all the belts on both the upper and lower
plate rotate. If they do not, check that the carriage belt drive shafts and pulleys are all
in place and are not damaged. Replace any damaged components if possible, or the
carriage.
UPPER PLATE LOWER PLATE
Pulley
Belts Belts
Pulley and drive

shafts

DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
The Control Board LEDs are not used for diagnostics.
There are no switches on the Control Board.
Level 1 Diagnostics
Test Description
MENU This displays a menu of the all the other Applets to allow the user to select
one.
CLEAR Performs the default Clear operation.
CLEAR TO RETRACT Performs a Clear operation with the destination set to Retract area.
AREA
SET NOTES Allows the user to set the number of bills to be picked from each cassette.
Only prompts for configured cassettes. If the total number of bills exceeds
the currently configured maximum the command fails. A default of 5 bills for
each configured and present cassette is used if no number is entered
STACK Performs a Stack of the bills configured via Set Notes (above).
PRESENT Performs a Present of bills previously stacked.
DISPENSE Performs Stack and Present operations consecutively. The number of bills
picked is configured via Set Notes.
LEARN NOTE Performs a Learn Measurements operation for the specified cassette type.
PARAMETERS (Only configured cassettes are offered for selection). 40 bills are picked and
the parameters measured, with the new and existing parameters being
returned in T_DATA.
SINGLE NOTE Performs the SNT Diagnostic test
TRANSPORT
SELF TEST Performs a Self Test operation. Menus are displayed to allow the destination
to be selected and which pick units to pick from. The shutter is then
operated if requested.
SHUTTER The Shutter Diagnostic test is performed.
SENSOR/SWITCH A Read Sensors Diagnostic test for all sensors is performed. The following
STATUS options are offered:
Normal reading with LEDs on
A/D reading of sensors in the on state
A/D blocked threshold values
CARRIAGE The Carriage Diagnostic test is performed.
GUIDANCE LIGHTS This test enables the various LED states / configurations to be exercised via
Set Guidance Light commands. Menus are provided to allow LED and flash
rates to be selected.
CLAMP The Clamp Diagnostic test is performed. The following options are offered:
Clamp test with carriage at home
Clamp test with carriage in safe position

Test Description
PICK VALVE The Pick Valve Diagnostic test is performed for the selected pick unit.
PICK ARM The Pick Arm Diagnostic test is performed for the selected pick unit.
DIVERT GATE The Divert Gate Diagnostic test is performed.
MEDIA DEFLECTOR The Media Deflector Diagnostic test is performed.
PREPARE FOR The Prepare for shipment command is executed.
SHIPMENT
RUN TO RUN Performs the following sequence of tests:
Clear (not performed when looping)
Sensor / Switch Status (default operation)
Carriage
Self Test
Dispense
Clear
RUN TO RUN 2 Performs the following sequence of tests:
Clamp Test
Carriage Test
PERFORMANCE Offers a menu with the following options:
FRU Performance
Device Performance.
On selecting FRU Performance the following are displayed for each FRU:
Media Dispensed
Fatal Errors
Routine Errors
Media per Fatal Error
Media per Routine Error
On selecting Device Performance the following are displayed for the overall
device:
Media Dispensed
Fatal Errors
Routine Errors
Media per Fatal Error
Media per Routine Error
NOTE IMAGES If SNR hardware is present then all serial numbers, denominations and
images will be displayed for the notes picked from the prior Dispense, Stack
or SelfTest command.
The Stack, Present, Retract and Dispense tests are not offered unless the lowest cassette
has been removed and re‐inserted (after The Menu Applet, AppletId=0, has been
displayed). This also applies to the Dispense test on a Run to Run test, which is by‐passed
unless these conditions have been met.

Action Requests
This section describes the mechanism sequence following an action request (command)
during normal dispenser operation.
The action requests are:
 Clear
 Stack
 Present
 Retract
 Self Test
 Learn Measurement
 Set Guidance Lights
 Prepare Shipment
 Enable Stack ready
Clear
This causes the device to be cleared of any media which may have been left in the
transport.
The media is transported to the destination requested in the operation, or to the default
location if no destination is provided. Possible destinations are:
 Reject compartment in the purge bin (default)
 Retract compartment in the purge bin
 Present position
Media detected in the single note transport prior to the divert gate will be stacked
before being moved to the required destination.
Media detected in the divert transport path, will be transported to the divert
compartment.
If media has been delivered to the purge bin, the carriage will return to its idle position,
ready for the next operation.
If media has been delivered to the present position, the carriage will return to its idle
position once the media has been taken and the Media Taken event sent.

Stack
This causes the number of media items requested to be picked and stacked in the device
ready for presentation to the card holder.
Media which are to be rejected during the operation will be diverted from the main path
via the divert gate and transported to the divert bin. This is done on an individual basis
with good media remaining in the main transport until they reach the stack area.
If Pre‐Present is enabled, after a good stack, the media is clamped in the carriage and
moved to the pre‐present position in readiness for the next operation.
If Pre‐Present is disabled, after a good stack, the media will be left in the stack position to
allow subsequent stack operations to add media to the bundle.
Present
This causes the media which have been previously stacked in the carriage to be moved to
a position where the customer can remove them.
With the exit shutter closed the carriage is driven forward until it reaches the present
position, where it is stopped and the shutter opened. If this is successful the media is
driven forward to be taken by the customer.
When the bundle has been taken, the carriage is returned to its idle position and the
shutter closed.
If a fault occurs which stops the media from reaching the customer, an attempt is made
to clear the media to the reject bin.
Note: The present command may be issued when media is in the half retract position
having previously been retracted there.
Retract
This will cause the media to be drawn back into the carriage and the carriage driven to
the location specified.
The location can be one of the following:
 Retract compartment in the purge bin
 Reject compartment in the purge bin
 Half retract position, if enabled
If media is retracted to the purge bin, the carriage will return to the idle position in
preparation for the next operation.
If media is retracted to the half retract position, the carriage will remain there until a
subsequent present or clear request is invoked.
If no media is detected by the carriage sensors, the carriage will return to the idle
position in preparation for the next operation.

Self Test
The test starts with the carriage in the home position. If it is not in the home position, the
carriage will move to the home position before proceeding.
The following mechanisms are exercised:
 Divert gate
 Pick arms of any pick units not involved in the picking operation
 Pick valve test
 Clamp test if no items are requested from any pick unit
 Carriage diagnostic test
 Shutter, if requested (Shutter is always requested in diagnostics).
 Single Note Transport if no items are requested from any pick unit
 Media deflector test if no items are requested from any pick unit (Items are always
requested in diagnostics).
Any requested media is picked and stacked.
If a bad item is detected, it is diverted by the divert gate to the divert bin and the pick
operation is retried.
The media destination can be either:
 Retract compartment
 Reject compartment
 Half retract position, if enabled
 Present position
 Divert compartment
If media destination is set to Divert, all items (good and bad) will be diverted by the
divert gate to the divert bin. Otherwise they will be stacked and the carriage will be
closed and driven to the media destination.
The carriage will then return to the idle position in preparation for the next stack
request.
Learn Measurement
This allows the software to learn the values of the widths and singularities of media at a
specified position.
Media will be picked and transported to the stacker before being transported to the
location specified by the destination attribute.
Refer to the section Currency Evaluation and Qualification Procedure for details of the
procedure.

Set Guidance Lights
There is a red, amber and green status LED that can be individually set to off, on solid or
flashing. This request allows the state of the individual status LEDs to be set.
If the ‘Enable Default Lights’ device setting is set, the command is not performed and the
default LED signalling is performed.
Prepare for Shipment
This request prepares the dispenser hardware for shipment.
The following steps are taken:
 All pick arms are moved to a suitable angle for shipment
 The carriage is moved away from home
 The clamp cam is moved to its shipping position
 The carriage is moved back to home
On the next operation which attempts to open the clamp (e.g. clear), the carriage will be
moved off home and the cam returned to the normal present position, to allow the
clamp to be opened.
Enable Stack Ready
This will enable the dispenser hardware for a stack command.
The following steps are taken when enabling stack ready:
 Move carriage to home position
 Open clamp
The command can also be used to cancel the enable stack ready request.
The following steps are taken when cancelling:
 Close clamp
 Return to idle position
Calibrate Sensors
This will re‐calibrate sensors when an Field Replacement Unit (FRU) has been replaced.
As the actual readings of the sensors are used to calibrate, the device must be clear of
media.

Diagnostics Tests
This section describes all the diagnostic tests that can be used to exercise different
components of the dispenser.
The tests are:
 Pick Arm
 Pick Valve
 Shutter
 Divert Gate
 SNT
 Carriage
 Clamp
 Media Deflector
 Read Sensors
Pick Arm Test
Tests the pick arm operation for the specified pick unit.
The test is performed by moving the pick arm through a complete cycle, determined by
the current pick profile, and measuring its position via its CIC sensor. The pick arm is
moved at the same speed as it is moved during a real pick cycle.
The 5 phases of the pick cycle are:
 Move to initial home position
 Move to each of the 4 positions (finishing at home)
The CIC sensor reading and Pick Arm position in degrees are reported for each phase in
the resulting event.
Cassettes do not need to be removed to perform this test.

Pick Valve Test
Pump
Vacuum
Sensor
Pick
Valves Presenter
Pick Lines Filter Zone
Test point
Downstream Upstream
Zone Zone
This will test for leaks and faulty parts in the vacuum system.
During the test, the dispenser interlock must be in the override position; cassettes can
remain in the dispenser.
First check the presenter zone:
1. Disconnecting the tubing just below the filter and seal the opening in the filter
assembly with your finger. Make sure no dust from the filter falls down into the
tubing.
2. In the test menu, select First Pick Module, then Test pressure ‐ pick arm away from
media, and run the test.
3. The following results will indicate a leak in the presenter zone:
 Either the Closed Running Result or the Closed Static Result is 1.
 The Closed Running Result and the Closed Static Result are both 0, but the Closed
Running Pressure is above 75% of the Local Atmospheric Pressure.
 The difference between the Closed Static Pressure and the Closed Running
Pressure is more than 100.
If a leak in the presenter zone is detected, replace the motor and pump assembly.
4. The following results will indicate an electronics fault that will require a replacement
of the presenter or main control board:
 There is no difference between the local atmospheric pressure reading and the
closed running pressure reading, but there is suction detected at the filter.

 After running the same test again, there is variation in the local atmospheric
pressure readings.
If there are no issues with the presenter zone, reconnect the hose to the filter and check
for leaks in the upstream zone:
1. In the test menu, select First Pick Module, then Test pressure ‐ pick arm away from
media, and run the test.
2. The following results will indicate a leak in the upstream zone:
 Either the Closed Running Result or the Closed Static Result is 1.
 Both the Closed Running Result and the Closed Static Result are 0, but the Closed
Running Pressure is above 75% of the Local Atmospheric Pressure.
 The difference between the Closed Static Pressure and the Closed Running
Pressure is more than 100.
3. If a leak in the upstream zone is detected, it can be isolated by disconnecting the
tubing at each pick valve in turn, starting at the lowest point, and seal the end of the
tubing with your finger. Then re‐run the test for that pick valve.
4. The following results will indicate a leak in the upstream zone:
 If the Closed Running Result and the Closed Static Result are both 0 and the
difference between the Closed Static Pressure and Closed Running Pressure is less
than 100, the location of the leak has been found. Replace the damaged hose and
re‐run the test.
If there are no issues with the upstream zone, reconnect all hoses and check for leaks in
the downstream zone:
1. Place a very good quality note in the cassette so that the suction cups will seal against
it during the test.
2. In the test menu, select the pick line and then Test pressure ‐ pick arm in contact with
media.
3. After running the test, if either the Open Valve Result is 0 or the Open Valve Result is 1
but the difference between Open Valve Pressure and Closed Static Pressure more
than 300, there is a leak in the downstream zone between the pick valve and the
media.
Either, re‐seat suction cups, replace suction cups or replace pick module FRU.

Pick Valve Test Results
Value Description
Local Atmospheric Local Atmospheric Pressure (mbar).
Pressure
Closed Running Result 0 = Base pressure reached
1 = Base pressure not reached
Closed Running Time Time (ms) to reach Closed Running Pressure in milliseconds
Closed Running Base pressure (mbar) or lowest pressure reached. Base pressure is the point at
Pressure which the rate of change in pressure has not fallen for 200 ms.
Closed Static Result 0 = Vacuum retained
1 = Vacuum leaked, reached local atmospheric pressure.
Closed Static Time Time (ms) to reach Closed Static Pressure with all valves closed, motor and pump
stopped.
Closed Static Pressure Pressure (mbar) reached during Closed Static Time.
Open Valve Result 0 = Vacuum leaked, reached local atmospheric pressure
1 = Vacuum retained
Open Valve Time Time (ms) to reach Open Valve Pressure with selected valve open and all other
valves closed, motor and pump stopped.
Open Valve Pressure Pressure reached during Open Valve Time with selected valve open and all other
valves closed, motor and pump stopped.
Shutter Test
This tests the shutter hardware operation by driving it to both open and closed positions.
The initial state for the shutter is the closed position, so an attempt will be made to put
the shutter into its initial state prior to test start.
The test is performed by driving the shutter in the open direction, measuring the length
of time taken to move between closed and open; the shutter position sensors are then
read and verified in this position. After a two second delay the shutter is driven in the
close direction, measuring the length of time taken to move, and the position sensors
again read and verified.
Divert Gate Test
This test verifies the divert gate operation.
The test is performed by driving the divert gate to the divert position, measuring the
length of time taken to move between stack and divert. The divert gate position sensor is
then read and verified in this position. After a two second delay the divert gate is allowed
to return to the stack position, measuring the length of time taken to move, and the
position sensor is again read and verified.

SNT Test
This test verifies the operation of the SNT. The motor is driven in normal operating
direction only.
The test is performed by measuring the number of timing disk and D‐Wheel interrupts
over a 2 second period. The transport speed is stabilised by running it up to speed for an
initial period of 2 seconds before the measurement starts.
If the observed number of interrupts is outwith the expected by more than ± 1, the test
will fail.
Carriage Test
This test verifies the operation of the carriage for diagnostic purposes. It tests the
carriage movement to different locations, records flag opacity and on‐board sensors at
each, and tests the carriage belt drive motor.
It is recommended that the test only be performed when there is no media in the
carriage, as it will not be managed appropriately.
When the request is received, the carriage and clamp cam will be driven accordingly to
set the carriage in the home position with clamp closed in preparation for the test to
begin.
The test is performed by driving the carriage from the HOME to PRESENT, then to RFP,
then to REJECT positions at normal operating speed, coming to rest momentarily at each
location. The time taken to move between positions, the opacity of the flag and the on‐
board sensors values are measured at each location.
At each of PRESENT, RFP and PURGE positions, the carriage belt drive motor can be
enabled in one of the following ways, by changing the Command Data:
 No belt drive
 Full Belt Drive Test – at a slow speed for 2 seconds in each direction and repeated at
a fast speed, counting the number of timing disk interrupts for each phase (default).
 Min Belt Drive Test – at a slow speed for 2 seconds in the reverse direction only,
counting the number of timing disk interrupts
There will be 3 carriage diagnostic events as a result of sending this request, one for each
phase of the test.
At the end of the test, the carriage will be returned to its HOME position, in readiness for
the next operation.

Clamp Test
This test verifies the operation of the clamp. The clamp mechanism consists of:
 Carriage
 Cam, stepper motor and CIC sensor,
 Media Aligner, stepper motor and CIC sensor.
The Clamp open operation consists of:
 Retract the Media Deflector
 Retract the Media Aligner to its home position and verify via its CIC sensor.
 Drive the Cam to its open position and verify via its CIC sensor.
 Drive the Media Aligner to its extended position and verify via its CIC sensor.
This Clamp close operation consists of:
 Retract the Media Deflector
 Retract the Media Aligner to its home position and verify via its CIC sensor.
 Drive the Cam to its closed position and verify via its CIC sensor.
The test can be performed as described in the following sections.
Default Clamp Test
The default test is performed with the carriage at the HOME position. The carriage will be
moved automatically to this position if it is not already there.
The clamp is closed, opened and closed again. Each stage of the operation is verified via
the CIC sensors.
Without carriage at home
This test operates the clamp in the same manner as the default test, but does not require
the carriage at the HOME position. It does not verify the operation of the lower carriage
plate. It does not exercise the BAM.
The carriage will be moved automatically out of the way before the test is started if
necessary. The carriage is not returned to HOME at the end of this test to allow the test
to be looped.
Media Deflector Test
This test verifies the media deflector operation for diagnostic purposes.
The test is performed by driving the deflector to the extended position, measuring the
length of time taken to move between the home and extended positions. The media
deflector position sensor is then read and verified in this position. After a two second
delay the deflector is driven to the home position, measuring the length of time taken to
move, and the position sensor is again read and verified.

Read Sensors Test
This command reads the state of all sensors and switches on the dispenser.
Sensors can be read as follows:
 normally – with LEDs switched on
 following a sensor reset and a delay of 250 ms
 when the LEDs have been switched on for a short time then off
 the A/D sensor reading can be returned
 the A/D blocked threshold or PWM drive level
The reset operation will recalibrate the sensors to obtain the blocked threshold
regardless of the current threshold level.
Sensors Can be reset Can be Switched on/off

Pick sensors Yes Yes
Mainmotor timing disk sensor No Yes
Stack entry sensor Yes Yes
Single note divert entry sensor Yes Yes
Width measurement sensors Yes Yes
Deflector sensors No Yes
Carriage sensors Yes No
Purge and RFP entry sensors Yes No
Diver gate position sensor Yes No
The sensors can be reported in individual groups as specified in the sensor group
attribute or all groups reported. On receipt of this request the sensors are read by the
software, then the event for an individual group is (or events for each group are) sent.
The events returned in response to sensor requests are detailed in section 13.7.6.
In the case of the A/D blocked threshold or PWM drive level operation, some sensors
have a fixed threshold with variable PWM LED drive. For these sensors, the PWM LED
drive level is reported. These sensors are:
 Pick Sensors
 Stack entry sensor
 Single note divert entry sensor
 Width measurement sensors
In this case the Carriage position sensor will report the threshold value which is the
upper limit of the sensor clear state. The other thresholds for this sensor are constant in
the firmware and cannot be read.
Note: The Read Sensors request is provided for diagnostic purposes only and should not
be used during a transaction to determine status. The status of the device is determined
by issuing a Get Information request.

Error Codes
M_Status and M_Data
To de‐code the data use the Status Code Translator Tool (available from
www.infoprod.ncr.com) or refer to Diagnostic Status Code Notebook (B006‐6273).
Tallies
Tally Description
PICKED 1 Number of items successfully picked from pick position 1.
PKATMPT1 Number of times a pick attempt failed from pick position 1.
PKFAIL 1 Number of times a pick fail occurred from pick position 1.
SIZEERR1 Number of times an item of media was rejected because a size error was
detected from pick position 1.
DOUBLE 1 Number of times a double was detected and rejected from pick position 1.

Tally Description
REJECT 1 Total number of items picked and rejected from pick position 1.
STACKOPS Total number of stack operations attempted including stacks as part of
self test and learn measurements operations.
PRESENTS Total number of present operations attempted.
RETRACTS Total number of retract operations attempted.
CLEAROPS Total number of clear operations attempted.
CAR OPS Total number of carriage operations attempted.
CAR FAIL Total number of times carriage failed to reach desired position.
BELT OPS Total number of carriage belt operations attempted.
BELTFAIL Total number of failed carriage belt operations.
CAM OPS Total number of CAM operations (lower, raise, rotate).
CAM FAIL Total number of failed CAM operations.
SHUT OPS Total number of shutter operations attempted.
SHUTFAIL Number of times a shutter fault has been detected.
COMM TRY Number of communications attempts between the core driver and the
device.
COMM RTR Number of communication attempts which required a retry before
succeeding.
COMMFAIL Number of communications attempts which failed after retries were
exhausted.
SER READ Number of Serial Numbers Scan Operations
INVNOTES Number of Invalid Notes Scanned
SERCHARS Number of Serial Number Read Characters
INVCHARS Number of Invalid Characters
STRAPPING
There are no strapping or DIP switches on this device.

ADJUSTMENTS
Pick Module Timing Procedure
4–High Dispenser
1. Place the upper double pick module on the pick support frame and close the two
latches securing the module to the presenter core.
2. Move the top timing gear to the number 1 position. This will align the lower timing
gear to the number 2 position as shown below.
3. Place the lower double pick module on the pick support frame.
4. Hang the lower double pick module from the upper module without closing the two
latches.
5. On the lower double pick module, move the top timing gear to the number 3
position. This will align the lower timing gear to the number 4 position.
6. Make sure the four timing gears are correctly aligned from top to bottom (1, 2, 3, 4).
Upper Double Pick Module
Lower Double Pick Module

7. Close the two latches securing the lower double pick module to the upper double
pick module.
5–High Dispenser
1. Follow steps 1 to 5 of the Pick Module Timing Procedure for 4–High Dispenser.
2. Place the single pick module on the pick support frame.
3. Hang the single pick module from the lower double pick module without closing the
two latches.

4. Make sure the five timing gears are correctly aligned from top to bottom (1, 2, 3, 4, 5).
Single Pick Module
pick module.
6. Close the two latches securing the single pick module to the lower double pick
module.

6–High Dispenser
1. Follow steps 1 to 5 of the Pick Module Timing Procedure for 4–High Dispenser.
2. Place a third double pick module on the pick support frame.
3. Hang the double pick module from the lower double pick module without closing the
two latches.

4. Make sure the six timing gears are correctly aligned from top to bottom (1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
6).
Third Double Pick Module
pick module.

6. Close the two latches securing the third double pick module to the lower double pick
module.
Cleaning Serial Number Read Transport Cameras
If SNR is fitted, the SNR transport cameras mounted on the fixed guide and on the
moving guide should be cleaned as part of regular preventive maintenance, especially in
dusty environments. Cleaning will also be required to clear the states of health ‘USB
serial number read too many invalid characters’ or ‘USB serial number read too many
invalid serial numbers’ which are triggered when the number of invalid characters or
invalid serial numbers read reaches the configured thresholds (default 10% and 5%
respectively).
Clean the cameras using compressed air or a soft thin brush or cotton bud. Ingrained
grime can be removed using a lint free cloth moistened with soapy water or an alcohol
free wipe.

JAM CLEARANCE
Refer to the NCR S2 Dispenser Operator Guide (B006‐6889) for jam clearance of the pick
module, SNT, carriage and shutter.
CAUTION
Do not move the carriage while it is in the open (stack) position.
How to move the Carriage to the Closed position
1. Remove the purge bin from the dispenser.
2. From inside the purge bin space, manually retract the BAM.
Media Deflector Fingers

retract position
BAM
retract position
3. Manually retract the Media Deflector Fingers on the SNT.
4. Manually move the primary cam wheel clockwise to the CLOSED position.
CL
OS
PEN
ED
OPEN CLOSED O
OPEN Position CLOSED Position

HETS CALIBRATION
Note: Dispensers are shipped pre‐calibrated by the manufacturing plant and are self‐
calibrating on an ongoing basis.
The dispenser maintains an internal compensation factor in NVRAM on the main control
board. This compensation factor allows for differences that exist between the
singularities calculated by different HETS assemblies due to mechanical tolerances.
The dispenser adjusts the HETS compensation factor automatically as bills of a known
singularity value are dispensed. While bills are dispensed, the average of good single bill
singularities is measured over 50 bills. This average is compared to the singularity figure
typed in at installation time and the compensation factor is adjusted accordingly. Initially
the compensation factor is set to 80H (equivalent to 1.00) and this is changed
automatically by the dispenser and updated every 50 bills.
Dispensers will only be calibrated correctly if the correct width and singularity for each
type of currency being dispensed has been entered as described in the Setting Note
Parameters section.
SETTING NOTE PARAMETERS
Each currency type being dispensed has a specific width and singularity value that must
be entered in to every ATM dispensing that currency. This applies to initial installation or
whenever the main control board has been changed. The local Professional Services
organisation will provide values for new and existing currencies.
1. Select Self‐Service Configuration option from the Supervisor menu.
2. Select Set Device Configuration option.
3. Select USB Media Dispenser option.
4. Select Note Configuration option.
5. Select SET option.

6. The system will then display the Note Configuration set up menu shown below. The
menu is spread over multiple pages which is navigated using page up and page down
options.
7. Enter Note Widths for all Types.
8. Enter Singularities for all Types.
9. To accept all the changes made select OK.
10. The system will display the menu shown below.
To finally confirm the changes, select the ‘Toggle’ side tab to change the NO option to YES
and then select ‘OK’.

detected, the error message is shown.
Possible error messages:
 ‘Invalid Size: Valid Range 54‐85’ ‐ Width is outside the permissible range
 ‘Invalid Singularity: Valid Range 0‐254’ ‐ Singularity is outside the permissible range
After five seconds the error message is replaced by the Note Configuration screen,
allowing a valid value to be entered.

CURRENCY EVALUATION QUALIFICATION PROCEDURE
Note: The currency width and singularity values previously calculated for the S1
Dispenser are valid for the S2 Dispenser.
The local Professional Services organization must establish the width and singularity
values for each type of currency to be dispensed. The currency evaluation qualification
procedure should only be performed on a calibrated dispenser. Attempting the
procedure on an un‐calibrated dispenser will give incorrect results.
To ensure a dispenser is calibrated, at least 50 bills of a known width and singularity must
be successfully dispensed. These bills may be local currency or test media.
Establishing Singularity and Width
In this procedure you have to cause the ATM to calculate the singularity and width of 40
dispensed bills five times for each currency you wish to evaluate. Due to the nature of
the currency the singularity calculated may vary for each attempt. Add the five figures
shown in the Parameters Option and take the average (divide by five and round to the
nearest whole number) and the answers are the singularity and width values you enter
to the ATM and to all ATMs using the same currency.
To achieve a good singularity figure, the currency loaded for this procedure should
right way up and upside down (see the following illustration). This allows for the
variations in inking.

dispensing from the ATMs. Refer to the S2 Currency Cassette chapter in the Dispense
section of this manual for the method of adjusting cassettes to currency size.
2. Load at least 200 bills of each denomination of the currency into the cassettes.
3. Insert the cassettes into the dispenser.
5. From the ATM opening menu, select System Application > Self‐Service Configuration >
Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser > Note Configuration.
6. The system will display the following message:
Clearing Dispenser Transport. Please Wait
7. Select Learn option.
8. The system will display the Note Configuration menu showing the types available as
shown below.
Note: The menus only show the cassette types present in the ATM.

9. There is the option to select each single type in turn, or select All Types.
10. Select Type 1 or All Types.
11. The system will perform the test and display the message:
Learning Cassette Type 1. Please Wait.
If All Types was selected, a message for each type will be displayed.
12. Select Learn.
13. Select Parameters.
14. The system will return to the Note Configuration menu.
15. Record the singularity and width figures for the cassette and type selected or all
cassette types if applicable.
16. Select Cancel to return to the Note Configuration screen.
18. If you selected an single type, repeat steps 11 to 21 until you have five readings of
singularity and width for each cassette type loaded.
singularity and width for each cassette type.
20. Select the Set option from the Note Configuration menu
21. Modify as appropriate using the average singularity and width figures obtained in
step 23.
22. To accept all the changes made, select OK.
23. The system will display the Note Configuration menu.
24. To finally confirm the changes, select the Toggle side tab to change the NO option to
YES and then select OK.
25. Select OK to return to the System Application Main menu.
The procedure is now complete. From the Utilities menu you can now enter level 1
note pusher.
A reject rate less than 1.5% must be achieved when dispensing an average of 2.5 bills per
transaction. If the reject rate is greater than this, the singularity and width values should
be recalculated.

The reject rate is calculated using the following formula.
Reject Rate = X 100%
The numbers for rejected bills and total bills picked are taken from tallies. Take a note of
the tallies current values before starting and use the difference, before and after, in the
calculations. There are different tallies for each Pick/cassette.
Error Messages
Any fatal error messages will need to be cleared in the normal manner.

Motor & Pump
Assembly
Carriage Single Note Transport
(SNT)
Carriage Umbilical
Harness
Nose
Bill Aligner Module

(BAM)
Presenter
Core
Double Pick Module
Main Control Board

Pick Support Frame
Single Pick Module

Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
 Carriage Umbilical Harness (front access or rear access)
 Carriage (front access or rear access)
 Nose (including nose, tracks, purge and present flags)
 Motor and Pump Assembly
 Double Pick Module
 Single Pick Module
 Main Control Board
 5/6 Hi Expansion Board
 Pick Support Frame
 Presenter Core
 Presenter Assembly (front access or rear access),
If replacing the entire dispenser, follow the instructions to remove the pick modules then
the presenter assembly.

Tools:
 Long magnetised #2 pozidrive screwdriver
 Spring hook (603‐9000063)
Note: Throughout these FRU removal and replacement procedures make sure that all
connectors are replaced securely and harnesses are routed correctly and neatly. Replace
and make good all cable ties, check for fouling conditions and replace all cable
identification labels damaged or lost during servicing.
CAUTION
Do not use the dispenser nose to rack, lift or move the dispenser.
WARNING
Remove power from the dispenser before carrying out any of the
FRU removal and replacement procedures.

Carriage Umbilical Harness
CAUTION
Take care not to damage the carriage umbilical harness during the
removal and replacement procedure.
Removing the Carriage Umbilical Harness
1. Fully rack out the dispenser.
2. Release the carriage umbilical harness from the side track by gently pushing the white
latch towards the harness.
3. Unscrew and retain the two screws securing the carriage chassis cover.
Securing Screws
Chassis Cover
4. Remove and retain the carriage chassis cover.
5. Release the carriage umbilical harness from the carriage by gently pushing the white
latch towards the cable, while supporting the PCB with your other hand.

Replacing the Carriage Umbilical Harness
The procedure for replacing the carriage umbilical harness is the reverse of the removal
procedure.
Check that the replacement harness is undamaged before using it.
Be sure to fit the replacement harness to the correct connector and to fit it securely in
the connector.
CAUTION
Check the umbilical harness has enough clearance as the carriage
moves along the track.

Carriage
CAUTION
Take care not to damage the carriage umbilical cable during the
removal and replacement procedure.
Removing the Carriage
2. Release the carriage umbilical cable by gently pushing the latch towards the cable.
3. Remove and retain the two screws securing the tie bar, then remove and retain the
tie bar.
4. Move the carriage to the end of the presenter and lift the carriage clear of the
dispenser.

5. If the carriage is to be shipped with the presenter frame, use two cable ties to secure
the carriage to the sides of the presenter frame.
Replacing the Carriage
Before fitting the new carriage, check that:
 there is no damage or cracks on the carriage lower link mount or the links and arms.
 the carriage lower plate shaft screws are correctly fitted and undamaged.
 all carriage belt rotate and the belt drive shafts and pulleys are in place and are
undamaged.
UPPER PLATE LOWER PLATE
Pulley
or hyperlink
Belts Belts
Pulley and drive

shafts
1. Insert the carriage into the end of the presenter.
Note: Make sure the carriage is aligned correctly and all four gearwheels are
engaged in the tracks.
2. Replace the tie bar and secure with two screws.
3. Make sure gearwheels are correctly positioned on the tracks by checking that the rear
of the carriage is parallel with the tie bar.

4. Push the carriage chassis towards the presenter tracks at the point shown below to
assist with correct alignment of the carriage.
5. Insert the carriage umbilical cable into the zero insertion force connector. Gently
pushing the latch away from the cable to engage the connector. Check the cable is not
damaged and is securely fitted in the correct connector.
6. Check that:
 the carriage is correctly aligned in the presenter
 the carriage moves freely along the presenter tracks
 the carriage lower plate is level when opened
 the carriage magnets are correctly configured
 the carriage motor cover is fitted correctly.
See ‘Troubleshooting Procedures’ section for details on these checks.
7. In SysApp, select Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media
Dispenser > Carriage Replaced.
This will reset all the carriage variables and recalibrate the carriage sensors.
8. Dispense at least 50 notes to ensure the dispenser is calibrated.

Nose
Removing the Nose
2. If fitted, remove and discard the two screws that join the track segments together
(one on each side).
3. Remove and retain eight screws that fix the nose to the presenter core (four on each
side).
CAUTION
Take care not to dislodge the flags located along the inner track.

4. Ease the nose away from the side frame.
5. Remove and retain the nose.
Replacing the Nose
Note: This procedure is used when replacing a nose with one of the same length. If the
replacement nose is of a different length, after replacement use SysApp to force the
firmware to re‐learn the new hardware configuration by selecting Self‐Service
Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser > Presenter Replaced.
When replacing the nose, take care not to snag any cables.
1. Align the nose and presenter track segments.
2. Do not refit the two screws that joined the geared track segments together.
3. Fit the eight screws securing the nose to the presenter.

Bill Aligner Module (BAM)
Special tool: Spring hook.
Removing the BAM
2. If the carriage is obstructing access to the BAM and the primary cam is in the ‘OPEN’
position, go to the Jam Clearance section and follow the procedure for moving the
carriage to the ‘CLOSED’ position.
3. Remove the purge bin from the dispenser.
4. Gently move the carriage away from the BAM.
5. Use a spring hook to unhook the two edge register extension springs from the base of
the BAM. Make sure the springs remain attached to the edge register.

6. Remove and retain the BAM cantilever and securing screw.
7. Slide the edge register along about one inch, then turn the edge register slightly
clockwise to disengage it from the slots in the base of the BAM.
8. Remove the Edge Register from the dispenser.

9. Remove and retain the two screws (M4 Pozidriv) securing the BAM mounting to the
presenter frame.
10. Disconnect the BAM motor harness at the flex interface (J4).
11. Remove any cable ties securing the BAM CIC harness to the inside of the presenter.
12. Disconnect the BAM CIC harness at the connector on the side of the presenter.
13. Four lugs locate the BAM mounting base to the presenter framework. Move the base
slightly away from the SNT to clear the lugs and lift the base out of the dispenser.

Replacing the BAM
The procedure for replacing the BAM is the reverse of the removal procedure.
In SysApp, select Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media
Dispenser > Media Aligner Replaced.
This will reset all the BAM (Media Aligner) variables.
Single Note Transport (SNT)
The SNT can be removed with the Bill Aligner Module (BAM) in place.
The SNT FRU includes the SNT interface harness.
Removing the SNT
2. Remove the purge bin.
3. Three screws (M4 x 10 combi) secure the SNT to the presenter framework.
Move the divert skid plate slightly away from the SNT to allow access to the first
screw. Using a long magnetised #2 pozidrive screwdriver, remove SNT mounting

screw from the location shown below.
4. Now remove second SNT mounting screw from the location shown below. Access to
this screw is blocked by a drive‐belt. A second screwdriver can be used to gently move
the belt to one side while removing the screw.

5. Remove and retain the third screw from the location shown below.
6. Disconnect the SNT harness from the main control board at J3 and J4.
7. Release the SNT harness from the two cable clamps securing the harness to the side
of the outside of the presenter.
8. Guide the SNT harness through the hole in the side of the presenter framework as
you lift the SNT out of the dispenser.

Replacing the SNT
The procedure for replacing the SNT is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Note: There are four potential SNT mounting points, but only three are used. The three
locations are shown below and the screws should be refitted in the order shown.
3
1
In SysApp, select Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media
Dispenser > SNT/HETS Replaced.
This will reset the HETS variables and recalibrate the HETS sensors.
Dispense at least 50 notes to ensure the dispenser is calibrated.

Main Motor and Pump Assembly
Note: If the dispenser is a rear access variant with a short or medium length nose, the
whole dispenser will need to be removed from the ATM as the safe door will block
access.
Removing the Motor and Pump Assembly
2. Complete the SNT removal procedure before removing the pump motor assembly.
3. Disconnect the power cord at J5 on the main control board.
4. If not already done, disconnect the SNT harness at J3 and J4 on the main control
board.
5. Unscrew and retain the three screws securing the hand wheel.
6. Remove and retain the hand wheel.
CAUTION
Take care not to damage the vacuum sensor connector located on
the outside of the presenter.
7. Disconnect the vacuum tube at the junction shown below.
8. Remove and retain the three screws and three nuts securing the pump motor

assembly to the presenter framework.
9. Remove the pump motor assembly from the dispenser.
Replacing the Motor and Pump Assembly
The procedure for replacing the Pump Motor Assembly is the reverse of the removal
procedure.
Take care not to overtighten the plastite screws that secure the green hand wheel.
There is no torque requirement for the motor securing screws.
Replace the motor in the correct orientation.
When refitting the vacuum hose at the Y junction, make sure the hose is fully inserted.

Double Pick Module
The pick module assembly includes the pick module harness.
CAUTION
The pick module assembly must be carried by the base plate and/or
the upper tie bar.
Note: This procedure is used when replacing a double pick module. If the number of pick
modules in the dispenser is changed, use SysApp to force the firmware to re‐learn the new
count by selecting Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media
Dispenser > Pick Units Added/Removed. This will prompt a reboot.
Calibrate each Pick Module by running 50 notes.
Removing the Double Pick Module Assembly
2. Remove all currency cassettes from the dispenser.
3. Disconnect the two upper and two lower pick module cables from the main control
board.

4. If serial number read (SNR) is fitted, disconnect the power and USB harness from the
SNR board located on the side of the pick module.
5. Disconnect the vacuum tubing at the four pick valves shown below. This can be done
by pushing the ring fully home, then pulling the tube out of the valve.

6. If the dispenser is configured with two double pick modules, unlatch and lower the
lower pick module.
7. Unlatch the top pick module from the presenter core.
8. Lift the top pick module off the pick support frame and clear of the dispenser.
9. If you need to remove the lower pick module, lift the lower pick module off the pick

support frame and clear of the dispenser.
Replacing the Double Pick Module Assembly
The procedure for replacing the Pick Module Assemblies is the reverse of the removal
procedure.
Dispenser > Pick Units Replacement Menu.
2. Select the appropriate pick unit from the list. This will reset the pick unit variables and
recalibrate the pick unit sensor.
3. Calibrate the Pick Module by running 50 notes.

Single Pick Module
Removing the Single Pick Module Assembly
2. Remove all currency cassettes from the dispenser.
3. Disconnect the two single pick module cables from the 5/6 hi expansion board.
4. Disconnect the vacuum tubing at the pick valve. This can be done by pushing the ring
fully home, then pulling the tube out of the valve.
5. Unlatch and lift the single pick module off the pick support frame and clear of the
dispenser.

Replacing the Singe Pick Module Assembly
The procedure for replacing the Pick Module Assemblies is the reverse of the removal
procedure.
Dispenser > Pick Units Replacement Menu.
2. Select the appropriate pick unit from the list. This will reset the pick unit variables and
recalibrate the pick unit sensor.
3. Calibrate the Pick Module by running 50 notes.

Main Control Board
Removing the Main Control Board
2. Disconnect all harnesses from the Main Control Board.
3. Unscrew and retain the four screws securing the Main Control Board cover, then
remove the cover.
4. Unscrew and retain the five outer screws that secure the Main Control Board.
5. Unscrew and retain the last central screw that secures the Main Control Board.
6. Remove the Main Control Board from the dispenser.
Replacing the Main Control Board
The procedure for replacing the Main Control Board is the reverse of the removal
procedure.
Note: The note parameters for all currency types must be re‐entered after replacing the
main control board. Dispense at least 50 notes to ensure the dispenser is calibrated.
Removing the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board
2. Disconnect all harnesses from the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board.
3. Unscrew and retain the two screws securing the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board cover, then
remove the cover.
4. Unscrew and retain the four outer screws that secure the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board.
5. Remove the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board from the dispenser.
Replacing the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board
The procedure for replacing the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board is the reverse of the removal
procedure.

Pick Support Frame
Removing the Pick Support Frame
1. Remove the cash cassettes from the dispenser.
2. Remove the Double Pick Modules as described previously.
3. Disconnect the vacuum tube at the vacuum filter.
4. Remove the Main Control Board as described previously.
5. Remove the Pick Support Frame.
Replacing the Pick Support Frame
The procedure for replacing the Pick Support Frame is the reverse of the removal
procedure.

Presenter Core
Removing the Presenter Core
1. Remove the Carriage as described previously.
2. Remove the Single Note Transport (SNT).
3. Remove the Double Pick Modules as described previously.
4. Remove the Pick Support Frame as described previously.
5. Remove the IGUS chain bracket from the side of the presenter frame. The type of
bracket will vary, depending on the ATM.
6. Remove the Presenter Nose as described previously.
7. A temporary yellow lifting handle is attached to the frame of new Presenter Core.
Remove the lifting handle from the new core and attach it to the top of the core that
is still attached to the dispenser rails. This handle will be used to lift the core off the
rails.
8. Remove the four screws securing the Presenter Core to the dispenser rails (two each
side).

9. Move the end of the rails to the mid‐point of their travel. Using a marker pen, make a
mark on top of the rails to align with a suitable detail on the top of the presenter
frame. This will indicate if the rail ends have moved during lifting of the Presenter
Core.
10. Standing on one side of the presenter and hold the presenter by the two yellow lifting
points. Lift up the side of the presenter furthest away from you and free it from the
far‐side rail ‐ at the same time use your fingers to push the far‐side rail away from the
presenter.
11. Retract the far‐side rail inwards and clear of the presenter.
12. Make sure the near‐side rail has not moved and the marker is in the correct position.
13. Lift and free the near‐side of the presenter from the near‐side rail and remove the
presenter core from the ATM.

Replacing the Presenter Core
Replacing the Presenter Core is the reverse of the removal procedure.
When attaching the Presenter Core to the dispenser rails, use the following table to
select the correct dispenser rail ‘T’ lug position for your ATM.
Dispenser Rail ‘T’ Lug

Presenter Core
A B
Product Access Location

2012 Front A
Rear B
6622 Front or Rear B
6625 Rear A
6626 Rear A
6628 Front A
6632 Front A
Rear B
6634 Rear A
6637 and 6638 Front A
6642 Front A
Remove the temporary lifting handle from the old Presenter Core frame and re‐fit it to
the new replacement Presenter Core. After the new replacement Presenter Core is
attached to the dispenser rails, the lifting handle must be removed and re‐fitted to the
old Presenter Core for returning to the rework centre.
After the dispenser has been fully re‐assembled, use SysApp to force the firmware to re‐
learn the new hardware configuration.
Presenter Replaced.
The presenter variables will be reset and the presenter sensors recalibrated.
Dispense at least 50 notes to ensure the dispenser is calibrated.

Presenter Assembly
The Presenter Assembly includes the following:
 Presenter Core
 Carriage
 Motor and Pump Assembly
Removing the Presenter Assembly
1. Secure the carriage to the presenter frame using two cable ties.
2. Follow the ‘Remove the Nose’ instructions as described in the ‘Nose’ section.
3. Follow the ‘Remove the Presenter Core’ instructions (steps 3 to 13) as described in
the ‘Presenter Core’ section.
Replacing the Presenter Assembly
1. Follow the ‘Replacing the Presenter Core’ instructions as described in the ‘Presenter
Core’ section.
2. Follow the ‘Replacing the Nose’ instructions as described in the ‘Nose’ section.
3. After the dispenser has been fully assembled, remove the two cable ties securing the
carriage to the presenter frame.
Dispenser > Presenter Assembly Replaced.
This will force the firmware to re‐learn the new hardware configuration. The
presenter variables will be reset and the presenter sensors recalibrated. This will also
reset the HETS variables and recalibrate the HETS sensors, reset all the carriage
variables and recalibrate the carriage sensors, and reset all the Media Aligner (BAM)
variables.
5. Dispense at least 50 notes to ensure the dispenser is calibrated.

CABLING
Presenter Harness
Presenter CIC
24VDC
Interlock Switch
Purge Bin Interface Purge Bin

Switch
P1
Cam Motor
Purge Bin Latch Sensor

P2
Carriage Flex Interface Module Latch Sensor
Main Control Board
Vacuum Sensor
1 PURGE_BIN1_LED+ (white) 1
2 LED_RTN_1 (white) 2 Purge Bin Interface
3 PURGE_BIN1_SEN+ (white) 3 (P_BIN)
4 PURGE_BIN1_SEN (white) 4
5 PURGE_BIN2_LED+ (white) 5
7 PURGE_BIN2_SEN+ (white) 8
8 PURGE_BIN2_SEN (white) 6 1
(white) 7
24VDC Interlock Switch

GND_5
(Interlock_GND)
13 PURGE_BIN_PRESb (white)
Purge Bin Switch
(PB_Pres1 &
14 GND_4 (white) PB_Pes2)
P1
1 21
15 Module_LED (red)
Module Latch
2 22 16 Module_LED_RTD (black)
Sensor
17 Module_SEN+ (white)
(Module_Latch)
18 Module_SEN (green)
9 PBLATCH_SEN+ (white)
Purge Bin Latch
10 PBLATCH_SEN (green)
Sensor
11 PBLATCH_LED+ (red)
(PB_Latch)
12 PBLATCH_(GND_1) (black)
(white) Cam Motor

22 CAM_PHASE_1B 1
(CAM_Phase)
20 PA_PHASE_1A (white) 3
21 CAM_PHASE_2B (white) 4
19 PA_PHASE_2A (white) 6
1

Vacuum Sensor
1 5V 1 (Vac_Sen)
3 Vacuum Level 3
4 GND_1 4
1
24VDC Interlock Switch

5 NO
(Interlock)
Purge Bin Interface

6 GND_2 7 (P_BIN)
Presenter CIC
15 SIN_CAM 1
(Pre_CIC)
13 COIL_BIAS 2
11 COS_CAM 3
9 EXPREF_CAM 4
7 EX_PRES_1 5 1 2 3 45
P2 Carriage Position CIC

12 COS_CARPOS 1
1 31 (CAR_POS)
14 COIL BIAS 2
16 SIN_CARPOS 3
2 32 10 EXPREF_CARPOS 4
8 EX_PRES_2 5
1
17 LED_RTN 1
18 8V 2
19 CAR_TD_SEL0 3
20 CAR_TD_SEL1 4
21 CAR_TD_SEL4b 5 Carriage Flex Interface
22 CAR_SENSORS 6 (CAR_interface)
23 CAR_MOTOR_SEL0 7
1 15
24 CAR_TIMING_DISC 8
25 CAR_MOTOR_SEL1 9
26 24V 10 2 16
27 CAR_TYPE 11
28 GND_3 12
29 CAR_PHASE_2A 13
30 CAR_PHASE_2B 14
31 CAR_PHASE_1A 15
32 CAR_PHASE_1B 16

Interface Harness
J18 J2
J19 J1
Main Control Board 5/6 Hi Expansion Board
1 +24V 1
2 GROUND 2
3 SPII_MOSI 3
4 SPII_SCK 4
5 CIC2_SPII_CSB 5
6 RESET_CIC2 6
7 CIC2_MISO 7
8 RSTb 8
9 SDA 9
10 SCL 10
J19 11 OPEN_ALL_VALVES 11 J1
1 27 12 5TO6_PA_FLAG 12 1 27
13 5TO6_DW_FLAG 13
14 5TO6_FLAGI 14
2 28 2 28
15 CASSLATCHED5 15
16 CASSLATCHED6 16
17 CASSLOW_AMR5B 17
18 CASSLOW_AMR6B 18
19 PICKSEN5_RTN 19
20 PICKSEN6_RTN 20
21 VALVE_ON 21
22 ENABLE_LEDSb 22
23 ID_SEL0 23
24 ID_SEL1 24
25 ID_5TO6_SELB 25
26 PA_DW_SEL0 26
27 PA_DW_SEL1 27
28 PA_DW_5TO6_SELB 28
1 24V_RLY 1
2 PICK_MOTOR_5B 2
3 PICK_MOTOR_6B 3
4 GROUND 4
5 PA_PHASE_1A 5
6 PA_PHASE_1A 6
J18 J2
7 PA_PHASE_1B 7
1 11 8 PA_PHASE_1B 8 1 11
9 PA_PHASE_2A 9
2 12 10 PA_PHASE_2A 10 2 12
11 PA_PHASE_2B 11
12 PA_PHASE_2B 12

S2 Double Pick Module Harness
The first (upper) double pick module harness is illustrated below, other double pick
module harnesses are similar.
Pick2 Sensor Pick1 LED
Pick2 LED
Pick1 Motor
Pick1 Sensor
Pick2
Solenoid Value
J8 or J10 Pick2 Motor
J9 or J11 Pick1
Solenoid Value
Main Control Board
Quad CIC
1 PA_PHASE2.A 1
2 PA_2_PHASE2B 3 Pick2 Motor
3 PA_PHASE1.A 4 (PA_2)
4 PA2_PHASE1B 6
5 PA_PHASE2A 1
J8 or J10 6 PA1_PHASE2B 3 Pick1 Motor
7 PA_PHASE1A 4 (PA_1)
8 PA1_PHASE1B 6
1 Pick 2
9 VACSOL2b Solenoid Value
(Val_2.1)
10 24V_2 (Val_2.0)
Pick 1
(Val_1.0)
12 24V_1 (Val_1.1)

1 EX_DW (white) 1
2 SIN_PA1 (white) 2
3 EXREF_DW_1 (white) 3
4 COIL_BIAS (white) 4
5 COS_DW1 (white) 5
6 COS_PA1 (white) 6
7 COIL BIAS (white) 7
8 EXREF_PA_1 (white) 8
9 SIN_DW1 (white) 9 Quad CIC
10 EX_PA (white) 10 (Quad_CIC)
11 EX DW (white) 11 1 19
12 SIN_PA2 (white) 12
13 EXREF_DW_2 (white) 13
2 20
14 COIL__BIAS (white) 14
15 COS_DW2 (white) 15
16 COS_PA2 (white) 16
17 COIL___BIAS (white) 17
J9 or J11
18 EXREF_PA_2 (white) 18
1 31 19 SIN_DW2 (white) 19
20 EX__PA (white) 20
2 32
Pick 1 LED
23 CASSLOW_AMR1B (white) 1 (PLED_1)
24 GROUND (white) 2
21 5V_SUPPLY_PICK_1 (white) 3
22 PICKLED1_RTD (white) 4
1
25 PICKSEN1+ (white) Pick 1 Sensor

26 PICKSEN1_RTD (green) (PSEN_1)
29 CASSLOW_AMR2B (white) 1 Pick 2 LED

30 GND (white) 2 (PLED_2)
28 PICKLED2_RTD (white) 4
1

32 PICKSEN2_RTD (green) (PSEN_2)

Single Pick Module Harness
Pick5 LED
Dual Cass ID CIC
J3 Pick5 Sensor
J6 Pick5
Solenoid Value
Pick5 Motor
1
2
3
4
J3
5 PA_PHASE2A 1
6 PA5_PHASE2B 3 Pick5 Motor
7 PA_PHASE1A 4 (PA_5)
1 8 PA5_PHASE1B 6
10
Pick 5
(Val_5.0)
12 24V_5 (Val_5.1)

1 EX_DW (white) 1
2 SIN_PA5 (white) 2
3 EXREF_DW_5 (white) 3 Dual Cass CIC
4 COIL_BIAS (white) 4
5 COS_DW5 (white) 5 1 9
6 COS_PA5 (white) 6
7 COIL BIAS (white) 7
8 EXREF_PA_5 (white) 8 2 10
9 SIN_DW5 (white) 9
10 EX_PA (white) 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
J6 17
18
1 31 19
20
2 32
Pick 5 LED
23 CASSLOW_AMR5B (white) 1 (PLED_5)
24 GROUND (white) 2
22 PICKLED5_RTN (white) 4
1

26 PICKSEN5_RTN (green) (PSEN_5)
29
30
27
28
31
32

Carriage Position Sensor Harness
J1
Carriage Position Sensor
Carriage PCB
1 White
J1 2 Green Carriage Position Sensor
(J_CPS) 3 Red (CPS)
4 Black
Dual Cassette ID Harness
J12 or J14 Dual Cassette ID
Main Control Board
1 COIL_BIAS1 1
2 SIN_ID1 2
3 COS_ID1 3
4 CASSLED_RTD 4
5 EXREF_ID1 5
Dual Cassette ID
J12 or J14 6 LATCHLED1+ 6 (Cass_ID)
1 15 7 EXID1 7
8 CASSLATCH1 8 1 15
9 SIN_ID2 9
2 16 10 CASSLATCH2 10 2 16
11 COIL_BIAS2 11
12 LATCHLED2+ 12
13 COS_ID2 13
14 CASSLED2_RTD 14
15 EXREF_ID2 15
16 EX_ID2 16

Single Cassette ID Harness

J7
Single Cassette ID
1 COIL_BIAS 1
J7
2 SIN_ID5 2
1 7 3 COS_ID5 3
4 CASSLED5_RTN 4
5 EXREF_ID5 5 Single Cassette ID
2 8 6 LATCHLED5+ 6 (Cass_ID)
7 EX_ID 7
1 15
8 CASSLATCH5 8
9
10 2 16
11
12
13
14
15
16

SNT Harness
Divert Gate Flag Sensor Timing Disc
Sensor
Divert Gate Width Sensor

Media Deflector Motor
Solenoid
Divert/Transport Sensor
J4
HETS
J3
SNT Sensor Board
Main Control Board
1 BOARD1+ 1
2 BOARD1_LED_RTN 3
J4 3 BOARD1_SEN 2 SNT Sensor Board
4 BOARD2+ 4 (BoardSen)
1 9
5 BOARD2_LED_RTN 6
6 BOARD2_SEN 5
2 10 7 SNT_LED_SUPPLY 7
8 SNT_STACK_LED_RTD 10
9 SNT_STACK_SEN+ 8 1
10 SNT_STACK_SEN 9

1 5V Ref (white) 1
2 NTS_A (white) 2 HETS
3 NTS_GND1 (white) 3 (HETS)
4 NTS_B (white) 4 1 7
5 NTS_GND2 (white) 5
6 24V (white) 6
2 8
7 WIDTH_SENA (white) 7
8 WIDTH_SENB (white) 8
Width Sensor
(WidthSen)
9 WIDTH_LEDB_RTN (white) 3
10 WIDTH_LEDA_RTN (white) 2
1 2 3
11 SNT_LED_SUPPLY (white) 1
12 SNT_LED_SUPPLY (white) 1 Purge Sensor

13 SNT_PURGE_LED_RTN (white) 2 (PurgeSen)
14 SNT_PURGE_SEN+ (white) 3
J3
15 SNT_PURGE_SEN (white) 4
1 29 1
16 DIVERT_GATE_LED+ (red)
2 30
17 DIVERT_GATE_LED_RTN (black) Divert Sensor
18 DIVERT_GATE_SEN+ (white) (DivertSen)
19 DIVERT_GATE_SEN (green)
20 TIM_DISC_SEN (green)
Timing Disc
21 TIM_DISC_SEN+ (white)
Sensor
22 TIM_DISC_LED+ (red) (TimeDiscSen)
23 TIME_DISC_LED_RTN (black)
Divert Gate
24 DIV_A_DRV (white) 1 Solenoid
25 DIV_COMON (white) 2
26 DIV_B_DRV (white) 3
1
27 BM_PHASE1A (white) 1
28 BM_PHASE1B (white) 3 Motor
29 BM_PHASE2A (white) 4 (Board_Mot)
30 BM_PHASE2B (white) 6

BAM CIC Harness
J25 BAM CIC
Main Control Board
J25 1 EX_PRES 1 1 EX_PRES 5 BAM CIC

1 9 3 EXREF_BAM 2 2 EXREF_BAM 4 (JBAM)
5 SIN_BAM 4 4 SIN_BAM 1
7 COIL_BIAS 5 5 COIL_BIAS 2
2 10 9 COS_BAM 6 6 COS_BAM 3 1
JBAM-1 PBAM-1
Purge Bin LEDs Interface
J1 J3
Purge Bin LEDs Interface Purge Bin Sensors
1 5V 1
2 SEN1 2
J1 3 SEN2 3 J3
4 SEN3 4
5 SEN4 5
Purge Bin Interface Harness
J2 J4
Presenter Harness Purge Bin LEDs Interface
1 GND 1
2 GND 2
3 PURGE BIN2 SEN 3
4 PURGE BIN2 LED 4
J2 J4
5 PURGE BIN1 SEN 5
6 PURGE BIN1 SEN+ 6
7 LED RTN 1 7
8 PURGE BIN1 LED+ 8

State of Health Harness
J15 Status Indicator
Main Control Board
1 Red 1
J15 2 Amber 2 Status Indicator
(Con_SOH) 3 Green 3 (J_SOH)
4 5V 4
TEST AND ADJUSTMENT TOOLS
None
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
A/D Analogue to Digital converter
BAM Bill Aligner Module
CIC CambridgeIC ‐ developer of non‐contact position sensing technology
HETS Hall Effect Thickness Sensor – used to count number of bills in SNT
RFP Retract from present. Retraction of presented media back into the
dispenser
Singularity Calculation of number of bills passing through the HETS
SNR Serial Number Read
SNT Single Note Transport ‐ part of transport which transports single bills
(not bundles)
SOH State of Health

S2 Dispenser Cassette 1
S2 Dispenser Cassette
Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
NCR cassettes are portable containers, moulded in high impact polycarbonate, that are
designed to store currency and other media such as postage stamps in the dispenser. the
external dimension of the cassette are:
Height: 121 mm (4.75 in.)
Width: 218 mm (8.6 in.)
Depth: 444 mm (17.5 in.).
The cassette can be configured to hold currency of different lengths and widths, and to
indicate a code for the denomination it contains.
Currency length range: 120 to 177 mm (4.7 to 7.0 in.)
Currency width range: 62 to 85 mm (2.4 to 3.4 in.).
The following variants of cassette are available:
 Standard security cassettes: the lid is secured with a latch and an optional seal, such
as a cable tie.
 Lockable cassettes: the lid is secured with a keylock in addition to the latch.
 Tamper indicating cassettes: tracks the number of times that a cassette has been
inserted and removed from the dispenser, to detect unauthorised activity. After six
insertions, the cassette is ‘locked out’ and needs to be reset. Both standard and
lockable cassettes can have the tamper indicator.

2 S2 Dispenser Cassette
Tamper Indicator
The counter on tamper indicating cassettes is initially green, and moves to white on the
first insertion of the cassette into the ATM, then moves to show numbers 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6
for subsequent insertions. After six insertions the cassette will no longer be accepted
into the dispenser until the counter has been reset.
Each time the cassette is removed for routine replenishment, the counter should be
reset by repeatedly sliding the stud then releasing it until the indicator shows green.
Reset stud
Internal insertion counter
External insertion counter
Cassette Identification Code
Each cassette has a identification code which is read by the ATM software so that
regardless of its position in the dispenser, the cassette can be identified and selected to
dispense notes of a specific denomination. The code can be changed for different
currencies and denominations.
Clip
Window
To change the cassette identification code, first remove the yellow clip inside the
cassette, then take off the cassette identification casing from the side of the cassette.
Remove the indicator wheel from the casing and reposition it so that the required
number is aligned with the window. Refit the casing and secure with the clip.

Cassette Body and Lid Marking
Once the cassette has been configured to a particular currency, it is advisable that the
body and lid are visually identified to avoid a mismatch of bodies and lids configured for
different currencies.
There are two recommended methods:
 Indelible ink marking: mark the currency denomination on the inside or outside of
both the body and lid, using an indelible ink pen
 Colour coded labels: assign a different colour for each currency denomination and
use matching labels on the body and lid.
Other identification methods may be employed, and can make use of the panels of
numbers and letters moulded into the cassette body and lid.
A
A: Recessed areas for either marking with indelible ink pens or for adhesive labels
B and C: Numbered panels.
Cleaning
Clean the cassettes with a cloth dampened with water. For stubborn marks and grease
try a clean cloth dampened with isopropyl alcohol. Do not use any other cleaning agents
or abrasives.

CASSETTE CONFIGURATION
The internal height and width of the cassette can be configured to fit the dimensions of
the currency being used.
gth
note len
e width =
Cassett
Cassette
height =
note width
Cassette Height
The internal height of the cassette is adjusted for the width of the notes using
combinations of spacers fitted between the lid and the note guides.
Note guide
Spacers

Refer to the table below for the combination of lid spacers required for your currency.
Currency Lid position Lid position Lid position Lid position

width A B C D
No. of No. of No. of No. of
+ Spacer + Spacer + Spacer + Spacer
(mm) white white white white
colour colour colour colour
spacers spacers spacers spacers
62 4 Orange 4 Blue 4 Yellow 4 Black
63 3 Black 4 Orange 4 Blue 4 Yellow
64 3 Yellow 3 Black 4 Orange 4 Blue
65 3 Blue 3 Yellow 3 Black 4 Orange
79 No spacers, secure note guides in lid with two screws each.
80‐85 No spacers, remove note guides from lid.
Note guide fixing screws if no spacers used
A D
B C
B C
A D

To fit the lid spacers:
1. Consult the table for the combination of spacers needed for the width of the
currency to be loaded in this cassette.
2. Fit the required spacers together starting with the white ones, by stacking one on top
of the another then turning it a quarter turn (90o) clockwise. Repeat until the
required stack is built.
3. Place the stack of spacers at each location A, B, C and D on each side of the cassette.
Align the stack as shown, then turn it a quarter turn (90o) clockwise to secure it. Do
not turn beyond the stop position at 90o.
4. Place the note guides on top of the stack of spacers and secure with a screw at each
location A, B, C and D.

Cassette Width
The internal width of the cassette is adjusted for the length of the notes using the
movable ‘L’ shaped guides which can be fixed to either side of the cassette. Side spacers
are used to brace the guides.
Left hand Right hand
side side
A B
The note guides are marked A or B and each end has a triangular indicator to line up with
a numbered scale on the cassette floor. Refer to the table below for the correct position
of the note guides and the required size of the side spacers.
Note Size Left hand side Right hand side

(mm) (refer to illustration above)
Guide Setting Spacer Guide Setting Spacer
120 ‐ 121 B 3 E9 A 2 E10
122 ‐ 124 B 3 E9 A 3 E9
125 ‐ 126 B 4 E8 A 3 E9
127 ‐ 129 B 4 E8 A 4 E8
130 ‐ 131 B 5 E7 A 4 E8
132 ‐ 134 B 5 E7 A 5 E7
135 ‐ 136 B 6 E6 A 5 E7
137 ‐ 139 B 6 E6 A 6 E6
140 ‐ 141 B 7 ‐ A 6 E6
142 ‐ 143 B 7 E5 A 7 E5
144 ‐ 145 A 5 E5 B 5 E5
146 ‐ 147 A 6 E4 B 5 E5
148 ‐ 150 A 6 E4 B 6 E4
151 ‐ 152 A 7 E3 B 6 E4
153 ‐ 155 A 7 E3 B 7 E3
156 ‐ 157 A 8 E2 B 7 E3
158 ‐ 160 A 8 E2 B 8 E2
161 ‐ 162 A 9 E1 B 8 E2
163 ‐ 165 A 9 E1 B 9 E1
166 ‐ 167 A 10 E B 9 E1
168 ‐ 170 A 10 E B 10 E
171 ‐ 172 A 11 ‐ B 10 E
173 ‐ 177 A 11 ‐ B 11 E

To fit the guides:
1. Remove and retain the screws and washers securing the note guides at the handle
end of the cassette.
2. Lift the end of the guide nearest to the cassette handle and slide a guide towards the
handle to disengage it, then lift it out of the cassette. Repeat with the other guide.
3. Reposition the guides so that the triangular indicators are pointing to the correct
numbers according to the table above. Then press the slides in and slide them away
from the handle end of the cassette to engage them.
Note: The metal clips on the guides must always be at the end of the cassette
without the handle.
4. Replace the screws and washers to secure the guides in position.

5. Cut the side spacers to size, according to the table. Use a strong, sharp knife to cut
the spacer so that the required number of segments are left on the spacer. Make
sure that the cut edge is flat by removing any jagged cut edges.
6. Fit the side spacers to brace the note guide on each side of the cassette: one in the
slot in the centre of the note guide and one in the slot near the rear of the cassette
(opposite end to the handle). The side of the spacer with the numbered segments
should be against the guide.

REPLENISHING CASSETTES
Preparing Currency
Good currency preparation will enhance the performance of the currency dispenser.
Before loading the currency into a cassette it must be prepared correctly as follows:
 Remove the bands or other packaging from the bunches of notes.
 Used currency should be prepared by holding a bundle of approximately 100 notes
and fanning them to separate them out. New currency repeat this several times.
 While separating out, the currency should be checked for obvious defects such as:
 Adhesive tape on the surface of the currency
 Staples, pins or any foreign matter attached to the currency
 Torn or limp notes with pin holes
 Two or more notes stuck to each other
 Corner folds (straighten as required)
Folded notes.

Loading the Cassette
1. Remove the seal (if fitted) from the cassette latch. Or unlock the cassette (lockable
variant only).
2. Press down on the lower latch tab and pull the bottom of the latch off the tab. Then
lift the latch up and off the top tab.
3. Remove the lid from the cassette.
4. Press down in the green cup while sliding the pusher to the handle end of the
cassette.
5. Remove any remaining currency and balance the transaction in accordance with your
in‐house procedures.

6. To help re‐load notes neatly, rest the cassette on the handle end and support it at an
angle, leaning against a wall for example. This stops the note stack falling over while
it is being built in the cassette.
7. Separate the currency, which has been prepared as described at the start of this
section, into bundles of approximately 100 notes.
8. Align the first bundle of notes by tapping it on both the long and short edges. Then
place it at the bottom of the cassette.
9. Continue to align and stack the bundles in the cassette, alternating the orientation of
the bundles.
20
20
10. Push down in the green cup to release it. The pusher may move the note stack a short
distance until it is pushed against the end of the cassette.
11. Insert the tabs on the lid into the slots in the cassette then close the lid.

12. Hook the top of the latch over the top tab then press the bottom of the latch onto
the lower tab.
13. Seal the latch if required or, on lockable variants, lock the cassette. The cassette is
now ready for use in the dispenser.


Service Manual Section 13: Shutters
Section Divider
Section 12 - Shutters

Section Divider

Shutters 1
Shutters
Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the shutters used in NCR ATMs behind the openings of the media
dispense and deposit modules.
DESCRIPTION
There are two types of shutter assembly: stepper motor driven shutters and the solenoid
driven shutter used on the Check Processor.
Stepper Motor Driven Shutters
The shutter assemblies include a motorised shutter control PCB which responds to open
and close commands from the control board of the following modules: Media Dispenser,
Envelope Depository and Dispenser (PPD), Cash Acceptor and Recycler (GBRU) and the
Bunch Note Acceptor. This drives a 24 V stepper motor to open or close the shutter. The
shutter control board also returns the state of the shutter (either opened or closed) to
the module control boards.
There are two basic types of stepper motor driven shutter assemblies:
 Upper motor (located left‐hand side or right‐hand side)
 Lower motor (located left‐hand side or right‐hand side).
Note: The GBRU, BNA and PPD modules have additional brackets fitted to the basic
shutters which control the infeed alignment.

2 Shutters
Both type of assembly use a similar motorised shutter control board.
Upper Motor Shutter Assembly (LHS) Upper Motor Shutter Assemblies (RHS)
Lower Motor Shutter Assembly (LHS) Lower Motor Shutter Assembly (RHS)
Shutter Assembly
The motor drives the shutter via a worm drive. As the worm drive turns, the shutter is
driven open or closed. The fully closed or open position is detected when the beam of
the upper or lower opto‐transmissive switches on the shutter control board is
interrupted by a flag incorporated in the shutter blade.
The following illustration shows the mechanical arrangement of the shutter.
Lower Motor Shutter Assembly Upper Motor Shutter Assembly
Stepper Motor
Control Board
Stepper Motor Shutter Blade Shutter Blade

Shutter Flag
Control Board
Shutter Flag

Shutters 3
Control Board
2
I C Shutter Control Board
J3 J1 J5 J2
Y1
1 1 U1 U2
D3
1
1
D1
+
_
1
+ L1
J4
U3 D2
J5
Upper stepper motor connection.
J1
Lower stepper motor connection.
Solenoid Driven Shutter
The shutter assembly includes a shutter control PCB which responds to open and close
commands from the check processor control board to drive the solenoid arm to open or
close the shutter blade.

4 Shutters
Shutter Assembly
Control Board
Micro Switch (2 off)
Solenoid Arm
Shutter Blade
Control Board
1
J3 J1
CPM Shutter I/F

Y1
J5
J2
J4
U2
U3 L1
U4
J6
U1
J3
Micro switch harness connection.
J2
Solenoid harness connection.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to the relevant device chapter for information on troubleshooting.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
There are no level 0 diagnostic tests associated with the shutters.
Level 1 Diagnostics
Refer to the relevant device chapter for information on level 1 diagnostic tests.

Shutters 5
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.
Stepper Motor Driven Shutters
The following instructions depend on whether:
A ‐ The whole shutter assembly is being replaced by an NCR supplied kit, with the shutter
preset to the closed position, or
B ‐ Only the motor is being refitted, or
C ‐ In exceptional circumstances, if the whole shutter assembly is being replaced by an
NCR supplied kit, but fitted with the shutter in the open position for special service
access conditions.
A ‐ Refit of complete shutter assembly with shutter preset to the closed
position
Note: The shutter assembly is preset to the closed position when shipped from the
factory. Do not alter the rotational position of the shutter before fitting.
1. Use the CE switch to remove power from the ATM whilst keeping the PC core running
(this avoids the lengthy re‐boot period associated with a full re‐start).
2. Remove the existing shutter assembly.
3. Position the new shutter assembly over the mushroom studs located on the facia
fixing bracket.
4. Push the shutter downwards until the blade contacts the facia moulding and using
moderate force remove the backlash from the shutter gears.
5. Any gap under the shutter should be within acceptable limits, parallel and a
consistent size. It should not be possible to fit the card of a magnetic card reader
through any gaps.
6. While still pressing downwards, tighten the screws.
7. Use the CE switch to resume power to the ATM.
8. Perform a level 1 diagnostic shutter test (approx. 50 cycles) to ensure that the shutter
is still operational.

6 Shutters
B ‐ Refit of motor only
3. Remove and refit the motor on its mounting bracket.
4. Manually wind the worm drive into the closed position so that the flag of the shutter
is central to the sensor on the PCB.
Diagram showing ‘Motor Upper’

type shutter in the closed position

Shutters 7
Diagram showing ‘Motor Lower’

type shutter in the closed position
5. Position the shutter assembly over the mushroom studs located on the facia fixing
bracket.
6. Push the shutter downwards until the blade contacts the facia moulding and using
moderate force remove the backlash from the shutter gears.

8 Shutters
through any gaps.
C ‐ Refit of complete shutter assembly with shutter in open position
Note: Fitting the shutter in its open position is an exceptional circumstance to aid access
to the module in difficult service conditions.

Shutters 9
3. Manually wind the worm drive of the new shutter assembly into the open position.
Diagram showing ‘Motor Upper’

type shutter in the open position

10 Shutters
Diagram showing ‘Motor Lower’

type shutter in open position
4. Position the new shutter assembly over the mushroom studs located on the facia
fixing bracket.
5. In its highest possible position, tighten the screws.
7. Perform a level 1 diagnostic shutter test to drive the shutter into its closed position.
8. Use the CE switch to remove power from the ATM whilst keeping the PC core running.
9. Loosen the fixing screws and push the shutter downwards until the blade contacts
the facia moulding.

Shutters 11
10. Using moderate force, remove the backlash from the shutter gears.
through any gaps.
CABLING
Stepper Motor Driven Shutter ‐ Internal Cabling
Control Board Motor
J1 or J5
3 Motor A3 Brown
1 Motor A1 Black
2 Motor B1 Orange
4 Motor B3 Yellow
Solenoid Driven Shutter ‐ Internal Cabling
1
Control Board
1 2
2 4
4
J3 P3
1 W1 Open
2 W3 Common
3 W2 Closed
Micro Switch Harness
Control Board
Solenoid Harness
J2 P2
1 Solenoid A black
2
3 Solenoid B black
4

12 Shutters

Service Manual Section 15: Security
Section Divider
Section 13 - Security

Section Divider

Skimming Protection Solution (MCRW) 1
Skimming Protection Solution (MCRW)

INTRODUCTION
This chapter details the Skimming Protection Solution (SPS), also known as Anti Skimming
Module (ASM), or Intelligent Fraud Detection 2 (IFD2). Note that some components such
as harnessing use ASM or IFD2 in their names, these have been preserved in this manual
for easier identification for re‐ordering and replacement.
The SPS feature uses sensors to detect and create an alert whenever fraudulent devices,
such as card skimmers are fitted to the exterior of the card path or MCRW bezel.
CAUTION
DESCRIPTION
The SPS consists of the following elements:
 Control box containing the SPS Control PCB (ASM Control Board) and SPS Daughter
PCB (ASM Control Daughter Board)
 SPS IMCRW Bezel moulding assembly with integrated sensors and connecting
harnessing
 Drill Mat, (if fitted) ‐ also known as the Penetration Mat.
 Interconnecting harnessing.

2 Skimming Protection Solution (MCRW)
The diagram below shows the functional elements of the SPS feature.
Door Switch Drill Mat
SPS Replenishment
Harness (If fitted)
Door Status - J6
SPS Daughter PCB

(ASM Control
Daughter Board)
Sensor
PCB Assembly
SPS Control PCB
(ASM Control Board)
UIMCRW or
IMCRW Card Reader - Width
and Shutter Switches
The base functionality of the SPS is to:
 Disrupt the magnetic read capability of card skimming technology
 Detect card skimming technology
 Detect attacks on the disruption and detection technology
 Report an entry into the ATM.
SPS uses the following technologies to prevent a skimming device from capturing data
from a card’s magnetic stripe at an ATM or Kiosk.
Capacitive Sensing
The capacitive sensing device is integrated into the IMCRW bezel. Its function is to detect
and create an alert whenever a fraudulent device such as a card skimmer is fitted to the
exterior of the card path or MCRW bezel.
Magnetic Field ‘Jammer’
The magnetic field jammer which disrupts card skimmers is located in the IMCRW bezel
moulding. Its function is to render the data obtained by a skimmer useless by disrupting
the magnetic card data being read by the skimmer. It does not raise an alert at the
presence of a skimmer, but blocks it from reading a card successfully during each
transaction.
Note that the jammer in the bezel is not a jamming transmitter.

Electrical
Power Requirements
SPS Control PCB power requirements: 24V +/‐ 10%: 3A maximum
SPS Control PCB to the Daughter PCB requirements:
 24V +/‐ 10%: 1.5A maximum
 5V +/‐ 10%: 50mA maximum.
Power supplied to the SPS PCB peripherals:
 5V +/‐ 5%: 250mA maximum
 ‐5V +/‐ 5%: 250mA maximum.

SPS Control PCB
SPS Daughter PCB
The SPS Daughter PCB which attaches directly to the SPS control PCB, provides a step‐
down power supply and can support two inductor coils.
Daughter PCB
Connectors
SPS Control
PCB

TROUBLESHOOTING
Module Error State Messages
The following error messages are reported by the device.
Module Error State Possible Root Cause(s) Isolation Resolution

USB Communication USB cable has been disconnected Check cable connection at Reconnect the USB cable or
Failure or is faulty. the SPS, PC Core or at the replace if faulty.
SPS firmware is faulty. powered HUB.
SPS is faulty.
USBASM Control SPS is faulty. Check LED D2 is on. Power cycle the SPS.
Electronics Fault Check no LEDs are on. Power cycle the SPS.
‐ If above steps fail, replace the
device.
Device not Different SPS connected. ‐ Requires authorisation.
authorised No more test required.
Download candidate Firmware file on the disk is ‐ Restart the ATM and allow the
firmware checksum corrupted. firmware loader service
invalid to download the compatible
device firmware.
Resident firmware Firmware file on the device is ‐ Restart the ATM and allow the
checksum invalid corrupted. firmware loader service
to download the compatible
device firmware. If it fails again,
then replace the hardware.
Not found during SPS not attached before service SPS not attached before Connect device and restart the
start up start. service start. ATM.
USB cable is disconnected. Check USB cable Reconnect the USB cable.
connection at the SPS, PC
Core, or at the powered
HUB.
USB cable is faulty. ‐ Replace the USB cable.
SPS firmware is not running. Check LED D1 is off. Power cycle the SPS.
SPS is faulty. Check LED D2 is on. Replace SPS.
I2C Communication I2C cable disconnected between Check LED D2 is flashing. Reconnect I2C cable.
Fault the primary card reader bezel
sensor and the SPS. Note: see Cable section
Faulty I2C cable.
Out of range cap Interfering object is in proximity of Check around the primary Do NOT remove any suspicious
sensor reading the primary card reader bezel card reader bezel sensor object, but instead, inform the
sensor. for any foreign objects of a necessary authorities i.e. bank
Possible skimming attack. suspicious nature. security.
Out of range Primary card reader bezel sensors Check around the primary Do NOT remove any suspicious
temperature have been sprayed with freezer card reader bezel sensor object, but instead, inform the
spray. for any foreign objects of a necessary authorities i.e.bank
Possible skimming attack. suspicious nature. security.


Primary card reader Primary card reader bezel ‐ Do NOT remove the hardware or
bezel capacitive capacitive sensors have been suspicious object.
sensor displaced moved away from the card reader
slot. Possible skimming attack.
Width‐Shutter Width‐Shutter switch harness has ‐ Reconnect the Width‐Shutter
switch harness been disconnected. switch harness.
displaced
Skimmer detected Additional material in proximity to Inspect the area around Do NOT remove the hardware or
the capacitive sensor. the sensor for any any suspicious object.
Possible skimming attack. suspicious object.
Jammer signal too Faulty primary card reader bezel ‐ Replace the primary card reader
weak jammer bezel.
Invalid jammer Non‐NCR primary card reader ‐ Replace the primary card reader
detected bezel jammer attached. bezel.
Jammer signal too Additional material in proximity to Inspect the area around Do NOT remove any additional
strong the primary card reader bezel the primary card reader material.
jammer. bezel jammer for any
Possible skimming attack. additional material.
Penetration Drill mat has been penetrated. ‐ Carefully replace the drill mat.
detected Drill mat has been removed.
Door open Door opened. ‐ Close the door.

Jammer Jammer is NOT configured Use the Test Device Tool Restart the ATM and allow the
programming fault properly. ‐ Place the tool in the bezel firmware loader service to
and with SysApp open, download the FPGA firmware. If
view Jammer On State it fails again, then check if the
‐ Use the key disk to loop FPGA candidate firmware file is
the test and to view the current or replace the hardware.
jammer toggle.
Note: After replacing any harnessing, carry out a Post Repair Test, see instructions in the
Diagnostic section.

DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostic LEDs
LED’s are an indication of the general operation of the device. They do not report
detailed faults. Refer to the System Application Menu for detailed fault reporting.
Condition LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4

USB CONNECTED ON ‐ ‐ ‐
USB DISCONNECTED RAPID FLASH FLASH ‐ ‐
HEALTHY ON ‐ FAST FLASH ‐
DISRUPTOR ON ‐ ON ‐ ‐
DISRUPTOR OFF ‐ OFF ‐ ‐
CAPACITIVE SENSOR ‐ ‐ SLOW FLASH ‐
DISCONNECTED
Note: Jammer has a duty cycle when the USB is disconnected. LED 2 follows the Jammer
ON/OFF condition.
Led’s
1
2
3
4

Device Diagnostics
In System Application the SPS feature is called USB Anti‐Skimming Module and the
disruptor is referred to as the jammer.
Note: Looping is allowed on all tests except on Transfer Logs.
Test Description
Menu Displays a menu of all the other tests to allow the user to select one.
Identification Performs an identification command and displays the following:
 Device Variant
 Main Firmware Version
 FPGA Firmware Version
 Device Name.
Display Status The test will display the current sensors status and tries to check and clear the
jammer weak or strong signal error. When all sensors are healthy, then the status will
be displayed in the following format:
Sensor State
Primary Card Reader Bezel Capacitive No Alert
Primary Card Reader Jammer No Alert ‐ Jammer ON/OFF
Drill Mat No Alert
Door State Closed
When the drill mat sensor is affected and the door is opened, then the status will be
displayed as:
Sensor State
Drill Mat Alert
Door State Open
Transfer Logs This test is available on the ATM only if ‘Allow Transfer Logs Diagnostic Applet’ is set
to TRUE (configurable via Property Page).
NOTE: Some banks collect logs from the ATM remotely.
If the configuration is set to TRUE, then the test will perform the operations below in
sequence:
1. The test will first display the menu which will contain all the removable media
detected on the system for user selection.
2. Create a directory under the root directory if not present and name it using the
ATM serial number and Site I.D. e.g. 12345678_XXXXXXXX where 12345678 is the
ATM serial number and xxxxxxxx is the actual Bank ATM ID.
3. The logs will be copied into newly created directory.
4. The user will be prompted about the success or failure of the activity.
This applet will copy the log files to the removable media. The user must not expect
any device related MStatus or error code on the execution of the applet.
 This applet copies the device logs to the removable media and during this process
it does not communicate with the device.
 The removable media must be loaded before executing this applet. If the media is
inserted later on, then, it will not be reflected in the media selection menu.
 The logs will not be deleted from the disk after the successful execution of this
applet because we may need to transfer the logs again from the ATM later.

Test Description
Display Cap The test will display the current sensors status. When all sensors are healthy, then the
Status status will be displayed in the following format:
Sensor State
Drill Mat No Alert
Door State Closed
displayed as:
Sensor State
Drill Mat Alert
Door State Open
Run Sequence This test verifies the operation of the Capacitive Sensor, Jammer Strong & Jammer
Test 1 Weak. Part of the test involves rebaselining the sensors. See detailed description
below.
Post Repair Test: Run Sequence Test 1
This test should be carried out after every repair. The trigger insert tool (part number
445‐0738402) is needed to complete the test. The tool has 3 numbered test surfaces and
must inserted into the card entry slot when prompted, so that the number of the surface
required is visible to the user when fully inserted.
Note: You must transfer the interface to the front of the ATM in order to carry out this
test.
1. Choose ‘Run sequence Test 1’ from Device Diagnostics menu.

2. The status of the device will be displayed for information.
3. Follow the on‐screen instructions. When prompted to ‘place insert 1’ insert the
trigger tool so that surface number 1 is visible when the tool is fully inserted into the
card entry slot.
4. A screen will be displayed to show the result of insert 1.
5. Then follow the instructions when prompted to remove insert 1 and place insert 2 in
the card entry slot. Make sure you insert the tool so that surface number 2 is visible
when the tool is fully inserted.

6. A screen will be displayed to show the result of insert 2. Follow the on‐screen
instructions when prompted to remove insert 2.
7. When prompted to ‘place insert 3’ insert the trigger tool so that surface number 3 is
visible when the tool is fully inserted into the card entry slot.
8. A screen will be displayed to show the result of insert 3. Follow the on‐screen
instructions when prompted to remove insert 3.
9. A final screen will display the test status.
10. Remove the trigger tool at the end of the test.

Service Tallies
Tally Description
ATTEMPTS The total number of communication operations done on the device.
COM_FAIL The total number of communication failures reported by the device.
FAIL_ATT The total number of communication retries done on communication failures.
DEV_REM The total number of USB cable disconnections.
DEV_ARR The total number of USB cable connections.
CAP_COMM The total number of card reader interface capacitive sensor communication failures.
CAP_OBJ The total number of card reader interface capacitive sensor unusual object detected.
JAMMER_ON The total number of card reader interface Jammer ON.
JAMMROFF The total number of card reader interface Jammer OFF.
DRIL_PEN The total number of drill mat sensor penetrations detected.
DOOROPEN The total number of door state sensor open.
DOOR_CLS The total number of door state sensor close.
Device Self Test
The following options are available via System Application.
Test Description
Device Self Test The device self test will execute the following command:
 This test executes the Determine state command.
 End of test.
CONFIGURATION
Configuration options are available via the System Application.
Test Description
Device Information The test will display the following:
 Device Variant
 Device Name.
Display Status The test will display the current sensors status.
This test executes ‘Determine State’ command to get sensor status and when all
sensors are healthy, then the status will be displayed in the following format:
Sensor State
Drill Mat No Alert
Door State Closed
When the drill mat sensor is affected and the door is opened, then the status will
be displayed as:

Test Description
Sensor State
Drill Mat Alert
Door State Open
Re‐Baseline Sensor This applet allows the user to reset the SPS device and clear all error counts and
flags. The ‘Re‐baseline Sensor’ command will cause the SPS hardware to be reset
to a new environment level for all sensors. The environment level is the baseline
for the sensors. The test will be performed in the below sequence:
1. Perform a check of the SPS system sensors and confirm there are no foreign
objects present before executing the ‘Re‐Baseline Sensor’ command.
2. Execute the ‘Re‐Baseline Sensor’ command to reset the new environment level.
3. Display sensor information after this test.
Note: This applet will be visible when the user entered SysApp through the USB
dongle key.
Note: Rebaseline must be performed from the front of the unit.
SPS Device Setting This applet allows the user to set the jammer settings:
1. Signal Drift for Jammer Activation. The acceptable range is 50 to 1000. The
default is 50.
2. Jammer Activation Timeout. the acceptable range is 1 to 10. The default is 1.
Drill Mat Status The test will display the status of the drill mat: either configured or not. If
configured, it will display any sensor alerts.
Configure Drill Mat The test will configure the drill mat, after which the ATM must be re‐booted.
Deconfigure Drill Mat The test will de‐ configure the drill mat, after which the ATM must be re‐booted.
Note: Configuration setting will be remotely viewable by default. They cannot be
modified.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.
 SPS IMCRW Bezel moulding assembly (containing coil, capacitive sensor driver and
electrode PCB’s inside the bezel) plus Harness assembly containing shield, shield
ground harness, sensor and coil assembly plus associated harnesses.
 SPS Control Box
 Control PCB
 Daughter PCB
 Drill mat assembly (25, 34, 38 and 32 ATM only)
 Interconnecting harnesses

 IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to IMCRW Linker harness
 SPS Replenishment harness
 IFD2 (SPS) Short Linker harness
 IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to Coil Linker harness
 IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to IMCRW Electrode Linker harness
 Penetration Mat harness.
SPS Bezel Moulding and Harness Assembly
There are no field replaceable parts within the bezel moulding assembly. If faulty,
replace the bezel moulding assembly.
Drill Mat
The drill mat assembly comprising the drill mat and bracket is mandatory where the ATM
supports this functionality. There are different drill mat assemblies for different ATMs:
the one shown below is for illustration only
CAUTION
Take care when replacing the drill mat assembly as the micro‐switch

is easily damaged..
1. Remove and retain the four screws (three on the SelfServ 34) securing the drill mat
assembly.
2. Carefully position the replacement drill mat assembly, taking care not to damage the
delicate micro‐switch.
3. Secure the assembly with the retained screws.
4. Carefully remove the protective Mylar strip over the micro‐switch.
SPS Control Box
Daughter PCB
1. Loosen the M4 nut and remove the control box cover plate from the SPS control box.
2. Disconnect the IFD (SPS) Coil Linker harness from the daughter PCB.
3. Remove and retain the M3 x 20 M/C comb screw securing the daughter PCB to the
SPS control PCB.

4. Remove the spacer between the daughter PCB and the SPS control PCB.
M3 x 20
Screw
Spacer
5. Squeeze the end of the plastic stand‐off together to free the PCB from the stand‐off.
6. Carefully remove it by gently prizing it from the control board connectors.

Note: When removing the daughter PCB, ensure it is kept parallel with the main SPS
control PCB to prevent damage to the connectors.

SPS Control PCB
1. Disconnect the USB cable and any other cable connections from the SPS control PCB.
2. Remove and retain the plastic snap‐on stand‐off.
Stand-off
3. Remove the three M3 x 6 screws securing the control PCB to the metal frame.
4. Remove the control PCB.
Interconnecting Harnessing
There are no serviceable parts on the harnessing. If faulty, replace the harness.

CONNECTORS ASSIGNMENTS
SPS Control PCB Connectors
Penetration Mat Replenishment USB
Low Power DC (J4) (J6) (J7) IMCRW Electrode Linker
(J1) (J9)
IMCRW Linker
(J12)
Daughter PCB Connectors
IMCRW Coil Linker

Harness

CABLING
The following diagram shows the harness connections on the SPS.
Penetration Mat Drill
* MISCIF Switch Set Harness Mat
MINI MISC SPS Replenishment Long Short J1
MIDI MISC Harness
Note: Linkage to the MISCIF only when Auto-Supervisor is fitted.
Door Status - J6 Drill Mat In - J4
SPS Bezel Jammer - PCB IFD2 Control PCB Low Power

to Coil Linker Jammer - J1 24V In - J1 DC Dist.
SPS Daughter PCB USB - J7 USB Type A

to Mini-B
Capacitive Sensor - PCB IFD2 Control - IMCRW Cap Sensor - J9

Electrode Linker (12C cable)
Shield
IFD2 Control PCB
IMCRW - IN - J12
- IMCRW Linker
SPS Control PCB
Earth Wire Harness
IFD2 Harness
Short Linker
IMCRW
IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to IMCRW Linker Harness (J12 SPS Control PCB)
To IFD Control PCB To FDI Jammer Harness
IFD2 (SPS) Harness ‐ IMCRW Short Linker Harness (on IMCRW)
Card Reader Power Header To MCRW Linker Long Harness
Shutter_SW
Width_SW
Card Reader Power Harness

IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to Coil Linker Harness (J1 Daughter PCB)
IFD2 (SPS) Ctl PCB to IMCRW Electrode Linker Harness (J9 SPS Ctl PCB)
ATM Facia J9 Control PCB
Penetration Mat Harness (J4 SPS Control PCB)
Short
DMAT_J1 DRILL_FEMALE
Long
IFD_J4
Drill_MALE
DMAT_M

SS ASM (SPS) Replenishment Harness (J6 SPS Control PCB)
Note: The type of replenishment harnesses used will depend on the ATM model.)
To IFD PCB
To MISC Board Supervisor To Supervisor Harness
ASM (SPS) Replenishment Harness (J6 SPS Control PCB)
Note: The type of replenishment harnesses used will depend on the ATM model.
DMAT_F
SW1-NO_M
SW1-NO_F
To IFD PCB J6 SW1-CM_F
SW1-CM_M
The trigger insert tool must be used to perform repair exit tests at the conclusion of any
activity on SPS:
SPS SelfServ MCRW Trigger, NCR part number 445‐0738402.

Skimming Protection Solution (Dip Card Reader) 1
Skimming Protection Solution (Dip Card

Reader)
Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
This chapter details the Skimming Protection Solution (SPS), also known as Anti Skimming
Module (ASM) for Dip Card Readers.
The SPS feature uses sensors to detect and create an alert whenever fraudulent devices
such as card skimmers are fitted to the exterior of the card path or Dip Card Reader
bezel.
CAUTION
DESCRIPTION
The SPS consists of the following elements:
 Control box containing the SPS control PCB (ASM control board).
 SPS dip card bezel assembly with integrated sensors and connecting harnesses.
 Drill mat, (if fitted) ‐ also known as the penetration mat.
 Interconnecting harnesses.

2 Skimming Protection Solution (Dip Card Reader)
Functional Elements
The diagram below shows the functional elements of the SPS feature.
Door Switch Drill Mat

SPS Replenishment
Harness (If fitted)
Door Status - J6
SPS Control PCB

(ASM Control Board)
Sensor
PCB Assembly
The base functionality of the SPS is to:
 Detect card skimming technology
 Detect attacks on the detection technology
 Report an entry into the ATM.
SPS uses capacitive sensing to detect a skimming device. The capacitive sensing device is
integrated into the Dip card reader bezel. Its function is to detect and create an alert
whenever a fraudulent device such as a card skimmer is fitted to the exterior of the card
path or Dip card reader bezel.
Power Requirements
SPS Control PCB power requirements: 24V +/‐ 10%: 3A maximum
Power supplied to the SPS PCB peripherals:
 5V +/‐ 5%: 250mA maximum
 ‐5V +/‐ 5%: 250mA maximum.

SPS Control PCB

ERROR MESSAGES
USB Communication USB cable has been disconnected Check cable connection at Reconnect the USB cable
Failure or is faulty. the SPS, PC Core or at the or replace if faulty.
SPS firmware is faulty. powered HUB.
SPS is faulty.
USBASM Control SPS is faulty. Check LED D2 is on. Power cycle the SPS.
Electronics Fault Check no LEDs are on. Power cycle the SPS.
‐ If above steps fail,
replace the device.
Device not Different SPS connected. ‐ Requires authorisation.
authorised No more test required.
Download candidate Firmware file on the disk is ‐ Restart the ATM and
firmware checksum corrupted. allow the firmware
invalid loader service
to download the
compatible device
firmware.
Resident firmware Firmware file on the device is ‐ Restart the ATM and
checksum invalid corrupted. allow the firmware
loader service
to download the
compatible device
firmware. If it fails again,
then replace the
hardware.
Not found during SPS not attached before service SPS not attached before Connect device and
start up start. service start. restart the ATM.
USB cable is disconnected. Check USB cable Reconnect the USB
connection at the SPS, PC cable.
Core, or at the powered
HUB.
USB cable is faulty. ‐ Replace the USB cable.
SPS firmware is not running. Check LED D1 is off. Power cycle the SPS.
SPS is faulty. Check LED D2 is on. Replace SPS.
I2C Communication I2C cable disconnected between Check LED D2 is flashing. Reconnect I2C cable.
Fault the primary card reader bezel
sensor and the SPS. Note: see Cable section
Faulty I2C cable.
Out of range Primary card reader bezel sensors Check around the primary Do NOT remove any
temperature have been sprayed with freezer card reader bezel sensor suspicious object, but
spray. for any foreign objects of a instead, inform the
Possible skimming attack. suspicious nature. necessary authorities
i.e.bank security.
Unusual object Additional material in proximity to Inspect the area around Do NOT remove the
detected the capacitive sensor. the sensor for any hardware or any
Possible skimming attack. suspicious object. suspicious object.


Penetration Drill mat has been penetrated. ‐ Carefully replace the drill
detected Drill mat has been removed. mat.
Door open Door opened. ‐ Close the door.
Note: After any repair activity ‐ not just SPS ‐ carry out instructions in the Configuration
section to Re-Baseline Sensor.

DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostic LEDs
LED’s are an indication of the general operation of the device. They do not report
detailed faults. Refer to the System Application Menu for detailed fault reporting.
Led’s
1
2
3
4
Condition LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4

USB CONNECTED ON ‐ ‐ ‐
USB DISCONNECTED RAPID FLASH FLASH ‐ ‐
HEALTHY ON ‐ FAST FLASH ‐
CAPACITIVE SENSOR ‐ ‐ SLOW FLASH ‐
DISCONNECTED

Device Diagnostics
Note: Looping is allowed on all tests except on Transfer Logs.
Test Description
Identification Performs an identification command and displays the following:
 Device Variant
 Device Name.
When all sensors are healthy, then the status will be displayed in the following
format:
Sensor State
Drill Mat No Alert
Door State Closed
displayed as:
Sensor State
Drill Mat Alert
Door State Open
Transfer Logs This test is available on the ATM only if ‘Allow Transfer Logs Diagnostic Applet’ is set
to TRUE (configurable via Property Page).
NOTE: Some banks collect logs from the ATM remotely.
If the configuration is set to TRUE, then the test will perform the operations below in
sequence:
1. The test will first display the menu which will contain all the removable media
detected on the system for user selection.
2. Create a directory under the root directory if not present and name it using the
ATM serial number and Site I.D. e.g. 12345678_XXXXXXXX where 12345678 is the
ATM serial number and xxxxxxxx is the actual Bank ATM ID.
3. The logs will be copied into newly created directory.
4. The user will be prompted about the success or failure of the activity.
This applet will copy the log files to the removable media. The user must not expect
any device related MStatus or error code on the execution of the applet.
 This applet copies the device logs to the removable media and during this process
it does not communicate with the device.
 The removable media must be loaded before executing this applet. If the media is
inserted later on, then, it will not be reflected in the media selection menu.
 The logs will not be deleted from the disk after the successful execution of this
applet because we may need to transfer the logs again from the ATM later.

Test Description
Display Cap The test will display the current sensors status.
Status
When all sensors are healthy, then the status will be displayed in the following
format:
Sensor State
Drill Mat No Alert
Door State Closed
displayed as:
Sensor State
Drill Mat Alert
Door State Open
Run Sequence This test performs the re‐baselining of the sensors. See Configuration section for
Test 1 instructions details of the Re‐Baseline Sensor post repair test.
Device Self Test
The following options are available via System Application.
Test Description
Device Self Test The device self test will execute the following command:
 This test executes the Determine state command.
 End of test.
Tallies
Tally Description
ATTEMPTS The total number of communication operations done on the device.
COM_FAIL The total number of communication failures reported by the device.
FAIL_ATT The total number of communication retries done on communication failures.
DEV_REM The total number of USB cable disconnections.
DEV_ARR The total number of USB cable connections.
CAP_COMM The total number of card reader interface capacitive sensor communication failures.
CAP_OBJ The total number of card reader interface capacitive sensor unusual object detected.
DRIL_PEN The total number of drill mat sensor penetrations detected.
DOOROPEN The total number of door state sensor open.
DOOR_CLS The total number of door state sensor close.

CONFIGURATION
Configuration options are available via the System Application.
Test Description
Device Information The test will display the following:
 Device Variant
 Device Name.
This test executes ‘Determine State’ command to get sensor status and when all
sensors are healthy, then the status will be displayed in the following format:
Sensor State
Drill Mat No Alert
Door State Closed
When the drill mat sensor is affected and the door is opened, then the status will
be displayed as:
Sensor State
Drill Mat Alert
Door State Open
Re‐Baseline Sensor This applet allows the user to reset the SPS device and clear all error counts and
flags. The ‘Re‐baseline Sensor’ command will cause the SPS hardware to be reset
to a new environment level for all sensors. The environment level is the baseline
for the sensors. The test will be performed in the below sequence:
1. Perform a check of the SPS system sensors and confirm there are no foreign
objects present before executing the ‘Re‐Baseline Sensor’ command.
2. Execute the ‘Re‐Baseline Sensor’ command to reset the new environment level.
3. Display sensor information after this test.
Note: This applet will be visible when the user entered SysApp through the USB
dongle key.
Note: Rebaseline must be performed from the front of the unit.
Drill Mat Status The test will display the status of the drill mat: either configured or not. If
configured, it will display any sensor alerts.
Configure Drill Mat The test will configure the drill mat, after which the ATM must be re‐booted.
Deconfigure Drill Mat The test will de‐ configure the drill mat, after which the ATM must be re‐booted.
Note: Configuration setting will be remotely viewable by default. They cannot be
modified.

Post Repair Test: Re‐Baseline Sensor/Run Sequence Test 1
The SPS sensor should be re‐baselined after every repair, using the trigger test tool (part
number 445‐0743656, or 445‐0749153 for 6691 ATMs). Place the trigger test tool around
the bezel when prompted, ensuring that it does not move during re‐baselining but do not
hold it in place with your hand as this will affect the result of the test.
Use only the correct trigger tool for the ATM:
Trigger tool for 66xx ATMs except 6691
Trigger tools for 6691 Cantilever and 6691 Head‐on
Note: On rear access units, you must transfer the interface to the front of the ATM in
order to carry out this test.
1. Choose ‘Re‐baseline Sensor’ from Device Configuration menu.
2. Then choose option ‘Run Sequence Test 1’.

3. The status of the device will be displayed for information.
4. Follow the on‐screen instructions. When prompted to ‘place insert 3’ place the
trigger test tool around the bezel.
5. A screen will be displayed to show the result of insert 3.

6. A final screen will display the test status.
7. Remove the trigger test tool at the end of the post repair sequence test exercise.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.
The Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) within SPS are:
 SPS dip card reader bezel moulding assembly (containing capacitive sensor driver,
electrode PCBs, ASM shield ground harness and associated harnesses).
 SPS control box
 Control PCB
 Drill mat assembly (if fitted)
 Interconnecting harnesses
 SPS dip driver PCB to control PCB linker harness
 SPS dip top electrode harness
 SPS dip bottom electrode harness

 SPS replenishment harness
 Penetration mat harness
SPS Bezel and Driver Assembly
There are no serviceable parts within the bezel and driver assembly. If faulty, replace the
bezel and driver assembly ‐ example shown below.
Interconnecting Harnessing
There are no serviceable parts on the harnessing. If faulty, replace the harness.

Drill Mat
The drill mat assembly comprising the drill mat and bracket is mandatory where the ATM
supports this functionality. There are different drill mat assemblies for different ATMs.
The one shown below is for illustration only.
CAUTION
Take care when replacing the drill mat assembly as the micro‐switch
is easily damaged.
Drill Mat Connector
Mylar Strip Micro-switch
1. Remove and retain the four screws (three on the SelfServ 34) securing the drill mat
assembly.
2. Carefully position the replacement drill mat assembly, taking care not to damage the
delicate micro‐switch.
Tip: if a spare protective strip is not available, use a piece of sticky tape to protect the
switch during installation, with a folded end to make it easy to remove afterwards.
3. Secure the assembly with the retained screws.
4. Carefully remove the protective Mylar strip over the micro‐switch.

SPS Control Box
SPS Control PCB
1. Loosen the M4 nut and remove the control box cover plate from the SPS control box.
2. Disconnect the USB cable and any other cable connections from the SPS control PCB.
3. Remove the four M3 x 6 screws securing the control PCB to the metal frame.
4. Remove the control PCB.

CABLING
The following diagram shows the harness connections on the SPS.
Penetration Mat Drill
* MISCIF Switch Set Harness Mat
MINI MISC SPS Replenishment Long Short J1
MIDI MISC Harness
Note: Linkage to the MISCIF only when Auto-Supervisor is fitted.
Door Status - J6 Drill Mat In - J4
SPS Dip Card Bezel Low Power

24V In - J1 DC Dist.
USB - J7 USB Type A

to Mini-B
SPS Dip Driver PCB to Control PCB
Capacitive Sensor - PCB Electrode Linker Harness Cap Sensor - J9
Shield
SPS Control PCB

Earth Wire Harness
SPS DIP Driver PCB to Control PCB Linker Harness
Low Power DC Distribution Harness
USB Type A to Type Mini B High Speed Cable Assembly

Penetration Mat Harnesses
Short
DMAT_J1 DRILL_FEMALE
Long
IFD_J4
Drill_MALE
DMAT_M
SS ASM (SPS) Replenishment Harness
Note: The type of replenishment harnesses used will depend on the ATM model.
To IFD PCB
To MISC Board Supervisor To Supervisor Harness

Bezel Assembly
ASM Shield Ground Harness
SPS Dip Bottom Electrode Harness
SPS Dip Top Electrode Harness

SPS Control PCB Connectors
Penetration Mat Replenishment USB
Low Power DC (J4) (J6) (J7) Electrode Linker
(J1) (J9)
The trigger test tool must be used to perform repair exit tests at the conclusion of any
repair activity, not just on SPS:
SPS SelfServ Dip Trigger, NCR part number 445‐0743656 or Moulding Assy ‐ Dip Trigger,
NCR part number 445‐0749153 for 6691 ATMs.
None.


Alarms 1
Alarms
Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
The alarm system provides an interface between a series of alarm sensors and an
external environment, such as a bank’s existing alarm scheme. There are three types of
alarm systems:
 Basic
 Enhanced
 High security.
Location
The following diagrams show the locations of the installations within the safe:
Basic Alarm System
PRIMARY LOCK
SECONDARY
LOCK

2 Alarms
Enhanced Alarm System
PRIMARY LOCK
SECONDARY
LOCK

Alarms 3
High Security Alarm System
SECONDARY
PRIMARY LOCK
LOCK
DESCRIPTION
All Alarm Systems offer status reporting. This feature reports the status of the alarm
signals to the ATM application program.
A silent alarm, operated by a special combination lock, is an option.
TROUBLESHOOTING
None.

4 Alarms
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0
None.
Level 1
Alarms
The test Offered on the Alarms Diagnostic menu is the Determine Sensor Status test.
Determine Sensor Status
TReports the status of the safe’s six sensors.
Level 3
None.
STRAPPING
If the silent alarm is not fitted, the following turnaround plug (NCR part no. 445‐
0591539) will be installed in connector J1 on the alarm termination panel:
 1 x 009‐0006439, connector 2 x 3 plug
 2 x 009‐0006427, terminal #18 (female)
 50 mm x 006‐5830020, wire #18 white.
6 5 4
3 2 1

Alarms 5
ADJUSTMENTS
The vibration detector will normally be adjusted for optimum performance by the
representative of the alarm company responsible for connecting the ATM to a local
alarm system (they have the expertise and local knowledge to adjust the unit for a
particular site). For test purposes, however, NCR presets the unit to an initial adjustment
as follows:
 Using a spring gauge, centred level with the contact in the direction of the arrow,
adjust the screw until the force necessary to open the contact is approximately 5 g.
Recommended range is 5 g minimum to 25 g maximum.
 If a gauge is not available an approximate adjustment can be made as follows:
 Loosen the adjustment screw until the contact is open
 Tighten the screw until the contact is just closed
 Tighten the screw a further one eighth (1/8) of a turn. (This is the equivalent of
the 5 g setting.)
CABLING
None.

6 Alarms
Alarm Termination Panels
Basic
C7 R5
R20
R21
R6 U1 R12
R23 Q2 D5
R4 VR1
D3 R30
C4
J3
SW1
J1 RLY1 RLY2 RLY4
C5
J2 R28 C6
D1 D2 R16 R25
J4
R18
Basic and Enhanced/High Security
Silent Alarm Connector, J1
N/C 4 1 N/C
+12V 5 2 N/C
N/C 6 3 SREL
Door Switch Connector, J2
+12V 3 1 N/C
DREL 4 2 N/C

Alarms 7
Alarm Output Connector, J3
TAL_NC 1 2 DAL_NO
TAL_CM 3 4 DAL_CM
N/C 5 6 DAL_NC
N/C 7 8 SAL_NO
N/C 9 10 SAL_CM
N/C 11 12 SAL_NC
N/C 13 14 CAL_NC
CSTS_CM 15 16 CAL_CM
DSTS_CM 17 18 CAL_NO
SSTS_CM 19 20 CSTS_NC
TSTS_CM 21 22 DSTS_NC
N/C 23 24 SSTS_NC
N/C 25 26 TSTS_NC
N/C 27 28 +12V
GND 29 30 N/C
Vibration Sensor Connector, J4
N/C 1 2 N/C
N/C 3 4 N/C
N/C 5 6 N/C
N/C 7 8 N/C
N/C 9 10 N/C
VIB 11 12 N/C
N/C 13 14 N/C
N/C 15 16 GND

8 Alarms
Enhanced
Basic and Enhanced/High Security
Silent Alarm Connector, J1
N/C 4 1 N/C
+12V 5 2 N/C
N/C 6 3 SREL
Door Switch Connector, J2
+12V 3 1 N/C
DREL 4 2 N/C
Alarm Output Connector, J3
TAL_NC 1 2 DAL_NO
TAL_CM 3 4 DAL_CM
TAL_NO 5 6 DAL_NC

Alarms 9
TAL_OUT 7 8 SAL_NO
TAL_IN 9 10 SAL_CM
N/C 11 12 SAL_NC
N/C 13 14 CAL_NC
CSTS_CM 15 16 CAL_CM
DSTS_CM 17 18 CAL_NO
SSTS_CM 19 20 CSTS_NC
TSTS_CM 21 22 DSTS_NC
CTST_OP 23 24 SSTS_NC
CTST_OUT 25 26 TSTS_NC
CTST_IN 27 28 +12V
GND 29 30 N/C
Composite Attack Connector, J4
N/C 1 2 +12V
N/C 3 4 N/C
N/C 5 6 CTST_OP
N/C 7 8 CTST_OUT
N/C 9 10 CTST_IN
N/C 11 12 CAL_OUT
TAL_OUT 13 14 N/C
GND 15 16 GND

10 Alarms
I/O Panel Alarm Output Connector
The alarm output connector, located on the ATM I/O connector panel, has the following
arrangement of pins which are allocated for basic and enhanced systems as shown in the
diagram:
A spring gauge (optional).

SelfServ 23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual Section 12: Miscellaneous Devices and Interfaces
Section Divider
Section 14 - Miscellaneous Devices and

Interfaces

Section Divider

Media Entry/Exit Indicators 1
Media Entry/Exit Indicators

Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
The Media Entry/Exit Indicators (MEEIs) are located next to media entry/exit slots on the
facia of the ATM. They act as prompts to the customer during specific entry services.
DESCRIPTION
The MEEI comprises of a series of LEDs mounted on a PCB which has a single two way
connector. The MEEIs are controlled through the Miscellaneous Interface.
For some entry/exit slots the MEEI may be mounted on a carrier moulding.
MEEI PCB
Carrier Moulding
TROUBLESHOOTING
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
None.

2 Media Entry/Exit Indicators
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.
Standard MEEI
In most instances the MEEI is fixed to the facia with screws. To remove the MEEI:
1. Disconnect the harness from the MEEI.
2. Remove the screws securing the MEEI to the facia.
3. The MEEI can now be removed.
Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure.
MEEI With Carrier Moulding
If the MEEI is mounted on a carrier moulding then both the carrier and MEEI must be
removed. Proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect the harness from the MEEI.

Media Entry/Exit Indicators 3
2. The carrier is held in place by lugs at each end. Using a screwdriver, ease one end of
the carrier out of the facia.
3. Remove carrier/MEEI assembly from the facia.
4. Remove and retain the plastic rivets securing the MEEI to the carrier and remove the
MEEI.
5. Using the retained plastic rivets, secure the new MEEI to the carrier.

4 Media Entry/Exit Indicators
6. Insert one end of the carrier into the slot on the facia then press the other end home
until it clicks into place. Make sure the lugs on the carrier are fully engaged.
7. Re‐connect the harness.
CABLING
None.
The MEEI has a single Molex, Male two way connector, P1.
1 24V
2 GND
None.

Midi Miscellaneous Interface 1
Midi Miscellaneous Interface

INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the USB Midi Miscellaneous Interface board (Midi‐Misc Board).
DESCRIPTION
The Midi‐Misc Board is a hardware variant of the Mini‐Misc Board with upgraded
features. The micro‐controller connects to the host PC Core via an integrated USB 2.0
compliant full speed USB link. The micro‐controller firmware is updated automatically
from the host PC via the USB link.
The Midi‐Misc Board contains the following I/O interfaces:
 Media Entry/Exit Indicators ‐ 16 MEEIs, maximum of 3 at one time, not auto‐detect,
brightness controlled (“throb”).
 Public Audio (“beep”) ‐ Stereo, software enable.
 Private Audio ‐ Stereo, software enable, feature detect, jack detect and volume
control inputs
 Function Display Keys ‐ 8 FDKs, feature detect.
 TTL DIP card reader
 Alarms Status ‐ 4 lines supported.
Board Layout
The main components on the Midi‐Misc Board are identified in the following illustration:

2 Midi Miscellaneous Interface
Power Requirement
The Midi‐Misc Board is powered from the USB Vbus supply. The board must be powered
from either a root hub or a self powered hub, it cannot be powered from a bus powered
hub.
The board requires the following DC voltages:
 USB Vbus+5v nominal
 +5.25v max
 +4.50v min
Required current is:
 Vbus = 0.5Amps (maximum rms – dependent on board population)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Message Possible root causes Isolation Resolution
REPLACE_NOW Device Fault None Replace Device
INSPECT_NOW Comms Error None Connect Device
DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostic LED
The diagnostic LED fitted to the Midi‐Misc Board is for development use only and mirrors
MEEI4 in normal operation.
STRAPPING
None.

ADJUSTMENTS
None.
There are no field replaceable parts in the device.
CABLING
Interconnect Diagram
In‐Circuit Debug Cable
The In‐Circuit Debug Cable connects between Midi‐Misc J11 and the Microchip MPLAB
ICD2 debug/programming tool.

Midi‐Misc Board Connectors
Audio Line I/P Connector (J1)
This is a 3.5mm right angled PCB Audio Jack socket:
Pin Signal
1 Screen
2 PC Audio Right
3 Not Populated
4 Not Populated
5 PC Audio Left
Public Audio (“beep”) Connector (J2)
This is a 4‐way right angle connector:
Pin Signal
1 BEEP_L_A
2 BEEP_L_B
3 BEEP_R_A
4 BEEP_R_B
MEEI (5‐10) Connector (J3)
Pin Signal
1 NC
2 NC
3 NC
4 NC
5 NC
6 NC
7 +5V
8 MEEI10_DRV
9 +5V
10 MEEI9_DRV
11 +5V
12 MEEI8_DRV
13 +5V
14 MEEI7_DRV
15 +5V
16 MEEI6_DRV
17 +5V

Pin Signal
18 MEEI5_DRV
USB Connector (J4)
This is a 5‐way right angled USB mini B‐type connector:
Pin Signal
1 BUS_PWR
2 USB_D‐
3 USB_D+
4 NC
5 GND
Private Audio Connector (J5)
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 NC
3 GND
4 HP_FREAT_DETb
5 GND
6 HP_VOL_ADJ_BUT
7 GND
8 HP_JACK_DETECT_SW
9 HP_SPK_LEFT
10 HP_SPK_RIGHT
FDK Connector (J6)
Pin Signal
1 NC
2 NC
3 FDK2_BTb
4 FDK2_CONFb
5 FDK2_UMb
6 FDK2_LMb
7 GND
8 FDK2_TPb
9 FDK1_BTb
10 FDK1_CONFb
11 FDK1_UMb
12 FDK1_LMb
13 GND

Pin Signal
14 FDK1_TPb
Alarms Status Connector (J7)
This is an 12‐way right angle connector:
Pin Signal
1 NC
2 NC
3 NC
4 NC
5 TSTS
6 GND
7 SSTS
8 GND
9 DSTS
10 GND
11 CSTS
12 GND
Pin Signal
1 NC
2 NC
3 NC
4 NC
5 NC
6 NC
7 GND
8 NC
9 +5V
10 MEEI4_DRV
11 +5V
12 MEEI3_DRV
13 +5V
14 MEEI2_DRV
15 +5V
16 MEEI1_DRV

Pin Signal
1 NC
2 NC
3 NC
4 NC
5 NC
6 NC
7 NC
8 NC
9 +5V
10 MEEI16_DRV
11 +5V
12 MEEI15_DRV
13 +5V
14 MEEI14_DRV
15 +5V
16 MEEI13_DRV
17 +5V
18 MEEI12_DRV
19 +5V
20 MEEI11_DRV
Auto Supervisor Connector (J10)
Pin Signal
1 AUTO_SUP_SW
2 GND
3 AUTO_SUP_DET
4 GND
5 NC
In‐Circuit Debug/Programming Connector (J11)
This is a 6‐way right‐angled header that provides in‐circuit debug and programming
access to the micro‐controller:
Pin Signal
1 MCLRb/VPP
2 +5V
3 GND
4 IC_PGC
5 IC_PGD
6 IC_PGM

Note: This connector will be fitted during board development but may be removed for
production boards subject to Production Test agreement.
TTL Card Reader Connector (J12)
Pin Signal
1 +5V
2 0V
3 CR_DATA2
4 CR_CLK2
5 CR_DATA1
6 CR_CLS
7 CR_REAR_SENSOR
8 CR_CLK1
None.

USB DVD RW Slimline Drive 1
USB DVD RW Slimline Drive

Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides information on the USB DVD RW Slimline Drive.
The drive is a DVD‐RW and CD‐RW drive which has a USB 2.0 interface that supports DVD
video and CD audio playback capability. It reads any standard DVD‐ROM and CD‐ROM
disks complying with following ECMA standards:
 ECMA–130
 ECMA–267
 ECMA–279
 ECMA–337
 ECMA–338
 ECMA–349
 ECMA–359
 ECMA–371
The drive writes to any standard DVD‐R/RW and CD‐R/RW disks complying with the same
ECMA standards. The drive uses a tray mechanism which is spring loaded for disk load
and unload. Disks may be loaded or unloaded with the drive in either vertical or
horizontal orientation.
The drive is powered from the USB cable, but requires an additional 5V dc supply from
the product if the drive is used for writing to disks rather than just reading from them.

2 USB DVD RW Slimline Drive
DESCRIPTION
Dimensions
The table below lists the physical properties of the drive.
Dimension Measurement (excluding the front bezel)

Height 12.7 mm
Width 128 mm
Length 126.1 mm
Mass 172 g or less
Mounting Orientation
The USB DVD RW Slimline drive can be mounted either vertically or horizontally.
Note: The mounting screws are M2, and should not exceed 5.0 mm from the surface of
both sides or the bottom of the drive.

Disk Clamp System
To secure and hold the disk, the drive uses a Ball Clamp as its disk clamp system.
Tray Ejecting
The drive uses a spring loaded tray mechanism for loading and unloading a disk.
The tray can be ejected through either of the following options:
 Manual Eject Button
 Emergency Eject Hole
 ATAPI command
Manual Eject Button
This button transmits an electrical signal to the eject mechanism. It is enabled at power
on and may be disabled by software commands.
Press the Manual Eject button located at the front bezel to eject the tray, and load or
unload a disk.
Manual Eject Button
Emergency Eject Hole
For emergencies, push a pin through the emergency eject hole located at the front bezel
to eject the tray.
ATAPI Command
A standard ATAPI command may also eject the tray.
Supported Disk Types
The table below lists the disk types that the DVD RW Slimline drive supports.
Readable Disks Recordable Disks

DVD–ROM DVD–R
DVD–R DVD–R DL


DVDR DL DVD–RW
DVD–RW DVD–RAM (4.7 gb)
DVD+R DVD+R
DVD+R DL DVD+R DL
DVD+RW DVD+RW
DVD–RAM CD–R
CD–DA CD–RW
CD–ROM
CD–R
CD–RW
Read and Write Speed
The table below lists the read and write speed of the drive.
Drive Read Speed Write Speed

DVD‐RW 8x CAV 4, 680rpm 2 ‐ 6x(ZCLV)
2 ‐ 4x(ZCLV)
2x (CLV)
1x (CLV)
CD‐RW 24x CAV 5, 160rpm 10–24x(ZCLV)
10–20x(ZCLV)
10–16x(ZCLV)
10x(CLV)
4x(CLV)
Power Requirements
The USB DVD RW Slimline drive powers up with an input voltage in the range of 5 Vdc, +/
‐5% (4.75 to 5.25 V).
The table below lists the current consumption of the DVD RW drive.
Mode Average Current (A) Peak Current (A)

Standby 0.18 –
Sleep 0.17 –
USB Suspend 0.06 –
Write 24x (CD–R) 1.1 –
Active 1.0 –
Random access (Duty 1.2 1.3
100%)
During starting seek – 1.5
During eject – 1.0

ERROR MESSAGES
The DVD RW Slimline drive does not send out error messages. If the drive fails to
operate, perform the following:
1. Check the USB cable connection to the USB hub or Core.
2. Check the disk if it is damaged or scratched. Make sure the drive supports the disk
that is loaded.
3. If the drive fails to write, check the 5 V dc supply to the drive. The drive requires
additional 5 V supply when writing to disks.
4. If the drive still does not operate, replace the DVD drive with a new one.
DIAGNOSTICS
None.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.
There are no field replaceable units in the drive.
CABLING
None.
The following illustration shows the rear view of the drive:
DC 5V IN CONNECTOR
USB MINI INTERFACE
PIN 1

USB Mini Interface
The table below lists the pin assignments for the USB mini interface.
Name (Pin Number) Type

1 VCC
2 D‐
3 D+
4 ID
5 GND
DC 5 V In Connector
This connector is a 4.0 mm x 1.7 mm, EIAJ RC5320A TYPE2 connector.
The table below lists the pin assignments for the 5 Vdc In connector.
Pin Type
Inner +5 Vdc
Outer Ground
None.

Slim DVD SATA Super Multi Drive 1
Slim DVD SATA Super Multi Drive

Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides information on the Slim DVD SATA Super Multi Drive.
The drive is a DVD–RW and CD–RW drive which has a Serial ATA interface that supports
DVD video and CD audio playback capability. It reads any standard DVD–ROM and
CD–ROM disks complying with the following ECMA standards:
 ECMA–130
 ECMA–267
 ECMA–279
 ECMA–337
 ECMA–338
 ECMA–349
 ECMA–359
 ECMA–371
The drive writes to any standard DVD–R/RW and CD–R/RW disks complying with the
same ECMA standards. The drive uses a tray mechanism which is spring loaded for disk
load and unload. To secure and hold the disk, the drive uses a Ball Clamp as its disk clamp
system.

2 Slim DVD SATA Super Multi Drive
DESCRIPTION
Dimensions
The table below lists the physical properties of the drive.
Dimension Measurement (excluding the front bezel)

Height 12.7 mm
Width 128 mm
Depth 129.4 mm
Mass 172 g or less
Tray Ejecting
The drive uses a spring loaded tray mechanism for loading and unloading a disk.
The tray can be ejected through the following options:
 Manual eject button
 Emergency eject hole
 ATAPI command
Manual Eject Button
The eject button transmits an electrical signal to the eject mechanism. It is enabled at
power on and may be disabled by software commands.
Press the Manual Eject button located at the front bezel to eject the tray, and load or
unload a disk.
Manual Eject Button
For emergencies, push a pin through the emergency eject hole located at the front bezel
to eject the tray.

ATAPI Command
A standard ATAPI command may also eject the tray.
Supported Disk Types
The table below lists the disk types that the DVD drive supports.

DVD–ROM DVD–R
DVD–R DVD–R DL
DVD–R DL DVD–RW
DVD–RW DVD–RAM (4.7 gb)
DVD+R DVD+R
DVD+R DL DVD+R DL
DVD+RW DVD+RW
DVD–RAM CD–R
CD–DA CD–RW
CD–ROM
CD–R
CD–RW
Read and Write Speed
The table below lists the read and write speed of the DVD drive.
Drive Read Speed Write Speed

DVD–RW 8 x CAV 4, 680 rpm 2 ‐ 6x (ZCLV)
2 ‐ 4x (ZCLV)
2x (CLV)
1x (CLV)
CD–RW 24x CAV 5, 160 rpm 10 ‐ 24x (ZCLV)
10 ‐ 20x (ZCLV)
10 ‐ 16x (ZCLV)
10x (CLV)
4x (CLV)
Power Requirements
The DVD drive powers up with an input voltage in the range of 5 Vdc, +/‐ 5%
(4.75 to 5.25 V).
The table below lists the current consumption the drive.

Standby 0.049 ‐
Sleep 0.049 ‐
Write 24x (CD–R) 0.8 ‐
Active 0.7 ‐
Random access (Duty 100%) 1.0 1.3


During starting seek ‐ 1.5
During eject ‐ 0.7
ERROR MESSAGES
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.
There are no field replaceable parts in this device.

CABLING
The DVD Super Multi drive uses the following cables to connect to the terminal.
 Kiosk eSATA Core Breakout
 Kiosk DVD eSATA + Power to Slimline SATA
Kiosk eSATA Core Breakout
eSATA 7P
SATA 7P
1 Drain 1 1
2 2
3 3
eSATA 7P 4 Drain 2 4 SATA 7P
Drain 3
5 5
6 6
7 Drain 4 7

Kiosk DVD eSATA + Power to Slimline SATA
Slimline SATA 13P (7P + 6P) eSATA
5 V Power
1 Drain 1 1
2 2
3 3
Slimline SATA 7P 4 Drain 2 4 eSATA
Drain 3
5 5
6 6
7 Drain 4 7
Shield (screen)
1
2 +5 V 3
Slimline SATA 6P 3 (red) 1 5 V Power
4 4
5 GND (black) 2
6

The illustration below shows the rear view of the drive with the connector and pin
assignments.
Pitch Slimline Serial ATA
Pin P1 Pin S1
The DVD Super Multi drive uses a 1.00 mm, 1.27 mm Pitch Slimline Serial ATA Plug with
13 pins as its interface connector.
The table below lists the pin assignments of the Pitch Slimline Serial ATA Plug.
Pin Name Type Description

S1 GND
S2 A+ Differential Signal Pair A
S3 A‐
S4 GND
S5 B‐ Differential Signal Pair B
S6 B+
S7 GND
P1 DP Device Present
P2 +5 V
P3
P4 MD/DA Manufacturing Diagnostic/Device Attention
P5 GND
P6
None.


DView Camera 1
DView Camera
Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides service information on the DView camera.
The DView camera provides security and surveillance functionality. The DView camera
captures images with 690 HTVL–E resolution through Wide Dynamic Range (WDR)
capability in NTSC or PAL standards. The camera captures images regardless of lighting
condition or application, and automatically eliminates image–compromising visual noise.
The Dual Power Board enables the camera to safely operate at 24 Vac or 12 Vdc input
voltage.
CAUTION

2 DView Camera
DESCRIPTION
Dimensions
Camera
The illustrations below display the physical dimensions and measurements of the DView
camera.
49 mm
(1.93 in.)
42.2 mm
46 mm (1.66 in.)
(1.81 in.) 4.8 mm
(0.18 in.)
22 mm
(0.87 in.)
44 mm
(1.73 in.)
Dual Power Board
The illustrations below display the physical dimensions and measurements of the Dual
Power Board.
68 mm
2.67 in.
60 mm
2.36 in.
22 mm
0.87 in.
44 mm
1.73 in.

DView Camera 3
Camera Specifications
The table below lists the functional and video specifications of the DView camera.
Functional Specifications
Image Sensor 1/3 in. WDR Image Sensor
Effective Picture Element 758(H)x540(V) approximately 409K pixels
Scanning Frequency NTSC 2:1 Interlace/ H: 1575 Hz, V: 59.94 Hz
PAL 2:1 Interlace/ H: 1562 Hz, V: 50 Hz
Video Output BNC 75 Ohm unbalanced
Wide Dynamic Range 120 dB/17 bit (102 dB typical)
Wide Dynamic Range Area Fully Adjustable
Slow Shutter YES up to 32x
Electronic Shutter WDR Control (Auto)
Software Day/Night ON, OFF, AUTO
White Balance ATW, AWB, Manual
Auto White Balance Range 2000k ~ 11000k
Sync System Internal/Line Lock
AGC Boost Yes
AES 1/25‐1/30, 720
Noise Reduction 3D Motion Adaptive
Privacy Zones Four (4)
Image Flip Yes
Video Specifications
Resolution 690 HTVL Effective
Video Standards PAL, NTSC
Minimum Illumination 0.1 lux at F1.2
AGC Up to 50 dB
S/N Ratio Up to 53 dB
Digital PTZ Pan, Tilt, Zoom (1x‐8x)
Lens Properties
The table below lists the lens specifications of the DView camera.
Property Measurement
Focal Length 2.5 mm
F–No. F2.0
Iris Range Fixed Range
Angle of View
Diagonal 122.1°
Horizontal 96.6°
Vertical 71.9°

4 DView Camera
Lens Focus
CAUTION
The lens focus is pre–set in the factory. Do not adjust the focus
factory settings.
The lens focus is set to capture images within an object distance of 300 mm and 1000
mm from the lens.
White lines on the body and lens are aligned to determine that the focus is correctly set.
Power Requirements
The following table lists the power requirements for the DView camera.
Parameter Value
Power Operating Range 24VAC+20%
12VDC + 10%
Power Consumption 4.2 W max.

DView Camera 5
Temperature Requirements
The table below lists the temperature requirements of the DView camera.
Parameter Value
Operating Temperature ‐10o C to 50o C (14o F to 122o F)
Storage Temperature ‐30o C to 60o C (‐22o F to 140o F)
ERROR MESSAGES
Device USB cable disconnected Check USB cable. Reconnect cable.
disconnected from MCRW
USB cable disconnected Check USB cable. Reconnect cable.
from hub
DIAGNOSTICS
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.
There are no field replaceable parts in the DView camera.

6 DView Camera
CABLING
Harness – CCTV Colour Camera – Safe
I/O_CAMERA SAFE_CAMERA
I/O_POWER SAFE_POWER
Harness Camera Power Top Box
CAMERA SAFE_POWER
Harness Camera PWR 12V Fascia
I/O_POWER FASCIA_HUB_P3

DView Camera 7
Harness 24V EXT
FASCIA_HUB_P2 DC_IN
DC_I/O

8 DView Camera
Camera
The illustration below displays the connector assignments of the camera.
Camera Lead
Connector
Dual Power Board
The illustration below displays the connector assignments of the dual power board.
Video Output
24 VAC/12 VDC
Camera Lead Connector
None.
For the preventive maintenance schedule and details of the required tasks for the Dview
Camera, refer to the Preventive Maintenance section of this manual.

USB 2D Bar Code Reader 1
USB 2D Bar Code Reader

Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
This chapter gives servicing information for the USB 2D bar code reader (UBAR).
Safety Compliance
The UBAR meets the requirements of paragraph 1.1 of IEC 60825‐1, and therefore no
safety labels are required.
DESCRIPTION
The USB 2D bar code reader (UBAR) can be fitted to ATMs to extend banking services by
automating bill payment and merchant deposit transactions otherwise handled by front
office tellers. The UBAR has a USB 1.1 interface and can decode linear (such as Code 39),
stacked linear (such as PDF 417) and matrix (such as Maxicode) bar code standards.
On exterior products only, illumination is provided by two IR LED pcb’s which are
triggered via illumination controller board when the barcode reader is activated.
IR LED
Driver
Barcode
Reader PC
Module Core
IR LED
IR LED

2 USB 2D Bar Code Reader
The hardware consists of an imager, interface board and two UBAR IR LED pcb
assemblies.
Interface PCB
IR LED PCB
Imager
IR LED PCB
The LEDs are controlled by the UBAR illumination IR LED driver board, shown below.
The UBAR interface board provides the USB interface between the bar code imager and
the PC core and also supplies dc power to the bar code imager. The UBAR interface board
provides the trigger signal to the UBAR illumination driver board.
The UBAR illumination driver board supplies the power and controls the firing of the
UBAR IR LED pcbs.
Power Requirements
5V USB powered device.
Note: The UBAR is plug‐and‐play (PnP) capable and is not ‘hot‐docking’ capable.

TROUBLESHOOTING
Module States
Condition SOH Message Action
Device disconnected INSPECT_NOW Check connections
30 consecutive read errors INSPECT_SOON Clean viewing window as
described below
75 consecutive read errors INSPECT_NOW Replace bar code reader
Cleaning Viewing and Illumination Windows
If the UBAR is not successfully reading codes make sure the viewing and illumination
windows on the outside of the facia is scrupulously clean and also free from scratches or
abrasions. If a window is scratched a new moulding with window will have to be fitted.
DIAGNOSTICS
Reporting
The UBAR is a GO/NO GO device and either works or fails, therefore there are no
extensive diagnostics.
Self Test
Selecting DEVICE SELF TEST from the System Application Main Menu and selecting bar
code reader from the Device Self Test Menu will display a screen prompt to “Scan a
Barcode”. If a test bar code has been successfully scanned within a 10 second period, the
display will show that the self test was successful. If no bar code has been scanned within
10 seconds, the display will show that the test is incomplete.
Level 3 Diagnostics
M_CODE Meaning
00H GOOD
02H ERROR
M_STAT Meaning
00 Operation successful
01 Bar code type not supported or data error
02 Bar code read error
04 Device inoperative
05 USB communications error

M_STAT Meaning
06 Format error
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.
Note: The UBAR is factory configured to recognize all bar code symbologies.
There are no serviceable parts within the UBAR.
CABLING
There is no internal cabling in the UBAR module but the following covers the barcode
illumination harness.

2 1
B_CODE_B3
4 3
2 1
IRLED_P1
4 3
2 1
UBAR_P4
IRLED_P1
4 3
2 1
UBAR_P3
4 3
2 1
UBAR_P1
2 1
DIODE CONTROL (D3)

1 1
DIODE CONTROL (D4)
2 2
UBAR_P4 GND IRLED_P1
3 3
GND
4 4
DIODE CONTROL (D1)

1 1
DIODE CONTROL (D2)
2 2
UBAR_P3 GND IRLED_P1
3 3
GND
4 4
TRIGGER
1 1
UBAR_P1 GND B_CODE_B3
2 2
This section includes pinouts of the connectors on the UBAR Illumination IR LED Driver
board shown below.

UBAR Illumination IR LED Driver Board
J1 J3
J4
J2
Connector J1
The connector (J1) carries the trigger signal from the UBAR interface board to the
Illumination IR LED Driver board. The connector is a 2‐way right‐angled header, S‐ROW
microfit with the following pinout:
1 TRIGGER
2 GND
Connector J2 (Power)
The connector (J2) supplies the 24Vpower to the Illumination IR LED Driver board. The
connector is a 2‐way right‐angled header, mini‐fit jnr with the following pinout:
1 +24V
2 GND
Connector J3
The connector (J3) carries the signals from the UBAR Illumination driver board to the IR
LED board. The connector is a 4‐way right‐angled header, microfit with the following
pinout:
GND 3 1 DIODE CONTROL (D1)

Connector J4
The connector (J4) carries the signals from the UBAR Illumination driver board to the IR
LED board. The connector is a 4‐way right‐angled header, microfit with the following
pinout:
UBAR Interface PCB
Connector J3
The connector (J3) carries the trigger signal from the UBAR interface board to the
Illumination IR LED Driver board. The connector is a Molex Microfit type with the
following pinout:
1 TRIGGER
2 GND
Connector J2
The connector (J2) is the USB connector which carries the signals from the PC Core to the
UBAR interface board. The connector is a Molex PTH Mini‐B USB type with the following
pinout:
1 VCC
2 D‐
3 D+
4 ID
5 GND
6 S1

The Barcode Reader Test Document (NCR Part No. 009‐0017470).
BAR CODE READER TEST DOCUMENT
BAR CODE TYPE: CODE 128 - TABLE C

CHECK CHARACTER STRING
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890

SelfServ 23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual Section 13: Audio
Section Divider
Section 15 - Audio

Section Divider

Public/Private Audio with Volume Control 1
Public/Private Audio with Volume Control

Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
Public/Private audio with volume control provides users of ATMs with access to
controllable audio via a headset.
DESCRIPTION
The main components of the feature are shown below:
Public
Loudspeaker(s)
Motherboard
On-Board sound Universal
or Misc I/F
Soundblaster Line
Level
Audio
Audio Volume
Control Button
Private Audio
Harness Headset Jack
Socket
The four levels of audio volume can be user adjusted using the audio volume control
button located on the facia adjacent to the headset jack socket. Pressing the button
increases the volume level in three steps up to its maximum and a fourth press returns it
to its original volume.
The volume level is reset to the lowest level each time a headset is inserted into the jack
socket. Overall volume level is set from within the application software.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
The volume of the audio line input signal is controlled via the Sound menu, from the Set
Device Configuration menu under Self Service Configuration in System Application.
TEST TOOLS
A pair of suitable headphones with a 3.5 mm jack.

2 Public/Private Audio with Volume Control
CABLE INFORMATION
The cabling from the facia audio jack socket to the miscellaneous interface is shown
below:
AudioAudio
J4 In Out
HP LEFT HP LEFT
Universal Misc Interface Board

1 1 1 1
Heaphone
SHIELD GND SHIELD GND
Socket
2 4 4 4
HP RIGHT HP RIGHT
3 2 2 2
GND DETECT
4 6 6 3
VOL ADJUST
5 5 5
JACK DETECT
Control Button
Audio Volume
7 3 3
9 AUDIO FEAT DETECT GND
10 SENSE
DIAGNOSTICS
The Sound menu is found under the Device Diagnostics menu of System Application. The
sound tests allow you to verify the operation of the enhanced audio system. The
following test are displayed:
? Master Volume Control Test
? Waveform Audio Volume Control Test
? MIDI Sequencer Volume Control Test.
If you select a sound test, enter the volume level and then OK, the selected test plays for
approximately 10 seconds.
The volume range offered is from 0 to 255. The default value is 127 for the master
volume and 255 for both the waveform and midi files.
Looping is allowed on these tests. The test plays repeatedly until cancelled.
The test returns a Fail if the file containing the test piece is not found.
Level 3 Diagnostics
The level 3 diagnostics returned for the digital audio are:
S_DATA
The S_DATA returned for the digital audio are:
S_DATA Meaning
00 GOOD (No error).

Public/Private Audio with Volume Control 3
TROUBLESHOOTING
Ensure that the line out connector is connected correctly on the motherboard and the
miscellaneous interface board, and that the speaker and private audio connectors are
connected correctly on the miscellaneous interface board. Refer to the Terminal Core &
Comms and the Miscellaneous Devices and Interfaces sections of this manual.

4 Public/Private Audio with Volume Control

1
Section Divider
Section 16 - Environmental Management

1
Section Divider

1
Product Environment Heaters 1
Product Environment Heaters

Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the product environment heaters. The heater assembly is
designed to keep the internal temperature of an enclosure regulated above a minimum
temperature of 10o Centigrade.
DESCRIPTION
A product environment heater consists of a fan heater assembly, a control thermostat
plus associated harnessing and connectors. Also included is a product mounting plate
and a thermostat mounting bracket.
Fan Heater Assembly
Control Thermostat
Thermostat
Mounting Bracket
Product
Mounting Bracket
IEC Connector
Product environment heaters are available in the following voltages:
? 240 V and 120 V ATMs ‐ 200 W
? 240 V and 120 V ATMs ‐ 300 W
? 240 V and 120 V ATMs ‐ 400 W.
Temperature Control
The heater is thermostatically controlled to keep the temperature inside the ATM within
normal operating limits. When the temperature at the thermostat drops below 15oC +/_
4oC, the thermostat will close and switch on the heater. The heater heats the air being
drawn into the fan which then transfers the warm air throughout the ATM. The
thermostat will switch the heater off when the temperature rises above 24oC +/_ 3oC.
1
2 Product Environment Heaters
TROUBLESHOOTING
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
None.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.
There are no field replaceable modules within the heater assembly.
CABLING
There is no field replaceable internal cabling.

SelfServ 23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual Section 14: Special Procedures
Section Divider
Section 17 - Special Procedures

Section Divider

SelfServ 23 Module Removal 1

Note: To play the video clips in this chapter in Adobe Reader XI onwards, you need to
have all media players set to ‘Always’ in the trust options in Edit menu > Preferences >
Multimedia Trust (legacy).
ACCESS TO LOWER FACIA ITEMS
1. Remove the screws securing the motorised card reader and/or the receipt printer as
appropriate then move the device(s) further back in the tray.
2. Remove the two screws on each side securing the facia to the brackets.

2 SelfServ 23 Module Removal
3. Lift the facia off the two bracket hooks, lower it slightly and replace on the bracket
with the lower hook in the upper slot on the facia. Make sure that harnessing is not
snagged or strained.
REMOVE KEYPAD
1. Lower the facia to gain access to the rear of the keypad assembly (see ‘Access to
Lower Facia Items’ instructions).
2. Remove the two screws securing the keypad assembly, then lever the tangs on the
bracket off the clips to allow the assembly to be removed.

3. Disconnect the keypad harness and remove the four screws securing the keypad to
the bracket.
4. When replacing the keypad assembly, make sure the bracket is correctly snapped
into place on the clips on the facia before replacing the screws.
KEYPAD MEI
1. Lower the facia to gain access to the rear of the keypad assembly (see ‘Access to
Lower Facia Items’ instructions).
2. Unclip the MEI and disconnect the harness.

MCRW MEI/FACIA INSERT/DECAL INSERT
1. Lowering the facia is optional (see ‘Access to Lower Facia Items’ instructions).
2. Remove the screw securing the motorised card reader, then remove the card reader.
3. Remove the two screws securing the MCRW MEI bracket.

4. Remove and replace the required part:
a MCRW MEI: Remove the MEI from the bracket and disconnect the harness.
b MCRW decal holder: Slide the decal holder out of the facia.

c MCRW facia insert: Remove the four screws securing the insert.
5. When the required part has been replaced, re‐secure the MCRW MEI bracket
assembly with the two screws. Note that there is a choice of 4 screw holes in case of
thread wear.

RECEIPT FACIA INSERT & MEI
1. Lowering the facia is optional (see ‘Access to Lower Facia Items’ instructions).
2. Remove the two screws securing the receipt printer, then remove the printer.
3. Remove the four screws securing the receipt facia insert.

4. Remove the insert and then either replace the whole assembly, the inner or outer
parts of the insert or unclip and disconnect the MEI on the facia.
MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACE
1. Loosen the screw securing the miscellaneous interface (misc. i/f.) to the facia. Then
slide the misc. i/f. to the right and remove it.
2. Disconnect the harnesses. Then remove and retain the four screws securing the misc.
i/f. to the bracket. Re‐fit the bracket to the replacement misc. i/f.

DISPLAY
1. Disconnect the three harness connectors (USB, power and signal) on the display.
2. If the ATM is fitted with a touchscreen, the touchscreen controllers can be removed
from the back of the display without disconnecting the ribbon cables. Loosen the
screws securing the touchscreen controllers in the keyhole slots then carefully lift the
controller assemblies off the display. (Tip: Use a loose screw in the facia frame to
hold the smaller board in place, use tape to hold the larger board to the camera
mounting.)
If it is necessary to disconnect the controllers: carefully open the white clamps
retaining the ribbon cable connectors on the touchscreen controllers: two cables at
the top and one on the right‐hand side of the display. (Tip: Use a small flat head
screwdriver to gently prise open the clamps.)

3. Loosen the four screws (two each side) securing the display to the facia. Then lift the
display off the screws and slide it out from behind the top‐box latch bracket.
Note: on early units, the screws may have to be removed completely, not just
loosened.
4. If the touchscreen controllers have been disconnected, loosen the screws securing
them in the keyhole slots then lift the controller assemblies off the display. Retain the
controllers and their covers and harnesses, to be fitted to the replacement display.
Note: When re‐fitting the ribbon connectors make sure that the white stripes on the
ribbon cables are level and only just visible once the white retaining clamps have
been pushed back into place. The right‐hand ribbon is particularly difficult to re‐

connect, so to make access easier, try removing the controller from the display and
bending open the cover.
TOUCHSCREEN
1. Remove the screws securing the motorised card reader and the receipt printer then
move them further back in the tray.

2. Loosen the screw securing the miscellaneous interface (misc. i/f.) to the facia. Then
slide the misc i/f to the right and remove it.
3. Remove the two screws securing the camera (if fitted) to the top of the facia, and
leave the camera hanging from the harnessing.

4. Carefully open the white clamps retaining the ribbon cables on the touchscreen
controllers: two cables at the top and one on the right‐hand side of the display.
Tip: Use a small flat head screwdriver to gently prise open the clamps.
5. Remove and the four screws securing the touchscreen.

6. NOTE: Some earlier units have an additional screw securing the facia on each side,
visible through an access hole in the facia bracket. If these screws are present:
a Remove the two screws on each side securing the facia to the brackets.
b Lift one side of the facia only off the bracket and remove the screw securing the
touchscreen through the access hole. Replace the facia onto the bracket and re‐
secure it with the two screws. Then repeat this step on the bracket on the other
side. Note that the two touchscreen screws do not need to be refitted later.

7. From the front of the ATM, slide the touchscreen up slightly to release it then lift it
off the facia.
8. Follow the reverse of these instructions to fit the new touchscreen.
Note 1: When replacing the touchscreen take care to feed the ribbon cables through
the holes in the facia without trapping or folding them.
Note 2: Make sure there is no gap between the refitted touchscreen and the lower
facia. Apply pressure to all edges to ensure a tight fit.
Note 3: When re‐fitting the ribbon connectors make sure that the white stripes on
the ribbon cables are level and only just visible once the white retaining clamps have

FDKS AND SCREEN
1. Disconnect the FDK harness from the miscellaneous interface. Loosen the screw
securing the miscellaneous interface to the facia, then slide the misc. i/f. to the right
and remove it.
2. Remove the thirteen screws securing the rear of the facia: four each side, three at the
top and two in the lower edge.

3. Move the rear of the facia back and rest it over the module tray.
4. Remove the upper four screws on each side of the facia frame (leave the lower two
which secure the shelf).

5. Remove the three screws above the display.
6. From the front of the ATM, lift the screen off the facia.
7. You can now replace the screen or gain access to the FDK assemblies.
FACIA
1. Disconnect all facia to top‐box harnessing, including to MEEIs, facia hub, display
power and USB. The audio and misc. i/f USB should be disconnected at the core and
the dispenser MEI should be disconnected so that they remain with the facia when it
is removed.
2. Remove the two screws on each side securing the facia to the brackets.

3. Lift the entire facia off the brackets.
4. Remove functioning facia devices and re‐fit them to the replacement facia.
FACIA SHELF
1. Disconnect all lower facia to top‐box harnessing, including to MEIs.
2. Remove the thirteen screws securing the rear of the facia: four each side, three at the
top and two in the lower edge.
3. Remove the lower two screws on each side of the facia frame, securing the shelf.
4. Remove the shelf, then remove any undamaged device inserts and re‐fit them to the
replacement shelf.

PC CORE
1. Disconnect the DC power harness from the rear of the PC core.
2. Disconnect the USB retaining clips and unplug all the USB connectors and audio jack
from the side of the core. Take careful note of the order of the connections as they
must be plugged back into the same ports.

3. Remove the two screws securing the PC core cover and the single screw securing the
PC core to the mounting bracket.
4. Slide the whole core towards you slightly to disengage it from the slots in the module
tray, then tilt it up so that you can slide the cover off.
5. Disconnect the two LVDS harnesses and feed them carefully out through the back of
the PC core, one at a time.
6. The PC core can now be lifted out of the ATM along with the mounting and USB
retention assembly, which can be separated from the core by removing the two
screws.
7. Refer to the Mini PC Core service chapter for instructions on how to remove the FRUs
within the PC core.

DISPENSER
? S1 dispenser: Refer to the S1 Bill Alignment Dispenser Removal and Replacement
chapter in this section.
? S2 dispenser: Refer to FRU Removal and Replacement in the S2 Dispenser chapter in
the Dispense section.

S1 Bill Alignment Dispenser Removal and Replacement 1
S1 Bill Alignment Dispenser Removal and

Replacement
Chapter Contents
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the removal and replacement of the Front and Rear Access
currency dispensers.
As this type of dispenser has been developed and manufactured to meet EU RoHS
compliance guidelines it should only be serviced using appropriate RoHS compliant parts.
Presenter Options
The following variants of presenter are available:
? Rear Access (short transport)
? Rear Access (mid transport)
? Rear Access (long transport)
? Front Access.
Pick Modules
The Dispenser can use the Aria or the 56XX enhanced single and double pick modules.
The Aria pick modules are described in the Aria pick module chapter of the dispense
section of this manual. The description of the 56XX type is in the Aria Pick Module section
of the Dispense chapter of this manual.
The dispenser can be configured as either Single or Dual Dispenser. The removal
instructions are the same for single and dual configurations.
It is advisable that prior to the removal of any pick module that the currency cassettes be
removed so as to reduce the weight of the module.
The currency dispenser is removed by dismantling it into manageable sections as
described below.
1. Removal of In Service Replenishment Covers.
2. Removal of Lower Pick Module.
3. Removing the Electronics Box (Rear Access).
4. Removing the ICS Module.
5. Removing the Control Board.

2 S1 Bill Alignment Dispenser Removal and Replacement
6. Removal of Upper Pick Module.
7. Removing the Presenter Module.
The dispenser replacement is described below.
1. Replacing the Presenter Module.
2. Replacing the Upper Pick Module.
3. Replacing the Electronics Box
4. Replacing the Lower Pick Module.
5. Replacing the Control Board.
6. Replacing the ICS Module.
7. Control Board Authentication.
8. Dispense Protection Configuration.
9. Replacing the In Service Replenishment Covers
10. Currency Evaluation Qualification Procedure.
11. Diagnostics.
12. Adjustments.
Removal of In Service Replenishment Covers
It may be necessary to remove in service replenishment covers as appropriate to gain
access to the various parts of the dispenser prior to removal. Any cover and fixing screws
removed should be retained for refitting after the dispenser has been reassembled.
Removal of Lower Pick Module
1. The lower pick module for either front or rear access presenters is removed by firstly
disconnecting the inter pick harness between the two pick modules as shown below.
2. Disconnect the vacuum tubing which supplies the lower pick unit by pushing the
upper vertical tube fully home and squeezing the yellow ring and then pulling the

vertical tube out of the tee connector.
3. Loosen the four toggle latches on the lower pick module by inserting a flat bladed
screw driver and lifting in the direction of the arrow to release the latches.
4. Carefully disengage both latches on one side and allow the pick module to swing
down and hang on the other two.
5. The next step is to carefully lift the pick module off the two remaining latches.
Replacing the Lower Pick Module
Fitting a replacement lower pick module is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Removing the Electronics Box (Rear Access)
On the rear access currency dispenser the electronics box contains the main motor
and pump assembly, solid state relay, and motor run capacitor. It also provides a

mounting place for the dispenser control board. Its removal gives access to these
components and also to the LVDT assembly.
Dispenser Motor
Dispenser Control
Board
Electronics Box
Remove the electronics box as follows:
2. Push out the cable ties holding the harness to the top and left‐hand side of the
control board cover.
Screw
Harness
Control Board
Cover
Screw
Cable
4. Unscrew and remove the screw at the bottom right‐hand side of the control board
cover.

7. Disconnect the cables from the lower right‐hand side of the electronics box.
the USB cable must be carefully released prior to removal.
Dispenser
Harness
Cables
Screw
9. Unscrew and remove the two screws securing the green turning wheel in position.
10. Remove the green turning wheel from the presenter drive wheel and then ease off
the timing belt.
Screws
Timing Belt
11. Remove and retain the two plastic rivets securing the timing disk sensor in position by

pushing the rivet centre on the timing disk side of sensor. Move the sensor clear of
the timing disk.
Plastic Timing Disk

Rivets Sensor
12. Loosen the four main motor mounting screws and ease the timing belt off the rear of
the timing disk gear towards the presenter side frame.
13. Lift the timing belt over the timing disk.
Timing Belt
Screws
(4 off)
14. At the upper left‐hand side of the electronics box remove the screw attaching the
earth strap to the presenter.
Screw
Earth
Strap

15. Remove the air hose from the pump.
Air Hose
16. Remove the two top screws (1 each side) holding the electronics box to the presenter.
17. Remove the two bottom screws (1 each side) holding the electronics box to the upper
pick module.
18. Lift the electronics box to release its hooks from the presenter tie shaft and lift it clear

of the dispenser.
Replacing the Electronics Box
Fitting a replacement electronics box is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Removing the Control Board
Dispenser Control Board ‐ Rear Access
Screw
Harness
Control Board
Cover
Screw
Cable

3. Unscrew and remove the screw on the bottom right‐hand side securing the control
board cover to the electronics box
Dispenser
Harness
Cables
Screw
7. Unscrew and remove the two screws securing the IC heat sink to the mounting
bracket.
8. Unscrew and remove the four screws securing the control board to the electronics
box and then remove the control board.

Removal of Fluiditi Security Module
If the dispenser is fitted with a Fluiditi security system (also known as ICS) then it must be
decommissioned prior to its removal. The decommisioning information is contained in
the Fluiditi Replenishment Security and Fluiditi ATM Security chapters in the security
sections of these manuals.
The Fluiditi module should be removed and refitted as per agreed procedures.
The system should be commissioned at the appropriate time during the replacement of
the dispenser.
Dispenser Control Board ‐ Front Access
3. Unscrew and remove the screw on the bottom right hand side securing the control
board cover to the pick module.
4. Remove the control board cover from the pick module.
5. Push out the cable ties holding the dispenser harness.

7. Unscrew and remove the two screws securing the IC heat sink to the mounting
bracket.
8. Unscrew and remove the four screws securing the control board to the mounting
bracket and then remove the control board.

Replacing the Control Board
Re‐fitting the existing control board is the reversal of the removal procedure.
The only additional actions required to verify the new board are: Control Board
Authentication, Control Board Authorisation and Currency Evaluation Qualification
procedures.
Removal of Upper Pick Module
Rear Access
1. The upper pick module for the rear access presenter is removed by firstly
disconnecting the inter pick harness between the presenter and the pick module as

shown below.
2. Disconnect the vacuum tubing which connects the pick module to the presenter at
the first tee connector as shown below by pushing the pushing the yellow ring
towards the Tee‐piece while pulling the filter in the opposite direction.
3. Loosen the four toggle latches on the upper pick module by inserting a flat bladed
screwdriver and lifting in the direction of the arrow to release the latches.

Front Access
On the front access ATM the control board is attached to the upper pick module.
1. The interpick harness and the vacuum tubing are disconnected in the same manner
as the rear access version.
2. Disconnect the harness connectors from the control board as described in the
Removing the Control Board section to release the control board from both the
harness and the presenter module. Remove the two fixing screws that hold the
control board mounting assembly to the upper pick module and then remove the
control board and mounting assembly.
3. Loosen the four toggle latches on the upper pick module by inserting a flat bladed
screwdriver and lifting in the direction of the arrow to release the latches.

Replacing the Upper Pick Module
Fitting a replacement upper pick module is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Removing the Presenter Module
Rear Access
The presenter module is removed as follows:
1. Remove the two securing screws that lock the presenter slides to the presenter
module as shown by the two arrows below.
2. Carefully slide the presenter module location studs off the slides and remove.
Front Access
The presenter module is removed as follows:
1. Remove the two securing screws that lock the presenter slides to the presenter
module as shown by the two arrows below.
2. Carefully slide the presenter module location studs off the slides and remove.
Replacing the Presenter Module
Fitting a replacement presenter module is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Control Board Authorisation
The following procedure must be carried out if the control board is replaced as part of
the dispenser unit or separately as an FRU item. The following steps require the Parts
Replacement Service Key for activation.
1. Select the DEVICE STATUS LIST option from the SYSTEM APPLICATION menu.
2. Select the device status reporting AUTHORISATION REQUIRED on the Cash Dispenser
option.

3. Select the required part to be authorised.
4. The system will display a screen confirming the test is being performed.
5. If the part is authorised the following screen is displayed.
6. Once authorisation is complete the DEVICE STATUS LIST screen is redisplayed.

7. If the part is not authorised the system will display a summary report screen stating
the test has failed.
8. If the authorisation fails then repeat steps 1 to 6 after ensuring that the service key
being used is correctly inserted and has appropriate authorisation security level.
Control Board Authentication
The dispenser has the following levels of dispense protection:
? USB
? Logical
? Physical.
To authenticate a control board when configuration is physical or command is accessed
through System Application via the Parts Replacement Service Key with a logical
configuration. The following procedure must be carried out if the control board is
replaced as part of the dispenser unit or separately as an FRU item. The procedure must
also be carried out if the PC Core and/or hard disk are replaced or if the hard disk has
been reformatted or ghosted.
NOTE: If configuration is logical use all steps except 5 and 6. If the configuration is
physical use all steps. If the configuration is USB no action is required.
1. Select the SELF‐SERVICE CONFIGURATION option from the SYSTEM APPLICATION
menu.

3. Then select the USB CASH DISPENSER option.
4. Then select the AUTHENTICATE option.
5. The AUTHENTICATE option will display the following screen.
6. The user should change the state of the dispenser security toggle switch or remove/
replace the cassette located in the lowest configured and populated position of the
dispenser unit, or insert a cassette into the lowest possible configured position of the
dispenser unit within 1 minute to make the system attempt to authenticate the
board.

7. If the system fails to verify the control board the following screen is displayed.
8. The user should select the OK button which will return them back to the USB CASH
DISPENSER menu and repeat steps 4,5 and 6.
9. If the system verifies the board the following screen is displayed.
10. Once the board has been verified the user should return to the SYSTEM APPLICATION

menu and proceed with the Currency Evaluation Qualification Procedure if required.
Dispense Protection Configuration
The following procedure must be carried out if the control board is replaced as part of
the dispenser unit or separately as an FRU item. The procedure must also be carried out
if the PC Core and/or hard disk are replaced, or if the hard disk has been reformatted or
ghosted.
Note: Dispense configuration comes in three versions ie: USB dispense, logical dispense
and physical dispense.
To change dispense configurations as listed below use all the following steps except 7:
? USB to logical
? logical to physical
? USB to physical
To change security configurations as listed below use all the following steps:
? physical to logical
? logical to USB
? physical to USB
menu.
3. Then select the USB CASH DISPENSER option.
4. Then select the DISPENSE PROTECTION CONFIGURATION option.

5. The system will display the following screen.
6. Use the toggle option to select the appropriate dispense protection level required.
Once the correct option has been selected use OK option to display the following
screen.
7. The user should change the state of the dispenser security toggle switch or remove
the cassette located in the lowest configured and populated position of the dispenser
unit, or insert a cassette into the lowest possible configured position of the dispenser
unit within 1 minute to change configuration.

8. If the system fails to verify the control board the following screen is displayed.
9. The user should select the OK button which will return them back to the USB CASH
DISPENSER menu and repeat steps 4 to 7 inclusive.
10. Once the configuration has been verified the user should return to the SYSTEM
APPLICATION menu and proceed with the Currency Evaluation Qualification
Procedure if required.
Currency Evaluation Qualification Procedure
NOTE: The currency dispenser is calibrated in the same way as the other dispensers in
the 58XX and 56XX ranges of ATMs and singularity values previously calculated for
these are valid.
When the first dispenser is received in each country the local Field Engineering
organization must establish the singularity values for each type of currency to be
dispensed. These singularity values must then be entered to every ATM dispensing that
currency, upon initial installation or whenever the dispenser control board or the LVDT
has been changed or repaired.
The currency evaluation qualification procedure can only be performed on a calibrated
dispenser. Attempting the procedure on an uncalibrated or incorrectly calibrated
dispenser will give incorrect results.
Calibrating the Dispenser
NOTE: Dispensers are shipped pre‐calibrated by the manufacturing plant. Calibration is
required if the LVDT or control board are replaced or NVRAM is corrupted or a new
version of firmware is down loaded.

The dispenser maintains an internal compensation factor in NVRAM on the dispenser
control board. This compensation factor allows for differences that exist between the
singularities calculated by different LVDT assemblies because of mechanical tolerances.
The dispenser adjusts the LVDT compensation factor automatically as bills of a known
singularity value are dispensed. While bills are dispensed the actual average of good
single bill singularities is measured over 255 bills. This average is compared to the
singularity figure typed in at installation time and the compensation factor is adjusted
accordingly. Initially the compensation factor is set to 80H (equivalent to 1.00) and this is
changed automatically by the dispenser and updated every 255 bills.
To achieve dispenser calibration at least 255 bills of a known singularity must be
dispensed. This may be local currency or test media.
The following procedure describes how to calibrate a dispenser on a terminal running on
the XP platform using SYSTEM APPLICATION. If configuring dual dispensers you will use
the SYSTEM APPLICATION on NT and should refer, for details to the publication B006‐
6167‐A000, “Self‐Service Platform Software, Personas (PLATFORM For Windows XP),
System Application User Guide”.
Level 1 diagnostic tests are required to dispense cash and for this reason you need to
insert the field engineer’s Service key.
The procedure is as follows:
1. For each cassette type, adjust the cassette guides if necessary to accept the test
currency, and set the cassette magnets for the required cassette type. Refer to
currency cassette chapter in the dispense section of this manual for details.
2. Load the test currency into the cassettes.
3. Insert the cassettes into the dispenser.
MAIN MENU.
7. Then select the USB CASH DISPENSER option. The system will then instruct the CE to
wait while the dispenser transport is cleared.
8. The system with display the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu.
9. Then choose the SET option.
10. The system will then display the NOTE CONFIGURATION set up menu as shown below.
The menu is spread over two pages which is navigated using page up and page down

options.
11. To start changing the note configuration, select the Reset option.
12. Enter note size for type 1. This is repeated for types 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7.
13. Enter the singularity for type 1. This is repeated for types 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7.
14. To accept all the changes made, select OK.
YES.
17. Return to the SYSTEM APPLICATION main Menu and select the DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC
option.
18. Select the CASH HANDLER option from the DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC menu.
19. Operate the dispenser security switch.
20. Select SET NOTES option from the USB CASH DISPENSER menu. The number of notes
to be picked is 40 from cassette type 1

21. Change the Loop Off option to Loop On.
22. Select the DISPENSE option and allow the loop count to reach at least 7 before
stopping the command.
The dispenser is now calibrated and you can evaluate the currency to be dispensed as
described in the next section.
Establishing Singularity and Size
In this procedure you have to cause the ATM to calculate the singularity and size of 40
dispensed bills five times for each currency you wish to evaluate. Due to the nature of
the currency the singularity calculated may vary for each attempt. Add the five figures
and take the average (divide by five and round to the nearest whole number) and the
answers are the singularity and size values you enter to the ATM and to all ATMs using
the same currency.
To achieve a good singularity figure the currency loaded for this procedure should
right way up and upside down (see the following illustration). This makes sure that
variations in inking are allowed for.
dispensing from the ATMs. Refer to currency cassette chapter in the dispense section
of this manual for the method of adjusting cassettes to currency size.
2. Set the cassette magnets to indicate cassette types 1, 2, 3 and 4 as required. Refer to
currency cassette chapter in the dispense section of this manual for this setting
3. Load at least 200 bills of each denomination of the currency into the cassettes
4. Insert the cassettes into the dispenser
5. Put the ATM into supervisor mode
6. Select the SYSTEM APPLICATION option from the ATM opening menu.

menu.
8. Then choose the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION option.
9. Then choose the USB CASH DISPENSER option from the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION
menu. The system will display the following screen.
10. Select the NOTE CONFIGURATION option.
11. Then choose the LEARN option.
12. Select the SET NOTES option to change the number of bills to be dispensed during the
LEARN process.
13. The system will display the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu showing the types available
as shown below.
NOTE: The menus only show the cassette types present in the ATM.
14. Select Type 1 from the menu shown below and the system will display the menu

below which allows you to change the number of bills to be dispensed.
15. Return to NOTE CONFIGURATION menu and activate Type 1.
16. The system will perform a test and return the message shown below.
17. The system will return to the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu.
18. Make a note of the singularity and size figures on the screen against the cassette and
type selected or all cassette types if applicable.
20. Repeat steps 11 to 18 until you have five readings of singularity and size for each
cassette type loaded.
singularity and size for each cassette type.
22. Select the PARAMETER option from the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu
23. Modify as appropriate the parameters you require to change.
24. To accept all the changes made select OK and the changes will be accepted.

YES.
27. Return the system to the SYSTEM APPLICATION MAIN menu.
The procedure is now complete. From the UTILITIES menu you can now enter level 1
note pusher.
A reject rate less than 1.5% must be achieved when dispensing an average of 2.5 notes
per transaction. If the reject rate is greater than this the singularity and size values
should be recalculated.
The reject rate is calculated using the following formula. The numbers for rejected bills
and total bills picked are taken from tallies.
Reject Rate = x 100%
Error Messages
Errors occurring during bill configuration procedures result in the error messages
described below.
Dispenser Clear Transport Error
When the DISPENSER BILL CONFIG option is selected from the CONFIGURATION menu a
CLEAR command is sent to clear the transport of any bills. If the clear operation fails then
the following error screens shown below are displayed. Each screen is displayed for five
seconds before the next one is displayed. You return to the CASH HANDLER menu via the
SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION menu.

detected then the error message shown below is displayed. The incorrect entry is
highlighted and you can re‐enter a correct value in the error position.
The message is shown for five seconds and then you are prompted to enter the new
parameter value again. Once all the parameter values have been changed and checked,
the main dispenser screen reappears with the new parameter values. If a mistake
becomes apparent at this point then the user can select CHANGE again.
The dispenser parameter error messages are as follows:

? ERROR ‐ VALID RANGE XX ‐ XXX ‐ Parameter value is outside the permissible range.
This applies to bill sizes and singularity values
? DUPLICATE VALUE IN SEQUENCE ‐ A duplicate value has been entered in the
presentation order
? ERROR ‐ INVALID SEQUENCE ‐ The user has input fewer than four values for the
presentation order.
Learn Parameter Errors
Cassette Errors During Learn - If an attempt to learn the parameters from a particular
cassette type fails then, providing the error is not fatal, the operation will be tried
repeatedly until successful, or a fatal error occurs. Should a fatal error occur then the
error screen shown below appears, and after five seconds, you are returned to the NOTE
CONFIGURATION menu.
Dispenser Error During Learn - The following screen appears if a fatal dispenser error

occurs while learning parameters from the dispenser. Any changes made up to this point
can not be written to the dispenser therefore you are returned to the CASH HANDLER
menu via the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION menu.

Dispenser Read/Write Errors - If, while communicating with the dispenser, an error occurs

which is not fatal, then the operation is tried repeatedly until it is successful or until a
fatal error occurs. When a fatal error is encountered then a DISPENSER COMMS ERROR
screen showing one of the following messages is displayed. The CONFIG MENU activator
on the screen returns you to the configuration menu.
? UNABLE TO READ PARAMETERS ‐ A fatal error has occurred while reading data from
the dispenser. Unable to read the currently configured dispenser parameters so can
not continue with configuration.
? CONFIGURATION NOT COMPLETED ‐ Fatal error while writing data to the dispenser.
The configuration data is written to the dispenser NVRAM using three separate
dispenser calls. One sets the new bill sizes, one sets the new singularity values and
the third sets the new presentation order. Because the data is split into three parts, if
this type of error occurs then the dispenser configuration is incomplete.
Pick Module Timing
The dispenser does not require any timing relationship to be set between the action of
the pick modules and the presenter. The pick module to pick module relationship does,
however, still require to be set. The adjustment procedures are described in Aria pick
module chapter of the dispense section of this manual.
DIAGNOSTICS
None
STRAPPING
None
ADJUSTMENTS
Drive Belt Tension
Proceed as follows to adjust the tension of the drive belt from the main motor to the
intermediate pulley. Refer to the illustrations following the procedure for each type of
dispenser
? Check for a deflection of 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) when a force of 1.0 N (0.21 lb.) is applied
to the mid span of the drive belt.
? If the tension is wrong, loosen the four motor mounting screws.
? Move the main motor to adjust the belt tension.
? Tighten the screws and check the tension again.
? Repeat the adjustment until the correct tension is achieved.

Drive Belt Arrangement ‐ Rear Access
1.0 N (0.21 lb)
Motor Mounting Screws

(4 places)
Drive Belt Arrangement ‐ Front Access
None.


SelfServ 27 ATM Service Manual Section 14: Special Procedures

ACCESS TO FASCIA ITEMS
1. Open the topbox rear door. (Remove the door if access is restricted)
2. Disengage the module tray latch and fully extend the module tray.

KEYPAD
1. Remove the two screws securing the keypad assembly, then lever the tangs on the
bracket off the clips to allow the assembly to be removed.
2. Disconnect the keypad DC and USB cables. Remove the four screws securing the
keypad to the bracket.
3. When replacing the keypad assembly, make sure the bracket is correctly snapped
into place on the clips on the fascia before replacing the screws.

KEYPAD MEI
1. Unclip the MEI and disconnect the harness.
MCRW MEI/FASCIA INSERT/DECAL INSERT
1. Remove the two screws securing the MCRW MEI bracket.

2. Remove and replace the required part:
a MCRW MEI: Remove the MEI from the bracket and disconnect the harness.
b MCRW decal holder: Slide the decal holder out of the fascia.
c MCRW fascia insert: Remove the four screws securing the insert.

3. When the required part has been replaced, re‐secure the MCRW MEI bracket
assembly with the two screws. Note that there is a choice of 4 screw holes in case of
thread wear.
RECEIPT FASCIA INSERT & MEI
1. Remove the four screws securing the receipt fascia insert.
2. Remove the insert and then either replace the whole assembly, the inner or outer
parts of the insert or unclip and disconnect the MEI on the fascia.

MIDI MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACE
1. Loosen the screw securing the Midi Miscellaneous Interface (Midi Misc. I/F.) to the
fascia. Then slide the Midi Misc. I/F to the right and remove it.
2. Disconnect the harnesses. Then remove and retain the four screws securing the Midi
Misc. I/F. to the bracket. Re‐fit the bracket to the replacement Midi Misc. I/F.
PC CORE
1. Disconnect the LVDS and LVDS Power connections from the rear of the display.
Detach the cables from any strain relief and anchor point on the rear of the display.

2. Disconnect the Audio Jack Socket from the front of the core. Note the position and
disconnect all the USB cables from the front of the Core.
3. Remove the USB cables from their strain relief clips on the front of the core.
4. Unscrew and disconnect the DVI cable from the front of the core.
5. Disconnect the LAN cable from the front of the core.
6. Disconnect the DC cable from the underneath the core.
7. Remove the cables bundles from the cable management clips under the core.

8. Remove and retain the M4 shipping screw from the core top bracket.
9. Partially remove the other M4 screw in the core top bracket (keyhole slot).
10. Unhook the screw from the top bracket, lower the front of the core to clear, then
disengage from the two rear locating brackets.

11. Refer to the Mini PC Core service chapter for instructions on how to remove the FRUs
within the PC core.
PSU
1. Turn the PSU switch to the off position (0).
2. Disconnect all of the AC and DC cables from the rear of the PSU.
3. Partially remove the two M4 nuts from the PSU.
4. Remove the PSU.
SHUTTER
Note: If access to inside the safe is available, then rack out the cash dispenser for better
access to the shutter.
1. Remove the cowl M6 screw from the top of the safe.
2. Remove the cowl and remove the harnessing from the cable management clips.

3. Remove the Card Reader MEI assembly. (see ‘MCRW Fascia Insert and MEI’
instructions).
4. Disconnect the shutter I2C and DC cables from the shutter.
5. Remove and retain the three M4 screws securing the shutter.
Note: Older versions of the shutter assemblies have open slots and the screws need only
be partially removed.
6. Remove the shutter from the fascia.
Fitting is the reverse except leave the shutter screws loose. Run diagnostics to establish
the shutter blade home position before fully tightening the shutter screws to the fascia.

CCTV CAMERA
1. Disconnect the cables from the camera.
2. Partially remove the two M4 screws from the CCTV camera mounting bracket.
3. Remove the camera and mounting bracket from the fascia.
FASCIA
From the rear of the unit:
1. Disconnect the LVDS (USB, Power and Comms) cables from the rear of the display.

2. Remove the cables from the clips on the rear of the display.
3. Disconnect the Audio Jack Socket from the front of the core.
4. Disconnect the Midi Misc I/F USB from the front of the core (USB port 2).

5. Remove the Audio and Midi Misc I/F USB from the cable management clips
underneath the core.
6. Disconnect the Cash Dispenser MEI.
7. Remove the Keypad (See ‘Keypad Removal’ instructions)
8. Remove the CCTV, CCR and Biometric devices.
9. Disconnect the SPS cables from the device, if installed.
10. Disconnect the RIO and Alarms to Midi Misc I/F cables, if installed.
11. Disconnect the Autosupervisor cables from the switch.
12. Disconnect the Display Air Duct Tube from the airflow cover.
13. Check harnessing is not tied in to prevent fascia removal.
14. Remove the six M4 nuts from the rear of the fascia. Three down the left‐hand side
and three down the right‐hand side.
15. Partially remove the M4 screw from the fascia retaining bracket.

16. Turn the retaining bracket 180 degrees to allow fascia removal.
From the front of the unit:
17. Use the keypad aperture and the top edge of the fascia as hand holds and pull the
fascia carefully outwards and clear of the unit. Take care not to snag any harnessing.
18. Place the fascia on a clean flat surface.

DISPLAY
1. Disconnect the three harness connectors (USB, power and signal) on the display.
2. If the ATM is fitted with a touchscreen, carefully open the Zero Insertion Force
connector (ZIF) retaining the ribbon cable connectors on the touchscreen controllers:
two cables at the top and one on the right‐hand side of the display.
Tip: Use a small flat head screwdriver to gently prise open the connector.

3. Loosen the four screws (two each side) securing the display to the fascia. Then lift the
display off the screws and slide it out from behind the top‐box.
Note: on early units, the screws may have to be removed completely, not just
loosened.
4. Loosen the screws securing the touchscreen controllers in the keyhole slots. Then lift
the controller assemblies off the display. Retain the controllers and their covers and
harnesses, to be fitted to the replacement display.
Note: When re‐fitting the ribbon connectors make sure that the white stripes on the
ribbon cables are level and only just visible once the white retaining clamps have
TOUCHSCREEN
1. Remove the fascia and place on a clean flat surface. (See ‘Fascia Removal’
instructions).
2. Remove the display assembly from the fascia. (See ‘Display Removal’ instructions)
Note: Take care not to leave finger prints or debris on the display and or filter surfaces.
3. Remove the two pan head plastite screws from the airflow cover.

4. Remove airflow cover moulding.
5. Partially remove the two pan head plastite screws from the top corners of the fascia.
6. Remove the eight pan head plastite screws from the top and sides of the fascia.

7. Remove the six M4 screws from the insides of the fascia brace.
8. Disengage the bezel tabs and screws from the locating slots. Separate the
touchscreen bezel from the shelf by first sliding up and then out.
9. Follow the reverse of these instructions to fit the new touchscreen.
Note 1: When replacing the touchscreen take care to feed the ribbon cables through
the holes in the fascia without trapping or folding them.
Note 2: Make sure there is no gap between the refitted touchscreen and the lower
fascia. Apply pressure to all edges to ensure a tight fit.

Note 3: When re‐fitting the ribbon connectors make sure that the white stripes on
the ribbon cables are level and only just visible once the white retaining clamps have
FDK BEZEL
1. Remove the fascia and place on a clean flat surface. (See ‘Fascia Removal’
instructions).
2. Remove the display assembly from the fascia. (See ‘Display Removal’ instructions)
3. Remove the two pan head plastite screws and the airflow cover.
4. Partially remove the four pan head plastite screws (keyholes slots) from the left and
right hand side of the mounting plate.

5. Partially remove the three pan head plastite screws (keyholes slots) from along the
top of the mounting plate.
6. Remove the pan head plastite screw from along the top of the mounting plate (below
the speaker).
7. Remove the three M4 screws from along the left‐hand side of the mounting plate
edge.

8. Remove the three M4 screws from along the right‐hand side of the mounting plate
edge.
9. Remove the display mounting bracket.

10. Remove the FDK bezel.
11. Place the bezel on a clean flat surface.
12. You can now replace the screen or gain access to the FDK assemblies.
FASCIA SHELF
1. Remove the Fascia from the unit. (see ‘Fascia Removal’ instructions).
2. Remove the Receipt Printer Interface moulding and MEI. (see ‘Receipt Fascia Insert
and MEI’ instructions).
3. Remove the Card Reader Interface moulding and MEI. (see ‘MCRW Fascia Insert and
MEI’ instructions).
4. Remove the Cash Camera device if fitted.
5. Remove the Bar‐code reader device if fitted.
6. Remove the Contactless Card Reader module if fitted.
7. Remove the three pan head plastite screws from the top, the five pan head plastite
screws from the bottom and the four pan head plastite screws from the sides.

8. Remove the airflow cover moulding.
9. Remove the shelf from the fascia assembly.
CASH DISPENSER
Please refer to the FRU removal section of S2 Dispenser chapter in the Dispense section
of this manual.


For problems with this publication please email:
FinancialHWL3.Support@ncr.com
For technical queries please contact your local NCR support.

NCR SelfServ23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NCR SelfServ23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NCR SelfServ23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NCR

This equipment has been found to comply with the essential

This is a Class A product, in a domestic/residential environment

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Revision Date Chapter Reason for change

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY February 2016

Revision Date Chapter Reason for change

February 2016 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY February 2016

February 2016 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY February 2016

February 2016 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY February 2016

February 2016 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY February 2016

February 2016 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY February 2016

February 2016 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY February 2016

February 2016 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY February 2016

February 2016 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY February 2016

February 2016 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY February 2016

February 2016 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY February 2016

February 2016 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY February 2016

February 2016 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY February 2014

February 2014 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Reference and Safety

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY January 2015

January 2015 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Section 2 - Preventive Maintenance

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY February 2014

February 2014 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Preventive Maintenance Overview

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY January 2015

Lubricant NCR Reference No. * Recommended Alternative(s)

Manufacturer Type Manufacturer’s Part No.

January 2015 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Cleaning Materials NCR Reference No. *

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY January 2015

January 2015 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Preventive Maintenance Schedule

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY April 2016

CABINETRY & FACIA

April 2016 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

CABINETRY & FACIA

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY April 2016

April 2016 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

MOTORIZED CARD READER/WRITERS

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY April 2016

LCD MONITOR & KEYBOARDS

FLUIDITI - ICS & CS

April 2016 NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

CABINETRY & FASCIA

NCR — CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY April 2016